Sei sulla pagina 1di 714

bosch 0

Functional Description
EDC15 +
P120 - VG2
All rights reserved by Robert Bosch GmbH, including in cases of proprietary rights applications. All rights of disposal such as copying and passing on to us.
19 April 2002 DS / ESA
Page 2 EDC15 +
Y 281 S01 120 - VG2
0 bosch
Contents
1 OVERVIEW ................................................................................................................ 1-1
1.1
1.2
1.3
1.4
1.5
1.6
1.7
Notes on the structure and use ............................................ 1-1 ..........
Definitions ................................................. ........................................ 1-2
Naming conventions ................................................. ..................................... 1-2
Symbole........................................................................................................... 1-3
Characteristic space ........................................................................................................ 1-6
Abbreviations ................................................. .................................................. 1-7
RCOS - operating states ............................................... ................................. 1-9
1.7.1 Initialisierung.......................................................................................... 1-9
1.7.2 Recovery................................................................................................. 1-9
1.7.3 Operational .............................................. ............................................... 1-9
1.7.4 Restart - treatment ............................................ ................................ 1-10
2-1 2 QUANTITY CALCULATION ................................................. ...................................
2.1
2.2
2.3
2.4
2.5
2.6
2.7
2.8
2.9
Survey ......................................................................................................... 2-1
Startup ................................................. .................................................. . 2-5
2.2.1 Start quantity calculation .............................................. ........................... 2-5
2.2.2 Start quantity control .............................................. .............................. 2-8
Begrenzungsmenge........................................................................................ 2-11
2.3.1 Smoke limitation and turbo boost limit .................................... 2-12
2.3.2 Torque limitation .............................................. ........................ 2-16
2.3.3 fixes the limitation amount ............................................ ........ 2-18
Idle controller ................................................. ............................................... 2-24
2.4.1 crossing detection .............................................. ....................................... 2-25
2.4.2 Set-up select .............................................. ............................. 2-27
2.4.3 desired idle speed calculation .............................................. ............ 2-30
2.4.4 Control Algorithm .............................................. .................................... 2-38
Desired quantity ................................................. .............................................. 2-41
PWG filter and driving behavior ............................................. ......................... 2-41
2.6.1 Double Analog PWG ............................................. ............................. 2-42
2.6.2 speed-dependent ride ............................................. ......... 2-53
2.6.3 Speed-dependent driving behavior .................................. 2-53
2.6.4 Torque Gradient ............................................ ........... 2-57
Fuel cut-off ................................................. ......................................... 2-60
Cruise control ................................................. ..................... 2-62
2.8.1 Examination of Breaking ............................................ ........... 2-67
2.8.2 GRA on wheel torque ............................................ ............................. 2-70
2.8.3 Execution of the selected function ........................................... ......... 2-72
2.8.4 Description of the GRA states ........................................... .............. 2-76
2.8.5 GRA-target acceleration ............................................ ......................... 2-87
2.8.6 Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) ......................................... .................. 2-88
2.8.7 Status Display, shutdown and application notes .... 2-91
Arbeitsdrehzahlregelung................................................................................ 2-94
2.9.1 Overview .............................................. ................................................ 2 - 94
2.9.2 Variable working speed control ............................................. ........... 2-96
2.9.3 Fixed Work speed control ............................................. .............. 2-104
All rights reserved by Robert Bosch GmbH, including in cases of proprietary rights applications. All rights of disposal such as copying and passing on to us.
DS / ESA Contents 19 April 2002
0 bosch
EDC15 +
Y 281 S01 120 - VG2
Page 3
2:10 maximum speed limit ................................................ ........... 2-105
2.10.1 Evaluation of the request via Niveau1 and Allrad1 ................ 2-107
2.10.2 Setpoint tracking .............................................. .......................... 2-110
2.10.3 Initialization of the setpoint ............................................ ............... 2-113
2.10.4 Controller parameters selection .............................................. .................... 2-113
2.10.5 HGB PI controller ........................................... ...................................... 2-113
2:11 External quantity engagement ............................................... .............................. 2-114
2.11.1 drag torque limit for CVT ................................ 2-116
2.11.2 External control units engaged ............................................. .............. 2-117
2.11.3 EGS intervention ............................................. ........................................ 2-119
2.11.4 ASR intervention ............................................. ........................................ 2-126
2.11.5 MSR intervention ............................................. ....................................... 2-128
2.11.6 ASG intervention ............................................. ....................................... 2-132
2:12 Active Ruckeldmpfer ............................................... ................................ 2-141
2.12.1 transition detection .............................................. ................................... 2-141
2.12.2 Set-up select .............................................. ......................... 2-141
2.12.3 Control Algorithm .............................................. ................................ 2-150
2:13 smoothness controller ................................................ ............................................. 2-154
3 EXHAUST FEEDBACK ................................................. .............................................. 3-1
3.1
3.2
3.3
3.4
3.5
3.6
3.7
Survey ......................................................................................................... 3-1
Mengenauswahl............................................................................................... 3-2
Process value ................................................. .......................................... 3-3
3.3.1 Plausibility check of the air mass measurement ....................................... 3-4
Sollwertberechnung......................................................................................... 3-9
Regulator ............................................................................................................ 3-12
3.5.1 function while driving ............................................ ........................... 3-13
Driving an EGR cooler bypass valve .......................................... . 3-17
Monitoring and Shutdown ............................................... ...................... 3-18
3.7.1 Monitoring of control error ............................................ ........ 3-18
3.7.2 Abschaltung.......................................................................................... 3-19
3.7.3 Monitoring the status line ............................................ ................ 3-25
4 CHARGE PRESSURE CONTROL ................................................. ............................................. 4-1
4.1
4.2
4.3
4.4
4.5
4.6
Survey ......................................................................................................... 4-1
Setpoint generation ................................................. .............................................. 4-2
Regelung.......................................................................................................... 4-4
4.3.1 loader noise suppression .............................................. ................... 4-7
Steuerung......................................................................................................... 4-8
Adaptation of the control parameters ............................................... ........................... 4-9
Abschaltung................................................................................................... 4-11
4.6.1 Shutdown due to permanent control offset ............................... 4-13
4.6.2 Shutdown due to cold start ............................................ .................... 4-13
5 OTHER FUNCTIONS ................................................ ............................................. 5-1
5.1 Glhzeitsteuerung............................................................................................ 5-1
5.1.1 Glhkerzenansteuerung .............................................. ............................ 5-1
5.1.2 Determination of Glhanforderung ............................................ ................ 5-6
5.1.3 Description of the states of glow time ................................ 5-7
All rights reserved by Robert Bosch GmbH, including in cases of proprietary rights applications. All rights of disposal such as copying and passing on to us.
19 April 2002 Contents DS / ESA
Page 4 EDC15 +
Y 281 S01 120 - VG2
0 bosch
5.2
5.3
5.4
5.5
5.6
5.7
5.8
5.9
5:10
5:11
5:12
5:13
5:14
5:15
6
5.1.4 "pushing" for the glow plugs 3 Generation ......................................... 5-12
5.1.5 Protection of GSK 3 from overheating ......................................... ............. 5-12
5.1.6 sum fault diagnosis .............................................. .......................... 5-13
GSK3 ............................................. 5.1.7 Diagnosis ....................................... 5-13
5.1.8 Coding GSK3 ............................................. ..................................... 5-15
Fuel cooling ................................................. ......................................... 5-18
Air compressor ................................................. ......................................... 5-19
5.3.1 Conditions for lockout ............................................ .............. 5-20
Khlwasserheizung........................................................................................ 5-30
5.4.1 switch-on condition .............................................. ................................. 5-32
5.4.2 Abschaltung.......................................................................................... 5-33
Motorlagersteuerung...................................................................................... 5-35
Ecomatic........................................................................................................ 5-36
5.6.1 Ecomaticfunktion via digital input ............................................ 5-37 .....
5.6.2 Ecomaticfunktion with CAN ............................................ ...................... 5-37
5.6.3 'engine' / 'a motor' command (from the gearbox control unit MSG) ... 5-38
Coolant temperature control ............................................... .................... 5-40
5.7.1 Overview .............................................. ................................................ 5 - 40
5.7.2 Coolant Thermostat control ............................................ .............. 5-41
5.7.3 Education of bits "characteristic map cooling": ........................................ .......... 5-43
5.7.4 radiator fan control ............................................ ............................. 5-44
5.7.5 radiator fan output stage control ............................................ .......... 5-48
5.7.6 Education of the relative cooling power for CAN ....................................... 5 - 52
5.7.7 caster and caster pump ............................................ .................. 5-53
Thermostatdiagnose....................................................................................... 5-57
5.8.1 State Description "Enable Diagnostics" ....................................... 5-58
5.8.2 Error detection .............................................. ..................................... 5-60
5.8.3 temperature calculation model and ambient temperature calculation 5-61
Flexible service interval indicator ................................................ ................... 5-63
Generator excitation ................................................. ........................................ 5-64
Odometer ................................................. ............................................ 5-65
EOBD - odometer ............................................... ................................ 5-66
Misfire Detection ................................................. .............................. 5-68
5.13.1 General .............................................. .......................................... 5-68
5.13.2 Monitoring conditions .............................................. .................. 5-68
5.13.3 Delayed detection start / early detection end ................. 5-69
5.13.4 misfire detection .............................................. ............................... 5-70
5.13.5 Test Result .............................................. .......................................... 5-71
Betriebsstundenzhler.................................................................................... 5-72
Electrical fuel pump / TAV ............................................. ........................ 5-73
5.15.1 Electrical fuel pump / TAV during the initialization phase .... 5-73
ERROR HANDLING ................................................. ............................................... 6-1
6.1
6.2
Survey ......................................................................................................... 6-1
Fehlervorentprellung ................................................. ...................................... 6-2
6.2.1 defect detection .............................................. ...................................... 6-2
6.2.2 Intact recognition .............................................. ........................................ 6-2
6.2.3 Testzustand............................................................................................. 6-3
6.2.4 caster - Low voltage K15 .......................................... ............. 6-3
Data set parameters for each error path ............................................... .................. 6-4
6.3
All rights reserved by Robert Bosch GmbH, including in cases of proprietary rights applications. All rights of disposal such as copying and passing on to us.
DS / ESA Contents 19 April 2002
0 bosch
EDC15 +
Y 281 S01 120 - VG2
Page 5
6.4
6.5
6.6
6.7
6.8
6.9
7
6.3.1 Environmental conditions .............................................. ................................. 6-4
6.3.2 debounce counter for error entry ............................................ .................. 6-5
6.3.3 debounce Error Clear ............................................ .............. 6-6
6.3.4 Priority and Readiness ............................................ ............................... 6-7
Data set parameters for each error ............................................... ......................... 6-8
6.4.1 debouncing for entry and healing .......................................... ............ 6-8
6.4.2 Error type (fbwE.. T Low byte) .............................................. ................ 6-8
6.4.3 Memory codes .............................................. ......................................... 6-11
Fehlerspeicherverwaltung.............................................................................. 6-13
6.5.1 Driving Cycle (DC) .......................................... .................................... 6-15
6.5.2 Warm Up Cycle (WUC) ......................................... .............................. 6-15
6.5.3 General Data set parameters ............................................. .............. 6-15
Fehlerspeicher................................................................................................ 6-18
6.6.1 Behaviour at full fault memory ........................................... ......... 6-20
6.6.2 Freeze frame ............................................. ............................................ 6-20
Activation of the MIL - lamp ............................................. ......................... 6-22
Control of the system lamp ............................................... ....................... 6-23
Terminology used ................................................ ...................................... 6-24
DIAGNOSIS .................................................................................................................. 7-1
7.1
7.2
Survey ......................................................................................................... 7-1
Standard protocol ................................................ ........................................... 7-2
7.2.1 Establish communication .............................................. ........................... 7-2
7.2.2 Communication sequence .............................................. ............................ 7-3
Standard telegram contents ................................................ ............................. 7-5
Read 7.3.1 SG identification ........................................... ................................ 7-6
Read 7.3.2 RAM cells ........................................... ....................................... 7-9
Read 7.3.3 ROM / EPROM cells ......................................... ........................ 7-10
7.3.4 Clear the fault memory ............................................. ............................ 7-10
7.3.5 Diagnostics end ............................................. ......................................... 7-11
7.3.6 Read fault memory ............................................. ................................ 7-11
7.3.7 ADC channel read ............................................ ...................................... 7-12
7.3.8 Acknowledge .............................................. .......................................... 7-13
7.3.9 No Acknowledge ............................................. ..................................... 7-13
Read 7.3.10 SG addresses ............................................ .................................. 7-13
7.3.11 Parameter coding .............................................. .............................. 7-14
Read 7.3.12 E2PROM ............................................. ...................................... 7-14
Write E2PROM 7.3.13 ............................................. ............................... 7-15
7.3.14 Login Request ............................................. ........................................ 7-16
Read 7.3.15 measurements ............................................. ...................................... 7-20
7.3.16 actuator test Initiate / continue turn ........................................... 7-20 .......
7.3.17 normalized values read ............................................ ........................ 7-21
7.3.18 Overview adaptation ............................................. ............................. 7-27
Read 7.3.19 adjustment ............................................. .................................... 7-29
7.3.20 test adaptation ............................................. ................................... 7-29
Save 7.3.21 adjustment ............................................. ............................. 7-29
7.3.22 Initiate basic setting ............................................. ..................... 7-30
Normalized 7.3.23 Initiate basic setting ............................................ 7-31 .......
7.3.24 Entering Ableichwerten by VAG tester ............................... 7-33
OBDII protocol ................................................ ............................................ 7-34
7.3
7.4
All rights reserved by Robert Bosch GmbH, including in cases of proprietary rights applications. All rights of disposal such as copying and passing on to us.
19 April 2002 Contents DS / ESA
Page 6 EDC15 +
Y 281 S01 120 - VG2
0 bosch
7.5
7.6
7.7
7.8
8
7.4.1 Establish communication .............................................. ......................... 7-34
7.4.2 Communication sequence .............................................. .......................... 7-35
7.4.3 Initialization by WUP ............................................ ...................... 7-37
7.4.4 Time definition .............................................. .......................................... 7-38
7.4.5 Error handling .............................................. ................................... 7-38
OBDII telegram contents ................................................ .............................. 7-39
Read 7.5.1 Emissions-related information ............................................ ........ 7-39
7.5.2 Freeze frame read ............................................ .................................... 7-42
Read 7.5.3 Emission-related errors ............................................ ..................... 7-43
Delete 7.5.4 Emissions-related information ............................................ 7-44 ....
7.5.5 reading of test results ............................................ .................. 7-44
7.5.6 Current emission-related reading errors ........................................... ........ 7-51
7.5.7 Reading of vehicle information ............................................ 7-51 ......
7.5.8 Control unit acknowledge ............................................ ........................ 7-55
7.5.9 Diagnosis - Start ............................................ ........................................ 7-56
Description of the parameter fields ............................................... ................ 7-57
Fehlercodes.................................................................................................... 7-60
7.7.1 Fehlercodeliste...................................................................................... 7-60
McMess ......................................................................................................... 7-61
MONITORING CONCEPT ................................................. ........................................ 8-1
8.1
8.2
8.3
8.4
8.5
8.6
8.7
8.8
8.9
8:10
8:11
8:12
8:13
8:14
8:15
8:16
8:17
8:18
8:19
8:20
8:21
8:22
8:23
8:24
8.25
8:26
8:27
8:28
8:29
Survey ......................................................................................................... 8-1
Exhaust gas recirculation (ARF) .............................................. .................................. 8-2
Exhaust gas recirculation actuator (AR1, AR2, AR3) .......................................... ............. 8-2
Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) ............................................ .......................... 8-3
Working speed controller (ADR) .............................................. ............................ 8-4
Atmospheric pressure sensor (ADF) .............................................. ....................... 8-4
Battery voltage (U_bat) .............................................. ............................... 8-4
Brake Centre (BCC, BRK) ............................................ ............................... 8-5
Onboard supply control unit (BSG) .............................................. ................................ 8-6
CAN bus (CA0) ............................................. ................................................. 8 -7
Crash detection (CRA) ............................................ ..................................... 8-8
Electric fan - power amplifier (GER) ............................................ ......................... 8-10
External lot of intervention / transmission (Exme) ........................................... 8-12 ......
External lot of intervention / brake (ABS) ........................................... ............ 8-13
External lot of intervention / Automatic Transmission (ASG/VL30) ......... 8-15
Road speed signal (FGG) .............................................. ................. 8-18
FGR control panel, variant LT2 ............................................. ......................... 8-19
FGR control panel, Variant VW ............................................. ......................... 8-19
FGR control panel, Variant VW CAN, "locked-off" .................... 8-20
Glow relay (GLR) .............................................. ............................................. 8-21
Glow time (GZS) .............................................. ................................. 8-22
Main relay (HRL) .............................................. ........................................... 8-22
Heating requirement (HZA) .............................................. ........................... 8-24
Highest speed limit (HGB) .............................................. 8-24 .....
Hydraulic fan - power amplifier (HYL) ............................................ ........................... 8-25
Kickdown switch (KIK) .............................................. ................................. 8-25
Terminal 15 (KL15) ............................................. .......................................... 8-25
Air Relay (KLI) .............................................. ............................................ 8-26
Instrument Cluster CAN message (KBI) ........................................... ........... 8-26
All rights reserved by Robert Bosch GmbH, including in cases of proprietary rights applications. All rights of disposal such as copying and passing on to us.
DS / ESA Contents 19 April 2002
0 bosch
8:30
8:31
8:32
8:33
8:34
8:35
8:36
8:37
8:38
8:39
8:40
8:41
8:42
8:43
8:44
8:45
8:46
8:47
8:48
8:49
8:50
8:51
8:52
EDC15 +
Y 281 S01 120 - VG2
Page 7
8:53
8:54
8:55
8:56
8:57
8:58
8:59
8.60
8.61
8.62
8.63
8.64
9
Fuel temperature sensor (KTF) .............................................. ................... 8-27
Coolant thermostat - power amplifier (TST) ............................................ ............ 8-28
Cooling water heating (KWH) .............................................. ............................ 8-29
KWH Relay 1 (GSK1) ............................................ ...................................... 8-29
KWH relay 2 (GSK2) ............................................ ...................................... 8-29
Boost pressure sensor (LDF) .............................................. ................................... 8-30
Boost pressure control (LDR) .............................................. ............................... 8-32
Boost pressure plate (LDS) .............................................. ................................... 8-38
Mass air flow sensor (MAF) .............................................. .............................. 8-38
Air temperature sensor (LTF) .............................................. ............................. 8-40
MIL - Lamp (MIL) ............................................ ........................................... 8-40
Lag pump - power amplifier (ZWP) ............................................ .................... 8-40
Oil temperature sensor (OTF) .............................................. ............................... 8-41
Pedal sensor (PWG) .............................................. .................................... 8-42
Reference voltage (U_REF) .............................................. ........................... 8-48
Lighting system (SYS) .............................................. ....................................... 8-48
Ambient temperature sensor (UTF) .............................................. ................ 8-49
Water temperature sensor on the radiator outlet (WTK) ....................................... 8-50
Water temperature sensor on the cylinder head outlet (WTF) ............................. 8-50
RME sensor (RME) ............................................ .......................................... 8-51
Analog / digital converter (TAD) ............................................ .......................... 8-52
Shutdown due to system error ............................................... ................... 8-53
Tachometer (DZG) .............................................. ...................................... 8-58
8.52.1 defect detection .............................................. .................................. 8-58
8.52.2 healing .............................................. ................................................. 8 -59
Electrical shut-off valve (ELAB) ............................................. ................ 8-60
Electric fuel pump (EKP) ............................................. ................. 8-61
Refrigerant pressure sensor (KMD) .............................................. ....................... 8-61
Solenoid valve plate - power amplifier (MVS) ............................................ .............. 8-61
Amount repeaters (HDK) .............................................. .............................. 8-62
Amount interlocking (MES) .............................................. ................................. 8-64
8.58.1 defect detection .............................................. .................................. 8-64
8.58.2 healing .............................................. ................................................. 8 -64
Needle movement sensor (NBF) .............................................. ......................... 8-65
8.59.1 defect detection .............................................. .................................. 8-65
8.59.2 healing .............................................. ................................................. 8 -66
redundant pedal sensor (PGS) ............................................. .................. 8-67
Injection start control (SBR) .............................................. ........................... 8-67
Control unit (SG) .............................................. .............................................. 8-68
Tankabschaltventil (TAV) .............................................. ............................... 8-73
Summarized system error ................................................ .................... 8-74
INPUT AND OUTPUT SIGNALS .............................................. ........................... 9-1
9.1 Eingangssignale............................................................................................... 9-1
9.1.1 Digitaleingnge....................................................................................... 9-1
9.1.2 Analog inputs .............................................. ........................................ 9-7
9.1.3 tachometer .............................................. ......................................... 9-15
9.1.4 needle movement sensor .............................................. ........................... 9-16
9.1.5 Speed Measurement .............................................. ............... 9-17
9.1.6 Analog-K15 evaluation ........................................... ......................... 9-21
All rights reserved by Robert Bosch GmbH, including in cases of proprietary rights applications. All rights of disposal such as copying and passing on to us.
19 April 2002 Contents DS / ESA
Page 8 EDC15 +
Y 281 S01 120 - VG2
0 bosch
9.2
9.1.7 PWM signal crash ............................................ .................................... 9-22
9.1.8 Evaluation refrigerant pressure signal ............................................. ........ 9-24
Output signals ................................................. ........................................... 9-25
9.2.1 beginning of injection plate .............................................. .................................. 9-25
9.2.2 boost pressure plate .............................................. ..................................... 9-25
9.1.3 exhaust gas recirculation actuator 1 ............................................. ............................ 9-26
9.1.4 exhaust gas recirculation actuator 2 ............................................. ............................ 9-26
9.1.5 Elektrolfter.......................................................................................... 9-26
9.1.6 Hydro fan .............................................. ............................................. 9-26
9.1.7 Coolant Thermostat .............................................. .............................. 9-26
9.1.8 Interlocking amount .............................................. .................................... 9-26
9.1.9 Glhrelaissteller.................................................................................... 9-26
9.1.10 TD signal ............................................. .............................................. 9-28
9.1.11 TQS / MFA / VBS - Signal ........................................ ........................ 9-29
9.1.12 consumption calculation .............................................. ......................... 9-31
9.1.13 MUX signal ............................................. .......................................... 9-31
10 CAN ........................................................................................................................ 10-1
10.1 Overview ....................................................................................................... 10-1
10.2 DPRAM layout ............................................... .............................................. 10-2
10.3 berwachung................................................................................................. 10-4
10.3.1 Excluding the CAN monitor ........................................... 10-6 .....
10.3.2 suppression of errors of the external control device intervention ........... 10-6
10.4 Data Exchange ................................................ .............................................. 10-7
10.5 Configuration of the messages .............................................. ........................ 10-9
10.6 Structure of the messages .............................................. ................................. 10-10
10.7 version of the CAN data definition ............................................ ................. 10-11
10.8 Embassies ................................................ .................................................. 10-12
10.8.1 Overview - CAN object using ........................................... 10-12 ....
10.8.2 Sent message - Engine 1 ......................................... ............... 10-13
10.8.3 Sent message - Engine 2 ......................................... ............... 10-17
10.8.4 Sent message - Engine 3 ......................................... ............... 10-19
10.8.5 Sent message - Engine 5 ......................................... ............... 10-22
10.8.6 Sent message - Engine 6 ......................................... ............... 10-25
10.8.7 Sent message - Engine 7 ......................................... ............... 10-26
10.8.8 Sent message - MotorFlexia ........................................... 10-28 .......
10.8.9 Sent message - MSG_Transportprotokoll ............................. 10-31
10.8.10 Sent message - MSG_Transportkanal1 ............................... 10-32
10.8.11 Sent message - GRA ........................................... ................ 10-34
10.8.12 Sent message - GRA_Neu ........................................... 10-35 ........
8/10/13 Received message - brake 1 .......................................... 10-37 .......
8/10/14 Received message - brake 3 .......................................... 10-40 .......
8/10/15 Received message - Transmission 1 ......................................... 10-41 ......
8/10/16 Received message - Gear 2 ......................................... 10-44 ......
8/10/17 Received message - Combination 1 .......................................... 10-46 ........
8/10/18 Received message - Combination 2 .......................................... 10-48 .......
8/10/19 Received message - Airbag 1 .......................................... 10-50 ........
8/10/20 Received message - BSG_Last ........................................... 10-52 .....
8/10/21 Received message - Clima 1 .......................................... 10-54 .........
8/10/22 Received message - GRA ........................................... ............. 10-56
All rights reserved by Robert Bosch GmbH, including in cases of proprietary rights applications. All rights of disposal such as copying and passing on to us.
DS / ESA Contents 19 April 2002
0 bosch
EDC15 +
Y 281 S01 120 - VG2
Page 9
8/10/23 Received message - GRA_Neu ........................................... 10-57 ....
8/10/24 Received message - ADR 1 ......................................... ........... 10-59
8/10/25 Received message - eavesdropping channel ........................................... . 10-61
8/10/26 Received message - Transportkanal1 ...................................... 10-61
8/10/27 Received message - Niveau1 ........................................... 10-62 ........
8/10/28 Received message - Allrad1 ........................................... 10-65 .........
10.9 CAN Interpreter........................................................................................... 10-67
10:10 normalization of the messages .............................................. ......................... 10-68
10.10.1 Received moments ............................................. ....................... 10-69
10.10.2 Sent moments ............................................. .......................... 10-69
10:11 Transportprotokoll....................................................................................... 10-74
10.11.1 Overview .............................................. .......................................... 10-74
10.11.2 protocol handler .............................................. ............................... 10-74
11 CASTER ............................................................................................................... 11-1
11.1
11.2
11.3
11.4
12
Survey ....................................................................................................... 11-1
Actuator stop position adjust it ............................................... .......................... 11-6
Voltage stabilizer test ................................................. ............................. 11-7
Monitoring module test (gate array test) .............................................. 11-10 .......
PUMP CONTROL ................................................. ........................................... 12-1
12.1
12.2
12.3
12.4
12.5
12.6
12.7
Survey ....................................................................................................... 12-1
Fuel temperature correction ................................................. ...................... 12-2
Position preset ................................................. .......................................... 12-3
Quantity control Interlocking ................................................. ...................... 12-4
ELAB control ................................................ ....................................... 12-6
ELAB released in the start-up operation .............................................. ....................... 12-6
ELAB Test..................................................................................................... 12-7
13 SPRAY STARTING SYSTEM ................................................. ........................................ 13-1
13.1 Overview ....................................................................................................... 13-1
13.2 Generation of setpoint ................................................ ............................................. 13-2
13.2.1 Dynamic advance ............................................. ................. 13-4
13.2.2 setpoint corrections .............................................. .............................. 13-5
13.2.3 advance after start ............................................ ...................... 13-6
13.2.4 advance at start ............................................ ........................ 13-6
13.3 Process value ................................................ ......................................... 13-7
13.4 Regelung........................................................................................................ 13-8
14 CONTROL DEVICE CODE ............................................... .................................... 14-1
14.1 Coding ...................................................................................................... 14-1
14.2 CAN-Freischaltung........................................................................................ 14-2
14.2.1 Overview .............................................. .............................................. 14-2
14.2.2 Signal Configuration .............................................. .............................. 14-3
14.2.3 Error handling .............................................. ................................. 14-6
APPENDIX A UMPROGRAMMIERANLEITUNG ............................................... .......................... A-1
Motor-specific data ................................................ ........................................... A-1
Control engineering functions ................................................ .................................... A-2
All rights reserved by Robert Bosch GmbH, including in cases of proprietary rights applications. All rights of disposal such as copying and passing on to us.
19 April 2002 Contents DS / ESA
Page 10 EDC15 +
Y 281 S01 120 - VG2
0 bosch
P controller, the I-controller (time and speed sync) ..................................... ..... A-3
Time Synchronous DT1 .............................................. ............................... A-4
Time Synchronous DT1 element with nonlinear coefficient .......................... A-5
Speed Synchronous DT1 .............................................. ....................... A-6
Time Synchronous PT1 .............................................. ................................ A-7
Speed Synchronous PT1 .............................................. ........................ A-7
Time Synchronous PT2 element .............................................. ................................ A-8
Speed Synchronous D2T2 member .............................................. ..................... A-9
Time Synchronous PDT1 member (Lead Lag) .......................................... .............. A-9
Speed Synchronous PDT1 member (Lead Lag) .......................................... ...... A-9
Amplifiers ............................................................................................................... A-11
Endstufenbausteine....................................................................................... A-11
Donor passwords ehwEST_ ................................................ ........................... A-12
APPENDIX B DEFINITION OF GROUP NUMBERS ............................................. .................. B-1
FGR / ACC via login enabled (comFGR_opt nonzero) ....................... B-6
ADR Plus.........................................................................................................B-6
ADR minus .....................................................................................................B-6
Handbremskontakt...........................................................................................B-6
ADR ein...........................................................................................................B-6
ADR recovery (LT2 control panel) ............................................ ............ B-6
APPENDIX C SCHEDULING ....................................................................................................C-1
Aktivierungsraster.....................................................................................................C-1
maximum throughput times "critical path" ............................................ .............. C-3
APPENDIX D LIST OF ENVIRONMENTAL CONDITIONS ............................................. ..................... D-1
APPENDIX E LIST OF ERROR CODES ............................................. .................................... E-1
APPENDIX F LIST of the error ............................................. ........................................ F-1
APPENDIX G LIST OF olda'S ............................................. ............................................ G-1
ANNEX H LIST OF PINS SG ............................................ ............................................ H-1
ANNEX I UNIVERSAL INTERFACE ASCET ........................................... .................... I-1
Activation ................................................................................................................ I-1
Adressen..................................................................................................................... I-2
Monitoring ............................................................................................................. I-3
Of intervention ................................................................................................................. I-3
Limitation of bypass values ............................................. ...................................... I-3
All rights reserved by Robert Bosch GmbH, including in cases of proprietary rights applications. All rights of disposal such as copying and passing on to us.
DS / ESA Contents 19 April 2002
0 bosch
EDC15 +
Y S01 281/120 - VG2
Page 1-1
1 Overview
The information in this document is confidential. A passing without written
Consent of Robert Bosch GmbH is not permitted. For any damages as a result of
Reprogramming assumes no responsibility Robert Bosch GmbH.
1.1 Notes on the structure and use
The modularization of EDC15 software is function-oriented in function groups. Each
Functional group has a function group name and a two-character abbreviation. The
2 character abbreviation is the first 2 characters of all names (symbols), and in the texts
Drawings are used. In block letters are the overview pictures of the individual functions
specified.
Monitoring concept (including self-diagnosis (ed)) / Troubleshooting (fb)
Configuration (CO)
Control engineering functions (rf)
Input signals:
Digital inputs (di)
Analog inputs (on)
Injection start control (sb) or
Control beginning (ab) in the CR
or conveying beginning calculation
(Fn) in PDE
Exhaust gas recirculation (AR)
Secondary speed sensor (dz)
Boost pressure control (ld)
Vehicle speed sensor (fg)
Glow time (gs)
Air compressor (kl)
Cooling water heating (kh)
Khlmittelthermostatst. (Km)
Ecomatic (ec)
Radiator fan control (ku)
Misfire Detection (mr)
Fl. Service interval indicator (si)
Diagnosis (xc)
CAN (ca)
All rights reserved by Robert Bosch GmbH, including in cases of proprietary rights applications. All rights of disposal such as copying and passing on to us.
Quantity calculation (mr) and
Quantity metering (zm)
Output signals:
Exhaust gas recirculation plate
Boost pressure plate
.
.
.
.
.
.
TD - signals
TQ - Signal
MUX - signal (pb)
Tachometer (dz)
19 April 2002 Survey -Notes on the structure and use DS / ESA
Page 1-2 EDC15 +
Y S01 281/120 - VG2
0 bosch
1.2 Definition of terms
Representation
at the left edge of a
Drawing
Output at the right edge of a
Drawing
Message Message At formation exchange -
between SG functions
OLDAdient the output of intermediate results-
Datensatzalle modifiable by an adjustment -
Data (fixed value, characteristic curves, maps)
.. Put placeholders for letters and numbers -
represent their importance in the respective chapter
is explained
Read-only single value or software switch
Software switch Allows you to configure the individual SW -
Functions
DAMOS - switch subset of software switch may only-
be changed by running DAMOS
Term
Input
Explanation
-
1.3 Naming Conventions
All names used in text and figures are according to the following
Scheme built:
jjtXXXXXXX (maximum 10 characters)
jj
t
-
-
-
-
-
-
2 character abbreviation of the function group (lowercase)
Name type from the following list (lowercase)
b
c
e
m
o
w
Bit variable
Byte (character) variable
Equate or set constant
Message
Olda address
Word variable / fixed value
(Uppercase or lowercase) To forgive XXXXXXX 1 to 7 characters left
Examples:
-
Message (m) water temperature (WTF) of analog value processing
(To)
- dzmNmitMessage (m) Speed (NMIT) the speed measurement (dz)
- fboSDZGOLDA address (o) of the path speed encoder (SDZG) of the
Error handling (fb)
- fbwHAEUF_I data word (w) Frequency counter initial value (HAEUF_I) of the
Error handling (fb)
anmWTF
All rights reserved by Robert Bosch GmbH, including in cases of proprietary rights applications. All rights of disposal such as copying and passing on to us.
DS / ESA Overview - Definitions 19 April 2002
0 bosch
EDC15 +
Y S01 281/120 - VG2
Page 1-3
1.4 Symbols
Subsequently, the single Bosch-K5 symbols are listed below:
Absolute amount
AMOUNT CONTROLS
Limit
DT1
DT1 element
I element
I
IT1 element
IT1 P
P-element
PI-element
PI PID
PID element
PT1
PT1 element
PT2 element
PT2
RAMP
Ramp
RAMP
Ramp, rising
SRC
Signal Range
Check
Timer
TIMER
Dead time
DEAD TIME
Characteristic
KL KF
Map
KR
Characteristic space
Hysteresis, falling
Hysteresis, rising
Hysteresis, 3x
MIN
Minimum,
2 inputs
MAX
Maximum,
2 inputs
COUNTER
Counter,
falling edge
MIN
Minimum,
3 inputs
MAX
Maximum,
3 inputs
COUNTER
Counter,
rising edge
ENT
Contusion Debouncing
Switch, 2 inputs,
1 output
Switch, 2 inputs,
1 output
Switch, 1 input,
2 outputs
Switch, 1 input,
2 outputs
The shorting switch
All rights reserved by Robert Bosch GmbH, including in cases of proprietary rights applications. All rights of disposal such as copying and passing on to us.
19 April 2002 Overview - Symbols DS / ESA
Page 1-4 EDC15 +
Y S01 281/120 - VG2
0 bosch
The shorting switch
Switch, 1 input,
3 outputs
Switch, 3 inputs,
1 output
a a
Comparator
b
=
Compared to the same
b
a <b
Compare for less
a a
a> b
b
Compare for greater
b
a <= b
Compare for less
or equal to
a
a> = b
b
Compare for greater
or equal to
X
Bit position Addition Subtraction
Division Multiplication
Empty gate
&
&
AND, 2 inputs AND, 3 inputs
&
&
AND, 4 inputs AND, 5 inputs
&
AND, 6 inputs
= 1
XOR, 2 inputs
> 1
> 1
OR, 2 inputs OR, 3 inputs
> 1
> 1
OR, 4 inputs OR, 5 inputs
> 1
OR, 6 inputs
1
Inverter Inversion
S
Q
RS flip-flop
R
All rights reserved by Robert Bosch GmbH, including in cases of proprietary rights applications. All rights of disposal such as copying and passing on to us.
DS / ESA Overview - Symbols 19 April 2002
0 bosch
Text Text
EDC15 +
Y S01 281/120 - VG2
Page 1-5
Text
Block start / end Function call Statement
Text
Text
Text
Text
Statement Statement with number Decision
Connector
All rights reserved by Robert Bosch GmbH, including in cases of proprietary rights applications. All rights of disposal such as copying and passing on to us.
19 April 2002 Overview - Symbols DS / ESA
Page 1-6 EDC15 +
Y S01 281/120 - VG2
0 bosch
1.5 Characteristic
space
The calculation algorithm of a characteristic space is generally explained here.
z-source
KL
High Byte
Select Curve
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
KF
Low Byte
00 FF HEX HEX ...
x = 0 ... 9
Standardization
100 HEX
0 ... 0996
Value of x.ten
Characteristic field
Final value
x-source
y-source
x maps
x = 1 ... 10
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
Th value of x +1.
Characteristic field
Illustration: CHARACTERISTIC
SPACE
The final value is formed from a 4-dimensional interpolation. The 4-dimensional
Interpolation is linear interpolation between outputs of two maps
simulated. In response to the third input variable (z-source) is calculated using the
Select Curve (the conversion must have SBK_EKF) (baseline 00 00 HEX ... xx 00
HEX) a pair of switches operated. The lower switch is always one step further than the
upper switch.
The pair of switches selects each x maps the input variables x and y-source-to-source
a map pair. The choice from the x maps done by the "high byte" of the
Select Curve value (0 x n). Between the output values of the characteristic fields KF (x) and
KF (x +1) is linearly interpolated. For this purpose, the difference of the above output values with
the normalized "low byte" of the selection curve multiplied, and the result of the characteristic field
KF (x) is added. This results in the final output value.
All rights reserved by Robert Bosch GmbH, including in cases of proprietary rights applications. All rights of disposal such as copying and passing on to us.
DS / ESA Overview - characteristic space 19 April 2002
0 bosch
EDC15 +
Y S01 281/120 - VG2
Page 1-7
1.6 Abbreviations
ADC
ADF
AG4
ARD
ARF
ASR
BRE
BRK
Analog-to-digital converter
Atmospheric pressure sensor
Automatic transmission (4-speed)
Active Ruckeldmpfung
Exhaust gas recirculation
Traction control
Brake contact
redundant brake contact
LL
LLR
LMM
LRR
LTF
MD
MES
MSA
MSG
MVS
M_L
M_E
N
NBF
Commercial
vehicles
NW
N_LL
OBD
Olda
EHAB
ELAB
EPW
FGG
GAZ
GF
GRA
GRL
GSK
GZS
HDK
HFM
IWZ
KF
KL
KLI
KS
KTF
KUP
KW
LDF
LDR
LDS
LGS
Electrohydraulic parking structure
Electrical shut-off device
Electro-pressure transducer
Vehicle speed sensor
Glow indicator
Memory factor
Cruise control
Glow relay
Glow plug
Glow time / device
Half difference shorting ring encoders
Hot-film air mass meter
Incremental angle-time system
Map
Characteristic
Air Compressor
Short circuit
Fuel temperature sensor
Coupling
Crankshaft / Crank angle
Boost pressure sensor
Boost pressure control
Boost pressure plate
Empty gas switch
PBM
PID
Car
PSG
PWG
PWM
P_ATM
P_L
RAM
ROM
RP
RWG
SB
SBR
SG
SNYC
t
T0
T_K
T_L
T_S
T_W
TDS
TV
TQS
Neutral
Idle controller
Air flow meter
Smoothness controller
Air temperature sensor
Moment
Amount amplifiers signal
Volume, injection start and
Emission control
ECM
Solenoid valve plate
Air mass
Amount
Number of revolutions
Needle-movement sensor
Commercial vehicles
Camshaft
Idle speed
On-board diagnostics
On-line data analysis
Pulse-width modulation
Parameter identification
Passenger cars
Pump controller
Pedal position sensor
Pulse-width modulation
Atmospheric pressure
Charge pressure
Random Access Memory
Read Only Memory
Series pump
Regelweggeber
Start of injection
Injection start control
Control unit
Sync pulse
Time
Sampling
Fuel temperature
Air temperature
Intake manifold
Water temperature
Speed signal
Duty cycle
Amount of signal
CAN
DIA
DKS
DPRAM
DZG
I / O
EAB
EDC
EEPROM
Controller Area Network
Diagnosis
Throttle Actuator
Dual Port RAM
Speed encoder
O signals
EAB (VP) or EHAB (RP)
Electronic Diesel Control
Electrical Erasable Programmable
Read Only Memory
All rights reserved by Robert Bosch GmbH, including in cases of proprietary rights applications. All rights of disposal such as copying and passing on to us.
19 April 2002 Index - Abbreviations DS / ESA
Page 1-8 EDC15 +
Y S01 281/120 - VG2
0 bosch
U_Batt
V
VP
VSO
VTG
VAG
WTF
Z
ZMS
Battery voltage
Speed
Distribution pump
Adjustment 100 (real-time
Application system)
Variable turbine geometry
VW Diagnostic Tester
Water temperature sensor
Number of cylinders
Dual mass flywheel system
All rights reserved by Robert Bosch GmbH, including in cases of proprietary rights applications. All rights of disposal such as copying and passing on to us.
DS / ESA Index - Abbreviations 19 April 2002
0 bosch
EDC15 +
Y S01 281/120 - VG2
Page 1-9
1.7 RCOS - operating states
The operating system differentiates between 3 system states. At a time the system takes exactly
one of these states:
1.7.1 Initialization
A Initialization place after a power-up or a K15 - level change from low to high
and instead can also be initiated by the operating system (after occurrence of several
Recoveries s, u). The initialization is used to set the computer core to a defined
Condition and is performed when it is assumed that the processor in an in
With regard to the application of undefined state. The duration of the initialization
is typically in the range of 200 ms.
1.7.2 Recovery
A Recovery takes place under the assumption that a fault condition has occurred in the system, the
by restarting (= Reset + execution of Recovery - functions) in an error-free
Condition can be performed. The goal of recovery is that the remuneration and
To restart application programs during operation without the driving noticeably
is affected. In the case of recovery, it is assumed that in a system to the total
Part defined state. The duration of a recovery of the order of 1
ms. The occurrence of Recoveries is time-monitored, too frequent recoveries lead to a
Initialization.
1.7.3 Operational
This is the "normal" operating state of the control unit. The state Operational is after
Reached the end of the initialization or recovery. Only in this state, for
the driving operation necessary functions performed.
HW reset &
NOT watchdog OV
HW reset &
Watchdog OV &
Rst Cnt> = 3
HW reset &
Watchdog OV &
Rst Cnt <3
Restart
Restart &
Rst Cnt <3
Initialization
Restart & Rst Cnt> = 3
Recovery
Operational
Figure OPMODES: Operating conditions
All rights reserved by Robert Bosch GmbH, including in cases of proprietary rights applications. All rights of disposal such as copying and passing on to us.
19 April 2002 Overview - RCOS - operating states
R
Rs est
t-C type
nt & <3
RE
CV
-R
ea
dy
IT
IN
y
ad
Re
& 3
rt
sta> =
Re-Cnt
tRs
DS / ESA
Page 1-10 EDC15 +
Y S01 281/120 - VG2
0 bosch
1.7.4 Restart - treatment
The operating system detects a critical misconduct, it triggers a restart. Through this
Process is brought into the state of the system recovery. The recovery routines of the individual
Tasks can read the restart cause and take appropriate action. The respective
Cause of error in the Low byte of Olda edoRSTCD displayed:
Value (hex)
00
01
02
03
04
05
06
07
08
09
0A
0B
0C
0D
0E
0F
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
1A
1B
1C
1D
1E
1F
*)
**)
Cause of error
Hardware initialization (no error)
Timeout during initialization (first task)
Timeout Recovery (1 task)
Error in the external RAM test
Timeout during initialization (other task)
Timeout Recovery (other task)
Incorrect system tables in the EPROM version
Error reading the bit pattern in the EPROM
Error reading the bit pattern in the external RAM
Checksum of the EPROM incorrect
Invalid restart entry point
Watchdog expired during Operational
Zero job is not active
Exceeded deadline of a task
Inconsistent Gltig_Bits (int RAM)
Exceeded Resource Deadline
Illegal interrupt after PEC 0 *)
Illegal interrupt after PEC 1
Illegal interrupt after PEC 2 **)
Illegal interrupt after PEC 3
Illegal interrupt after PEC 4
Illegal interrupt after PEC 5
Illegal interrupt after PEC 6
Illegal interrupt after PEC 7
Invalid trap or interrupt entry point
Stack not empty at end of task
Stack overflow
Stack underflow
Undefined opcode
Protection Fault
Illegal Word Operand Access
Illegal Instruction Access
Possible cause: extreme over frequency on MES-0
Possible cause: extreme over frequency to FGG-1
All rights reserved by Robert Bosch GmbH, including in cases of proprietary rights applications. All rights of disposal such as copying and passing on to us.
DS / ESA Overview - RCOS - operating states 19 April 2002
0 bosch
EDC15 +
Y S01 281/120 - VG2
Page 1-11
Cause of error
Access to non-configured bus
Illegal Class B HW Trap
Illegal NMI interrupt
Detuning on the overrun
Index in dzmDZGPER has overflowed
User stack overflow
User stack underflow
A / D channel number out of step
Checksum of the EPROM (residual) incorrectly (with CR function switch invalid)
Series controller with application data set
CAN module blocked Ready line
Differnet. Number of power amplifier modules - number made use of amplifiers
Series of measurements is, although started
Main relay has stuck
The internal ROM checksum incorrect
Exceeded task - Deadline a 100ms
wrong CS-lines-Number (for CR: KWP 2000 Flash EPROM programming
start)
31Falsche form identifier in EPROM
32Fehler XpressNet the RAM test
33falsche addr-line-number
34reserviert (at CR: Critical iwz implausibility)
35Falsche gate array identification
36KWP 2000 Flash EPROM programming start (at CR: Flash Programming
enabled on restart)
37Fehler in data-bus test
38Softwareinkompatibilitaet (at CR: digital Einsprungbedingungen lie on)
39falsche form identifier in Flash
3Areserviert (at CR: Master / Slave Communication failure)
3BFehler in RAM Connection Test
3CFehler in CS-agility test
3DFehler for address bus test
3Efehlerhafte CC215 data bus connection
The differences between V and CR result from the different mask versions.
High byte of the message edmRSTCD:
00h ... during initialization / recovery
10h ... while Operational in previous initialization
30h ... while in previous Operational Recovery
Value (hex)
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
2A
2B
2C
2D
2E
2F
30
All rights reserved by Robert Bosch GmbH, including in cases of proprietary rights applications. All rights of disposal such as copying and passing on to us.
19 April 2002 Overview - RCOS - operating states DS / ESA
Page 1-12 EDC15 +
Y S01 281/120 - VG2
0 bosch
The high byte of the restart code was extended by a further position. At Restart Code
80xxh jumped the control unit in the high-level Flash programming. The numbers in
Low byte then have other meanings (ie the error numbers of the self-diagnosis) from the
The following table can be removed.
VALUE (hex)
19
1A
1F
24
27
50-61
7F
Cause of error
EPROM Checksumfehler Page 36
faulty ext. RAM
EPROM Checksumfehler (Page 32,33,37-62)
Error in SW Kompatibilitaetstest
defective masks identifier in EPROM (Page 36)
Faulty bit patterns in EPROM
High-level programming entry-level flash (via recovery)
All rights reserved by Robert Bosch GmbH, including in cases of proprietary rights applications. All rights of disposal such as copying and passing on to us.
DS / ESA Overview - RCOS - operating states 19 April 2002
0 bosch
EDC15 +
Y S01 281/120 - VG2
Page 2-1
2 Quantity Calculation
2.1 Survey
The amount calculated is divided because of the different required response times in three
Subtasks. Maps and characteristic curves are calculated essentially synchronously. The
dynamic response to the motor behavior required for some parts of a variable-speed synchronous
Calculation, while the position control of the quantity metering is done with a high repetition rate.
Speed synchronous tasks are generally coupled to the Drehzahlinterrupt,
However, at least every 32 ms (mathematics limit for speed synchronous controller) and not
more often than every 6 ms (for CR 1.3 ms; VP44 at 6.4 ms) enabled.
Functional sets the amount calculated as follows:
-
-
Startup
Driving
The movement is further subdivided into:
-
-
-
-
-
Limiting amount
Idle controller
Desired quantity
Active Ruckeldmpfer
Smoothness controller
The injection system specific functions are described in Chapter quantity metering.
An overview can be found in the figures MERE01 (volume calculation) and MERE02
(Driving).
The speed synchronous part of the crowd control calculated from the current driving or
Motor state, and the calculated speed, the required fuel amount to the
to achieve desired operating point or to keep.
The amount determined desire of the idle controller mrmM_ELLR and synchronously
Desired quantity mrmM_EWUN be after the start dropping as the current injection quantity
mrmM_EAKT accepted. If the sum of the value of the limiting amount
mrmM_EBEGR, is from the time synchronous request only the amount corresponding to reduced
Part (command desired amount mrmM_EWUSO) accepted. This part is called the operating point change
Size on the amount of input Ruckeldmpfers assets included in the system. Possible
ARD quantities are ignored in coasting mode after the time mrwSCHTIxG (output dependent).
After the addition of the partial results of the synchronous speed LLR, ARD and LRR takes place
Implementation of the quantity desire in Chapter quantity metering.
All rights reserved by Robert Bosch GmbH, including in cases of proprietary rights applications. All rights of disposal such as copying and passing on to us.
19 April 2002 Quantity calculation DS / ESA
DS / ESA
Time sync
Start
MEREST01MEREST02
MEREST03MEREST04
mrmSTART_
B
Speed
synchronous
mrmM_ESTA
R
mroM_EAKTf mroM_EFAHf
mrmM_EFAH
R
mroM_APUM
P
mrmM_EAKT mrmM_EPUM
P
mrmM_EWU
NL
mrmM_EWU
NR
mrmM_EMOT
RAMP
Page 2-2
dzmNmitanmWTFanmK
TFmrmSTA_AGL
Driving
EDC15 +
MERE02
Y S01 281/120 - VG2
Figure MERE01: Quantity calculation
3
All rights reserved by Robert Bosch GmbH, including in cases of proprietary rights applications. All rights of disposal such as copying and passing on to us.
Overview - Survey
mrmPWGPB
M
Switching logic
frSchubabschaltung
MERESA01
mrmM_EKOR
R
Kraftstofftemp.-
/Dsenkorrektur
ZUME01
Time sync
Speed
synchronous
mrmSASTAT
E
3
4
mrmM_EMOT
X
0
19 April 2002
bosch
0
19 April 2002
MIN
Time sync
Speed
synchronous
bosch
Idle controller
mroM_ELLBE
mrmM_ELLR
mroM_EAKTf
mrmLLR_AGLklmN_LLKLMkhmN_LLKWHmrmN_LLDI
AanmWTFfgm_VzuNdzmNmitmrmPWGfimrmM_EFGRfg
mFGAKTdimBREdimKUPmrmSTART_BanmUTFanmUB
ATT
MERELL01
Limiting quantity
mrmM_EBEG
R
armM_ListdzmNmitmrmBEGa
AGLmrmBEGmAGLanmWTF
fgmFGAKT
mroM_EWUB
E
dzmN_ARD
EDC15 +
MEREBG01
Y S01 281/120 - VG2
mrmM_ESTA
R
Figure MERE02: driving
AktiverRuckeld
mpfer
MIN
All rights reserved by Robert Bosch GmbH, including in cases of proprietary rights applications. All rights of disposal such as copying and passing on to us.
Quantity calculation - Overview
mrmM_EWUS
O
mrmM_EARD
CONTROLS
mrmM_EMOT
mroM_EFAHf
Desired
quantity
mrmM_EWU
N
MEREWU01
MEREAR01MEREAR0
2MEREAR03MEREAR
04
mrmM_EBEGR
+
mrwABegOKL
(dzmNmit)
mrmSTART_
B
Smoothness
controller
mrmM_ELRRme
nge
MERELR01
mrmM_EWU
NL
anmPWGdimLGSdimBRKdimBREdimKUPdimAG4dzmN
mitmrmM_EAKTphmPBM_T2dimFGxfgmFGAKTfgmBES
CHfgm_VzuNmrmM_EBEGRmrmM_EPWG
mrmM_EWU
NR
mrmPWGPB
M
dzmNmitdzmNaktfgmFGAKTmr
mM_EMOTmrmSTART_BdzmS
EGMdzmABTAS
Time sync
Speed
synchronous
Page 2-3
DS / ESA
Page 2-4 EDC15 +
Y S01 281/120 - VG2
0 bosch
mrmdM_EFF (output-input of the reference-forming element ARD)
mroM_WUBE
MIN
mrmM_EIST6
CONTROLS mrmM_EWUN6
mroM_ELLBE
mrmM_EWUS6
mrmM_EBEGR
mrmM_ESOL6
CONTROLS
mrmM_EBEGR
Figure MERE03: Quantity calculation for Motor6 Embassy
The EGS uses the engine intervention to reduce acceleration peaks, and requires
the actual torque for hydraulic control. The desired torque is for the push / train detection, and
Requires control of the converter clutch.
For the output of the engine indicated torque via CAN (Motor6 embassy) in addition to the
actual amount calculating the "actual injection quantity" mrmM_EIST6 for Motor6-Is-
Moment, and the "target injection quantity" mrmM_ESOL6 calculated for Motor6-set torque. On
However, these two quantities are the influences of the ARD fault regulator, the smoothness controller
and EGS engagement not to be imaged, which requires a certain "Parallel calculation".
Both sets are not used for the actual injection, but after the
Conversion used in moments only for the CAN outputs of Motor6 message. The
Evaluation of these moments takes place in the gear-SG. The "target injection quantity" mrmM_ESOL6
furthermore does not include the influence of the ARD-reference-forming element, allowing for a "preemptive
Injection amount "can be determined, which in the transmission before the actual SG
Injection can be cheap.
All rights reserved by Robert Bosch GmbH, including in cases of proprietary rights applications. All rights of disposal such as copying and passing on to us.
DS / ESA Overview - Survey 19 April 2002
0
2.2
bosch
Startup
EDC15 +
Y S01 281/120 - VG2
Page 2-5
The boot process is divided into a starting quantity calculation and in a starting volume control.
The starting quantity calculation assumes a static base amount mroM_ESTIP, adds a
adjustable via VAG tester mrmSTA_AGL value and a time-dependent correction value. The
Start quantity control are the starting amount freely and turns it off again.
2.2.1 Start quantity calculation
dimK50
S
Q
mro_ZMsta.4 Meshed starters
R
KF
mrwSTMGxKF
anmT_MOT
dzmNmit
KF
mroM_ESTIP
Starting quantity of map
mrwSTMGRKF
mroM_EStKo
anmKTF
KF
mrwSTMKoKF
dzmNmit
mrwSTA_END
mroM_ESTI2
1 -
mrwSTA_END
mroM_ESAB
Starting quantity correction
mrmSTA_AGL
CONTROLS
mrwSTA_MAX Min: 0
dzmNmit <= mrwSTA_END
dzmNmit> = mrwSTNMIN2 mroM_ESTAG
> 1
mrmM_ESTAR> = mrwST._GM
dzmNmit> mrwSTNMIN1
mroM_ESTF
mroM_ESTvo
Starting quantity increase
&
t> mrwST._WZ
mrwST._MI
mroM_ESTER
I
dzmNmit <> 0
S
Q
TIMER
R
anmT_MOT
KL
mrwSTMFRKL
Start flow cutoff for
Dual-mass flywheel
MEREST1A
mro_ZMsta.3
All rights reserved by Robert Bosch GmbH, including in cases of proprietary rights applications. All rights of disposal such as copying and passing on to us.
19 April 2002 Quantity calculation - Startup DS / ESA
Page 2-6 EDC15 +
Y S01 281/120 - VG2
0 bosch
Figure MEREST01: starting quantity
Base amount:
The lower the engine temperature, the higher the initial amount must be to good cold start
allow the speed dependency is to prevent unnecessary smoke of the engine.
The base value is the mroM_ESTIP by the starting amount map depending on
Engine temperature anmT_MOT and the speed dzmNmit specified. Additionally, for VP44
Injection an additional additive correction to leakage at high fuel
temperatures and low speeds to compensate.
Before recognizing a real positive edge at dimK50 (transition initialization - Driving-SW
shall not be deemed edge) the initial amount mrwSTMGRKF map is used. The first positive
Edge at dimK50 (= starter meshing olda mro_ZMsta.4 = 1) in an RS flip-flop
stored and causes the switch to the start amount map mrwSTMGxKF.
A faulty terminal X (eg fuse failure) or a start without a starter (eg
Pushing) is started with the start of a characteristic diagram mrwSTMGRKF.
Application Note:
The starting amount map must be applied so that if error in shear mode (fbbERUC_S)
no amount is output, that is, above the speed threshold, the amount mrwUW_SNGR
Be zero.
The map contains mrwSTMGxKF quantities even at low speeds and high
Engine temperature, to obtain short start times.
The map mrwSTMKoKF must aplliziert for other than VP44 injection pump with zero
be.
anmKTF <mrwST_TKsw
mrwSTK_GM
mrwSTW_GM
Limit amount
mrwSTK_WZ
mrwSTW_WZ
Waiting period
mrwSTK_MI
mrwSTW_MI
Mengeninkrement
Figure MEREST02: Selection of the fuel temperature-dependent parameters
Starting quantity balance:
The starting amount adjustment value mrmSTA_AGL (initialized with cowAGL_STA) is on the
maximum adjustment value mrwSTA_MAX and the minimum balance value 0 limited. Above
the Abgleichenddrehzahl mrwSTA_END is not corrected the starting amount.
Starting quantity increase:
The starting amount of increase depends on the fuel temperature and ensures safe
Cold start. At speeds <mrwSTNMIN1 not start quantity increase occurs (integrator = 0).
After mrwSTNMIN1 speed is exceeded, initially for a temperature-dependent
Waiting time mrwSTW_WZ or mrwSTK_WZ no amount of increase made. After this
Time is the starting amount mroM_ESTER ramp-shaped with the temperature-dependent
Mengeninkrement mrwSTW_MI or mrwSTK_MI increased. The starting amount of increase is
All rights reserved by Robert Bosch GmbH, including in cases of proprietary rights applications. All rights of disposal such as copying and passing on to us.
DS / ESA Overview - Startup 19 April 2002
0 bosch
EDC15 +
Y S01 281/120 - VG2
Page 2-7
frozen when the resulting initial amount mrmM_ESTAR the temperature-dependent
Limit amount mrwSTW_GM or mrwSTK_GM or the speed of the threshold mrwSTNMIN2
reaches or exceeds. Only when this condition has been reached, the
Start increasing amount be terminated by lowering the speed under mrwSTNMIN1 again
(Integrator = 0). The choice of fuel temperature-dependent parameters is done once at
"Ignition on" after a delay of the temperature threshold mrwST_TKsw. This
Delay (mrwWTCNTKT * 20ms) is to be applied such that, when selection of the
fuel temperature dependent parameter already has a valid fuel temperature. At
Receipt of the fuel temperature via CAN is the time to initial reception to
taken into account.
Disconnection of the starting quantity during an applicable time to improve the cold start
The starting amount can be used for an applicable period, determined from anmT_MOT via the characteristic
mrwSTMFRKL be turned off. The timer is started when the first time a
Speed is determined (dzmNmit greater than 0).
anmUBATT
anmUBATT - anmUBATT
(K) (k mrwSTZUmit) mro_STBatt
mrwSTZUmit. 20
a
mrwSTZMSdU
anmUBATT> mrwSTZMSU
a> = b
b
&
cowK50_var
mro_ZMsta.0
dimK50
dzmNmit> = mrwSTZMSN
dzmNmit
mro_STNBT
KL
a
&
mro_ZMsta.1
a <b
b
anmT_MOT
mrwSTNB_KL
mro_ZMsta.2
TIMER
mrwSTZMSt1
S
Q
&
> 1
TIMER
mro_ZMsta.3
mrwSTZMSt
R
a
a <b
mro_STNO
KL
b
mrwSTNO_KL
Figure MEREST1A: Start flow cutoff for dual-mass flywheel
All rights reserved by Robert Bosch GmbH, including in cases of proprietary rights applications. All rights of disposal such as copying and passing on to us.
19 April 2002 Overview - Startup DS / ESA
Page 2-8 EDC15 +
Y S01 281/120 - VG2
0 bosch
Disconnection of the starting quantity to avoid resonance of the dual mass flywheel
Is decoupled from the engine when starting the starter, it shows the battery voltage during a
positive voltage swing. If this exceeds positive gradient of the battery voltage mro_STBatt,
calculated from the average difference of the battery voltages between the last mrwSTZUmit
Program cycles, the value mrwSTZMSdU, and at this time the battery voltage
greater mrwSTZMSU, as a condition for a launch abort is satisfied. Alternatively, on the
Variant switch cowK50_var be applied to the Run Out back on the falling edge
dimK50 (starters) are detected. To allow a reliable detection of the Start Out back
is the Start Out back at speeds greater than or equal to the applicable operating speed threshold
mrwSTZMSN accepted. If at this time a rising edge (mro_ZMsta.1) the
Speed dzmNmit smaller than a motor temperature-dependent threshold mro_STNBT (determined from
the characteristic mrwSTNB_KL) as the starting quantity mroM_ESTER is for the time mrwSTZMSt
off. Otherwise, a timer is started mrwSTZMSt1. If after this time the
Mro_STNO speed threshold (determined from the characteristic curve mrwSTNO_KL) is not reached, it is
the starting amount mroM_ESTER also shut mrwSTZMSt for the time. This
Trips can be done per cycle only once.
By this measure, the critical for a start-resonance speed range is excluded
and the maximum allowed for the persistence time mrwSTZMSt1 in a resonance.
The number of periods of the main program for the averaging of the voltage rise mrwSTZUmit
is also limited to the values 1 to 10. The acquisition is carried out of the application date
therefore only in the initialization. Furthermore, the conditions are only calculated and the OLDAs
updated until the start bit is set.
2.2.2 Start quantity control
mrmSTART_B
dzmNmit = 0
fbbEDZG_L
mrmSTART_B
&
| Loading pressure change |> mrwST_dPL
t> = mrwST_SPZ
dzmUMDRK15> = mrwUM_abK15
dzmNmit
a
&
a> b
b
> 1
anmT_MOT
KL
MAX
mrwSTNABKL
mrmEAB_Dz
dimK15 = 0
&
fbbEK15_P
Figure MEREST03: Start shedding
In PDE the MAX Education provides that the message mrmEAB_Dz (then = 0) due to the
Lack of ELAB function.
All rights reserved by Robert Bosch GmbH, including in cases of proprietary rights applications. All rights of disposal such as copying and passing on to us.
DS / ESA Overview - Startup 19 April 2002
0 bosch
EDC15 +
Y S01 281/120 - VG2
Page 2-9
mroM_ESTER
dzmNmit <= mrwSTNMIN1
MIN mrmM_ESTAR
&
t <mrwST_OFZ mrwST._GM
&
zmmSYSERR.0
dzmNmit> = mrwSTNMIN1
> 1
mrmSTW_fr
mrmSTART_B
Figure MEREST04: ELAB quantity metering and release
Normal case:
The set after the start bit Steuergerteinitialisierung mrmSTART_B will be stopped when
a motor temperature dependent start dropping speed deleted. The start dropping speed is determined from
the characteristic mrwSTNABKL determined as a function of engine temperature anmT_MOT. At
funktionierendemDrehzahlgeber (zmmSYSERR.0 = 0; see monitoring concept-
"Summarized System Error"), after switching on the supply voltage of the
Control device, the start quantity mrmM_ESTAR and for systems with ELAB also the ELAB at
Zero speed (dzoNmit = 0) to share.
Range mrmSTART_B (bit-coded):
0 = start shedding
1 = Start condition
16 = transition from a broken caster to start condition
32 = restart by Ecomatic
Speed sensor - monitor the Start (see Monitoring concept):
The speed sensor can be monitored via the change in the charge pressure anmLDF. Varies
the pressure at the speed dzoNmit = 0 (was always 0 since terminal 15) by more than the
Delta pressure threshold mrwST_dPL an error fbbEDZG_L is reported and the start bit
deleted. The absolute value of the supercharge pressure change after the 400 ms anmLDF
Initialization and the current anmLDF formed. No error is reported if the LDF in
this cycle ever was defective (fbosLDF, fboSLDP).
Terminal 15 - Monitoring the Start:
If during the start-up process by the driver "ignition off" desired (dimK15 = 0) and is not
Error in the evaluation circuit terminal 15 (fbbEK15_P), the start bit is also cleared. At
slaked start bit mrmSTART_B remains frozen the starting amount mrmM_ESTAR.
Noise pulse suppression:
Due to interference from the starter is observing the speed for a
Start shedding lock time mrwST_SPZ suppressed after the beginning of the boot process. A mapping
also takes place until a minimum number (mrwUM_abK15) of engine revolutions since K15 A
(DzmUMDRK15) is reached. When the starting procedure triggered by the ECOMATIC, then at
Speed dzmNmit 0, the starting shedding lock time mrwST_SPZ suppressed.
No Starter Activity:
If, after the start Glhbeginn minimum speed mrwSTNMIN1 not within the turn-off
mrwST_OFZ + preheating time is exceeded or only a speed sensor is defective, the
Quantity metering and ELAB blocked again.
Start with ELAB test (see Monitoring concept):
-
-
-
-
All rights reserved by Robert Bosch GmbH, including in cases of proprietary rights applications. All rights of disposal such as copying and passing on to us.
19 April 2002 Overview - Startup DS / ESA
Page 2-10 EDC15 +
Y S01 281/120 - VG2
0 bosch
At certain intervals, the ELAB is tested during the boot process. see also
Operating hours counter (monitoring approach)
All rights reserved by Robert Bosch GmbH, including in cases of proprietary rights applications. All rights of disposal such as copying and passing on to us.
DS / ESA Overview - Startup 19 April 2002
0
2.3
bosch
Limiting amount
EDC15 +
Y S01 281/120 - VG2
Page 2-11
The limitation amount is composed of the parts of smoke, torque limiting and
Correction options together:
mrmM_EWUNL
mrmGANG
mrmM_EAKT
dzmNmit
anmLTF
anmSTF
armM_List
ldmP_Llin
ldmADF
mrmASGSTAT
mroBM_ETUR
Smoking and Turbo
feed limit
MEREBG02
mroBM_ESE1
Torque
limit
MEREBG2A
mroBM_VE
mrmBEGmAGL
dzmNmit
fgmFGAKT
anmWTF
anmWTF_CAN
anmOTF
anmLTF
ldmADF
anmTTF
anmKTF
mrmSTART_B
mroBM_ENSU
Korreketur the
Limiting amount mrmM_EBEGR
MEREBG3A
zmmF_KRIT.3
Shutdown due
System errors
SYS_FEHL
dzmNmit
ldmADF
fgm_VzuN
dimKIK
zmmVEAKTIV
dzmNmit
fgmFGAKT
anmWTF
mrmSTART_B
dzmDNDT2u
fboSDZG
mrmBM_ESER
Korreketur the
Limiting amount
MEREBG03
Limiting amount
active in VE
MEREBG2B
dzmNmit
mrmM_EAKT
zmmVEAKTIV
Figure MEREBG01: limiting amount
All rights reserved by Robert Bosch GmbH, including in cases of proprietary rights applications. All rights of disposal such as copying and passing on to us.
19 April 2002 Quantity calculation -Limiting amount DS / ESA
Page 2-12 EDC15 +
Y S01 281/120 - VG2
0 bosch
2.3.1 Smoke limitation and turbo boost limit
ldmADF
ldmP_Llin
mroBEG_P
mroPkorr
KF
cowBEG_BOO
mroBM_ERAU
KF
cowBEG_P_L
anmWTF
armM_List
anmSTF
anmLTF
mroBEG_T
mrwPKOR_KF
mrwPBRA_KF
Smoke characteristics space
mroM_Lk
KF KR
Ramp mrwBRA_DEK
difference between
last and new value
at the switching
MEREBG2D
Smoke limit
mrwMKOR_KF
cowBEG_STF
mrwBRA_KL
mrwBRAxKR
dzmNmit
mrmM_EAKT
mrwKTB_TD
anmKTF
zmmVEAKTIV
cowRauchKR
mrmGANG <= mrwTSBgang
mrwTSB_NU <dzmNmit <mrwTSB_NO
mrwTSB_MEU <mrmM_EAKT <mrwTSB_MEO
KF
mroBM_KTB
KF
Amounts of smoke-
correction
mrwKTB_KF
mrwBRA_KF
mroBM_EKTB
MAX
zmmBM_ADD
> 1
MAX
mroBM_ERKT
&
mroTSBits.1 off delay mroTSBits.0
see description
anmLTF
KL
mroTSBKLTF
mroBM_ETUR
RAMP
mrwTSTLKL
ldmADF
KL
mroTSBKADF
mrwTSADpKL
mroTSB_STG
Turbo boost-
limit
mroBM_ERKT <mroBM_ETUR
mroTSBits.2
KL
mrwTSADnKL
mroBM_ERKT <mroBM_ETUR
mroTSBits.3
&
mrmM_EWUNL <mroBM_ETUR
mroBM_ERKT
mrmM_EWUNL
MAX
Figure MEREBG02: Smoke limitation + Turbo boost limit
All rights reserved by Robert Bosch GmbH, including in cases of proprietary rights applications. All rights of disposal such as copying and passing on to us.
DS / ESA Quantity calculation -Limiting amount 19 April 2002
0 bosch
EDC15 +
Y S01 281/120 - VG2
Page 2-13
Smoke limit:
The allowable fuel quantity (amount of smoke) is determined from a smoke limit map,
In order to avoid excessive smoke emission. Is via the switch cowBEG_BOO
defines whether the Smoke limitation is calculated with mass air flow or intake manifold pressure.
In cowBEG_BOO = 0, the smoke limit with mrwBRAxKR as a function of the corrected
Air mass and the speed mroM_Lk dzmNmit calculated. The corrected air mass mroM_Lk
is calculated with mrwMKOR_KF from air mass armM_List and temperature. If the
Pre-injection is switched off (zmmVEAKTIV = 0) or is not the selection of the smoke characteristic map
applied (cowRauchKR = 0) as the amount of smoke from the map mrwBRA_KF is determined.
To a lot of jump when switching from mrwBRAxKR and mrwBRA_KF (or
vice versa) is to avoid the always valid shortly after switching value from a map
subtracted from the current value and the final value as the target for the current to ramp 0
taken mrwBRA_DEK. The output of the ramp is added to the final value:
Output
Input
(T = 0)
(T +1)
RAMP
mroBM_ERDF
mrwBRA_DEK
zmmVEAKTIV edge
Figure MEREBG2D: ramp between smoke control maps
In cowBEG_BOO = 1, the boundary with smoke mrwPBRA_KF as a function of the
corrected mroPkorr intake manifold pressure and the speed dzmNmit calculated. The corrected
MroPkorr intake manifold pressure is calculated with mrwPKOR_KF of pressure and temperature. With the
CowBEG_P_L switch selects whether atmospheric pressure ldmADF or boost pressure
ldmP_Llin is used. With the switch cowBEG_STF is selected, whether with anmLTF
(CowBEG_STF = 0) or anmSTF (cowBEG_STF = 1) should be corrected.
System specific amount of smoke correction:
With zmmBM_ADD can einspritzsystemabhngege additive correction of the smoke limit
be made.
Amount of smoke correction as a function of fuel temperature:
At high fuel temperatures to a correction of the amount of the smoke map
be calculated, made to the softer the injection pump due to
temperature-dependent leakage losses to compensate. Thus, smoke avoided
be. The correction affects only subtractive on the amount of smoke map
mroBM_ERAU.
About the correction map mrwKTB_KF with the input variables mrmM_EAKT and dzmNmit,
is normalized to 100 C above the reference temperature mrwKTB_TD amount mroBM_KTB
All rights reserved by Robert Bosch GmbH, including in cases of proprietary rights applications. All rights of disposal such as copying and passing on to us.
19 April 2002 Quantity calculation -Limiting amount DS / ESA
Page 2-14 EDC15 +
Y S01 281/120 - VG2
0 bosch
calculated. The amount of smoke mroBM_EKTB correction is restricted to positive values and
is subtracted from the amount of smoke, i.e., is at fuel temperatures below mrwKTB_TD no
Correction is performed. The result mroBM_ERKT is also limited to positive values.
Turbo boost limit:
The sudden increase of the engine torque at the onset of the turbocharger is by the
Advanced Turbo boost limit (TSB) are reduced. Once the connection conditions
mrmGANG <= mrwTSBgang
mrwTSB_NU <dzmNmit <mrwTSB_NO
mrwTSB_MEU <mroM_EAKT <mrwTSB_MEO
are met, the slew rate of the output quantity of the smoke characteristic field is
(Amount of smoke mroBM_ERAU) by a ramp to the maximum slope mroTSB_STG
limited and the amount Turbo mroBM_ETUR formed. The maximum slope is given here,
depending on the sign, of two ADF - dependent characteristics mrwTSADpKL and mrwTSADnKL,
aggravated by an LTF - be corrected dependent characteristic mrwTSTLKL. When at
falling TSB ramp the requested quantity mrmM_EWUNL is smaller than the Turbo Volume
mroBM_ETUR, the TSB-ramp to the maximum of the requested quantity is mrmM_EWUNL
and amount of smoke mroBM_ERKT initialized.
Switch-off the turbo boost limit:
In order to avoid significant amount jumps when switching off the TSB, the TSB remains after removal
the connection conditions still remain active until the turbo amount the value of the amount of smoke
has reached or is engaged the torque limiting.
Ramp-shaped limiting amount at pre:
With active pilot (zmmVEAKTIV = 1) and act. Amount (mrmM_EAKT) is greater
Threshold mroBM_Verp (from mrwBMVE_KF) to the current set only with the WTF
dependent ramp slope of the characteristic curve mrwVEBsLKL rise to as long as possible in the
Area of the pilot to stay.
The delay (mroVEB_STA.0 = 1) should amount jumps when you turn the
Prevent function. After elimination of the switch condition (mroVEB_STA.1 = 0)
mroBM_VE with the slope mrwVEBstgS incremented to mroBM_ESE1 is achieved
regardless of mrmM_EAKT.
If mrmM_EAKT is greater mroBM_VERp and small mroBM_VE,
Limiting amount mroBM_VE with mrmM_EAKT initialized (mroVEB_STA.3 = 0).
shall the
AND
AND
All rights reserved by Robert Bosch GmbH, including in cases of proprietary rights applications. All rights of disposal such as copying and passing on to us.
DS / ESA Quantity calculation -Limiting amount 19 April 2002
0 bosch
EDC15 +
Y S01 281/120 - VG2
Page 2-15
mroBM_ESE1
dzmNmit
mroBM_VERp
anmWTF
KF
mrwBMVE_KF
a
mrmM_EAKT
zmmVEAKTIV
a <b
b
&
mroVEB_STA.1 off delay mroVEB_STA.0
see description
Ramp end
on a rising edge and
Ramp not yet started:
Rampeninitalwert mroBM_VERp = (k-1)
RAMP
mrwVEBstgS mroBM_VE
Ramp Rate
anmWTF
KL
mroVEB_STA.3
old ramp value
mrwVEBsLKL
mroBM_VERp <mrmM_EAKT <mroBM_VE
mrmM_EAKT
Figure MEREBG2B: ramp limitation amount active in VE
m roBM _ESE1
m ro BM _VE
m rm M _EAKT
m rm M _EW UNL
m roBM _VERp
ZMM VEAKTIV
Switch-off delay mroVEB_ST A.0
Turn On Delay m roVEB_STA.1
Initialization mroVEB_ST A.2
Reinitialization with m RMM _EAKT mroVEB_ST A.3
Figure MEREBG2C: typical limiting amount sequence active in VE
All rights reserved by Robert Bosch GmbH, including in cases of proprietary rights applications. All rights of disposal such as copying and passing on to us.
19 April 2002 Quantity calculation -Limiting amount DS / ESA
Page 2-16 EDC15 +
Y S01 281/120 - VG2
0 bosch
2.3.2 Torque limit
Limiting amount
at pre-
aktivmroBM_VE
MEREBG2B
MIN
mroBM_ESER
Smoke limit
Turbo boost limit
MEREBG02
dzmNmit
ldmADF
mroBM_ETUR
Switching off the
Turboschubbegrenzg
at kickdown
MEREBG21
mroBM_ETUK
MIN
KF
mroBM_EMOM
MIN
mroBM_ESE1
mrwBDB_KF
dzmNmit
fgm_VzuN
KF
Ramp mrwADB_DEK,
between maps
to final value reached
mrwADB_KF
KF
mrwADB2_KF
zmmVEAKTIV
dzmNmit
KL
mrmBM_ASG
mroBM_EMO2
mrwBDB2_KL
mrwM_EMAX
mrwASG_BGR.0
mrmASGSTAT.13
dimKIK
&
Figure MEREBG2A: torque limiter
Torque limitation:
The torque limitation amount mroBM_EMOM is from the minimum of the characteristic fields
mrwBDB_KF (dzmNmit, ldmADF) and mrwADB_KF (dzmNmit, fgm_VzuN) or
mrwADB2_KF (dzmNmit, fgm_VzuN and zmmVEAKTIV = 1), is formed.
To avoid crowd jumps will switch between the maps mrwADB_KF
and mrwADB2_KF realized via a ramp with maximum gradient mrwADB_DEK
(Method see smoke control / Fig. MEREBG2D).
All rights reserved by Robert Bosch GmbH, including in cases of proprietary rights applications. All rights of disposal such as copying and passing on to us.
DS / ESA Quantity calculation -Limiting amount 19 April 2002
0 bosch
EDC15 +
Y S01 281/120 - VG2
Page 2-17
Torque limitation in ASG-ECO mode:
For the ASG-ECO mode is a second torque limiting amount mrmBM_ASG
determined from the map mrwBDB2_KL available.
This can be activated via the label mrwASG_BGR.0. If now the ASG-ECO mode
released (mrmASGSTAT.13 = 1) and Kik-down is not actuated (dimKIK = 0), so goes the
calculated torque limitation mroBM_EMO2 in the Mimnimalauswahl with a.
Off the turbo boost limit at kick-down:
This gives the driver the opportunity despite turbo thrust limiting the full engine power
retrieve, this can be turned off at kick-down. For this purpose, at applied
Kick-down (dimKIK = 1) and active turbo boost limit (mroTSBits.0 = 1 OR
mroTSBits.1 = 1) a maximum selection between amount of smoke and turbo boost correction amount
created and displayed on mroBM_ETUK. This function can be about the label
off mrwTSB_KIK. In the absence of effective kick-down in the maximum selection is the
Label mrwBM_ERKT one. For runtime reasons, the olda mroBM_ETUK 20ms after
mroBM_ETUR output.
mroBM_ETUR
mroBM_ETUK
MAX
mroBM_ERKT
mrwBM_ERKT
dimKIK
mrwTSB_KIK
&
fboSKIK
mroTSBits.1
> 1
mroTSBits.0
Figure MEREBG21: TSB bypass by kickdown
All rights reserved by Robert Bosch GmbH, including in cases of proprietary rights applications. All rights of disposal such as copying and passing on to us.
19 April 2002 Quantity calculation -Limiting amount DS / ESA
Page 2-18 EDC15 +
Y S01 281/120 - VG2
0 bosch
2.3.3 fixes the limitation amount
Smoke limit
Turbo boost limit
MEREBG02 mrmBM_ESER
Torque limit
MEREBG2A
1
mrmBEGmAGL
CONTROLS
Quantity adjustment
mrwBEAmMAX
mrwBEAmMIN
mroBM_WT
cowV_AGL_B = 2
mroBM_EERH
MAX
dzmNmit
anmT_MOT
KF
mroBM_EVSU
Water temperature-dependent
Full load increase
mrwBWT_KF
mrwBEG_NTU <dzmNmit <mrwBEG_NTO
ldmP_lin
ldmADF
KF
mrwBPL_KF
mrwBWT_ADF
anmWTF_CAN
mroBMEFKOC
fgmFGAKT
KF
1 Overheating protection water
mrwBUE_KF
mrwBEG_UNS <dzmNmit <mrwBEG_ONS
anmOTF
KF
mroBMEFOEL
1
Overheating protection oil
mrwBOEL_KF
cowBEG_OEL
mroBMEFATM
ldmADF
KF
Depending on altitude
Speed correction
mrwBATM_KF
mroBMEFTT
anmTTF
KF
MIN
mrmBMEF mroBM_ENSU
Fuel cooling 1
xcwPKSKon / off
mroBMELFT
mrwBTT_KF
Overheating protection
Charge-air temperature
anmLTF
KF
mrwBLFT_KF
mroBMEFKT
anmKTF
KF
Fuel cooling by
Switching program reduction
mrmB_DSP
mrwBEHdsp
mrwBKT_KF
Figure MEREBG03: corrections to the limiting amount
All rights reserved by Robert Bosch GmbH, including in cases of proprietary rights applications. All rights of disposal such as copying and passing on to us.
DS / ESA Quantity calculation -Limiting amount 19 April 2002
0 bosch
EDC15 +
Y S01 281/120 - VG2
Page 2-19
Service Volume adjustment via VAG tester:
About the software switch cowV_AGL_B defines whether the quantity adjustment multiplicative effect on
to the limitation amount or take place in the additive quantity metering
Description of the software switch cowV_AGL_B:
Bit position
0
1
Decimal comment
1See quantity metering
2multiplikativer balance the limitation amount mrmBM_ESER with
mrmBEGmAGL (substitute value cowAGLmBEG). The adjusted value
is bounded between mrwBEAmMIN and mrwBEAmMAX.
Water Temperature-dependent Vollasterhhung:
Is between the speed threshold mrwBEG_NTU and the speed threshold mrwBEG_NTO
which determines the increase amount mroBM_EERH. This amount is composed of the
Map mrwBWT_KF (formed from dzmNmit and anmT_MOT) to a correction factor of
the map mrwBPL_KF (formed from anmT_MOT and ldmP_lin (or variant switch
mrwBWT_ADF the atmospheric pressure ldmADF)) acting multiplicatively. The amount
mroBM_EERH is determined to provide a better starting with a cold engine. The
Maximum limit of amount mrmBM_ESER and increase amount mroBM_EERH is to
Summarized limiting amount mroBM_EVSU and further processed.
Is between the speed threshold mrwBEG_NTU and the speed threshold mrwBEG_NTO
from the characteristic map as a function of boost pressure mrwBWT_KF (or variant switch
mrwBWT_ADF selectable above atmospheric pressure) and water temperature on the map
mrwBPL_KF a correction factor formed on the increase amount mroBM_EERH as a function
the water temperature and the speed anmWTF dzmNmit determined to a cold engine
to enable better start. The maximum limit of amount mrmBM_ESER and
Increase amount mroBM_EERH is summarized to limit quantity mroBM_EVSU
and further processed.
Overheat protection on the water temperature:
The chef protection quantity factor mroBMEFKOC is from the overheating protection map
mrwBUE_KF as a function of water temperature via CAN anmWTF_CAN and the
Speed fgmFGAKT determined. However, this feature is only within the
Speed limits mrwBEG_UNS and mrwBEG_ONS active.
Overheating protection above the oil temperature:
About the map mrwBOEL_KF is with the current speed dzmNmit and the oil temperature
anmOTF the limiting factor mroBMEFOEL amount calculated. With the software switch
cowBEG_OEL the quantity limit in dependence on the oil temperature is turned on (= 1)
or off (= 0).
Overheating protection via the charge air temperature:
About the map mrwBLFT_KF is with the current speed and the dzmNmit
Charge air temperature anmLTF the limiting factor mroBMELFT amount calculated.
Height-dependent speed correction:
About the map mrwBATM_KF is with the current speed and the dzmNmit
Atmospheric pressure ldmADF the limiting factor mroBMEFATM amount calculated.
All rights reserved by Robert Bosch GmbH, including in cases of proprietary rights applications. All rights of disposal such as copying and passing on to us.
19 April 2002 Quantity calculation -Limiting amount DS / ESA
Page 2-20 EDC15 +
Y S01 281/120 - VG2
0 bosch
Fuel temperature dependent speed adjustment and fuel cooling:
About the map mrwBKT_KF is with the current speed and the dzmNmit
Fuel temperature anmKTF the limiting factor mroBMEFKT amount calculated.
About the map mrwBTT_KF is with the current speed and the dzmNmit
Tank inlet temperature anmTTF the limiting factor mroBMEFTT amount calculated. About
Diagnosis password can xcwPKSKon turned this limitation, via xcwPKSKoff
be turned off.
Fuel cooling system by switching point reduction:
From the minimum of protection against overheating water - oil - fuel - tank inlet temperature
and - charge air temperature, the factor mrmBMEF is formed, with the limitation amount on
mroBM_ENSU is reduced. Falls below the additional factor mrmBMEF the value
mrwBEHdspU, dialing with mrmB_DSP via CAN on the transmission circuit program in
carried the upshift at niedereren speeds. MrmBMEF exceeds the value
mrwBEHdspO, the original circuit program is re-elected.
All rights reserved by Robert Bosch GmbH, including in cases of proprietary rights applications. All rights of disposal such as copying and passing on to us.
DS / ESA Quantity calculation -Limiting amount 19 April 2002
0 bosch
EDC15 +
Y S01 281/120 - VG2
Page 2-21
Corrections to the
mroBM_ENSU
Limiting amount
MEREBG03
Transition to defective
or healing
mroM_EBG
dzmNmit
KL
mroBM_EERS MIN
mrwBEM_KL
Shutdown due zmmF_KRIT.3
System errors
SYS_FEHL
RAMP
mrwBEG_ANH
mrwBEG_ABS
dzmNmit
KL
mrwBdnN_KL
mroM_Edndt
anmWTF
dzmDNDT2u
PT1
MIN
mroM_EBGvo
mroDNDTfi
KF
mrwBdn_KF
RAMP
mrwBdnF_GF
mrwBdnS_GF
fgmFGAKT <mrwBdn_v
mrmWH_POSb.1
mrmWH_POSb.3
mrwBdn_ANH
mrwBdn_ABS
Ramp slope at
Switching mrwBdn_v > 1
mrmM_EBEGR
TIMER
mrwBEG_ZMt
fboSDZG = 0
mrmSTART_B
dzmNmit <mrwBEG_ZMN
> 1
&
> 1
zmmSINKSYN = 0
mrmSTART_B
dzmNmit <mrwBEG_ZMD
&
Figure MEREBG3A: corrections to the limiting amount
All rights reserved by Robert Bosch GmbH, including in cases of proprietary rights applications. All rights of disposal such as copying and passing on to us.
19 April 2002 Quantity calculation -Limiting amount DS / ESA
Page 2-22 EDC15 +
Y S01 281/120 - VG2
0 bosch
Quantity limitation on system failure:
With the software switches cowFMEBEG1, cowFMEBEG2, cowFMEBEG3 and cowFMEBEG4
is applied, in which system errors limited to a speed-dependent compensation amount
should be. (See Monitoring concept: Shutdown due to system errors), the
speed-dependent compensation amount is mroBM_EERS from the equivalent amount characteristic
mrwBEM_KL formed as a function of speed dzmNmit.
When a system problem (zmmF_KRIT.3 = 1) occurs, the amount mroM_EBG on the ramp
mrwBEG_ABS to the minimum of the speed-dependent compensation amount, and the mroBM_EERS
Limiting amount mroBM_ENSU introduced.
The heal of the system error, the amount mroM_EBG over the ramp mrwBEG_ANH is to
the amount mroBM_ENSU introduced.
Limiting a function of the rotational speed acceleration:
The speed acceleration of the last two revolutions is dzmDNDT2u on falling
Acceleration filtered using mrwBdnF_GF, with increasing acceleration with mrwBdnS_GF
filtered. With the map mrwBdn_KF and the characteristic mrwBdnN_KL is dependent on
this filtered acceleration of the water temperature and the rotational speed of a
Limiting amount mroM_Edndt determined. This is a limitation of the acceleration
controlled, the inputs for the water temperature and speed in this case has the purpose that, when
bestimmtenWassertemperaturenundbeibestimmtenDrehzahlbereichendie
Acceleration limit or less can be eliminated. Having a switch
at speeds below mrwBdn_v or selector lever in mrmWH_POSb.1 (N)
or .3 (P) is the acceleration limit are turned on. The minimum of the quantity
mroM_Edndt and mroM_EBG is with switched acceleration limit
mroM_EBGvo passed. When switching off and on the acceleration limitation acts
the ramp mrwBdn_ANH or mrwBdn_ABS to avoid crowd jumps.
Flow cutoff to avoid resonance due to the dual mass flywheel:
If when driving (mrmSTART_B = 0), the speed by further brakes below the threshold
mrwBEG_ZMN falls and no error in DZG path exists (fboSDZG = 0) or when driving
(MrmSTART_B = 0), the rotational speed falls below the threshold and at the same time mrwBEG_ZMF
Speed detection is out of sync (zmmSINKSYN = 0), then the limiting amount
mrmM_EBEGR switched to 0, and the time mrwBEG_ZMt started. Is not the condition
more fulfilled, then after the time mrwBEG_ZMt the amount released. Changes
the condition during the time mrwBEG_ZMt runs, then the time at each change of
not fulfilled restarted on met.
All rights reserved by Robert Bosch GmbH, including in cases of proprietary rights applications. All rights of disposal such as copying and passing on to us.
DS / ESA Quantity calculation -Limiting amount 19 April 2002
0 bosch
EDC15 +
Y S01 281/120 - VG2
Page 2-23
All rights reserved by Robert Bosch GmbH, including in cases of proprietary rights applications. All rights of disposal such as copying and passing on to us.
19 April 2002 Quantity calculation -Limiting amount DS / ESA
Page 2-24 EDC15 +
Y S01 281/120 - VG2
0 bosch
2.4 Idle controller
For the idle speed control, a PI controller is employed. To optimize the speed synchronous
Processing are selected synchronously different parameter sets and available
provided. The desired idle speed is dependent on the operating condition of the vehicle
switched.
anmWTF
fgmFGAKT
mrmLLR_AGL
klmN_LLKLM
khmN_LLKWH
mrmN_LLDIA
mrmSICH_F
anmUBATT
dzmNmit
mrmN_LLCAN
mrmLLR_PWD
dimBRE
fboSBRE
anmWTF
fgmFGAKT
mrmPWG_roh
dzmNmit
mrmM_EFGR
mrmM_EADR
dimBRE
dimKUP
mrmN_LLBAS
mrmSICH_F
mrmMSR_AKT
mrmLLRIAnt
mrmLLRPAnt
Calculation
Desired idle speed
MERELL03
mrmN_LLBAS
Set-up select
for the idle speed control
MERELL02
mrmCASE_L
mrmLLIINIT
Idle controller
MERELL05
mrmM_ELLR
mrmLLRIAnt
mrmLLRPAnt
mroLLRDAnt
mrmGANG
dzmNmit
mrmSTART_B
fgmFGAKT
dzmNmit
Crossing detection
MEREGG01
Figure MERELL01: Overview idle controller
All rights reserved by Robert Bosch GmbH, including in cases of proprietary rights applications. All rights of disposal such as copying and passing on to us.
DS / ESA Overview - Idle controller 19 April 2002
0 bosch
EDC15 +
Y S01 281/120 - VG2
Page 2-25
2.4.1 crossing detection
The transition detection determines the gear used for parameter selection of the idle controller
and the assets Ruckeldmpfers.
mrwVNF_VNX
fgmFGAKT
a
a
MIN
b
mroVzuNfil
PT1
mrmGANG
b
fgwVNF_GF
mrwGANG_
dzmNmit
PT1
mrmNfilt
mrwFGF_GF
mrwGANGCAN.0
mrmGTRGANG
mrmEGS_akt
Monoflop
> 1
mrwGANGCAN.1
Figure MEREGG01: crossing detection
There is a possibility that transition of vehicle speed and engine speed information to
determine or to take over from the CAN message transmission 1. The selection is made by
mrwGANGCAN.
Description of the software switch mrwGANGCAN:
Bitpos.
0
1
Decimal comment
10: transition information from vehicle speed and engine speed
1: transition information via CAN
2Only effective in mrwGANGCAN.0 = 1
0: accept transition information directly from mrmGTRGANG
1: evaluation with inclusion of "active circuit" bits.
Transition information from vehicle speed and engine speed:
To speed dzmNmit to the dynamics of the driving speed fgmFGAKT adapt,
there is a PT1 filtering on mrwFGF_GF. It is the ratio of the vehicle speed
fgmFGAKT formed to speed mrmNfilt filtered and smoothed over another PT1 element.
Before PT1 filtering the v / n ratio mroVzuNfil is limited to mrwVNF_VNX. If the
mrmNfilt filtered speed zero, and the V / N ratio is set to zero. The result is
a filtered value of the V / N ratio mroVzuNfil. The gear selection is done mrmGANG
then the application data mrwGANG_2 to mrwGANG_7.
All rights reserved by Robert Bosch GmbH, including in cases of proprietary rights applications. All rights of disposal such as copying and passing on to us.
19 April 2002 Overview - Idle controller DS / ESA
Page 2-26 EDC15 +
Y S01 281/120 - VG2
0 bosch
Gear
mrmGANG
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
V / N
mroVzuNfil
mrwGANG_2 mrwGANG_3 mrwGANG_4 mrwGANG_5 mrwGANG_6 mrwGANG_7 fgwDA._VNX
0
Figure MEREAR02: crossing detection for the parameters defining ARD and LLR
Transition information about CAN:
If the bit mrwGANGCAN.1 not set, then the goal transition information from the transmission
mrmGTRGANG transferred directly.
When this bit mrwGANGCAN.1 the value of mrmGTRGANG is only at the falling
Edge of mrmEGS_akt (S_SG - "active circuit" from gear 1) taken. This has the
Purpose that a newly engaged gear is not detected until after the end of circuit
All rights reserved by Robert Bosch GmbH, including in cases of proprietary rights applications. All rights of disposal such as copying and passing on to us.
DS / ESA Overview - Idle controller 19 April 2002
0 bosch
EDC15 +
Y S01 281/120 - VG2
Page 2-27
2.4.2 Set-up select
mrmGANG
= 5 (5th gear) MIN
Gear
> 1 =
dimKUP
> 1 =
fgmFGAKT <mrwLLR_VLG
&
Clutch / neutral gear
anmWTF
The engine is cold
mrwTWH_ ..
&
mrwLLR_Anf> 0
dzmNmit> mrmN_LLBAS
mrmPWG_roh> 0
Approach
F
fgmFGAKT> mrwLLR_UBR
! FboSFGG
dimBRE
! FboSBRE
! DimKUP
cowVAR_GTR == 1
Brakes
&
E D C B A 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
mrmCASE_L
dzmNmit <mrwLLR_EIN
dzmNmit> mrwLLR_AUS
> 1 =
Idle controller inactive
Quantity request
State machine
dzmNmit
"Feedforward"
Feedforward control is not locked
&
dzmNmit <mrmN_LLBAS + mrwLLR. _VD
Feedforward
calculate
&
(MrmLLRIAnt + mrmLLRPAnt) <mrwLLR_ITS &
> 1 =
Freeze integrator
dzmNmit> mrmN_LLBAS
&
&
mrmSICH_F
> 1 =
mrmPWG_roh> 0
mrmMSR_AKT> 0
mrmM_EFGR> 0
mrmM_EADR> 0
> 1 =
Quantity request
Figure MERELL02: Parameter selection for the idle speed control
All rights reserved by Robert Bosch GmbH, including in cases of proprietary rights applications. All rights of disposal such as copying and passing on to us.
19 April 2002 Overview - Idle controller DS / ESA
Page 2-28 EDC15 +
Y S01 281/120 - VG2
0 bosch
This subtask meets the parameter selection for the idle speed control (LLR) of the
Input variables water temperature anmWTF and driving speed ratio to speed
mroVzuNfil. Switching between the states of cold / warm is done with hysteresis. In the
State of "cold" are two parameter sets are available, one for the uncoupled and
coupled powertrain. With a cold engine is no specific input
Parameter switching. For driving in the aisles with a warm engine, five sets of parameters
provided. Are represented by the small differences in the parameters in the higher gears
from 5 Transition (mrmGANG> = 5), the parameters of the 5th Ganges used. Furthermore, at
Optimize the speed synchronous processing, the following operating conditions in control bits
summarized and sent with the message "state of the LLR" mrmCASE_L:
-
"Approach - conditions":
mrwLLR_Anf> 0
Speed dzmNmit> desired idle speed mrmN_LLBAS
PWG raw mrmPWG_roh> 0
Engine is warm
"Brakes - conditions":
Current Speed fgmFGAKT> Threshold velocity at
Brakes mrwLLR_UBR
Path vehicle speed sensor fboSFGG not defective
Brake applied dimBRE = 1
Brake signal path fboSBRE not defective
Clutch not disengaged dimKUP = 0
Transmission type is manual transmission (cowVAR_GTR = 1).
"Idle controller inactive - conditions":
DzmNmit speed <speed limit LLR a mrwLLR_EIN
Speed dzmNmit> speed limit LLR from mrwLLR_AUS.
In this case remains under the speed synchronous LLR calculation.
AND
AND
AND
-
AND
AND
AND
AND
AND
-
OR
- "Feedforward control is not locked - conditions"
Implemented by a state machine with two states, locked / feedforward
disabled (initial value). The feedforward control is not switched blocked by locked when
at least one of the following cases is true:
(Speed dzmNmit> set speed mrmN_LLBAS + range mrwLLR_DNV window)
AND quantity request or
Speed dzmNmit> set speed mrmN_LLBAS + tax offset mrwLLRK_VD or
mrwLLRW_VD
In the "locked" state is switched when the desired idle speed mrmN_LLBAS
is exceeded or reached.
- "Feedforward calculate - conditions"
Not gesperrtUND feedforward
Speed dzmNmit <setpoint speed mrmN_LLBAS + offset mrwLLRK_VD or
mrwLLRW_VD
All rights reserved by Robert Bosch GmbH, including in cases of proprietary rights applications. All rights of disposal such as copying and passing on to us.
DS / ESA Overview - Idle controller 19 April 2002
0 bosch
EDC15 +
Y S01 281/120 - VG2
Page 2-29
- "Freeze Integrator - conditions"
no safety case mrmSICH_F
((Speed dzmNmit> set speed mrmN_LLBAS
(Quantity request
LLR I component + P component <Auftauschranke
AND
Feedforward active))
(Brakes
dzmNmit <= mrmN_LLBAS))
- "Quantity request - conditions"
PWG raw mrmPWG_roh> 0
MSR amount of active engagement, mrmMSR_AKT> 0
Desired amount of GRA mrmM_EFGR> 0
Desired amount of ADR mrmM_EADR> 0
AND
AND
OR
OR
AND
OR
OR
OR
anmWTF
KL
mrmLLIINIT
mrwSTINILL
MERELL06: Initial value for the integrator
With the characteristic mrwSTINILL as a function of water temperature anmWTF is the
Initial value of the LLR integrator in the message mrmLLIINIT provided.
Description of Message mrmCASE_L:
WertHEX
0001H
0002H
0003H
0004H
0005H
0010H
0020H
0040H
0100H
0200H
0400H
0800H
1000H
2000H
Decimal
1
2
3
4
5
16
32
64
256
512
1024
2048
4096
8192
Comment
The first Gear is engaged
The second Gear is engaged
The third Gear is engaged
The 4th Gear is engaged
The 5th Gear is engaged
Clutch is pressed or backlash active
The engine is cold
Approach
A quantity request is available
Freeze the integrator of the idle controller
The feedforward control (D element) is calculated
Feedforward control state is not locked
The idle control is not active
State braking is active
All rights reserved by Robert Bosch GmbH, including in cases of proprietary rights applications. All rights of disposal such as copying and passing on to us.
19 April 2002 Overview - Idle controller DS / ESA
Page 2-30 EDC15 +
Y S01 281/120 - VG2
0 bosch
2.4.3 desired idle speed calculation
anmT_MOT
fgmFGAKT
ldmADF
mrmLLR_AGL
dzmUMDRsta
mrmLLR_PWD
Target idle speed mrmLL_ZIEL
Calculation
MERELL3C
LL-raising beimroLLpwg
defective PWG
MERELL3D
mrwLLR_NSF
mrmN_LLDIA
mrwLLR_AUS
khmN_LLKWH
MIN
klmN_LLKLM
LL-raising by UTF mrmLLUTF
and air compressor
MERELL3A
LL-raising frmrmLLWTF
KAT-response
MERELL3B
LL-raising durchmrmN_LLBAT
low U Bat
MERELL04
LL-raising durchmrmN_LLBSG
BSG request
MERELL07
LL-raising durchmrmN_LLKLI
KLI request CAN
MERELL08
LL-raising by
mroN_LLCA2
CVT request
MERELL3E
MAX
RAMP
mrmN_LLBAS
MAX
RAMP
mrwLLR_ANH
mrwLLR_ABS
anmT_MOT
mrwLLR_AN2
mrwLLR_AB2
mrmSICH_F <> 0
anmUBATT
mrmBSG_Anf
CAN - Klima1
mrmN_LLCAN
Figure MERELL03: idle target speed calculation
All rights reserved by Robert Bosch GmbH, including in cases of proprietary rights applications. All rights of disposal such as copying and passing on to us.
DS / ESA Overview - Idle controller 19 April 2002
0 bosch
EDC15 +
Y S01 281/120 - VG2
Page 2-31
If a deviation between the currently acting desired idle speed and mrmN_LLBAS
recognized the desired new desired idle speed, then an increase in the
Desired idle speed via a ramp with the pitch mrwLLR_ANH, or a reduction
with the increment mrwLLR_ABS. An exception is the occurrence of the safety case.
The increase is made abruptly. The back is likewise a
Ramp with the pitch mrwLLR_ABS. The desired idle speed increase is dependent on the
Operating condition of the vehicle between various default values, characteristics and
Balance values switched:
In the initialization phase, the desired idle speed with the maximum value of the
Maps mrwWTAD_KF, mrwLLW_KL and mrwLTW_KL preset.
anmT_MOT = <mrwLLR_TW
&
mrmSTART_B
TIMER
mrwLLR_tTW
mrwLLR_SOL
mrwLLR_FAR
fboSFGG
&
fgmFGAKT
mrwLLRVFOH
mrwLLRVFUH
anmT_MOT
KL
mrwLTW_KL
anmT_MOT
ldmADF KF
mroLLsoll
mrwWTAD_KF
dzmUMDRsta
a
anmT_MOT
KL
mroLLumdr
b
a <b
mrwWTUMDKL
mrmLL_ZIEL
CONTROLS
mrmLLR_AGL
mrwLLA_MAX
mrwLLA_MIN
Figure MERELL3C: Target idle speed calculation
Motor temperature-dependent increase:
As long as the number of revolutions after start shedding dzmUMDRsta less than a calculated
Number of mroLLumdr turns to start dropping (from the characteristic mrwWTUMDKL as
Function of anmT_MOT) is, the result is the desired idle speed to mroLLsoll, one by the
Map mrwWTAD_KF specified function of ldmADF and anmWTF.
All rights reserved by Robert Bosch GmbH, including in cases of proprietary rights applications. All rights of disposal such as copying and passing on to us.
19 April 2002 Overview - Idle controller DS / ESA
Page 2-32 EDC15 +
Y S01 281/120 - VG2
0 bosch
For the time mrwLLR_tTW after the launch, the desired idle speed mrmN_LLBAS results from
the characteristic mrwLTW_KL as a function of engine temperature anmT_MOT. If in this period, the
Engine temperature anmT_MOT rises above the threshold applicative mrwLLR_TW, is an equally
driving speed dependent value used.
Speed-dependent increase or decrease:
Below the administrable Hystereschwelle mrwLLRVFOH is the idle target speed of
Value assigned mrwLLR_SOL, above this hysteresis is on mrwLLR_FAR
connected. This occurs only when no error is present FGG.
Increase by VAG tester:
The idle setpoint speed via the diagnostic interface with the balance value
mrmLLR_AGL (initialized with cowAGL_LLR) are matched additive. Before that is
mrmLLR_AGL to the maximum adjustment value mrwLLA_MAX in a positive direction and to
the minimum balance value mrwLLA_MIN limited in the negative direction.
Increase caused by defective PWG:
In a plausibility error PWG - mrmSICH_F brake is on safety idling speed
mrwLLR_NSF switched.
If the PWG detection via potentiometer / switch (cowVAR_PWG = 0), then with a defective PWG
(FbbEPWG_H, fbbEPWG_L or fbbEPWP_A) the idle speed mroLLpwg to the value
mrwLLR_PWD raised.
In PWG acquisition with a doppelanalogem PWG (cowVAR_PWG = 1) with a defective
PWG (mrmLLR_PWD = 1) the idle speed when the brake mroLLpwg (dimBRE = 1)
or with a defective path fboSBRE to the value mrwLLR_PWB, otherwise on mrwLLR_PWD
placed.
mrwLLR_PWD
fbbEPWG_H
fbbEPWG_L
fbbEPWP_A
mroLLpwg
mrwLLR_PWB
fboSBRE | | dimBRE
mrmLLR_PWD
cowVAR_PWG
> 1
Figure MERELL3D: LL-raising by defective PWG
Increase in basic setting:
The desired idle speed the diagnosis can mrmN_LLDIA the desired idle speed to
Increasing influence calculation limit of the LLR mrwLLR_AUS.
Increase by cooling water heating:
With active cooling water heating, the idle speed to the value khmN_LLKWH is
raised.
Detection resting vehicle as a condition of speed increase idle
All rights reserved by Robert Bosch GmbH, including in cases of proprietary rights applications. All rights of disposal such as copying and passing on to us.
DS / ESA Overview - Idle controller 19 April 2002
0 bosch
EDC15 +
Y S01 281/120 - VG2
Page 2-33
For the release of the desired idle speed increases to resting as a condition vehicle
be recognized that is, Vehicle speed is 0 and there is no error in the error path FGG. At
Vehicles with Automatikgetrieb is also queried whether the transmission is in park or
Neutral position, the transmission is not active, and whether the gear selector in park or
Neutral position (mrmWH_POSb.1 or .3) is located. The condition can by the
Software switch cowFUN_LLA be turned on and off. (CowFUN_LLA = 1
Stationary car ... as a condition for desired idle speed increases; cowFUN_LLA = 0
no release condition Stationary car, so no speed increase for functions
the Stationary car mrmLLN_ANH = 1 as a condition have).
mrmWH_POSb.1 == 1 (grade N)
mrmWH_POSb.3 == 1 (grade P)
mrm_P_N == 1 (target gear P or N)
mrmEGS_akt == 0
> 1
&
> 1
cowVAR_GTR == 1 (manual transmission)
fgmFGAKT == 0 mrmLLN_ANH
&
fboSFGG == 0
cowFUN_LLA
Figure MERELL09: Stationary car as a condition of speed increase idle
All rights reserved by Robert Bosch GmbH, including in cases of proprietary rights applications. All rights of disposal such as copying and passing on to us.
19 April 2002 Overview - Idle controller DS / ESA
Page 2-34 EDC15 +
Y S01 281/120 - VG2
0 bosch
Battery Voltage-dependent increase:
If the battery voltage anmUBATT at a speed greater mrwNBATEIN longer than the
Time mrwTBATEIN below the threshold mrwUBATEIN, the desired idle speed is to
at least mrwN_LLBAT raised. The desired idle speed is at a standstill (condition
Resting vehicle mrmLLN_ANH = 1) or at a speed dzoNmit> mrwN_LLBAT +
mrwDN_EIN and start shedding (mrmSTART_B = 0 debounced with mrwTBATSTA) is raised and
released for maximum generation. The battery voltage rises above anmUBATT mrwUBATAUS
and the increased idling speed is reached, then after the time the mrwTBATAUS
Desired idling speed of mrmN_LLBAT withdrawn. The withdrawal of the
Desired idle speed is only at a speed dzoNmit> mrmN_LLBAS + mrwDN_EIN.
Application Note: mrwUBATEIN must be less than mrwUBATAUS.
mrmSTART_B
1
DEAD TIME
mrwTBATSTA
anmUBATT <mrwUBATEIN
&
dzmNmit> = mrwNBATEIN
DEAD TIME
&
mrwTBATEIN
dzmNmit> mrwN_LLBAT + mrwDN_EIN
> 1
mrmLLN_ANH
S
Q
R
anmUBATT> mrwUBATAUS
DEAD TIME
&
mrwN_LLBAT mrmN_LLBAT
mrwTBATAUS
dzmNmit> mrmN_LLBAS + mrwDN_EIN
Figure MERELL04: Idle speed increase depending on the battery voltage
Increase due to demand of the onboard control unit BSG:
berBSG_LastBotschaftBit1.0kannvomBordnetzsteuergerteine
Desired idle speed increase is requested. If an increase is requested, it is at
a speed dzmNmit> mrwN_LLBSG + mrwDN_EIN2 or at standstill (condition
Resting vehicle mrmLLN_ANH = 1), the increased idle target speed mrwN_LLBSG to
Maximum generation released in the desired idle speed calculation.
Turns off the request, the increased idle speed mrwN_LLBSG is again
withdrawn. Returns may only be at a speed dzmNmit> mrmN_LLBAS +
mrwDN_EIN2.
mrmBSG_Anf == 1
&
dzmNmit> mrwN_LLBSG + mrwDN_EIN2
> 1
mrmLLN_ANH
mrmBSG_Anf == 0
dzmNmit> mrmN_LLBAS + mrwDN_EIN2
S
Q
&
R
mrwN_LLBSG mrmN_LLBSG
Figure MERELL07: Idle speed increase due to demand of the BSG
All rights reserved by Robert Bosch GmbH, including in cases of proprietary rights applications. All rights of disposal such as copying and passing on to us.
DS / ESA Overview - Idle controller 19 April 2002
0 bosch
EDC15 +
Y S01 281/120 - VG2
Page 2-35
Increase due to demand of the climate control unit via CAN message Clima1:
Via Clima1 message bit 1.0 (S_KLB) and bit 1.4 (S_KPZ) the climate control unit, a
Desired idle speed increase is requested. If an increase is requested, it is at
the vehicle is stationary (mrmLLN_ANH = 1) or at a speed dzmNmit> mrwN_LLKLI
+ MrwDN_EIN3 the increased idle target speed mrwN_LLKLI for maximum education in the
Desired idle speed calculation released. The bit S_KPZ the message Clima1 can with the
Software switch cowFUN_KPZ = 0 as the condition for a speed increase hidden
be. Note: In the case that both inputs of the flip-flops are 1 applies mrmN_LLKLI = 0
dzmNmit> mrwN_LLKLI + mrwDN_EIN3
mrmLLN_ANH
mrmCAN_KLI.0 = 1 (S_KLB)
> 1
&
S
Q
m rm CAN_KLI.4 = 1 (S_KPZ)
R
1
cowFUN_KPZ
fbbEKLI_Q = 0
dzmNmit> mrmN_LLBAS + mrwDN_EIN3
mrwN_LLKLI mrmN_LLKLI
&
fbbEKLI_Q
mrmCAN_KLI.0 = 0 (S_KLB)
m rm CAN_KLI.4 = 0 (S_KPZ)
> 1
0
cowFUN_KPZ
Figure MERELL08: Idle speed increase request by CAN message Clima1
Increase by Getriebe2 message:
In the Getriebe2 message can be requested from the VL30-gear a desired idle speed.
This is limited to the maximum value mrwCVTNLLM and then the CAN reception task
transmitted as mrmN_LLCAN the LL target speed calculation. If the VL30 request
disabled (cowFUN_CVT.0 = 0) mrmN_LLCAN is always sent zero and thus the
Intervention in the N_LL calculation prevented. See also Chapter monitoring and CAN.
The demand for raising the idle speed is achieved by the engine control unit when the
mrmN_LLCAN required speed is not greater than the sum of the engine speed and dzmNmit
a tolerable speed increase mrwCVTNtol. In this case mrmN_LLCAN goes directly into the
Maximum formation of a target speed calculation. If the maximum tolerated idle
Speed increase exceeded by the requested idling speed, the value is mroN_LLCA1
(MrwCVTNtol + dzmNmit) frozen and in the formation of the maximum target speed calculation
fed. Only when the rotational speed exceeds the value of dzmNmit mrmN_LLCAN, the
Raising the idling speed on the frozen and allowed mrmN_LLCAN speed value
aufgetaut.Um to meet the demand for a brisk increase the idle speed, is
the ramp mrwLLR_AN2 effect as soon as the approved target speed is greater mroN_LLCA2
than the actual idle speed mrmN_LLBAS. Is the actual idle speed is greater than
mroN_LLCA2 so aufmroN_LLCA2 is heruntergerampt by mrwLLR_AB2.
All rights reserved by Robert Bosch GmbH, including in cases of proprietary rights applications. All rights of disposal such as copying and passing on to us.
19 April 2002 Overview - Idle controller DS / ESA
Page 2-36 EDC15 +
Y S01 281/120 - VG2
0 bosch
However mrwLLR_AN2 or-_AB2 are only used when all other
Desired idle speed specifications are smaller than mroN_LLCA2. MrwLLR_AN2 and mrwLLR_AB2
have to be applied faster than mrwLLR_ANH or mrwLLR_ABS.
mrmN_LLCAN mroN_LLCA2
dzmNmit
mrmN_LLBAS
MAX
mrwCVTNtol
mroN_LLCA1
Figure MERELL3E: Idle speed increase by Getriebe2 Embassy
Increase over UTF and Air Compressor:
An idle speed increase takes place when
o) the line CPI-E is activated (dimKLI = 1) AND
o) the hysteresis mrwUTF1_ .. (ambient temperature anmUTF) is active
The desired idle speed is set to mrmLLUTF mrwHOT_NLL when
o) the line CPI-E is activated (dimKLI = 1) AND
o) the hysteresis mrwUTF2_ .. (ambient temperature anmUTF) is active AND
o) the UTF-evaluation is no faulty (anmUTF_STA = FALSE)
o) the transmission is in P - and N - position (mrm_P_N received via CAN) OR
if no machine - gear is available.
All rights reserved by Robert Bosch GmbH, including in cases of proprietary rights applications. All rights of disposal such as copying and passing on to us.
DS / ESA Overview - Idle controller 19 April 2002
0 bosch
EDC15 +
Y S01 281/120 - VG2
Page 2-37
If one of the above conditions are not met, the desired idle speed is
mrmLLUTF raised to the value klmN_LLKLM. The P - N or - position of the
Automatic transmission is detected by the message mrm_P_N (see chapter "CAN") queried
will. The query on mrm_P_N (1 = gear selector lever of the CAN - automatic transmission to P or
causes position) that with a gear selection, the car is moving, this - to N
Speed increase for security reasons can not take place. The Transmission Type (manual
or automatic without CAN or automatic with CAN) is the function switch
cowVAR_C5 detected.
anmUTF
mrwUTF1_ ..
dimKLI
&
mroLLUTF.8
mrwUTF2_ ..
mroLLUTF.7
&
anmUTF_STA = 0
mrm_P_N
> 1
cowVAR_C5
mrwHOT_NLL
klmN_LLKLM
mrmLLUTF
Figure MERELL3A: idle up about UTF and air compressor
The increased idle speed is in the message mrmLLUTF the setpoint calculation for
Provided. Please also note the application instructions in section "Input and
Output signals "concerning ambient temperature anmUTF note!
Increase after start:
To the KAT - to improve response after the start, the idle speed after
Resetting of the start bit mrmSTART_B increased. The increase is only once within a
Driving cycle effect. The motor temperature dependent idle - starting speed is mrmLLWTF
the map mrwLLW_KL removed. It is ineffective when the speed dzoNmit the
Threshold mrw_nWTF exceeds or if the time mrw_tWTF since resetting of the start bit
has elapsed.
anmT_MOT
KL
mrmLLWTF
mrwLLW_KL
t> mrw_tWTF
> 1
dzmNmit> mrw_nWTF
Figure MERELL3B: idle up after start
All rights reserved by Robert Bosch GmbH, including in cases of proprietary rights applications. All rights of disposal such as copying and passing on to us.
19 April 2002 Overview - Idle controller DS / ESA
Page 2-38 EDC15 +
Y S01 281/120 - VG2
0 bosch
2.4.4 Control Algorithm
mrmSTART_B
mrmCASE_L
mrwLL .. ES
mrmLLIINIT
Bit 12 (LLR inactive)
> 1
mrmLLRIAnt
I
mrwLLI ...
Bit 5 (cold)
Limit
mrwLLR_MXk
mrwLLR_MXw
mrmLLRPAnt
mrmN_LLBAS
P
mrwLLP ...
Bit 5 (cold)
Limit
mrwLLR_MXk
mrwLLR_MXw
Bit 5 (cold)
mrmM_ELLR
Limit
dzmNmit
DT1
mrwLLD ...
mrwLLG ...
Hyperbola
mrwDHyp ...
mrwLLR_MXk
mrwLLR_MXw
mroLLRDAnt
Figure MERELL05: idle controller
For the idle speed control, a PI controller is employed. Against the undershoot of the speed
below the desired idle speed mrmN_LLBAS after the start or in a fall, gas is a
Pilot logic (DT1) installed. It should be noted that when traveling at idle speed range
the controller by the ARD on a PID2T2 - will be extended structure.
All rights reserved by Robert Bosch GmbH, including in cases of proprietary rights applications. All rights of disposal such as copying and passing on to us.
DS / ESA Overview - Idle controller 19 April 2002
0 bosch
EDC15 +
Y S01 281/120 - VG2
Page 2-39
For the Programmflusteuerung or for selecting the control parameters for P, I - Controls and DT1 -
Element is used to synchronously certain operating state in the message mrmCASE_L (see
Set-up select idle controller).
If the control bit is reset "LLR inactive", the calculation of the controller with a
the proposed parameter sets performed in this order:
State
Error in mrmCASE_L
Brakes
mroCASE_LL
10000000 00000000
00100000 xxxxxxxx
P component
mrwLLPWK_
mrwLLPBr_
mrwLLPWK_
mrwLLPKK_
mrwLLPKG_
mrwLLPAF_
mrwLLP5G_
mrwLLP4G_
mrwLLP3G_
mrwLLP2G_
mrwLLP1G_
I share
mrwLLIWK_
mrwLLIBr_
mrwLLIWK_
mrwLLIKK_
mrwLLIKG_
x
mrwLLI5G_
mrwLLI4G_
mrwLLI3G_
mrwLLI2G_
mrwLLI1G_
D component
mrwLLDWK_
mrwLLDBr_
mrwLLDWK_
mrwLLDKK_
mrwLLDKG_
mrwLLDAF_
mrwLLD5G_
mrwLLD4G_
mrwLLD3G_
mrwLLD2G_
mrwLLD1G_
GF
mrwLLGWK_
mrwLLGBr_
mrwLLGWK_
mrwLLGKK_
mrwLLGKG_
mrwLLGAF_
mrwLLG5G_
mrwLLG4G_
mrwLLG3G_
mrwLLG2G_
mrwLLG1G_
One-step quantity
mrwLLWK_ES
mrwLLBr_ES
mrwLLWK_ES
mrwLLKK_ES
mrwLLKG_ES
x
mrwLL5G_ES
mrwLL4G_ES
mrwLL3G_ES
mrwLL2G_ES
mrwLL1G_ES
Backlash / KUP + engine to warm 00000000 00010000
Backlash / KUP + engine cold
The engine is cold
Approach
5 Gear
4 Gear
3 Gear
2 Gear
1 Gear
00000000 00110000
00000000 00100000
00000000 01000000
00000000 00000101
00000000 00000100
00000000 00000011
00000000 00000010
00000000 00000001
When you start shedding the integrator with the value from the message LLR - Integrator -
Initialization mrmLLIINIT preset.
The differentiator has the task after start shedding and decreasing speed in
Speed window mrwLLRK_VD and mrwLLRW_VD above idle speed the
Speed profile to influence such that when the target idle speed, the actual
Idle speed control can be recorded by means of a PI controller.
The D component is not continuously engaged. It will only be on when it
enhancing effect on the idle speed quantity and other conditions and LLR states
are fulfilled. Furthermore, the injection of the differential fraction is determined weighted in
Dependence of the difference between the actual speed and target idle speed. These soft
Intrusion causes an asymptotic approximation to the defined setpoint speed. The
Feedforward component of the differential quantity is carried out by multiplication by a function value
a hyperbola, wherein said independent variable is the difference between the hyperbolic
Idle-base and current speed is. The equation of the barge is:
mrwDHyp. _ Z
mrwDHyp. _ N+ MRmn _LLBAS - dzmNmit
The launching of the D component is permitted only when gas fall to an undercutting of the
To prevent setpoint speed. The activation of the D component in the parameter selection
decided.
In reaching the idle speed and the feedforward control block (bit B of mrmCASE_L is 0)
is the I - Percentage of current D-part and added to mrwLLR_MXk or mrwLLR_MXw
limited. If the I component already greater than the limit, it will remain unchanged.
All rights reserved by Robert Bosch GmbH, including in cases of proprietary rights applications. All rights of disposal such as copying and passing on to us.
19 April 2002 Overview - Idle controller DS / ESA
Page 2-40 EDC15 +
Y S01 281/120 - VG2
0 bosch
There is also the possibility that the parameter set-dependent one-step amount mrwLL .. _ES to
Define that the respective idle integrator upon reaching the idling speed (less
current time synchronous request quantity mrmM_EWUN) must not fall below. The logic is
with the passing of the speed threshold desired idle speed mrmN_LLBAS + I - Regulators -
Small-signal window width mrwLL .. I_F released.
The calculated subsets (integrator, PI - fraction) and the total amount of PI + DT1 - Share
respectively to zero amount and maximum LLR - limited quantity. The result is a lot of
the idle controller mrmM_ELLR sent.
The maximum amount is when engine is cold (bit 5 of mrmCASE_L) mrwLLR_MXk. Turns
Hysteresis on warm engine over so the maximum amount to the value mrwLLR_MXw is
out, and this value is only achieved when the limited amount this value for the first time
is below. Turns the hysteresis on cold engine to the maximum amount of
the value mrwLLR_MXk occupied.
The integrator is therefore not highly integrated with the maximum amount is exceeded,
he must descend integrate but still. So that cracks are long reaction times and
avoided.
Application Note:
The value for the maximum amount of cold mrwLLR_MXk must have the maximum amount of warm
mrwLLR_MXw lie.
All rights reserved by Robert Bosch GmbH, including in cases of proprietary rights applications. All rights of disposal such as copying and passing on to us.
DS / ESA Overview - Idle controller 19 April 2002
0 bosch
EDC15 +
Y S01 281/120 - VG2
Page 2-41
2.5 Desired quantity
dzmNmit
mrmPWG_roh
anwPWG
dimLGS
dimBRE
dimBRK
dimKUP
fgmFGAKT
dzmNmit
mrmBI_SOLL
mrmMD_Rrel
dimFGx
fgmFGAKT
fgmBESCH
dzmNmit
fgm_VzuN
dimBRE
mrmM_EBEGR
mrmM_EPWG
mrmPWGfi
Determination of the
PWG-value
for the transmission
MEREEX02
mrmM_EPWG
mrmPWGPBM
mrmPWGPGI
Performance:
1) n-dependent FV
2) v-dependent FV
MEREFVxx
mrmM_EPWGR External
Amount of intervention
MEREEX12
mrmM_EWUNF
mrmM_EWUN
mrmM_EWUNL
mrmM_EWUNR
mrmINARD_D
Ground Speed
control
MEREGRxx
mrmM_EFGR
dimADx
dimHAN
fgmFGAKT
dzmNmit
mrmM_EWUN
mrmM_EBEGR
Working speed
control
MEREADxx
mrmM_EADR
dimAG4
mrmFGR_roh
mrmM_MOT
mrmM_ELLR
fgmFGAKT
mrmEGS_roh
mrmEGS_CAN
mrmASR_roh
mrmASR_CAN
mrmMSR_roh
mrmMSR_CAN
mrmASG_roh
mrmASG_CAN
mrmASG_tsy
mrmBI_SOLL
mrmFG_ABS
mrmAUSBL
fgm_VzuN
mrmM_EPWG
mrmM_EFGR
mroM_EBEGR
fgmFGAKT
mrmV_SOLEE
Hchstgeschwindig-
keitsbegrenzung
mrmM_EHGB
MEREHGxx
Figure MEREWU01: Desired quantity
2.6 PWG filter and driving behavior
About the drivability map is the influence of the accelerator pedal (= driver's request) and a
engine or vehicle-specific size in a PWG - driver's desired quantity mrmM_EPWG
mapped. Depending on the position of the DAMOS - cowFUN_FVH switch it is possible to
Engine speed-dependent driving behavior characteristic field with the direct determination of mrmM_EPWG
select (cowFUN_FVH = 0), or a driving speed dependent output torque
to use map-with subsequent correction by the translation of gear / axle
(CowFUN_FVH = 1). For various controller functions in addition also a PWG is -
All rights reserved by Robert Bosch GmbH, including in cases of proprietary rights applications. All rights of disposal such as copying and passing on to us.
19 April 2002 Quantity calculation - Desired quantity DS / ESA
Page 2-42 EDC15 +
Y S01 281/120 - VG2
0 bosch
Driver's desired amount of "raw" mrmM_EPWGR determined to even the amount of value available
corresponding value mrmPWG_roh - to which the unfiltered PWG provide.
In PWG with potentiometer / switch the message anmPWG is copied to the message mrmPWG_lwo, is
a double analog PWG configured corresponds mrmPWG_lwo the leerwegoptimierten PWG
Position (anmPWG + mroPW_OFFS).
2.6.1 Double Analog PWG
2.6.1.1 Leerwegoptimieren at doppelanalogem PWG
The required with a view to secure greater application Leerweg double analog of a
PWGS compared to a PWG with potentiometer / switch is minimized by using the learning function.
In exceptional cases (transient fields, high resistance, altered PWG) is a given
greater Leerweg used.
This function is configured via cowFUN_DPG:
Decimal comment
0No learning
2Lernen enabled
All rights reserved by Robert Bosch GmbH, including in cases of proprietary rights applications. All rights of disposal such as copying and passing on to us.
DS / ESA Quantity calculation -PWG filter and driving behavior 19 April 2002
0 bosch
EDC15 +
Y S01 281/120 - VG2
Page 2-43
The structure is shown in Figure Leerwegoptimierens MERELW01:
Default normalization
Caster
SG - Initialization
F
G
D
Driving
E
A C
Learning safe
Idle position
B
PWG - Idle
B
Figure MERELW01: States Leerwegoptimierung
All rights reserved by Robert Bosch GmbH, including in cases of proprietary rights applications. All rights of disposal such as copying and passing on to us.
19 April 2002 Quantity calculation - PWG filter and driving behavior DS / ESA
Page 2-44 EDC15 +
Y S01 281/120 - VG2
0 bosch
Labels and fixed values:
Name
mrwPWc1min
mrwPWc1max
mrwPWc2max
mrwPW_Tol
mrwPW_dp
mrwPWdUmax
mrwPW_diMX
mrwPW_Tmax
mrwPW1_fiH
mrwPW1_fiL
anmU_PWG
anmU_PGS
mroU_PGSx2
mroPW_cmax
mroPW_dp
mrmPW_cmax
mrmPW_dp
edmPW_cmax
edmPW_dp
mroPWLLPos
mroPW_MAX
mrmPW_OFFS
mroPW_Stat
mroPW_Hist
mroPW_DAbd
Importance
electr. Limit the lowest tolerance range detection idle position PWG [mv]
electr. Top limit tolerance range detection idle position PWG [mV]
electr. Top limit tolerance range detection idle position PGS [mV]
Tolerance range for Lernfkt. internal monitoring; Defaultnormierungsgr. [MV]
allowed synchronism difference in the idling range [mV]
maximum allowable change PWG for recognition "pedal does not move" [mV / s]
Debouncing tracking error [1]
Time threshold for detection component changes [us]
Filter constant "rising" [1]
Filter constant "falling" [1]
Analog value PWG [mV]
Analog value PGS [mV]
Factor 2-corrected analog value PGS [mV]
measured idle position [mV]
measured synchronism difference [mV]
learned idle position [mV]
trained synchronism difference [mV]
stored idle position [mV]
stored synchronism difference [mV]
secured idle position PWG [mV]
maximum allowed offset PWG [%]
Current offset PWG [%]
Status Leerweg learning [1]
traversed states [1]
Transition conditions [1]
When SG-initialization, the learning values from the EEPROM (trained electrical
Neutral edmPW_cmax, gelerntes plausibility window edmPW_dp) taken. The
Idle position with mroPWLLPos = edmPW_cmax + + edmPW_dp mrwPW_Tol
(Tolerance value) is calculated. Then (transfer of "F") in the status "driving"
(MroPW_Stat.3) changed.
If the vehicle is in "PWG idle", then the current position of the PWG and PGS
measured. If the idle exit (transition "B"), this position is learned and the
State "driving" recognized.
If an implausibility or an error in the DA-PWG detection on, is in the state
Changed "Default normalization" and a larger Leerweg allowed.
In the "trailing" the learned values are stored in the E2PROM.
The currently valid state is returned in the Statusolda mroPW_Stat, the currently
traversed states appear on the Olda mroPW_Hist, transition conditions in the Olda
mroPW_DAbd.
The increased by a factor of 2 sensor voltage anmU_PGS is on the Olda mroU_PGSx2
output.
All rights reserved by Robert Bosch GmbH, including in cases of proprietary rights applications. All rights of disposal such as copying and passing on to us.
DS / ESA Quantity calculation -PWG filter and driving behavior 19 April 2002
0 bosch
EDC15 +
Y S01 281/120 - VG2
Page 2-45
Importance of Bedingungsolda mroPW_DAbd:
Bitpos.
0
1
2
Destination
Default standard.
Default standard.
Default standard.
Condition
Error path fboSPWG set
Error path fboSPGS set
Tracking error:
looking stain _PWG - mroU _PGSx2>
EU with mrwPW_diMX ENTPR.
mrmPW _dp + mrwPW _Tol
EU
Tracking error:
AC Timer> mrwPW_Tmax and mroPWGmin >
mrmPW_cmax
anmU_PWG >mrwPWc1min
looking stain _PWG mrwPWc1 max OR
mroU _PGSx 2 mrwPWc 2 max
dzmNakt = 0 OR mrmSTART_B = 0
d-looking stain _PWG < mrwPWdU max
dt
looking stain _PWG mrwPWc1 max
mroU _PGSx 2 mrwPWc 2 max
anmU_PWG> mrwPWc1max
mroU_PGSx2> mrwPWc2max
3 Default standard.
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
Neutral
Neutral
Neutral
Neutral
Neutral
Neutral
Driving
Driving
Importance of Olda mroPW_Hist, mroPW_Stat:
Bit position
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
Decimal
1
2
4
8
16
32
64
128
Comment
Learning ban
Tracking error
PWG idle
Driving
Caster
Default normalization
Determination filtered values
Learning safe idle position
All rights reserved by Robert Bosch GmbH, including in cases of proprietary rights applications. All rights of disposal such as copying and passing on to us.
19 April 2002 Quantity calculation - PWG filter and driving behavior DS / ESA
Page 2-46 EDC15 +
Y S01 281/120 - VG2
0 bosch
2.6.1.2 "driving" mroPW_Stat.3 = 1
In this state it is monitored whether a PWG error occurs (consequence: Default normalization),
is changed to idle (idle path is learned), Run is active or while driving
should remain stops.
Transition "E":
not used
15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 AND Associates
OR Associates
mroPW_DAbd
If an error occurs in the paths fboSPWG (mroPW_DAbd.0) or fboSPGS (mroPW_DAbd.1)
so mroPW_Hist.0 is set and changed the status to "Default normalization".
Transition "G": If the caster is active (dimK15 = 0), it will change the status to "overrun".
Transition "A":
not used
15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 AND Associates
OR Associates
mroPW_DAbd
If the sensor voltage PWG anmU_PWG <= mrwPWc1max (mroPW_DAbd.8) or is the
Sensor voltage PGS mroU_PGSx2 <= mrwPWc2max (mroPW_DAbd.9), then the idling
Achieved learning area and it will be changed in the status "PWG idle". This change will
not occur when "learning ban" is present (mroPW_Hist.0 = 1).
2.6.1.3 "PWG idle" mroPW_Stat.2 = 1
Upon entry into this state of change timer is restarted. This is in the following for
the detection of synchronization errors needed.
In this state the idle range is measured: there are no relevant error conditions
to the current position of the PWG and the deviation from the PGS be a low pass filter
determined.
Furthermore, it is monitored whether a PWG error occurs (consequence: Default normalization), in the
Driving operation is changed, follower remains active or is to remain idle.
Transition "C":
not used
15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 AND Associates
OR Associates
mroPW_DAbd
If an error occurs in the paths fboSPWG (mroPW_DAbd.0) or fboSPGS on (mroPW_DAbd.1)
so mroPW_Hist.0 is set and changed the status to "Default normalization".
Furthermore, is set under the following conditions mroPW_Hist.1 and in the status
"Default normalization" changed:
All rights reserved by Robert Bosch GmbH, including in cases of proprietary rights applications. All rights of disposal such as copying and passing on to us.
DS / ESA Quantity calculation -PWG filter and driving behavior 19 April 2002
0 bosch
EDC15 +
Y S01 281/120 - VG2
Page 2-47
1) tracking error:
anmU_PWG
mroU_PGSx2
AMOUNT
a
a> b
b
ENT
Contusion
mroPW_DAbd.2
mrmPW_dp
mrwPW_Tol
mrwPW_diMX * 20 ms
Figure MERELW03: tracking error
The absolute deviation | anmU_PWG - mroU_PGSx2 | is at least mrwPW_diMX * 20ms
greater than the increased by the tolerance value mrwPW_Tol trained plausibility window mrmPW_dp
(MroPW_DAbd.2) or
2) identification of part exchange
mrmPW_cmax
a
mroPWGmin
b
a <= b
anmU_PWG
a
a <b
b
Change
"PWG idle"
TIMER
&
mrwPW_Tmax
mrwPW_DAbd.3
Figure MERELW04: part exchange
The change timer has reached a value greater than mrwPW_Tmax and reached since K15-A
minimum value of anmU_PWG (= mroPWGmin) is greater than the learned electrical
Neutral mrmPW_cmax (mroPW_DAbd.3).
Transition "B":
not used
15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 AND Associates
OR Associates
mroPW_DAbd
If the idling range leave (anmU_PWG> mrwPWc1max (mroPW_DAbd.10) and
mroU_PGSx2> mrwPWc2max (mroPW_DAbd.11)) and is neither learning nor a prohibition
Synchronization error (mroPW_Hist.0 = 0 and mroPW_Hist.1 = 0), then in the status of "learning
safe neutral "position changed.
Transition "H": If the caster is active (dimK15 = 0), it will change the status to "overrun".
All rights reserved by Robert Bosch GmbH, including in cases of proprietary rights applications. All rights of disposal such as copying and passing on to us.
19 April 2002 Quantity calculation - PWG filter and driving behavior DS / ESA
Page 2-48 EDC15 +
Y S01 281/120 - VG2
0 bosch
Actions in the "PWG idle":
not used
15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 AND Associates
OR Associates
mroPW_Dabd
Where no learning ban still tracking error (mroPW_Hist.0 = 0 and mroPW_Hist.1 = 0),
and is not detected on high impedance (anmU_PWG> mrwPWc1min, (mroPW_DAbd.4))
and is the idle range not leave (anmU_PWG <= mrwPWc1max or mroU_PGSx2 <=
mrwPWc2max, (mroPW_DAbd.5))
and No by the starter
mrmSTART_B = 0), mroPW_DAbd.6
caused Disorders before (DzmNakt = 0 or
and is the PWG change d (anmU_PWG) / dt is less mrwPWdUmax (mroPW_DAbd.7)
then the filtered measured values determined (mroPW_Hist.6 = 1):
Measured value neutral:
anmU_PWG
mrmPW_cmax
a
a> b
b
mrwPWG_fiH
mrwPWG_fiL
1
a
a b
b
mroPW_cmax mroPW_cmax
Figure MERELW05: Reading mroPW_cmax
mroPW_cmax | n = (mroPW_cmax | n-1 * Const anmU_PWG +) / (Const +1)
This applies to "const": If the measured value anmU_PWG greater than the stored value learning
mrmPW_cmax, is used for "const" value mrwPW1_fiH, otherwise the value
mrwPW1_fiL.
All rights reserved by Robert Bosch GmbH, including in cases of proprietary rights applications. All rights of disposal such as copying and passing on to us.
DS / ESA Quantity calculation -PWG filter and driving behavior 19 April 2002
0 bosch
EDC15 +
Y S01 281/120 - VG2
Page 2-49
Measured value plausibility window:
mroU_PGSx2
anmU_PWG
mrmPW_dp
+
b
-
a
a> b
mrwPWG_fiH
mrwPWG_fiL
1
b
a
a b
mroPW_dp
MIN mroPW_dp
mrwPW_dp
mrwPW_Tol
Figure MERELW06: Reading mroPW_dp
mroPW_dp | n = (mroPW_dp | n-1 * const + | anmU_PWG - mroU_PGSx2 |) / (Const +1) restricted to
maximum mrwPW_dp - mrwPW_Tol.
This applies to "const": If the measured value | anmU_PWG - mroU_PGSx2 | is greater than the stored
Learning value mrmPW_dp, the value mrwPW1_fiH is for "const" is used, otherwise the value
mrwPW1_fiL.
"Learning safe neutral" mroPW_Hist.7 = 1
Here are the measurements mroPW_dp and mrmPW_cmax weighted to Ermmittlung the
Learning values mrmPW_dp and mrmPW_cmax used.
Learning value neutral:
mroPW_cmax
mrmPW_cmax
a
a> b
b
mrwPWG_fiH
mrwPWG_fiL
1
b
a
a b
mrmPW_cmax mrmPW_cmax
Figure MERELW07: learning value mrwPW_cmax
mrmPW_cmax | n = (mrmPW_cmax | n-1 * Const mroPW_cmax +) / (Const +1)
This applies to "const": If the measured value mroPW_cmax greater than the stored value learning
mrmPW_cmax, is used for "const" value mrwPW1_fiH, otherwise the value
mrwPW1_fiL.
All rights reserved by Robert Bosch GmbH, including in cases of proprietary rights applications. All rights of disposal such as copying and passing on to us.
19 April 2002 Quantity calculation - PWG filter and driving behavior DS / ESA
Page 2-50 EDC15 +
Y S01 281/120 - VG2
0 bosch
Learning value plausibility window:
mroPW_dp
mrmPW_dp
a
a> b
b
mrwPWG_fiH
mrwPWG_fiL
1
b
a
a b
mrmPW_dp mrmPW_dp
Figure MERELW08: learning value tracking error
mrmPW_dp | n = (mrmPW_dp | n-1 * Const mroPW_dp +) / (Const +1).
This applies to "const": If the measured value mroPW_dp greater than the stored value learning
mrmPW_dp, is used for "const" value mrwPW1_fiH, otherwise the value
mrwPW1_fiL. The idle position mroPWLLPos results to mrmPW_cmax + + mrmPW_dp
mrwPW_Tol.
You then change the status to "driving".
2.6.1.4 "Default normalization" mroPW_Stat.5 = 1
It all values are reset to the "safe default values":
Learning value neutral mrmPW_cmax = mrwPWc1max,
Learning value plausibility window mrmPW_dp = mrwPW_dp,
Measured neutral mroPW_cmax = mrwPWc1max,
Measured value plausibility window mroPW_dp = mrwPW_dp
Then change in status "driving"
2.6.1.5 "Delay" mroPW_Stat.4 = 1
The values mrmPW_cmax and mrmPW_dp stored in the EEPROM (edwPW_cmax
or edwPW_dp)
All rights reserved by Robert Bosch GmbH, including in cases of proprietary rights applications. All rights of disposal such as copying and passing on to us.
DS / ESA Quantity calculation -PWG filter and driving behavior 19 April 2002
0 bosch
EDC15 +
Y S01 281/120 - VG2
Page 2-51
Calculating the idle position:
PWG [percent]
anwPWG_KL
mrmPWG_lwo (U2) = mroPW_MAX
+ AnwPWG_KL (U2)
mroPW_MAX
anmPWG (U2) = anwPWG_KL (U2)
mrmPWG_lwo (U1) = mrmPW_OFFS (U1)
anmU_PWG [mV]
U1 U2
mroPW_red
mrwPWc1max + + mrwPW_dp mrwPW_Tol
mroPWLLPos
Figure MERELW02: Calculation Leerwegoptimierung
Application Note: anwPWG_KL The characteristic must be applied so that when mrwPWc1max +
mrwPW_dp + mrwPW_Tol the 0% point is.
Use the Leerwegreduktion it is now possible already from mroPWLLPos (= mrmPW_cmax +
mrmPW_dp + mrwPW_Tol) a PWG-value release> 0%.
The scoring electrical Leerwegreduktion mroPW_red results to mrwPWc1max +
mrwPW_dp + mrwPW_Tol - mroPWLLPos.
The maximum to be added to anmPWG offset is mroPW_MAX = anwPWG_KL (at
mrwPWc1max + mrwPW_dp + + mrwPW_Tol mroPW_red).
The current offset is to be added to anmPWG MIN (mroPW_MAX, anwPWG_KL (anmU_PWG
+ MroPW_red).
anmPWG mrmPW_lwo
mrmPW_OFFS
mroPW_MAX
MIN
Figure MERELW09: Calculation of leerwegoptimierten PWG position
The PWG request is then mrmPWG_lwo = anmPWG + mrmPW_OFFS (limited to 100%).
All rights reserved by Robert Bosch GmbH, including in cases of proprietary rights applications. All rights of disposal such as copying and passing on to us.
19 April 2002 Quantity calculation - PWG filter and driving behavior DS / ESA
Page 2-52 EDC15 +
Y S01 281/120 - VG2
0 bosch
cowVAR_PWG
fbbEPWG_L
fbbEPWG_H
fbbEPWP_P
fbbEPWP_A
> 1
mrmSICH_F
mroPWG_neu
provisionally defective
anmPWG
mrwPWG_Pof
dimLGS
RAMP
mrmPWG_roh
mrwPWG_Pon
mrwPWG_Pof
mrmPWG_lwo
fbbETAD_L
fbbETAD_H
fbbEPWG_L
fbbEPWG_H
fbbEPGS_L
fbbEPGS_H
fbbEPW2_L
fbbEPW2_H
fbbEPG2_L
fbbEPG2_H
fbbEPWP_A
fbbETAD_D
fbbETAD_T
mrwPWG_Pbr
mrwPWG_Rau
mrwPWG_Run
mrwPWG_SfB
mrwPWG_SfE
mrwPWG_HRP
fbbEPWG_L
cowVAR_PWG
fbbEPWG_H
> 1
fbbEPWP_A
fbbEPWP_P
Ramp active
> 1
> 1
mrmSICH_F
Figure MEREFV01: Evaluation pedal sensor
Behavior in cowVAR_PWG = 0 (potentiometer / Shater):
The PWG anmPWG value is checked for SRC and against the empty gas switch (dimLGS) on
Plausibility checks. While applying the brake can additionally access security case
(MrmSICH_F) are detected. If an implausible value is detected, go to the PWG raw
Ramp to a default value. A more detailed description can be found in the chapter
Monitoring function.
Behavior in cowVAR_PWG = 1 (double analog PWG): examination of the PWG-value, see Section
Monitoring function. While applying the brake can additionally access security case
(MrmSICH_F) are recognized
All rights reserved by Robert Bosch GmbH, including in cases of proprietary rights applications. All rights of disposal such as copying and passing on to us.
DS / ESA Quantity calculation -PWG filter and driving behavior 19 April 2002
0 bosch
EDC15 +
Y S01 281/120 - VG2
Page 2-53
2.6.2 Speed-dependent driving behavior
In drivability map mrwFVH_KF a desired quantity PWG mrmM_EPWG is as
Function of speed and filtered PWG - Position mrmPWGfi determined. In circuits
changes the operating point in driving behavior characteristic field. The resulting different
Moment must be balanced by the driver at the previous vehicle state
maintain.
dzmNmit
mrmM_EPWGR
mrmPWG_roh
KF
Working speed
control
mrwFVH_KF
cowFUN_FVH
mrmM_EPWG
KF
MEREAD06
mrwFVH_KF
PT1
2-stage
mrwPT1_Z ..
mrwPFI_POS
mrwPFI_NEG
Ramp active
mrwPFI_AKT
dimKUP
cowFUN_FVH
mrmPWGfi
> 1
&
Drivability
Driving torque
determination /
Constant
MEREFV03
MEREFV04
dimKUP
fgmFVN_UEB
mrmGTR_UEB
mrmBI_SOLL
mrmMD_Rrel
Figure MEREFV02: filtering pedal sensor
The crude pedal sensor position mrmPWG_roh is a two-stage filter PT1 - filtered.
Depending on the direction of movement is above or below threshold PWG rise
threshold value mrwPFI_POS, PWG Abfallschwellwert mrwPFI_NEG one of four time constants
selected. PT1 filter positive above mrwPT1_ZPO, PT1 filter positive below mrwPT1_ZPU, PT1
Filter negative above mrwPT1_ZNO and PT1 filter negative mrwPT1_ZNU below. The circumvention of the
Filtering with activated coupling can be turned off (mrwPFI_AKT). The filtering is
not performed during a preset value over the ramp runs or if
doppelanalogem PWG (cowVAR_PWG = 1) pending a final defective error
(MroFPM_ZAK = 4).
2.6.3 Speed-dependent driving behavior
This form of driver request determination is primarily intended for automatic transmissions. The
Driver introduces the accelerator pedal propulsion request (output torque), regardless of the
current engine state. In circuits, the operating point changes in driving behavior characteristic field
do not. Here it is possible to have a different dependence on driving speed PWG behavior
set (eg, low torque slope for speed in the local area - easy
Operating point setting in column ride. Consideration of the running resistance at high
Speed - low idle path).
All rights reserved by Robert Bosch GmbH, including in cases of proprietary rights applications. All rights of disposal such as copying and passing on to us.
19 April 2002 Quantity calculation - PWG filter and driving behavior DS / ESA
Page 2-54 EDC15 +
Y S01 281/120 - VG2
0 bosch
2.6.3.1 Determination of the currently valid transfer function
mrmGANG == mrmGTRGANG
dimKUP
fbbEEGS_A
fbbEECO_L
fbbEAG4_L
fbbEEGS_1
fboSASG
fboSFGG
mrmPWGfi == 0
&
mroFVHSTAT.0
> 1
&
S
Q
mrmGRA_UEF
R
anmWTF
KL
mroFVHGTdi
mrwFVHGDKL
fgmFVN_UEB
mrmGTR_UEB
MAX
b
MIN
a> = b
a
mroFVHSTAT.1
mroFVHSTAT.0
mroFVHUEro
MAX
PT1
mrmFVHUEst
mrwFVHVGWU
mrwFVHUEun
KL
mwFVHFIKL
Figure MEREFV03: Determination of the translation to be used
This function is only executed if EGS is performed via CAN. From Gearbox is then
demMotorsteuergertberCANu.a.eineTriebstrang transfer function
(Mrad / MKurbelwelle = igear * IAchs) and the gear engaged transmitted. These are from the CAN
Interpreter provided to the system as mrmGTR_UEB and mrmGTRGANG available. At
actuated clutch dimKUP (includes in automatic transmissions applicatively selectable status bits
Converter clutch is "open" - dimKUP = 1 / "regulated" - dimKUP = 0 / "closed" - dimKUP = 0)
is subject to the following conditions, the translation mroFVHUEro currently used on
a translation-dependent PT1 - filter characteristic mrwFVHFIKL in for the ride
relevant size mroFVHUEst taken:
- No error in the paths fboSEXM (evaluation gearbox communication message
Getriebe_1) fboSASG (evaluation gearbox communication message Getriebe_2) and fboSFGG
(Vehicle speed measurement) or after an error occurs and mrmPWGfi = 0
- The deviation between mrmGTR_UEB and fgmFVN_UEB (translation, SG-determined internally
ratio of vehicle speed / engine speed fgm_VzuN) is smaller than the factor
All rights reserved by Robert Bosch GmbH, including in cases of proprietary rights applications. All rights of disposal such as copying and passing on to us.
DS / ESA Quantity calculation -PWG filter and driving behavior 19 April 2002
0 bosch
EDC15 +
Y S01 281/120 - VG2
Page 2-55
mroFVHGTdi (from the characteristic curve in dependence on mrwFVHGDKL anmWTF) * the
Maximum of mrmGTR_UEB and fgmFVN_UEB.
- Current gear mrmGANG = passage of CAN mrmGTRGANG (Transmission Control Module).
At the same time also depends on the transfer function mroFVHUEro from the characteristic
mrwFVHFIKL an appropriate filter time constant selected. If for the debounce time
fbwEASG_UA a translation difference greater mroFVHGTdi before, the transmission is not in
IDLE (mrm_P_N = 0), the clutch is not operated (dimKUP = 0) and there is no error SRC
Gear ratio of (fbbEASG_L), the error fbbEASG_U is set. If the
Translation difference for the time fbwEASG_UB continuously smaller than mroFVHGTdi so
the error fbbEASG_U is healed.
As a replacement function for errors in the paths fboSEXM, fboSASG and fboSFGG is for
mroFVHUEst the value mrwFVHVGWU selected. These values are also in the SG-
Initialization used. The current state of the translation determination is in the olda
mroFVHSTAT shown.
Description of olda "Status of the behavior evaluation" mroFVHSTAT:
Bit position
0
1
Decimal comment
1bernahme of translation and transition active
2The difference between mrmGTR_UEB and fgmFVN_UEB
(Translation, SG internally determined from the ratio
Vehicle speed / engine speed fgm_VzuN) is smaller than the
Factor mroFVHGTdi * the maximum of mrmGTR_UEB and
fgmFVN_UEB
128cowFUN_FVH = 1, the driving speed dependent driving behavior
7
If no EGS CAN applied, then only Bit 7 (Figure of cowFUN_FVH) in
mroFVHSTAT shown. The transfer function is in this case with the predetermined value
mrwFVHVGWU occupied.
2.6.3.1.1 GRA Off at default value for the ratio
If an error occurs with respect to the interface engine - (gear for all relevant
Error conditions are ORed)
fbbEEGS_A: Embassy failure ASG
fbbEECO_L: Ecomatic switching signal message
fbbEAG4_L: AG4 switching signal timeout
fbbEEGS_1: message timeout gear 1 or gear Botschaftinkonsistenz 1
fboSASG: Automatic Transmission
fboSFGG: Speed signal
on, then, under certain conditions, the ratio to a preset value
placed. The GRA desired quantity could thus be changed by leaps and bounds. This gives the driver the
Changing the requested quantity does not feel the GRA is disabled.
The message mrmGRA_UEF can enable the cruise control (GRA) or
ban.
mrmGRA_UEF = TRUEGRA is disabled
mrmGRA_UEF = FALSE GRA remains activated
All rights reserved by Robert Bosch GmbH, including in cases of proprietary rights applications. All rights of disposal such as copying and passing on to us.
19 April 2002 Quantity calculation - PWG filter and driving behavior DS / ESA
Page 2-56 EDC15 +
Y S01 281/120 - VG2
0 bosch
2.6.3.2 Calculation of the PWG - driver's desired quantity
To the currently set output torque during gearshifts kept constant,
be transmission / final drive ratio mroFVHUEst and the current friction mrmMD_Rrel
(Without idling regulator component) in the determination of the PWG - driver's desired quantity involved.
fgmFGAKT
mrmPWGfi
KF
mrmMDW_ab
mrwFGFVHKF
mroFVHUEst
mrwMAXMOM
mrmMD_Rrel
a
b a
b
MIN
mroMDWkorr
mrmPWGfi
RAMP
mroMD_Rakt
mroMDW_PWG
mrwFVHMDRu
mrwFVHMDRo
mrmBI_SOLL
mrmM_EPWGU
Figure MEREFV04: PWG - Quantity Takeoff
Of the accelerator pedal position and vehicle speed mrmPWGfi fgmFGAKT is the
Output torque desired mrmMDW_ab determined. By dividing by the stored
Translation mroFVHUEst yields the valid for the current transition moment mroMDWkorr.
This is limited before further processing on mrwMAXMOM. To the
compensate for the speed-dependent influence of the friction torque in the motor is in traction
(Above the threshold mrwFVHMDRu PWG) at this moment nor to the proportion of
Idle controller reduced, friction mroMD_Rakt added. To a smooth transition when
To create the transition from thrust to traction, thereby mroMD_Rakt from is
actual reduced friction mrmMD_Rrel rated, by a factor between 0 (when
mrwFVHMDRu) and 1 (mrwFVHMDRo) calculated. This is in compliance with mrwFVHMDRo
> MrwFVHMDRu> mrwPWG_OPS no impairment of the safety concept
If (amount released at mrwPWG_OPS, Redundant thrust monitoring).
From the thus determined PWG - desired torque for the motor is on the specific indexed
Consumption mrmBI_SOLL the corresponding injection quantity mrmM_EPWG determined.
The desired amount of raw mrmM_EPWGR is determined in the same manner. It is in this case only held
the filtered unfiltered PWG mrmPWG_roh value as an input variable for the
Driving behavior characteristic field mrwFGFVHKF used. The other Eingangsgen are identical to
which to identify mrmM_EPWG, but it accounts for the olda spending.
All rights reserved by Robert Bosch GmbH, including in cases of proprietary rights applications. All rights of disposal such as copying and passing on to us.
DS / ESA Quantity calculation -PWG filter and driving behavior 19 April 2002
0 bosch
EDC15 +
Y S01 281/120 - VG2
Page 2-57
2.6.4 Torque Gradient
This function limits on request by the Embassy Getriebe2 the increase in
Driver request torque in accordance with the information transmitted in Getriebe2 Byte3 moments gradient
limitation. This is therefore this is a temporary slew-rate limiting
Driver's desired quantity, which ensures a variable maximum increase. In the
Operating conditions in which no such limitation is required (indicated by byte 3 =
FFh) are not limiting the driver's desired torque.
2.6.4.1 Justification
Particularly at part load journeys from the state of the VL30 (CVT) transmission or for the function
Stationary decoupling the 5HP19 (stage automatic) gear can use this function to the
Speed of the torque formation are limited. This can also occur (consumption-
optimal) low speeds to ensure a smooth start-up, because after a
Gas shock a high "torque shock" is fed to the drive train immediately, to which
the transmission can no longer respond.
2.6.4.2 Description of functions
This function is the function switch cowFUN_MGB = 1 activated. In this case,
mrmM_EPWG (driver's desired quantity) with respect to the highest possible positive slope
limited (slew-rate limiting upward). That is, there is an additional MIN formation of active
the previously computed unlimited driver's desired quantity - now renamed to mroM_EPWGU -
and the sum of mrmM_EPWG (t-1) and mrodM_EMGB (maximum Mengengradient). For the
Event that the desired quantity mrmM_EWUN (t-1) is greater than mrmM_EPWG (t-1) on this
used a maximum selection summation, so that in case of not through the
PWG increased desired quantity, such as by an active drag torque limit for CVT
unnecessarily delayed response to a rising ptzlich PWG request by a
Moments gradient boundary below the desired quantity, where these have no effect
would have produced.
The maximum Mengengradient mrodM_EMGB is from the transmitted via CAN max.
Moment gradient from Getriebe2-Byte3 mrmdMD_MGB calculated. For this conversion process is
the target amount mrmBI_SOLL consumption, the processing period (20 ms main program
period) and an additional administrable rating factor for the MGB mrwMGBFAKT
taken into account. To the reduction of idle controller amount with increasing PWG value and the
to compensate for resulting delay in the rise of the driver's desired quantity is
yet the difference amount of the idle controller between each main program period (20ms) PT1
added to the filtered maximum torque gradient mrodM_EMGB.
Furthermore mrmdMD_MGB is a MAX-formation with the application date
mrwdMGBMIN limited downwards to allow a minimum increase in any case.
If actually requested via CAN impermissibly small moment gradient, then the
FbbEMGB_P error (error path fboSASG) reported - mrmdMD_MGB then gets the value
mrwdMGBMIN.
All rights reserved by Robert Bosch GmbH, including in cases of proprietary rights applications. All rights of disposal such as copying and passing on to us.
19 April 2002 Overview - PWG filter and driving behavior DS / ESA
Page 2-58 EDC15 +
Y S01 281/120 - VG2
0 bosch
There are the following shutdown conditions for the rate-of-moments:
max. Moment gradient from Getriebe2-Byte3 = FFh
faulty transmission 2 message (message count and timeout)
If one (or more) of the shutdown on, the torque
Gradient turned off by the fact that mrodM_EMGB on dM_EMAX (maximum
internally representable value) or the default value administrable mrwdMGBAUS is set. The
Default value is used if mrwdMGBAUS the torque rate-just
active (mroM_EPWGU> mrodM_EMGB + max selection (mrmM_EPWG (t-1),
mrmM_EWUN (t-1)) - this is an abrupt increase in any case avoided. Kick
during the active engagement of a switch-off on so a shut-down with the
Increase mrwdMGBAUS executed.
In the system acts on the Momentengradientenbegrenzung mrmM_EPWG and possibly on it
derived variables - but not on mrmMDW_ab (output torque on driving behavior characteristic field -
is used by FGR) and mrmM_EPWGR (desired quantity raw - is of ARF and
Boost pressure control system used). The EGS intervention (as well as FGR, ADR, etc.) do not get
Slew-rate limiting because after this moment gradient limit in the amount of path
acts.
mroM_EPWGU
mrmM_EPWG (t)
MIN
mrmM_EPWG (t-1)
mrmM_EWUN (t-1)
mrodM_EMGB
cowFUN_MGB = 1
MAX
Figure MEREMGB1: slew-rate limitation of mrmM_EPWG
mrmM_ELLR (t-1) - mrmM_ELLR (t)
MAX
mrwMGBFAKT
mrmdMD_MGB
PT1
mrwPT1LLRd
mrodM_EMGB
mrmBI_SOLL
mrwdMGBAUS
mrwM_EMAX
mroM_EPWGU
mrmM_EPWG (t-1)
mrmM_EWUN (t-1)
mrodM_EMGB (t-1)
mrmdMD_MGB = FFh
MAX
a
a> b
b
Figure MEREMGB2: Determination of the maximum Mengengradienten mrodM_EMGB
All rights reserved by Robert Bosch GmbH, including in cases of proprietary rights applications. All rights of disposal such as copying and passing on to us.
DS / ESA Overview - PWG filter and driving behavior 19 April 2002
0 bosch
EDC15 +
Y S01 281/120 - VG2
Page 2-59
DMD_MGB (gear 2 Byte 3)
mrwdMGBMIN
MAX
mrmdMD_MGB
FFh
mrmASG_CAN.11 (Botschatszhlerfehler)
mrmASG_CAN.4 (error message, timeout)
> 1
Figure MEREMGB3: Determination of the maximum torque gradient mrmdMD_MGB
In case of errors in the associated Getriebe2 message (message count and timeout), the
Replacement value FFh forwarded to the Momentengradientenbegrenzung disable secure.
If an inadmissible small moment gradient requested via CAN, then the error
fbbEMGB_P (error path fboSASG) reported - mrmdMD_MGB then gets on the
built-MAX formation the value mrwdMGBMIN. If the error fbbEMGB_P final
defective, it currently has no direct impact system. This error is only used for
Fault memory that the transmission control unit with an inadmissible-little moments gradient
has requested.
All rights reserved by Robert Bosch GmbH, including in cases of proprietary rights applications. All rights of disposal such as copying and passing on to us.
19 April 2002 Overview - PWG filter and driving behavior DS / ESA
Page 2-60 EDC15 +
Y S01 281/120 - VG2
0 bosch
2.7 Fuel cut-off
The shutdown of the injection in the thrust is through the shutdown of the metering
zmmMVS_ANS 6 = forced (See Chapter pump control). The operating status of thrust
is present when mrmM_EAKT = 0. To minimize the thrust jerking, can output depending
(X = 1 .5) for the period mrwSCHTIxG the fuel cut-off of the ARD be delayed. After
this time, the remaining pump volume, mrmM_EPUMP and the
Engine torque amount for the CAN transmission mrmM_EMOTX by increasing damping
(Starting with the dependent factor mrwSA_BExG) lowered to zero. After falling below the
Threshold quantity mrwSA_OFF or exceeding the time mrwARD_TIM is the metering
turned off and the quantities mrmM_EMOTX as well as zmmM_EKORR Set to 0.
Timer
stop
mrmM_EAKT>
0
Initialization
mrm
KEA
M_
= 0
T = Timer
start
erTimTI xG
SCH
mrw>
Ramp
mrwSA_BxG
start
mrmSASTATE = 1
"Quantity Desired"
0
mrmSASTATE = 2
"Quantity hold"
> ACT
M_E
mrm
mrmSASTATE = 3
"Quantity ramp"
Timer
stop
Timer
stop
mrmSASTATE = 4
zmmM_EKORR = 0
mrmM_EMOTX = 0
x = 1 .. 5
mrmM_EAKT> 0
Figure MERESA01: State diagram of the fuel cut-off
The size mrmSASTATE represents the state of the fuel cut.
mrmSASTATE = 1: There is a lot of desire to push is not active.
mrmSASTATE = 2: active thrust, the residence time mrwSCHTIxG has not yet expired. ARD
Procedures are possible.
mrmSASTATE = 3: reduction of mrmM_EPUMP ramped down to zero. To this end,
the currently calculated amount mroM_APUMP multiplied by a weighting factor.
At the same time the amount mrmM_EMOTX is ramp-shaped with the same weighting factor to
to zero out (multiplication of the weighting factor with mrmM_EMOT). The weighting factor
is initialized to 1 and proceeds with the step size mrwSA_BExG zero. Falls below the
Pump the amount administered barrier mrwSA_OFF, the ramp is stopped and in
the state mrmSASTATE = 4 connected.
mrmSASTATE = 4: The maximum Schubabschaltzeit mrwARD_TIM has expired or
Pumps mrmM_EPUMP amount is smaller than the barrier mrwSA_OFF. There is no
Controlling the solenoid valves.
All rights reserved by Robert Bosch GmbH, including in cases of proprietary rights applications. All rights of disposal such as copying and passing on to us.
DS / ESA Overview - fuel cut-off
Tim
he
>
19 April 2002
mr
wA
RD
OD
_T
ER
IM
he
IM
TimD_T
AR
rw
> M
0 bosch
EDC15 +
Y S01 281/120 - VG2
Page 2-61
All rights reserved by Robert Bosch GmbH, including in cases of proprietary rights applications. All rights of disposal such as copying and passing on to us.
19 April 2002 Overview - Fuel cut-off DS / ESA
Page 2-62 EDC15 +
Y S01 281/120 - VG2
0 bosch
2.8 Cruise control
The cruise control system (CCS) consists of three different sub-tasks
together: the control panel evaluation, the examination of the shutdown and the execution
the selected function. The control unit detects that the function evaluation request to the
Cruise control on the control panel and checked for plausibility and
Functionality. When checking the shutdown, the various conditions that
can cause a shutdown detected and the GRA disabled. In the sub-task
"Execute the selected function" function request is executed by the control unit.
The digital inputs for each key and contacts are already in the module Digital
Inputs debounced. It is processed by the GRA only the logical states.
Description of the software switch cowFUN_FGR:
Decimal
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
Comment
no cruise control (not activated by diagnosis!)
-
reserved
GRA function after VW / AUDI (by diagnosis switched on and off)
-
-
GRA function after LT2 (by diagnosis switched on and off)
ADR with variable working speed (by diagnosis switched on and off)
ADR with a fixed operating speed (by diagnosis switched on and off)
ACC Adaptive Cruise Control
The message contains the value of comFGR_opt cowFUN_FGR, where GRA not
EEPROM-switch (see Login Request) is disabled or GRA is performed via CAN.
Decimal
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
Importance comFGR_opt
disabled (via login or cowFUN_FGR = 0)
-
FGR via CAN (cowFUN_FGR = 3 AND mrwMULINF0 = 6, 9 or 11)
FGR via digital input
-
-
FGR with MB control panel (LT2)
variable ADR
fixed ADR
ACC
All rights reserved by Robert Bosch GmbH, including in cases of proprietary rights applications. All rights of disposal such as copying and passing on to us.
DS / ESA Overview - Cruise control 19 April 2002
0 bosch
EDC15 +
Y S01 281/120 - VG2
Page 2-63
Transmission and reception conditions of the CAN message GRA:
cowFUN_FGR
0
2
3
6
7
8
9
CAN message GRA
send
GRA enabled via EEPROM switch: received (comFGR_opt = 2)
GRA disabled through EEPROM switch: - (comFGR_opt = 0)
send
-
-
-
send
Control panel evaluation:
With function switch cowFUN_FGR (0 = no GRA, 3 = VW / AUDI, 6 = LT2) can
be chosen between LT2 control panel and control panel VW:
LT2 control panel:
The following digital inputs are available:
-
-
-
-
-
dimFGA
dimFGW
dimFGP
dimFGM
dimFGV
= Keyed OFF
= Recovery (WA)
= Acceleration (A +) or Tip Up
= Delay (ON) or tip-down
= Control contact
The control contact is used for plausibility checks. A contact is OFF Apart from the contact only
accepted along with a rising edge of the control contact. When switching from one
Function request to the next host and his family recognized the neutral position.
Exacerbated this is the acceptance condition for the contact A +: it is only with
the control contact accepted. Of the control and A + contact were activated and
then the control contact is deactivated, is not a change in position "neutral" for a
further accelerating is necessary, it is sufficient to further operation of the control contact.
VW control panel:
This GRA - version supports the digital operator variant with the contacts A +, WA,
OFF and locked OFF (initial contact). The clear contact is mechanically as the main circuit
GRA - keypad executed. When the clear contact is actuated, the GRA is -
Target speed set to zero. The following keypad versions:
Standard GRA:
-
-
-
-
dimFGL
dimFGA
dimFGP
dimFGW
= Locked OFF (clear contact)
= Keyed OFF
= Set (SET) / Speed (A +)
= Recovery (WA)
All rights reserved by Robert Bosch GmbH, including in cases of proprietary rights applications. All rights of disposal such as copying and passing on to us.
19 April 2002 Overview - Cruise control DS / ESA
Page 2-64 EDC15 +
Y S01 281/120 - VG2
0 bosch
VW control unit via CAN message GRA / GRA_Neu:
It is possible to read the GRA keypad status via CAN. These mrwMULINF0 must so
be applied that one of the CAN messages GRA or GRA_Neu is received (see
Version of the CAN data definition). In addition, the GRA must function according to VW / AUDI (cowFUN_FGR
Be = 3) were applied. If these conditions are met, instead of the digital inputs dimFGx the
Information from the CAN message used as follows:
-
-
-
-
dimFGL
instead dimFGA
instead dimFGP
instead dimFGW
plausibility with 'GRA / ADR - Main switch "
"GRA / ADR - Tipschalter 'Off'" - inverted
"GRA / ADR - Tipschalter 'Set / deceleration'"
"GRA / ADR - Tipschalter 'resume / accelerate'"
The bit "GRA / ADR control panel error" caused the shutdown of the GRA (mroFGR_ABN = 21).
Note: The names of the signals in the GRA-message vote only in "ON" - simulation (see below)
their meaning match.
The bits "GRA / ADR delay" and "GRA / ADR accelerate" from the embassy or GRA
GRA_Neu are not used.
The Information of contact "locked-off" on the digital input (dimFGL) of the
Control unit is with the redundant information GRA / ADR main switch of the GRA message
plausibility. If in this context, an error occurs, this is fbbEFGC_P
(Zeitentprellt) reported. This error leads to a shutdown of the GRA.
Description of Message mrmGRA (upon receipt of GRA or GRA_Neu by motor-SG):
Comment GRA / ADR comment GRA / ADR designation in the correlation
4 positions handset 6 positions keypad CAN message
0HauptschalterHauptschalterS_HAUPTdimFGL (Check Machine)
1AusAusT_AUSdimFGA
2Setzen/VerzgernVerzgernT_VERdimFGP
3Wiederaufnahme/Beschl BeschleunigenT_BESdimFGW
eunigen
4-SetzenT_SET
5-WiederaufnahmeT_WA
6BedienteilfehlerBedienteilfehlerF_BTLmroFGR_ABN = 21
7 ---
When using the 6-position control panel inputs CAN be linked and
plausibility and presented as mrmGRApl (bit positions identical to mrmGRA).
If the message GRA_Neu received by the engine-SG, the information is "transmitter
Coding "as follows with mrwMULINF0 plausibility:
mrwMULINF0
9
11
Transmitter coding
00b
01b
Bit
In implausible transmitter coding error fbbEFGC_S is reported.
All rights reserved by Robert Bosch GmbH, including in cases of proprietary rights applications. All rights of disposal such as copying and passing on to us.
DS / ESA Overview - Cruise control 19 April 2002
0 bosch
EDC15 +
Y S01 281/120 - VG2
Page 2-65
The GRA message contains a message count that is incremented continuously to the
To ensure timeliness of the message. The error fbbEFGC_B is reported if the
Difference, the message count of two consecutive messages larger than
was mrwGRA_Bmx. This error is also reported if the message count more
has remained unchanged as mrwGRA_Bmn main program periods. The error fbbEFGC_B
caused the shutdown of the GRA.
The message content is not monitored by a checksum byte. If the checksum as
correctly detected, an error counter is decremented to 0. In case of failure of the meter to be
upper limit mrwGRA_Cog incremented. If the counter exceeds the value mrwGRA_Cmx
the error fbbEFGC_C is reported. This error caused the shutdown of the GRA.
When identified as defective or faulty checksum message count the signals dimFGA be
dimFGP and dimFGW not updated.
The information about whether checksum or message count were identified as defective, in the
Message mrmGRACoff shipped and used as a cut-off condition for GRA.
Description of Message mrmGRACoff:
Bit position
0
1
Decimal comment
Recognized 1Checksumme defective
Recognized 2Botschaftszhler defective
In the case of time-out of the embassy or detection of inconsistency by the CAN-handler
the error fbbEFGC_Q and fbbEFGC_Y (no suppression and no fault memory entry)
reported to also cause a shutdown of the GRA. Here, as the replacement value of the
recent valid value is used further to one of the errors defective endltig.
The debounce times for defect detection with the errors fbbEFGC_B, fbbEFGC_C must be 0
to ensure a load heft compliant evaluation of the CAN message.
Alternatively to the GRA can use the function switch cowFUN_FGR (7 = ADR variable
Working speed, 8 = ADR fixed operating speed) and the function of operating speed-
control can be defined (see work speed control).
With the configuration variables mrwALL_DEF is, among others, also the A simulation
on. In this mode, the digital inputs are defined as follows:
GRA with delaying (A simulation):
-
-
-
-
dimFGL
dimFGA
dimFGP
dimFGW
= Locked OFF (clear contact)
= Keyed OFF
= Set (SET) / DEC (ON)
= Recovery (WA) / Speed (A +)
All rights reserved by Robert Bosch GmbH, including in cases of proprietary rights applications. All rights of disposal such as copying and passing on to us.
19 April 2002 Overview - Cruise control DS / ESA
Page 2-66 EDC15 +
Y S01 281/120 - VG2
0 bosch
Determining the control panel states A +, WA, SET and ON when ON-simulation:
Control panel is ON + (acceleration):
-
If velocity is zero
dimFGW (key WA) operated for more than mrwALL_SPZ
- dimFGW (key WA) operated
Target speed greater than zero
GRA active
Keypad WA state not active
Keypad state WA:
-
AND
OR
AND
AND
AND
dimFGW (key WA) operated
Target speed greater than zero
GRA not active
- dimFGW (key WA) operated
Target speed greater than zero
GRA active in the state re-absorption (WA)
dimFGW (key WA) already operated.
Keypad state SET (set):
-
AND
AND
OR
AND
AND
AND
dimFGP is pressed for less than mrwALL_SPZ
GRA is not active
- dimFGP is pressed for less than mrwALL_TPZ
GRA is active
Deviation | Vspec.-Vakt |> mrwALL_BER
Control panel is ON (retarding):
-
AND
OR
AND
AND
dimFGP pressed for more than mrwALL_TPZ
(Control panel monitoring, see Monitoring concept)
All rights reserved by Robert Bosch GmbH, including in cases of proprietary rights applications. All rights of disposal such as copying and passing on to us.
DS / ESA Overview - Cruise control 19 April 2002
0 bosch
EDC15 +
Y S01 281/120 - VG2
Page 2-67
2.8.1 Examination of Breaking
Off at VGW
From keypad or clear contact
dimBRE> 0
Error control panel
fgmFGAKT <mrwFAS_BVK
dzmNmit> mrwFAS_BNG
dzmNmit <mrwFAS_BNK
fgm_VzuN <mrwFAS_BEG
fgmFGAKT> mrwFAS_BVG
Error brake or DZG
> 1
FGR - lock
Selector lever == 1/N/R/P
MSR / ASR active
anmUBATT <mrwFAS_BAT
fbbECRA_A (croCR_STAT> = crwCR_ST_A)
ESP - engagement
fboSFGC | | mrmGRACoff | | mrmGRA.6
Deviation v / n ratio on activation
FGR to fgm_VzuN> mrwFAS_BVN
Coupling mroFGR_KUP
mrwFGR_KUP = 1
FGR active and not FGR_AUS
&
&
fgmBESCH <mrwFAS_VZM
DEAD TIME
> 1
FGR = OFF
mrwFAS_MZZ
&
fgmFGAKT> (v_cmd + mrwFAS_AVD)
DEAD TIME
mrwFAS_AVZ
fgmFGAKT <(v_cmd - mrwFAS_VDK)
> 1
fgmFGAKT> (v_cmd + mrwFAS_VDG)
fgmFGAKT <(v_cmd * mrwFAS_VDU)
FGR in Fashion Hold
&
Figure MEREGR01: shutdown
All rights reserved by Robert Bosch GmbH, including in cases of proprietary rights applications. All rights of disposal such as copying and passing on to us.
19 April 2002 Overview - Cruise control DS / ESA
Page 2-68 EDC15 +
Y S01 281/120 - VG2
0 bosch
Under the following conditions, the GRA is disabled, the cause of the shutdown on
the olda mroFGR_ABN is visible:
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
OFF from the control panel (mroFGR_ABN = 1) +)
(If OFF means of extinguishing Contact - snapped off, the set speed is cleared)
Brake contact or redundant brake contact is active (mroFGR_ABN = 2) + +)
Clutch actuation, provided mrwFGR_KUP = 0; no shutdown
mrwFGR_KUP = 1 (mroFGR_ABN = 3) + + +)
Occurrence of a control unit error (mroFGR_ABN = 4) + + +)
the vehicle deceleration during the time mrwFAS_MZZ greater than the max. Value
mrwFAS_VZM (entry via neg acceleration, mroFGR_ABN = 5) + +) Note: also
on deactivation of the GRA on the software switch cowFUN_FGR, or via the
Diagnosis is mroFGR_ABN = 5
Driving speed below the min. Value mrwFAS_BVK +), or above the max. Value
mrwFAS_BVG (mroFGR_ABN = 6) + + +)
Speed higher than the maximum. Value mrwFAS_BNG (mroFGR_ABN = 7) +)
Speed is less than the min. Value mrwFAS_BNK (mroFGR_ABN = 8) +)
nude. v / n - ratio is less than min. Value mrwFAS_BEG (mroFGR_ABN = 9) +)
Deviation of the current V / s - the ratio of V / N - ratio in the activation of
GRA - operation is greater than max. Value mrwFAS_BVN (mroFGR_ABN = 10) +)
Occurrence of a failure of the brake (fboSBRE) or speed encoder (fboSZG)
(MroFGR_ABN = 14) + +)
Waiting for neutral position of the control panel after cancelation (mroFGR_ABN = 15) +)
Selector lever of the automatic transmission (mrmWH_POSb) in position 1, P, N or R
(MroFGR_ABN = 16) +)
TCS or MSR intervention longer than the time mrwALL_ASR active, occurs when
mrmMSRSTAT bit 0 or mrmASRSTAT bit set to 0 (mroFGR_ABN = 17) +)
AnmUBATT battery voltage for longer than the time less than the threshold mrwFASBATt
mrwFAS_BAT (mroFGR_ABN = 18) +)
The crash croCR_STAT level is greater than or equal to the threshold applicative crwCR_ST_A
(MroFGR_ABN = 19) + + +)
ESP intervention mrmFDR_CAN.0 is longer than the time to mrwALL_FDR (mroFGR_ABN =
20) +)
One of the errors in the error path fboSFGC (FGR via CAN) final defective or if
Embassy GRA is reported control panel error. Similarly, if over mrmGRACoff
Shutdown due to a CAN message error is required. (MroFGR_ABN = 21) +)
Error in the determination of the valid transfer function (after the RS flip-flop is a
Error. This is communicated via mrmGRA_UEF EAF). (MroFGR_ABN = 22) +)
All rights reserved by Robert Bosch GmbH, including in cases of proprietary rights applications. All rights of disposal such as copying and passing on to us.
DS / ESA Overview - Cruise control 19 April 2002
0 bosch
EDC15 +
Y S01 281/120 - VG2
Page 2-69
In GRA - Condition KEEP following additional termination conditions still apply:
Positive deviation of the current speed of the GRA - target speed
during the time mrwFAS_AVZ greater than the max. Value mrwFAS_AVD (mroFGR_ABN =
11) + + +)
- Positive deviation of the current speed of the GRA - target speed
greater than the value mrwFAS_VDG (mroFGR_ABN = 12) +)
- Negative deviation of the current speed of the GRA -
Target speed: fgmFGAKT <Vspec. * mrwFAS_VDU or negative deviation of
current speed of
the GRA target speed: fgmFGAKT <Vspec. - mrwFAS_VDK (mroFGR_ABN = 13) +)
-
Aborting:
-
+) Reduction of the GRA - amount to a proportionality mrwFAS_RAS, then
Volume ramp with a slope of mrwFAS_SRA to 0
- + +) Reduction of the GRA - amount to a proportionality mrwFAS_RSB, then
the amount reduced on a ramp within the time mrwFAS_RAB to 0.
- + + +) Reduction of the GRA - quantity immediately to 0
If you cancel during actuated button A + / A-(acceleration / deceleration), the
Target speed is cleared (0).
With activated GRA also the plausibility of the driving speed fbbEFGG_P is checked (sh
Monitoring concept). When a defective FGG (error in the path fboSFGG) will brake
simulated and the GRA - operating under the resulting conditions (ramp slope)
canceled.
All rights reserved by Robert Bosch GmbH, including in cases of proprietary rights applications. All rights of disposal such as copying and passing on to us.
19 April 2002 Overview - Cruise control DS / ESA
Page 2-70 EDC15 +
Y S01 281/120 - VG2
0 bosch
2.8.2 GRA on wheel torque
With the function switch cowFGR_RMo (1 .. GRA on wheel torque, 0 .. GRA over quantity) is
decided whether the control structure of the GRA is to be expected with the wheel torque or with the crowd.
fgmBESCH
dzmNmit
mrmM_EFGR
mroMDabFGR
GRA-
Regulator
mrmM_EPWG
mrmMDW_ab
mrmM_EAKT
mrmFVHUESt
mrmBI_SOLL
a a
b
b
CONTROLS
mroMDabAKT
0 Nm
7650 Nm
mrmM_EBEGR
mrmMD_BEGR
CONTROLS
mroMDabBEG
mrmFVHUESt 0 Nm
7650 Nm
cowFGR_RMo = 1
mroMDabFGR a a
b
b
mrmFGR_roh
mrmBI_SOLL
mrmFVHUESt
MIN
mrmM_EFGR
GRA-
Regulator
mrmM_EFGR
mroMDabBEG a a
b
b
mrmBI_SOLL
mrmFVHUESt
mrmM_EBEGR
Figure MEREGR10: GRA wheel torque
All rights reserved by Robert Bosch GmbH, including in cases of proprietary rights applications. All rights of disposal such as copying and passing on to us.
DS / ESA Overview - Cruise control 19 April 2002
0 bosch
EDC15 +
Y S01 281/120 - VG2
Page 2-71
The input variables for the GRA-regulator block at "GRA wheel torque via" contact
as follows:


mroMDabFGR [Nm (output torque)] ... Result of the last controller run
mroMDabBEG The ... "Begrenzungsradmoment" calculated from "Begrenzungsradmoment"
times "transfer function drivetrain after filtering"
=
mrmMD_BEGR [Nm (motor torque)] mrmFVHUEst [-] mroMDabBEG [Nm (output torque)]

mroMDabAKT The ... "IS-wheel torque without ARD" is calculated from the "Current
Injection quantity "by the" target amount consumption "times" transfer function driveline
after filtering "
mrmM_EAKT [mg / stroke]
=
mrmBI_SOLL
mg / stroke
[Nm (motor torque)]
mrmFVHUEst [-]
mroMDabAKT [Nm (output torque)]



mrmMDW_ab [Nm (output torque)] ... from the moment drivability map mrwFGFVHKF
fgmBESCH [m / s ] ... acceleration
dzmNmit [1/min] ... speed
The output variables for the GRA-regulator block at "GRA on wheel torque" have the following
Units:
mrmM_EFGR [mg / stroke] ... Desired quantity GRA
mrmFGR_roh [mg / stroke] ... Desired quantity GRA unlimited
All rights reserved by Robert Bosch GmbH, including in cases of proprietary rights applications. All rights of disposal such as copying and passing on to us.
19 April 2002 Overview - Cruise control DS / ESA
Page 2-72 EDC15 +
Y S01 281/120 - VG2
0 bosch
2.8.3 Execution of the selected function
Execution of the selected function in the standard GRA:
OFF
(Locked)
V_cmd = 0
dimFGL
INACTIVE
(NEUTRAL)
A
SET
OFF
D
Demolition
treatment
F
(Any demolition
condition, from
each state)
D
C
G
C
KEEP
B
A +
Accelerate
E
TIP UP
V_act = v_cmd B
WA
D
Figure MEREGR02: Overview of the functions in the standard GRA GRA
All rights reserved by Robert Bosch GmbH, including in cases of proprietary rights applications. All rights of disposal such as copying and passing on to us.
DS / ESA Overview - Cruise control 19 April 2002
0 bosch
EDC15 +
Y S01 281/120 - VG2
Page 2-73
The selected through the control panel functions are performed in this subtask. The
GRA - operation takes for the desired function following GRA - states:
A control panel is ON + shorter recognized as mrwALL_SPZ and GRA - NEUTRAL state: -
> GRA - State is SET
B control panel is ON + shorter than mrwALL_TPZ recognized and GRA - HOLD state
or WA and deviation from desired speed to the current driving speed <=
mrwALL_BER: -> GRA - condition is TIP-UP
C control panel is ON + shorter than mrwALL_TPZ recognized and GRA - HOLD state
or WA and deviation from desired speed to the current driving speed>
mrwALL_BER: -> GRA - State is SET
D control panel is ON + recognized equal to or longer than mrwALL_SPZ: -> GRA - state is
_ A + (acceleration)
Recognized D control panel is ON + shorter than mrwALL_SPZ and GRA - state SET: ->
GRA-state is HOLD
E detected operating condition part WA and the current vehicle speed is greater than the last
Mileage GRA - target speed -> GRA - state is WA from above
WA detected and the current vehicle speed is lower than or equal to the last
Mileage GRA - target speed -> GRA - state is WA from below
F control panel is OFF from the keypad, or other termination condition is detected -> GRA
- Condition is OFF
G keypad is ON + recognized equal to or longer than mrwALL_TPZ: -> GRA - state is
A + (acceleration)
The GRA - HOLD state is calculated as the target state of the states A +, WA from above and
WA from below, as well as the target state of the state TIP-UP (via WA).
All rights reserved by Robert Bosch GmbH, including in cases of proprietary rights applications. All rights of disposal such as copying and passing on to us.
19 April 2002 Overview - Cruise control DS / ESA
Page 2-74 EDC15 +
Y S01 281/120 - VG2
0 bosch
Execution of the selected function ON in simulation:
OFF
(Locked)
V_cmd = 0
dimFGL
INACTIVE
(NEUTRAL)
C
B
SET
G
OFF
A +
Accelerate
B
Demolition
treatment
B
(Any demolition
condition, from
each state)
D
D
F
K
KEEP
E
I
TIP UP
A v_act = v_cmd E
B
I
WA
ON
Delay
A
TIP DOWN
D
F
Figure MEREGR03: Overview of the GRA functions in A Simulation
All rights reserved by Robert Bosch GmbH, including in cases of proprietary rights applications. All rights of disposal such as copying and passing on to us.
DS / ESA Overview - Cruise control 19 April 2002
0 bosch
EDC15 +
Y S01 281/120 - VG2
Page 2-75
The selected through the control panel functions are performed in this subtask. The
GRA - operation takes for the desired function following GRA - states:
A control panel is ON + shorter than mrwALL_TPZ recognized and GRA - HOLD state
or WA and deviation from desired speed to the current driving speed <=
mrwALL_BER: -> GRA - condition is TIP-UP
B control panel is ON + longer recognized as mrwALL_SPZ: -> GRA - status is ON +
(Acceleration). This state change can at any desired speed
mrmFG_SOLL be performed.
C control panel is ON-shorter than mrwALL_SPZ recognized and GRA - Inactive state: ->
GRA - State is SET
D control panel ON state equal to or longer than mrwALL_SPZ detected: -> GRA - state is
_ ON (retarding)
D control panel ON state-recognized shorter than mrwALL_SPZ and GRA - state SET: ->
GRA - HOLD state is
E ON shorter detected operating condition as part mrwALL_TPZ and GRA - HOLD state and
Deviation from desired speed to the current driving speed <= mrwALL_BER: -
> GRA - condition is TIP-DOWN
F keypad state ON shorter than mrwALL_TPZ recognized and GRA - HOLD state and
Deviation from desired speed to the current driving speed> mrwALL_BER: ->
GRA - State is SET
G keypad WA detected state, and the current vehicle speed is greater than the last
Mileage GRA - target speed -> GRA - state is WA from above
WA detected and the current vehicle speed is lower than or equal to the last
Mileage GRA - target speed -> GRA - state is WA from below
H control unit OFF state recognized by the control panel or other termination condition -> GRA
- Condition is OFF
I control panel is ON + shorter than mrwALL_TPZ recognized and GRA - HOLD state
or WA and deviation from desired speed to the current driving speed>
mrwALL_BER: -> GRA - state is unchanged.
K keypad state ON is equal to or longer than mrwALL_TPZ detected: -> GRA - state is
ON (retarding)
The GRA - HOLD state is calculated as the target state of the states A +, A-, WA from above
and WA from below, as well as the target state of the states TIP-UP and DOWN TIP (via WA).
The current GRA - set speed is on the olda mrmFG_SOLL, the value of the integrator
on the olda mroI_AKT and the current GRA - Desired amount on the olda mrmM_EFGR
visible.
For the output of the inverse PWG - signal (information on automatic transmission) is a GRA
Desired quantity mrmFGR_roh sent. In mrmFGR_roh be in the states "HOLD"
"A +" and "WA from below" P - not limited shares.
All rights reserved by Robert Bosch GmbH, including in cases of proprietary rights applications. All rights of disposal such as copying and passing on to us.
19 April 2002 Overview - Cruise control DS / ESA
Page 2-76 EDC15 +
Y S01 281/120 - VG2
0 bosch
2.8.4 Description of the GRA states
GRA - Condition SET:
In the state SET the current driving speed after releasing the pressed key to
Target speed is set and passed to the state HOLD, with the current amount
mrmM_EAKT into the integrator of the PI - controller is adopted for the state HOLD. At
long key press is set the current speed to the set speed
and based on this target speed in the follow-on state (ON + / ON)
passed.
GRA - Condition TIP-UP:
If the GRA - Condition HOLD ON + shorter than mrwALL_TPZ pressed and is the
Deviation from desired speed to the current driving speed mrwALL_BER, the
GRA - Condition TIP-UP enabled. The set speed is when the GRA - Desired amount
has not yet reached the full load, the current traveling speed increased by mrwALL_TPV
set, and it is in the GRA - passed over WA state from below. If the full load reaches
, the target speed is not increased, but is the state in the WA
State KEEP gone.
GRA - Condition TIP-DOWN:
If the GRA - Condition HOLD ON-pressed shorter than mrwALL_TPZ and is the
Deviation from desired speed to the current driving speed mrwALL_BER, then
the GRA - Condition TIP-DOWN enabled. The set speed is when the GRA -
Desired amount is greater than zero, the humbled to mrwALL_TPV (lower limit is zero)
current Fahgeschwindigkeit set, and it is in the GRA - WA state from above
passed. If the GRA - request amount is zero, the target speed is not
further lowered.
All rights reserved by Robert Bosch GmbH, including in cases of proprietary rights applications. All rights of disposal such as copying and passing on to us.
DS / ESA Overview - Cruise control 19 April 2002
0 bosch
EDC15 +
Y S01 281/120 - VG2
Page 2-77
GRA - Condition A +:
Button
"A +"
(Debounced)
1
0
t
mrmM_EFGR
mrwFEP_RSU
mrwFEP_FMG o
Initial value
t
(FgmBESCH <= mrwFEP_BOU) and
mrmFG_SOLL(V <= mroV_SOLL +
mrwFEP_AVD)
V
mrmFG_SOLLmroV_SOL
L V_Sollwertrampe
mrwFEP_RSP
V_act
t
mrwALL_SPZ
FGR Fashion
N
E
U
T
R
A
L
A + _bergang
KEEP
A +
P control
SET (not at A-Sim)
Control
PI control t
mrmRMP_gef
mrwFEP_RSK * fgmFGAKT + mrwFEP_RSP
t
Figure MEREGR04: ON + function curve
All rights reserved by Robert Bosch GmbH, including in cases of proprietary rights applications. All rights of disposal such as copying and passing on to us.
19 April 2002 Overview - Cruise control DS / ESA
Page 2-78 EDC15 +
Y S01 281/120 - VG2
0 bosch
After activation of the GRA - GRA is a state of A + - Desired amount initial value
calculated. This initial value is a maximum of the following sizes:
-
GRA - Desired amount proportional to the current speed with the
Proportionality mrwFEP_PAW
- current injection quantity mrmM_EAKT
- GRA - Desired amount mrmM_EFGR when the GRA - Condition A + from GRA - Condition
KEEP from activated
The set speed is increased subsequently with reference to a speed ramp. The
Initial value of the ramp, the current vehicle speed at the time of activation of the
GRA - A + condition, the ramp slope is (mrwFEP_RSK * fgmFGAKT +
mrwFEP_RSP). Means P - controller (limiting mrmFGR_roh only to the integer -
Values, boundary of mrmM_EFGR on [0, limiting amount mroM_EBEGR]) with the
Control parameters mrwFRP_ .. is the current driving speed to the ramp speed
regulated. If the determined GRA - request amount greater than or equal to the maximum fuel delivery, the
Ramp rate does not change. The ramp rate is increased as long
as long as the ON + contact, is detected as pressed. After releasing the ON + contact
is the current driving speed to the new GRA - target speed.
Is the acceleration of the vehicle is less than or equal to mrwFEP_BOU such a transition
in the GRA - HOLD state, the current GRA desired quantity in the mrmM_EFGR
Integrator of the PI controller for the GRA - HOLD condition will be accepted.
Otherwise, the current GRA is - mrmM_EFGR desired quantity at the time of release,
if the current request is greater than the amount Mengenschwellwert mrwFEP_MMP to the
Proportional factor mrwFEP_FMG reduced. If the GRA - request amount is less than or equal to the
Threshold value, the proportional factor mrwFEP_FMK. This new GRA - request amount is
reduced by means of ramp with the ramp slope mrwFEP_RSU. If the current
Vehicle speed is greater than or equal to the GRA - target speed, the ramp rate is
doubled. If the vehicle acceleration is less than or equal to and the mrwFEP_BOU
current vehicle speed is less than or equal to the target speed is increased, the offset
mrwFEP_AVD is from GRA - Condition A + in the GRA - Condition KEEP passed,
the current driving speed is set to the desired speed. The GRA -
Desired quantity mrmM_EFGR is the integrator of the PI controller for the GRA - Condition
KEEP taken.
All rights reserved by Robert Bosch GmbH, including in cases of proprietary rights applications. All rights of disposal such as copying and passing on to us.
DS / ESA Overview - Cruise control 19 April 2002
0 bosch
EDC15 +
Y S01 281/120 - VG2
Page 2-79
GRA - Condition A-:
Button
"On"
(Debounced)
1
0
t
mrmM_EFGR
Initial value
mrwFEM_PEM
mrwFEM_RSU
t
V
V_act
V_cmd
V_Sollwertrampe
mrwFEM_RSM
fgmBESCH> = mrwFEM_BOD
and V> v_cmd-mrwFEM_AVD
t
mrwALL_SPZ
FGR Fashion
N
E
U
T
R
A
L
ON _bergang
KEEP
ON
SET P control
mrwFRM_ ...
Control
PI control
mrwFP ...
mrwFI ...
t
t
mrmRMP_gef
- (MrwFEM_RSK * fgmFGAKT + mrwFEM_RSM)
Figure MEREGR05: A function pattern
All rights reserved by Robert Bosch GmbH, including in cases of proprietary rights applications. All rights of disposal such as copying and passing on to us.
19 April 2002 Overview - Cruise control DS / ESA
Page 2-80 EDC15 +
Y S01 281/120 - VG2
0 bosch
After activation of the GRA - state ON is a GRA - request amount initial value
calculated. This initial value is a maximum of the following sizes:
-
-
current injection quantity mrmM_EAKT
GRA - Desired amount mrmM_EFGR
The set speed is decreased subsequently with reference to a speed ramp.
The initial value of the ramp, the current vehicle speed at the time of activation
the GRA - state ON, the ramp slope is (mrwFEM_RSK * fgmFGAKT +
mrwFEM_RSM). Means P - controller with control parameters mrwFRM_ .. is the current
Speed controlled to ramp speed. If the determined GRA -
Desired amount less than or equal to zero, the ramp rate is not changed.
The GRA - Desired amount mrmM_EFGR is on [0, limiting amount mroM_EBEGR]
limited. The ramp rate is decreased, as long as the A-contact and pressed
is detected. After releasing the ON contact the current driving speed is to
new GRA - target speed.
The deceleration of the vehicle smaller mrwFEM_BOD (application as negative
Acceleration), then in the GRA - Condition KEEP gone, leaving the current GRA
Desired quantity mrmM_EFGR into the integrator of the PI controller for the GRA - HOLD state
is adopted.
Otherwise, the current GRA is - mrmM_EFGR desired quantity at the time of release
increased by a factor proportional mrwFEM_PEM proportional to the current speed
(MrmM_EFGR = mrmM_EFGR + fgmFGAKT * mrwFEM_PEM). This new GRA -
Desired quantity is increased by ramp with the ramp slope mrwFEM_RSU. If the current
Vehicle speed is less than CCS - the target speed, the ramp rate is
doubled. If the vehicle acceleration is equal to or greater and is the mrwFEM_BOD
current speed is greater than the GRA - target speed, reduced by the offset
mrwFEM_AVD is from GRA - state ON to GRA - Condition KEEP passed,
the current driving speed is set to the desired speed. The GRA -
Desired amount into the integrator of the PI controller for the GRA - HOLD state
taken.
All rights reserved by Robert Bosch GmbH, including in cases of proprietary rights applications. All rights of disposal such as copying and passing on to us.
DS / ESA Overview - Cruise control 19 April 2002
0 bosch
EDC15 +
Y S01 281/120 - VG2
Page 2-81
GRA - WA state from above:
Button
"WA"
(Debounced)
1
0
t
mrmM_EFGR
Initial value
t
V
fgmFGAKT
V_Sollwertrampe
mrwWA_RSW
fgmFGAKT <v_cmd + mrwWA_VRO
V_cmd
t
FGR Fashion
N
E
U
T
R
A
L
KEEP
WA top
P control
PI control t
t
-MrwWA_RSW
mrmRMP_gef
-MrwWA_RSW / 2
Figure MEREGR06: WA from above function curve
All rights reserved by Robert Bosch GmbH, including in cases of proprietary rights applications. All rights of disposal such as copying and passing on to us.
19 April 2002 Overview - Cruise control DS / ESA
Page 2-82 EDC15 +
Y S01 281/120 - VG2
0 bosch
After clicking on the WA-contact, the current amount on the percentage factor
mrwWA_PAV reduced and the new GRA - requested quantity. The travel speed is in
Subsequently, on the basis of a speed ramp mroV_RAMP lowered. The initial value
the ramp is the current speed at the time of activation of the GRA -
WA state from above, the ramp rate is mrwWA_RSW. Means P - controller with the
Control parameters mrwF1W_ .. is the current driving speed to the ramp speed
regulated. The GRA desired quantity mrmM_EFGR is bounded on [0, mroM_EBEGR]. If the
actual vehicle speed is less the GRA - target speed plus mrwWA_VRO, the
Ramp rate halved. If the current speed is less than or equal to the GRA -
Set speed is, in the GRA - passed state HOLD, the GRA -
Desired quantity mrmM_EFGR into the integrator of the PI controller of the GRA - HOLD state
is adopted.
All rights reserved by Robert Bosch GmbH, including in cases of proprietary rights applications. All rights of disposal such as copying and passing on to us.
DS / ESA Overview - Cruise control 19 April 2002
0 bosch
EDC15 +
Y S01 281/120 - VG2
Page 2-83
GRA - WA state from below:
Button
"WA"
(Debounced)
1
0
t
mrmM_EFGR
Initial value
t
V
V_cmd
V_Sollwertrampe
mrwWA_RSW
V_Rampe> v_cmd-mrwWA_VRU
fgmFGAKT
t
FGR Fashion
N
E
U
T
R
A
L
Transition
Hold
WA from below
KEEP
P control PI controller PI controller
t
mrmRMP_gef
mrwWA_RSW
mrwWA_RSW / 2
t
Figure MEREGR07: WA from below function curve
All rights reserved by Robert Bosch GmbH, including in cases of proprietary rights applications. All rights of disposal such as copying and passing on to us.
19 April 2002 Overview - Cruise control DS / ESA
Page 2-84 EDC15 +
Y S01 281/120 - VG2
0 bosch
After clicking on the WA-contact of the initial value of the GRA is - desire the maximum amount
from the current amount and a mrmM_EAKT, the current speed with the
Factor mrwFEP_PAW proportional value. The driving speed is then submitted to
Hand of a speed ramp mroV_RAMP increased. The initial value of the ramp is the
current speed at the time of activation of the GRA - WA state from below,
the ramp slope is mrwWA_RSW. Means P - controller (limiting mrmFGR_roh only
to the integer - range of values, mrmM_EFGR is on [0, limiting amount mroM_EBEGR]
limited) with the control parameters mrwF1W_ .. is the current driving speed to
Ramp speed regulated.
If the ramp rate is greater than the GRA - set speed minus mrwWA_VRU,
the ramp rate is halved. If the determined GRA - request amount greater than the
Full-load, the speed ramp is stopped. If the ramp rate is greater
or equal to the GRA - set speed is in the GRA - Condition TRANSFER HOLD
changed. If the current speed is greater than or equal to the GRA -
Set speed is, in the GRA - passed state HOLD. This is as long as the
current speed is less than the GRA - target speed, the
Driving speed by PI controller with parameters mrwF2W_ .. for the P - share and
mrwFIW_ .. for the I - Percentage of the GRA - target speed introduced.
For the calculation of the mrmFGR_roh P - proportion only to the integer - number range
limited, while the I - share on [0, limiting amount mroM_EBEGR] is limited. The
GRA desired quantity mrmM_EFGR is bounded on [0, limiting amount mroM_EBEGR]. The
Integrator of the GRA - HOLD state is the transition to the last value of the GRA -
Desired amount preloaded.
All rights reserved by Robert Bosch GmbH, including in cases of proprietary rights applications. All rights of disposal such as copying and passing on to us.
DS / ESA Overview - Cruise control 19 April 2002
0 bosch
EDC15 +
Y S01 281/120 - VG2
Page 2-85
GRA - OFF state:
Switch
"Brake"
1
0
t
mrmM_EFGR
mrwFAS_RSB
mrwFAS_RAB
FGR Fashion
FGR-active
BRAKE
NEUTRAL
t
t
Figure MEREGR08: brake function curve
Button
"Off"
1
0
t
mrmM_EFGR
mrwFAS_RAS
mrwFAS_SRA
t
FGR Fashion
FGR-active
OFF
NEUTRAL
t
Figure MEREGR09: OFF function curve
All rights reserved by Robert Bosch GmbH, including in cases of proprietary rights applications. All rights of disposal such as copying and passing on to us.
19 April 2002 Overview - Cruise control DS / ESA
Page 2-86 EDC15 +
Y S01 281/120 - VG2
0 bosch
The GRA - OFF state is activated when the OFF from the keypad or another
Switch-off condition is detected.
If the GRA - OFF state by brake application delay threshold mrwFAS_VZM or
System error (brake, DZG) was initiated, there is a proportional reduction of the GRA -
Desired quantity at the beginning of the GRA - OFF state by the reduction factor mrwFAS_RSB.
Furthermore, the current GRA is - required quantity within the time mrwFAS_RAB to zero
reduced.
If the demolition by clutch actuation or by the appearance of a control panel error
Desired quantity immediately zero - caused, the GRA is.
In all other cases, a proportional reduction of the GRA done - request amount at the beginning
the GRA - OFF state by the reduction factor mrwFAS_RAS and subsequently a
Degradation of the GRA - desired quantity means quantity ramp with the ramp slope mrwFAS_SRA to
Zero. If the GRA - NEUTRAL state passed - required quantity zero, in the GRA. The
last valid setpoint speed is deleted if the GRA - OFF state by the
Clear contact dimFGL was caused, or is canceled during the active state
A + / A-(acceleration / deceleration) was carried out.
GRA - NEUTRAL state:
In GRA - GRA is the NEUTRAL state - desired quantity set to zero.
GRA - HOLD state:
In GRA - HOLD state by means of a PI controller, the current speed to the value
the GRA - target speed mrmFG_SOLL regulated. The control parameters used are
mrwFP2_ .. for the P - share and mrwFI2_ .. for I - component. For the determination of
mrmFGR_roh of I is - part of the controller on [0, maximum fuel mroM_EBEGR] limited,
while the P - part only on the integer - is limited boundaries. The GRA - Desired amount
mrmM_EFGR is limited to [0, maximum fuel mroM_EBEGR]. If by means of the accelerator pedal
the GRA desired quantity mrmM_EFGR over suppressed, the integrator of the PI controller is stopped.
After completion of this condition and if the current vehicle speed is less than CCS
- Target speed plus mrwALL_IAV is, the integrator is enabled again.
All rights reserved by Robert Bosch GmbH, including in cases of proprietary rights applications. All rights of disposal such as copying and passing on to us.
DS / ESA Overview - Cruise control 19 April 2002
0 bosch
EDC15 +
Y S01 281/120 - VG2
Page 2-87
2.8.5 GRA-target acceleration
The GRA-target acceleration mrmRMPSLOP is calculated as follows:
GRA-state
A +
mrmRMPSLOP
(MrwFEP_RSK *
fgmFGAKT) +
mrwFEP_RSP
- ((MrwFEM_RSK *
fgmFGAKT) +
mrwFEM_RSM)
mrwWA_RSW
mrwWA_RSW / 2
0
0
-MrwWA_RSW
-MrwWA_RSW / 2
0
0
Condition
ON
WA from below
WA from below
WA from below
WA from below
WA top
WA top
WA top
otherwise
mroV_RAMP <= mrmFG_SOLL - mrwWA_VRU
mroV_RAMP> mrmFG_SOLL - mrwWA_VRU
mroV_RAMP> = mrmFG_SOLL
fgmFGAKT> = mrmFG_SOLL
fgmFGAKT> = mrmFG_SOLL + mrwWA_VOR
fgmFGAKT <mrmFG_SOLL + mrwWA_VOR
fgmFGAKT <= mrmFG_SOLL
The GRA-target acceleration is PT1 filtered with the memory factor mrwPT1_bes. To
Beginning of A +, A and WA is exposed to the filtering (see Fig MEREGR04-07), as
otherwise the transmission would react too slowly. The filtered target acceleration is in
mrmRMP_gef displayed.
All rights reserved by Robert Bosch GmbH, including in cases of proprietary rights applications. All rights of disposal such as copying and passing on to us.
19 April 2002 Overview - Cruise control DS / ESA
Page 2-88 EDC15 +
Y S01 281/120 - VG2
0 bosch
2.8.6 Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC)
Survey
To the function of the Adaptive Cruise Control (Adaptive Cruise Control - ADR) will implement
in the control unit received the CAN message ADR1. The contained in this message
Torque requirement is translated into a corresponding desired quantity. The debounced and
plausibility signals are provided via the CAN message GRA available to the ACC.
Activation
The activation of the ACC function is still by application of cowFUN_FGR (9 - ACC
Operation). In addition, the evaluation of the CAN message ADR1 on the software switch must
cowVAR_ADR be activated.
Description of the software switch cowVAR_ADR:
Bit position
1
Decimal comment
2Auswertung the message ADR1 active
Termination conditions
Under the following conditions disconnection of the ACC:
irreversible (by appropriately applying the fault debounce time):
-
-
-
-
-
-
Message count error (fbbEACC_B)
incorrect checksum of the ADR1 message (fbbEACC_C)
Flag "ADR defective" set in ADR1 message (fbbEACC_D)
Detected error ID in the required torque in ADR1 message (fbbEACC_F)
ACC requirement below the v-threshold mrwFAS_BVK (fbbEACC_V)
one of the following error paths defective: fboSPWG, fboSFGG, fboSBRE, fboSDZG,
fboSCAN
- Message timeout error fbbEACC_Q debounced defective
- Plausible ACC torque requirement during OFF signal from the keypad or
Driver braking (fbbEACC_P)
OFF signal: dimFGA dimFGL or equal to 0
Driver braking: dimBRE dimBRK or equal to 0
- General plausibility error (fbbEACC_A)
reversible:
-
-
-
-
-
Message timeout ADR1 accrued
Request bit "release torque request" message in ADR1 not set
Status ADR in ADR1 message is not "ADR active"
zmmSYSERR set, bit 5
Met GRA-shutdown condition and not hidden by mrwACCAUSx
mrwACCAUS1: If bit x is set, then executes GRA-off condition (mroFGR_ABN)
Number x to shutdown the ACC
mrwACCAUS2: If bit x is set, then executes GRA-off condition (mroFGR_ABN)
Number (x +16) to switch off the ACC
- Error path fboSFGA defective
All rights reserved by Robert Bosch GmbH, including in cases of proprietary rights applications. All rights of disposal such as copying and passing on to us.
DS / ESA Overview - Cruise control 19 April 2002
0 bosch
EDC15 +
Y S01 281/120 - VG2
Page 2-89
Basically, the requested torque after at one of the inputs dimFGP is accepted,
was detected or dimFGW a positive edge. If the ACC operation is interrupted
again waiting for og edge before the torque intervention is allowed. For the cut-off
on vehicle speed threshold mrwFAS_BVK can this behavior mrwALL_DEF (see
may be disabled).
If one of the stopping conditions described detected, the amount mrmM_EFGR is
a ramp with a slope of mrwACC_RAMP reduced to 0.
Description of Message mrmACC_SAT:
Bit position
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
Decimal comment
1 "release torque demand" OR not set ADR Status
than "ADR active"
2Fehlerkennung in torque requirement
4Botschaftstimeout or inconsistency
8Botschaftszhler incorrect
16Checksumme incorrect
32Flag "ADR defective" set
64Momentanforderung during OFF from the keypad or
Driver braking
128Momentanforderung during fgmFGAKT below the threshold
mrwFAS_BVK
Torque requirement
The requested torque is about the normalization moment mrwMULINF3 and the specific
indexed consumption mrmBI_SOLL in a corresponding amount converted and
mrmM_EFGR the system provided. The amount mrmM_EFGR is limited to
mrmM_EBEGR, the unlimited value contains the message mrmFGR_roh.
CAN
The ACC function works with the following CAN messages:
received message ADR1:
The following information from the ADR1 message are - apart from the calculation of the
Checksum - processed by the engine control unit:
- Torque requirement ACC
- Message counter
The message counter is (so) evaluated analogously to the received message GRA.
(Record Labels: mrwACC_Bmn, mrwACC_Bmx)
- Defect ADR,
set leads to the ACC switch off
- Status of ADR
Status ADR has 01 - be "active ADR" so that torque intervention is allowed
- Release torque requirement
not set leads to the ACC switch off
All rights reserved by Robert Bosch GmbH, including in cases of proprietary rights applications. All rights of disposal such as copying and passing on to us.
19 April 2002 Overview - Cruise control DS / ESA
Page 2-90 EDC15 +
Y S01 281/120 - VG2
0 bosch
message sent GRA:
About the Embassy GRA FGR debounced keypad signals are provided. The
Processing of the signals is analogous to the function FGR with a simulation.
The digital inputs are as follows on the items of GRA message shown:
dimFGL "GRA / ADR - Main switch"
dimFGAinvertiert to "GRA / ADR - Tipschalter OFF"
dimFGP "GRA / ADR - Tipschalter set / decelerate"
dimFGW "GRA / ADR - Tipschalter resume / accelerate"
The information "GRA / ADR delay" or "accelerate GRA / ADR" are set when
the signals dimFGP or dimFGW for the time mrwALL_TPZ persist uninterrupted.
message sent Motor2:
In ACC operation, the GRA status in the Motor2 embassy following meaning, in
this case is equal to mrmACCDDE2 S_GRA:
S_GRA.1 S_GRA.0 comment
00Fehler fbbEACC_D, ADR - defect from ADR1 message
FbbEACC_F error, error identification 0xFFh the required torque
Error in the path fboSFGA (control panel)
all reversible termination conditions (see above)
01 "ADR active" and mroACC_OFF flag not set
10 "ADR active" and driver's desired quantity mrmM_EPWG> ACC
Requirement mrmM_EFGR
11alle irreversible shutdown (see above)
All rights reserved by Robert Bosch GmbH, including in cases of proprietary rights applications. All rights of disposal such as copying and passing on to us.
DS / ESA Overview - Cruise control 19 April 2002
0 bosch
EDC15 +
Y S01 281/120 - VG2
Page 2-91
2.8.7 Status Display, shutdown and application information
2.8.7.1 Status Display
Description of olda GRA status mroFGR_SAT:
WertHEX
0000H
0010H
0020H
0030h
0040H
0050h
0060h
0070H
0080H
0090H
Decimal
0
16
32
48
64
80
96
112
128
144
Comment
GRA fashion NEUTRAL
GRA Fashion TIP UP
GRA Fashion TIP DOWN
GRA Mode ON + (or SET)
GRA Mode ON (or SET)
GRA fashion WA from above
GRA fashion WA from below
GRA Mode OFF
GRA fashion HOLD
GRA fashion ACC operation
Description of the GRA status in the fashion TIP UP / DOWN TIP (decimal value is the value for TIP
To add the UP / DOWN TIP):
WertHEX
0010H or 0020H
0011H or 0021h
Decimal comment
TIP 0Abwarten time
1Errechnen the target speed
Description of the GRA status in the fashion A + / A-(decimal value is the value for A + / A-to
add):
Decimal KommentarWertHEX
0030h or 0040H0Abwarten SET - time
0031h or 0041H1Anfangswert calculate
0032h or 0042H2Rampenbehandlung
0033H or 0043H3bergang Hold
Description of the GRA status in the fashion WA-oben/WA-unten (decimal value is the value for WA-
/ to add up WA-bottom):
Decimal KommentarWertHEX
Calculate 0050h or 0060H0Anfangswert
0051H or 0061H1Rampenbehandlung
0052h or 0062H2bergang Hold
Description of the GRA status in the fashion OFF (decimal value is added to the value for OFF):
Decimal KommentarWertHEX
Calculate 0070H0Anfangswert
0072H2Rampenbehandlung
0073H3Rampenbehandlung brake
Description of the GRA status in the fashion HOLD (decimal value should be the value for HOLD
add):
WertHEX
0081h
Decimal comment
Initialize 1Integrator with mrmM_EAKT
All rights reserved by Robert Bosch GmbH, including in cases of proprietary rights applications. All rights of disposal such as copying and passing on to us.
19 April 2002 Overview - Cruise control DS / ESA
Page 2-92 EDC15 +
Y S01 281/120 - VG2
0 bosch
2.8.7.2 shutdown
Description of olda GRA shutdown mroFGR_ABN:
Decimal
0
1
2
3
4
5
Comment
No switch-off
From the control panel
From brake
From clutch
From the control panel error
From over-B - Threshold (red. brake detection), or GRA disabled
(CowFUN_FGR, diagnosis)
6out V too big / too small V
7out N too large
8Aus N too small
9Gang (V / N) is too small
10Gangwechsel (V / N) - deviation
11Bleibende positive deviation
12Positive deviation
13Negative deviation
14Fehler brake or DZG
15Warten at the end of the control panel operation
16Wahlhebel of the automatic transmission in the 1-position, N, R or P
17ASR or MSR intervention
18Batteriespannung too small
19Crash
20ESP intervention
21fbbEFGC_B, fbbEFGC_C, fbbEFGC_P or fbbEFGC_Q finally broken
22Fehler concerning whether the interface engine - gearbox
(The conditions 11, 12 and 13 are only in the GRA - Condition KEEP checked.)
The switch-off conditions are bit-coded in the olda's mroFGR_AB1 and mroFGR_AB2
shown.
Olda mroFGR_AB1: gestetzt bit n means n shutdown condition is present.
Olda mroFGR_AB2: gestetzt bit n means n +16 shutdown condition is present.
Description of Message mrmGRACoff: GRA-shutdown due to CAN message errors
Decimal comment
1falsche Checksum
2Botschaftfehlerzhlerfehler
2.8.7.2.1 GRA Off at default value for the ratio
In application "GRA on wheel torque" (cowFGR_Rmo = 1), the GRA is in an error
concerning the interface engine - gearbox and disabled mroFGR_ABN has the value 22 See
also chapter "Calculation of the currently valid transfer function, GRA Off at default value for
the speed ratio ".
All rights reserved by Robert Bosch GmbH, including in cases of proprietary rights applications. All rights of disposal such as copying and passing on to us.
DS / ESA Overview - Cruise control 19 April 2002
0 bosch
EDC15 +
Y S01 281/120 - VG2
Page 2-93
2.8.7.3 Application Notes
Description of the software switch GRA control element mrwALL_DEF:
Bit position
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
Decimal comment
1For contact available
(0: OFF contact does not exist (dimFGA OR dimFGL))
2dimFGW and dimFGA is error
(0: dimFGW and dimFGA is not an error)
4dimFGP and dimFGA is error
(0: dimFGP and dimFGA is not an error)
8dimFGA KWH is a control element
(0: dimFGA is no control element KWH)
16Ein simulation (GRA with delay)
(0: no A simulation (standard GRA))
32dimFGP and dimFGW is error
(0: dimFGP and dimFGW is not an error)
64dimFGL = 0 and dimFGA, dimFGP or dimFGW is error
(0: = 0 and dimFGL dimFGx is not an error)
1281: ACC: When switching off via driving speed under threshold,
is not for the resumption on a positive edge at
dimFGP or dimFGW serviced.
Application Information:
This corresponds to the GRA VW / AUDI Group specification of 07/11/1994, but can be made by
Compatible application be held for previous GRA. The following values must
be strictly adhered to.
DatensatzparameterGRA Spec 7.11.1994Fr previous GRA
mrwALL_MIN00
mrwALL_MAXVMAXVMAX
mrwALL_BER5 Km / h, or beliebigVMAX
mrwALL_SPZ> 00 *)
mrwFEM_RSK00
mrwFEP_RSK00
mrwFAS_BVGVMAXVMAX
mrwFAS_VDU0.750
mrwFAS_VDKVMAX25
*) This is also defined as in A simulation setting disabled, or accelerate at Vspec. = 0
is possible.
Explanation for VW / AUDI Group specification from 11/07/1994:
Keypad Error: does not appear in the specification, as previously evaluated (configurable,
Volume reduction without ramp immediately to 0).
If you cancel during actuated key (acceleration / deceleration) Vspec. is cleared (used in
no longer mentioned last version of the GRA Spec).
All rights reserved by Robert Bosch GmbH, including in cases of proprietary rights applications. All rights of disposal such as copying and passing on to us.
19 April 2002 Overview - Cruise control DS / ESA
Page 2-94 EDC15 +
Y S01 281/120 - VG2
0 bosch
2.9 Work speed control
2.9.1 Overview
The working speed control (ADC) is used to control the individual functions of the
Digital inputs of the GRA. That is, no operation is possible in a vehicle GRA ADR
is!
Input:
(Switch)
(Button)
(Button)
(Button)
(Switch)
dimADR
dimADP
dimADM
dimADW
dimHAN
dzmNmit
fgmFGAKT
mrmM_EWUN
mrmM_EPWG
mroM_EBEGR
nlmNLact
anmPWG
mrmSICH_F
mrmSTART_B
mrmT_SOLEE
mrmADR_Neo
mrmADR_Nfe
dig. Input ADR Active
dig. Input ADR +
dig. Input ADR
dig. Input ADR WA
dig. Input handbrake
=> DimDIGprel.6
=> DimDIGprel.0
=> DimDIGprel.2
=> DimDIGprel.C
=> DimDIGprel.3
Number of revolutions
current speed
synchronous request quantity
Desired quantity PWG
Full-load
Overrun active
Pedal position sensor
Safety case
Start bit
Ramp-up time (from diagnosis)
upper speed threshold (Diagnostic)
Fixed speed (of diagnosis)
Output:
mrmM_EADR
ehmFML2
Desired quantity ADR
ADR pilot light (With an active ADR is the
Pilot light above ehmFML2 driven.)
There are two types implemented the ADR. The first possibility is the variable ADR, the second
represents the fixed ADR dar. Both functions never occur together. The distinction
via the function switch cowFUN_FGR.
Description of the function switch cowFUN_FGR:
Decimal
3
6
7
8
Comment
GRA with VW / AUDI control panel (see FGR)
GRA with LT2 control panel (see FGR)
ADR variable working speed
ADR with a fixed operating speed
All rights reserved by Robert Bosch GmbH, including in cases of proprietary rights applications. All rights of disposal such as copying and passing on to us.
DS / ESA Overview - Work speed control 19 April 2002
0 bosch
EDC15 +
Y S01 281/120 - VG2
Page 2-95
2.9.1.1 states of the working speed control
Stand-by
D
A
C
Demolition Waiting period
B
E
C
Regulate
Figure MEREAD01: States of the ADR
The following ADR state transitions apply to the variable, as well as for the fixed
ADR. The ADR is first in the "stand-by".
A for activating the ADR has the engine speed is greater than the lower dzmNmit ADR
Drehzahleinschaltschwelle mrwADR_Neu and smaller than the upper ADR
Drehzahleinschaltschwelle mrmADR_Neo and FahrgeschwindigkeitfgmFGAKT
be less than the activation threshold mrwADR_VAK. Furthermore start shedding has done
be (mrmSTART_B = 0), the handbrake on his (dimHAN = 1) and then the
Be operated switch for ADR once (dimADR = 1, rising edge). During the transition to
the state "waiting time" the target speed is initialized with the actual speed.
B After the time mrwADR_t_f (state "waiting period"), the ADR is in the state
"Rules" next program. As a reference value the known actual speed will be used.
mrmSTART_B
fgmFGAKT <mrwADR_VAK
dzmNmit> mrwADR_Neu
DEAD TIME
mrmT_SOLEE
&
dzmNmit <mrmADR_Neo
dimHAN
dimADR
DEAD TIME
ADR active
cowFUN_ADR.4
mrwADR_t_f
cowFUN_ADR.4
Figure MEREAD02: ADR switch-
C. If the controller is terminated by a termination condition (see below), as it enters the
State "Cancel".
D Only if no termination conditions are present, the controller will return to the state
"Stand-by" switched.
E If the controller is terminated by releasing the handbrake on or off via dimADR so
the target rotation speed is decreased by a ramp up to speed mrwADR_Nau. At
This speed is reached is the ADR in the state "standby" state.
All rights reserved by Robert Bosch GmbH, including in cases of proprietary rights applications. All rights of disposal such as copying and passing on to us.
19 April 2002 Quantity calculation - Working speed control DS / ESA
Page 2-96 EDC15 +
Y S01 281/120 - VG2
0 bosch
With the software switch cowFUN_ADR / Bit 4, the delayed ramp-up operation of the ADR
be set (after slaked start bit), ie after a through Diagnostics / channel 27 (in
Second increments) applicable time mrmT_SOLEE starts the run.
Erstinitialisierungswert for EEPROM: edwINI_ADT;
Default value when defective EEPROM: cowAGL_ADT
In the Message mrmADR_SAT of the ADR status is visible:
Decimal KommentarWertHEX
0001H1Die ADR is in "stand-by"
0002H2Die ADR is in the "waiting period"
0003H3Die ADR is in the "rules"
Canceled 0004H4ADR operation
00FFH255ADR is locked
2.9.2 Variable working speed control
The variable ADR consists of various tasks: "Working speed controller
Operation "," working speed governor increase / decrease "," working speed controller PI controller ",
"Working speed controller output", "working speed controller Cancel". DieAufgaben
"Working speed governor increase / decrease" and "working speed controller OFF" lead the
User request + ADR / ADR and OFF by. The task "work speed controller PI
Regulator "regulates the engine speed to the target speed. The task" work speed controller Cancel "
monitors all conditions which make one of the ADRs require discontinuation.
2.9.2.1 Operating speed controller operation
Depending on the operated contacts of the working speed controller (dimADP and dimADM)
and / or the PWG ADR target speed mrmADR_SOL, and the initial value of the integrator
the PI controller mroADR_I_A determined.
The contacts dimADP and dimADM, as well as the contacts for handbrake dimHAN and ADR
Active dimADR be debounced in the processing of the digital inputs.
Description of the function switch mrwADR_SOL:
Bit position
0
1
Decimal comment
1Sollwertvorgabe via keys (dimADP / dimADM)
2Sollwertvorgabe on PWG
All rights reserved by Robert Bosch GmbH, including in cases of proprietary rights applications. All rights of disposal such as copying and passing on to us.
DS / ESA Overview - Work speed control 19 April 2002
0 bosch
EDC15 +
Y S01 281/120 - VG2
Page 2-97
2.9.2.2 Working speed governor increase / decrease
Once the requirements of the ADR are given, and the wait time expired mrwADR_t_f
is, it can be activated by means of ADR + contact dimADP or ADR Contact dimADM. The
ADR-set speed is displayed by pressing mrmADR_SOL of ADR + (dimADP) or ADR
(DimADM) occupied with the current engine speed dzmNmit.
If the current engine speed is less than the threshold speed (dzmNmit <mrwADR_Nsc_) is
"active ADR" in the target rotational speed mrmADR_SOL a ramp with a slope of
mrwADR_dNP raised to the threshold speed mrwADR_Nsc. While the ramp is active
can not change the speed via the contacts ADR + (dimADP) or ADR (dimADM)
be. After reaching the target rotation speed Rampenendwerts mrmADR_SOL is
mrwADR_Nsc minimized.
As long as the ADR + (dimADP) or ADR (dimADM) contact is operated, the ADR
Target speed mrmADR_TSO within the speed limits and mrwADR_Neu mrmADR_Neo
increased or decreased over the ADR-ramp slope mrwADR_dNP or mrwADR_dNM.
If both buttons are pressed simultaneously, the ADR key has a higher priority and the
Target speed is lowered. If bit 0 of the function switch mrwADR_SOL set, the
Setpoint speed via button mroADR_TSA used for the formation of the maximum set speed.
The setpoint input via PWG takes place by means of the characteristic mrwADR_KL that an implementation
PWG allows (in percent) in speed. This speed mroADR_PSO after a
Minimum selection forwarded with mrmADR_Neo via a PT1 element mrwADR_GF if no
Error (fbbEPW2_L, fbbEPW2_H, fbbEPWG_L, fbbEPWG_H or mrmSICH_F) is set. At
set bit 1 of mrwADR_SOL the filtered speed mroADR_PWG to
Maximum formation of the target speed allowed.
After each working speed controller increase / decrease over the keys or the PWG
ADR target speed mrmADR_SOL with the current engine speed dzmNmit and the integrator
of the PI controller mroADR_I_A preset with the current request amount mrmM_EWUN. The
State of ADR in increasing or decreasing is condition "rules".
If RPM specification of the ADR on PWG (cowFUN_FV2 = 1 and mroADR_PGW> 0)
or active solid ADR (mrmADR_SAT = 3 and cowFUN_FGR = 8 and cowFUN_FV2 = 1)
be the abhnigen driving behavior-KF quantities (mrmM_EPWG and mrmM_EPWGR see
Chap. 2.6.2 Speed-dependent driving behavior) set to 0. While turning the ADR non-
Amount jump the driver's desired quantity produced, is the driving performance of I-KF before shutdown
Share it PI controller (mtoADR_I_A) with the current driver's desired quantity mrmM_EWUN
initialized.
All rights reserved by Robert Bosch GmbH, including in cases of proprietary rights applications. All rights of disposal such as copying and passing on to us.
19 April 2002 Quantity calculation - Working speed control DS / ESA
Page 2-98 EDC15 +
Y S01 281/120 - VG2
0 bosch
Speed-dependent. FVH
Geschwindigkeitsabh. FVH
mrm M_EPW GR
mrmM_EPWGR
Speed-dependent. FVH
Geschwindigkeitsabh. FVH
cowFUN_FVH
mrmM_EPWG
mrmM_EPWG
mroADR_PWG> 0
cowFUN_FV2
&
mrmADR_SAT = 3
cowFUN_FGR = 8
cowFUN_FV2
> 1
&
Figure MEREAD06: ADR on PW6
Description of the function switch cowFUN_FV2:
Decimal comment
Not switching off 0Fahrverhaltenkennfeld with active ADR
1Fahrverhaltenkennfeld switching off is at ADR speed setting by PWG
2.9.2.3 Working speed controller PI controller
The PI controller of the ADR regulates the engine speed dzmNmit to ADR target speed mrmADR_SOL
with the parameters mrwADP_ ... and mrwADI_ .... The control parameters are still after
Separately distinguished small-signal and large-signal according to P and I components. At a transition
e.g. of increase / decrease to state "rules" may at the regulator output no amount of jump
. occur The initial amount of the PI controller mrmM_EADR is the maximum fuel
mroM_EBEGR limited. The ADR-set speed is in mrmADR_SOL, the I component of the PI controller
visible on the olda mroADR_I_A and the P component on the olda mroADR_P_A. The state
ADR is the state of "rules". The maximum speed is about the mrmADR_Neo
Adaption channel 28 via diagnostic interface with adjustable Login (upper / lower limit:
mrwADR_vmn or mrwADR_vmx).
All rights reserved by Robert Bosch GmbH, including in cases of proprietary rights applications. All rights of disposal such as copying and passing on to us.
DS / ESA Overview - Work speed control 19 April 2002
0 bosch
dimADP
EDC15 +
Y S01 281/120 - VG2
Page 2-99
mrmADR_Neo
MIN
mroADR_TSO
RAMP
mrwADR_dNP
mroADR_TSO
mrwADR_Neu
MAX
RAMP
mrwADR_SOL.0
mrwADR_dNM
dimADM
mrmADR_Neo
MIN
mroADR_PWG
PT1
MAX
mrmADR_SOL
anmPWG
KL
mroADR_PSO mrwADR_GF
mrwADR_KL
fbbEPW2_L
fbbEPWG_L
fbbEPW2_H
fbbEPWG_H
mrmSICH_F
mrwADR_SOL.1
> 1
mrmADR_SOL
mrwADR_Nsc
MAX
mrmADR_SOL
mrwADR_Nsc
mrmADR_SOL
RAMP
MIN
mrwADR_dNP
dzmNmit <mrwADR_Nsc
mrmADR_SOL <mrwADR_Nsc
ADR active
&
Figure MEREAD03: speed determination of the ADR
For mrmADR_Neo is Erstinitialisierungswert for EEPROM: edwINI_ADV;
Default value when defective EEPROM: cowAGL_ADV
All rights reserved by Robert Bosch GmbH, including in cases of proprietary rights applications. All rights of disposal such as copying and passing on to us.
19 April 2002 Quantity calculation - Working speed control DS / ESA
Page 2-100 EDC15 +
Y S01 281/120 - VG2
0 bosch
mrmADR_SOL
dzmNmit
I CONTROLS
mroADR_I_A
ADR demolition
mrwADI_ ... mroM_EBEGR
mroADR_P_A 0
1
CONTROLS
mrmM_EADR
P
mrwADP_ ... mroM_EBEGR
Figure MEREAD05: Controller structure of the ADR
2.9.2.4 Working speed controller resumption
The activation of the WA is only in the states stand by and wait, and application of
Setpoint selection via push button possible. From the states standby and waiting time after
Abblauf the waiting time, the set speed in a state of control with the WA-speed mrmADR_SET
occupied. When changing the setpoint speed the WA-speed is to me the current target speed
occupied.
The keypad WA state is detected when
- DimADW (WA button pressed)
- DzmNmit> mrwADR_Neu
- DzmNmit <mrmADR_Neo
- MrmADR_SET <> 0
- ADR in the state stand-by OR
- ADR in the state waiting time.
If the keypad WA state recognized and is the actual speed> mrmADR_SET, so is the
new state of mroWA_Stat WA from above, is the actual speed <mrmADR_SET so is the
new state of mroWA_Stat WA from below.
If as a simultaneously operated by the dimADW, dimADM and dimADP more keys, so
the function according to the priority list dimADM, dimADP, dimADW is executed.
If the condition standby simultaneously operated dimADW and dimADM, the WA speed is
mrmADR_SET assigned 0.
Resumption from above:
AND
AND
AND
AND
In the transition from latency in accordance with rules, the target speed is occupied by dzmNmit, and in
Result based on a speed ramp with a slope of mrwADR_dWM to mrmADR_SET
introduced.
Recovery from below:
In the transition from latency in accordance with rules, the target speed is occupied by dzmNmit, and in
Result based on a speed ramp with a slope of mrwADR_dWP to mrmADR_SET
introduced. If the determined ADR request amount is greater than the maximum fuel then the
Speed ramp stopped.
All rights reserved by Robert Bosch GmbH, including in cases of proprietary rights applications. All rights of disposal such as copying and passing on to us.
DS / ESA Overview - Work speed control 19 April 2002
0 bosch
EDC15 +
Y S01 281/120 - VG2
Page 2-101
Recognized ADR rules and state = WA
In the transition from latency to rules of integrator of the PI controller with the current is
Desired quantity allocated. While regulating the ADR quantity mrmM_EADR on [0,
mroM_EBEGR] limited. If the current speed = mrmADR_SET as the state WA
deleted and the I component mroADR_I_A again with the current request amount mrmM_EWUN
pre-assigned.
The current set speed in WA in the Oldas for speed influence over key
mroADR_TSO, mroADR_TAS shown.
In the olda mroWA_STAT the Wiederaufnahmeart is visible:
Bit position
0
1
Decimal comment
1Wiederaufnahme from above
2Wiederaufnahme from below
All rights reserved by Robert Bosch GmbH, including in cases of proprietary rights applications. All rights of disposal such as copying and passing on to us.
19 April 2002 Quantity calculation - Working speed control DS / ESA
Page 2-102 EDC15 +
Y S01 281/120 - VG2
0 bosch
2.9.2.5 Operating speed controller OFF
In "working speed controller OFF" ADR setpoint speed via the ADR-ramp is
mrwADR_dNA lowered to speed mrwADR_Nau. Once the ADR setpoint speed
The controller output is achieved turn-off mrwADR_Nau switched to zero
(MrmM_EADR = 0) and only the idle controller remains active. Shall be considered as breaking conditions
Here, only the parking brake is not operated (dimHAN = 0) or the ADR switch is not actuated
(DimADR = 0), or start shedding (mrmSTART_B = 0) is not yet done.
In the olda mroADR_AUS the Ausschaltkondition is visible:
Bit position
0
1
2
Decimal
1
2
4
Comment
OFF via ADR switch dimADR = 0
OFF with manual brake dimHAN = 0
Delay due to start shedding mrmSTART_B = 1
2.9.2.6 Working speed controller demolition
The ADR will be canceled under the following conditions. In the olda mroADR_ABB is the
Termination condition is visible:
o) Speed fgmFGAKT greater mrwADR_VAK (mroADR_ABB = 1),
o) Speed dzmNmit greater mrwADR_Nao (mroADR_ABB = 2),
o) Speed dzmNmit smaller mrwADR_Nau (mroADR_ABB = 4),
o) is a positive system deviation fbbEADRpR: Speed difference in the "rules" greater
as a threshold mrwADR_pRA fbwEADRpRA for a time demolition of ADR and entry
ADR positive deviation of the error in the error memory (mroADR_ABB = 8),
o) with negative deviation fbbEADRnR without pressing through the PWG:
Speed difference is in the "rules" of less than threshold mrwADR_nRA for a time
fbwEADRnRA and desired amount of ADR greater than or equal to the desired amount by the
PWG (mrmM_EADR mrmM_EPWG) Demolition of ADR and ADR entry of the error
negative deviation in the error memory (mroADR_ABB = 16),
o) with negative deviation fbbEADRnR with overpressures by the PWG:
Speed difference is in the "rules" of less than threshold mrwADR_nRA for a time
mrwADR_t_R and less than the requested quantity by the PWG desired amount of ADR
(MrmM_EADR <mrmM_EPWG) Demolition of ADR without error entry (mroADR_ABB =
32)
In or out DZG Terminal 15 is defective (fboSDZG <> 0), the control mode also
canceled, but there is no output on mroADR_ABB. If you cancel, the
Controller output is immediately switched to zero (mrmM_EADR = 0) and the normal idle speed control
is active again.
The state is the state of ADR "Cancel". If none of these termination conditions to more
and is either dimADR or dimHAN back to 0, then the ADR in the "Stand-by"
switched. After renewed activation (dimADR = 1 and dimHAN = 1), after the ADR
Time mrwADR_t_f (state "waiting period") released again.
All rights reserved by Robert Bosch GmbH, including in cases of proprietary rights applications. All rights of disposal such as copying and passing on to us.
DS / ESA Overview - Work speed control 19 April 2002
0 bosch
EDC15 +
Y S01 281/120 - VG2
Page 2-103
K15 from
fboSDZG <> 0
fgmFGAKT> mrwADR_VAK
dzmNmit> mrwADR_Nao
> 1
dzmNmit <mrwADR_Nau
mrmADR_SAT == 3
ADR demolition
&
(MrmADR_SOL - dzoNmit)> mrwADR_pRA
DEAD TIME
fbwEADRpRA
(MrmADR_SOL - dzoNmit) <mrwADR_nRA
mrmM_EADR> = mrmM_EPWG
&
DEAD TIME
fbwEADRnRA
&
mrmM_EADR <mrmM_EPWG
dimHAN
DEAD TIME
mrwADR_t_R
> 1
dimADR
Off ADR
Figure MEREAD04: termination conditions of the ADR
Is detected with active labor speed controller terminal 15, so the ADR request quantity is
mrmM_EADR, and the ADR-set speed mrmADR_SOL immediately set to zero.
2.9.2.7 lamp test
After ignition on the ADR lamp is driven for the time mrwADR_t_L.
2.9.2.8 Configuration
About cowFUN_ADR the engagement of the ADR on other functions is configurable. Is
set cowFUN_ADR.0 so with the handbrake applied, the error FGG plausibility with
Speed and volume not reported (see monitoring concept FGG). Is with cowFUN_ADR.1
selected whether the ADR affects the parameter set selection of assets Ruckeldmpers. Is
set cowFUN_ADR.1 so can be selected with cowFUN_ADR.2 which parameter sets
vomAktivenRuckeldmpferverwendetwerden (sh.AktiverRuckeldmpfer,
Parameter set selection). Is cowFUN_ADR.3 set and work speed control is in the
State "rules" (mrmADR_SAT = 3) there is a shutdown of the exhaust gas recirculation. About
cowFUN_ADR.4, the automatic ramp can be set (see Sect. 2.9.1.1.).
The remaining bits of cowFUN_ADR are not used.
All rights reserved by Robert Bosch GmbH, including in cases of proprietary rights applications. All rights of disposal such as copying and passing on to us.
19 April 2002 Quantity calculation - Working speed control DS / ESA
Page 2-104 EDC15 +
Y S01 281/120 - VG2
0 bosch
2.9.3 Fixed Work speed control
2.9.3.1 Operation
In contrast to the variable ADR, the setpoint is at the fixed ADR a fixed predetermined
Value (fixed operating speed mrmADR_Nfe), the by on the adaptation channel 29
Diagnostic interface with adjustable log in (upper / lower limit: mrwADR_fmn or
mrwADR_fmx).
Erstinitialisierungswert for EEPROM: edwINI_ADE;
Default value when defective EEPROM: cowAGL_ADE
If the conditions are given to enable the ADR (dimADR = 1, dimHAN = 1 and there are
no termination conditions), then after waiting mrwADR_t_f (see "Variable
ADR ") the ADR target speed mrmADR_SOL via Ramp mrwADR_dNP fixed to the
Working speed mrmADR_Nfe introduced. The waiting period must be observed before each activation.
If the ADR off via the switch ADR-active or over the handbrake, then the
Reduced setpoint speed via the ADR mrwADR_dNA ramp and the speed according to the
Desired quantity set (without ADR). All other termination conditions lead to immediate
Flow shut-off of the ADR controller (see also "variable ADR").
All rights reserved by Robert Bosch GmbH, including in cases of proprietary rights applications. All rights of disposal such as copying and passing on to us.
DS / ESA Overview - Work speed control 19 April 2002
0 bosch
EDC15 +
Y S01 281/120 - VG2
Page 2-105
2:10 maximum speed limit
The maximum speed limit (HGB) has the amount of fuel depending on the
current average driving speed fgmFGAKT abgeregeln. The of the
Maximum speed limit calculated amount mrmM_EHGB limits the desired quantity
mrmM_EWUNF (see "External lot of intervention").
The maximum speed limit is composed of four sub-tasks: the
Evaluation of the request via the CAN messages Niveau1 and Allrad1, the
Set-point tracking, the controller parameters selection and control.
fgm_VzuN
Controller parameter
selection
mrmM_EPWG
mrmM_EFGR
mroM_EBEGR
fgmFGAKT
Control
MEREHG04
mrwM_EMAX
mrmV_SOLHN
mrmV_SOLEE = 0
mrmV_HGBSW
Setpoint
tracking mrwHGBvMAX = 0
> 1
&
mrmHGB_Sta.1
mrmHGB_Sta.5
> 1
mrmM_EAKT + mrwM_HGB_d
mrwM_NBHNI
dzmNmit> mrwN_NBHNI
MIN
Slew rate
Limit
mrmM_EHGB
&
mrmHGB_Sta.2
mrmM_EAKT + mrwM_HGB_d
mrwHGB_ABS
mrwHGB_ANH
mrmEXM_HGB
mrwM_NBPNG
dzmNmit> mrwN_NBPNG
&
mrmHGB_Sta.6
Figure MEREHG01: Structure of the German
Commercial Code
fgm_VzuN
mroM_EBEGR
mrmM_EPWG
mrmM_EFGR
fgmFGAKT
mrmV_HGBSW
Driving speed ratio to speed
Limiting amount
Wunschmenge_PWG
Wunschmenge_FGR
Current Speed
Currently valid speed
All rights reserved by Robert Bosch GmbH, including in cases of proprietary rights applications. All rights of disposal such as copying and passing on to us.
19 April 2002 Overview - Maximum speed limit DS / ESA
Page 2-106 EDC15 +
Y S01 281/120 - VG2
0 bosch
The message is the mrmV_SOLEE on EEPROM set maximum. The
Setting the speed limit on EEPROM is accomplished via the fitting function of
Diagnosis (see also chapter Diagnostics), Mewertekanal 18 The top speed can
chosen within the limits mrwHGBvMIN minimum value and maximum value mrwHGBvMAX
be. Each time you save the adjustment of the current value as the maximum value for which is
next adjustments applied. Disabling the HGB and resetting of the maximum value
can only be done via the login function and password xcwPHGBOff.
If the HGB disabled so are the values mrmV_SOLEE (maximum speed) and
mrmV_SOLHN (tracking speed) = 0 When activated, is dependent on the
Driving speed and the operating point of a tracking speed.
The current speed limit mrmV_HGBSW is the minimum of all active
Requirements
- Limitation in the high-level: mrmHGB_Sta.1 = 1 means mrwHGBvHNI takes effect on
the speed limit.
- Limitation in reduction by Planetennachgelege:
mrwHGBvPNG influences the speed limit.
mrmHGB_Sta.5 means
- else: speed corresponding value from the EEPROM: mrmV_SOLEE.
Application Note: a value of mrmV_HGBSW = 0 means for the control 'no
Limitation '. Due to the minimum education above values of mrwHGBvHNI lead
or mrwHGBvPNG = 0, means that even at mrmV_SOLEE equal to 0 no limit
is performed.
The message mrmEXM_HGB indicates whether the HGB amount mrmM_EHGB influence on the
Desired quantity mrmM_EWUNF has.
The slew-rate limiting prevents lot of jumps that the disabling
Can occur through the speed limit or speed limit (see below). The
Parameters mrwHGB_ABS or mrwHGB_ANH give the maximum permissible level change for
Lowering or raising of. The slew-rate limitation is only active when the amount active
is limited (mrmEXM_HGB = 1) as the effectiveness of the control of the state
Disabled would otherwise be delayed (speed overshoot).
Secure deactivation of the HGB as EPROM (mrmV_SOLEE):
mrwHGBvMIN = 0; mrwHGBvMAX = 0;
Erstinitialisierungswert for EEPROM edwINI_HGB = 0;
Default value when defective EEPROM cowAGL_HGB = 0;
All rights reserved by Robert Bosch GmbH, including in cases of proprietary rights applications. All rights of disposal such as copying and passing on to us.
DS / ESA Overview - Maximum speed limit 19 April 2002
0 bosch
EDC15 +
Y S01 281/120 - VG2
Page 2-107
2.10.1 Evaluation of the request via Niveau1 and Allrad1
The requirements of the speed limit on Niveau1 and Allrad1 are
Message mrmHGB_Anf summarized.
Description of HGB_Anf:
Bit position
0
1
2
3
4
Decimal value meaning
1Anforderung a speed limit in the high-level
Niveau1, byte 2, bit 7 'MSG constraint'
2Verbaucodierung - built engine in the Hunter
Niveau1, Byte5, bit 4 'Vehicle level'
4frei
8frei
16Anforderung a speed limit reduction in
by PNG
Allrad1, Byte1, bit 6 'speed limit'
If an implausibility between the internal state 'engine installed in the Hunter'
diagnosed cowFUN_HUN and Verbaucodierung mrmHGB_Anf.1, the error
fbbENIV_P reported.
The status of Hch's speed limit is summarized in mrmHGB_Sta.
Description of HGB_Sta:
Bit position
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
Decimal
1
2
4
8
16
32
64
128
Importance
HGB for HNI - activated
HGB for HNI - active
HGB for HNI - Error while active
reserved
HGB for PNG - activated
HGB for PNG - active
HGB for PNG - Error while active
reserved
Delete GRA setpoint
The setpoint of the GRA is cleared under the following conditions (mrmFG_SOLL = 0)
-
At the time of activation of a speed limit by external intervention
(Positive edge at mrmHGB_Sta.2 or mrmHGB_Sta.5) was the GRA-state neutral
(MroFGR_SAT = 0)
- The requested speed (mrmV_HGBSW) is greater than the GRA setpoint
(MrmFG_SOLL)
- The resumption of contact is actuated when activatable GRA. Toggle:
mroFGR_AB1 and mroFGR_AB2 masked (logical AND) with mrwHGB_AB1 and
mrwHGB_AB2 are equal to 0
If the GRA setpoint is changed while the speed limit by set, this
no longer cleared as a result.
Evaluation of the request via Niveau1
All rights reserved by Robert Bosch GmbH, including in cases of proprietary rights applications. All rights of disposal such as copying and passing on to us.
19 April 2002 Overview - Maximum speed limit DS / ESA
Page 2-108 EDC15 +
Y S01 281/120 - VG2
0 bosch
The following conditions must be met in order limitation in the high-level is possible:
the record label cowFUN_HUN (engine installed in the Hunter) is set to 1
there are no errors that prohibit the speed limit (fboSFGG,
fboSPWG)
- the vehicle speed is less than mrwHGBvHNI - mrwHGBdHNI
If all conditions are met, the bit mrmHGB_Sta.0 is set, otherwise cleared.
If the bit is set mrmHGB_Sta.0, the Begrenzug in the high-level with the bit 'MSG
Constraint '(Niveau1, byte 2, bit 7 = mrmHGB_Anf.0) are activated. In this case,
the bit is set mrmHGB_Sta.1 and limits the speed to mrwHGBvHNI.
The limitation is deactivated by using bit 'MSG constraint' requirement
is withdrawn. If at this point the speed will be actively limited
(MrmEXM_HGB = 1), the limit will not be disabled when mrmPWGfi for the period
was mrwT_HGBLL smaller mrwHGB_PWG. As long as the limit is maintained, is
mroHGBLLho set by the delay, otherwise cleared. The bit mrmHGB_Sta.1
resets with Deaktvierung.
If during the limitation (mrmHGB_Sta.1 = 1) errors that a
Prohibit speed limit is in the state 'error while running'
(MrmHGB_Anf.2 = 1) passed. Now the speed (dzmNmit) is limited: above the
Speed mrwN_NBHNI the default value is used mrwM_NBHNI. Below the
Limiting speed is equal mrmM_EHGB mrmM_EAKT + mrwM_HGB_d (HGB amount
corresponds to the current amount plus cushion, since the two different quantities
Calculating frequencies have). The speed limiter is disabled by using the bit
'MSG constraint' the request is withdrawn.
-
-
fbbENIV_Q
fbbENIV_C
fbbENIV_B
fgmFGAKT <mrwHGBvHNI -
mrwHGBdHNI
cowFUN_HUN
> 1
&
mrmHGB_Sta.0
&
fboSFGG
fboSPWG
fbbENIV_P
> 1
> 1
mrmHGB_Sta.1
mrmEXM_HGB
mrmPWGfi
Switch-off
Delay
mrmHGB_Anf.0
mrmHGB_Sta.2
mroHGBLLho
&
&
mrmHGB_Sta.1
> 1
&
> 1
mrmHGB_Sta.2
Figure MEREHG05: requirement in high-level
All rights reserved by Robert Bosch GmbH, including in cases of proprietary rights applications. All rights of disposal such as copying and passing on to us.
DS / ESA Overview - Maximum speed limit 19 April 2002
0 bosch
EDC15 +
Y S01 281/120 - VG2
Page 2-109
The status of the speed limit in the high-level of the CAN message Motor7
sent:
Signal Name
Speed limit
activated
Speed limit
active
Byte
1
1
Bit
1
2
RCOS message
mrmHGB_Sta.0
mrmHGB_Sta.1
Evaluation of the request via Allrad1
The following conditions must be met in order limitation in reduction by PNG
is possible:
the record labels cowFUN_HUN (engine installed in the Hunter) and cowFUN_HAQ
(Manual switch Quattro) set to 1
- there are no errors that prohibit the speed limit (fboSFGG)
- the vehicle speed is less than + mrwHGBvPNG mrwHGBdPNG
If all conditions are met, the bit mrmHGB_Sta.4 is set, otherwise cleared.
If the bit is set mrmHGB_Sta.4 that Begrenzug can at reduction by PNG with the bit
'Speed limit' (Allrad1, Byte1, bit 6 = mrmHGB_Anf.4) are activated. In
this case, the bit is set mrmHGB_Sta.5 and the speed to mrwHGBvPNG
limited.
The limit is disabled by the bit about the 'speed limit'
Request is withdrawn. The bit mrmHGB_Sta.5 is at Deaktvierung
reset.
If during the limitation (mrmHGB_Sta.5 = 1) errors that a
Prohibit speed limit is in the state 'error while running'
(MrmHGB_Anf.6 = 1) passed. Now the speed (dzmNmit) is limited: above the
Speed mrwN_NBPNG the default value is used mrwM_NBPNG. Below the
Limiting speed is equal mrmM_EHGB mrmM_EAKT + mreM_HGB_d (HGB amount
corresponds to the current amount plus cushion, since the two different quantities
Calculating frequencies have). The speed limiter is disabled by using the bit
'Speed limit' the request is withdrawn.
-
All rights reserved by Robert Bosch GmbH, including in cases of proprietary rights applications. All rights of disposal such as copying and passing on to us.
19 April 2002 Overview - Maximum speed limit DS / ESA
Page 2-110 EDC15 +
Y S01 281/120 - VG2
0 bosch
fbbEALR_Q
fgmFGAKT <mrwHGBvPNG +
mrwHGBdPNG
cowFUN_HUN
cowFUN_HAQ
&
mrmHGB_Sta.4
&
&
fboSFGG
> 1
mrmHGB_Sta.5
&
&
mrmHGB_Sta.5
mrmHGB_Anf.4
&
mrmHGB_Sta.6
> 1
mrmHGB_Sta.6
Figure MEREHG06: Request for reduction by PNG
2.10.2 Setpoint tracking
The speed setpoint mrmV_HGBSW for the maximum speed limit is
not directly output as controller setpoint to the controller, but in advance of the so-called
Setpoint tracking manipulated. This function has the task of an under-or overshoot
the filtered vehicle speed based on the fixed speed set point, according to
To avoid slope or hill climbing.
The setpoint tracking leads the setpoint for the controller "slow" (via a PT1 element) from the
current velocity value approach to the desired or target value.
The setpoint tracking can assume three states (display in olda mroAKT_SWN):
1 ...
2 ...
3 ...
Released setpoint tracking
Switched point tracking
Off point tracking
All rights reserved by Robert Bosch GmbH, including in cases of proprietary rights applications. All rights of disposal such as copying and passing on to us.
DS / ESA Overview - Maximum speed limit 19 April 2002
0 bosch
v
mrmV_HGBSW
mrmV_SOLEE - mrwHGB_NAU
EDC15 +
Y S01 281/120 - VG2
Page 2-111
mrmV_SOLHN
fgmFGAKT
mrmV_SOLEE - mrwHGB_NIS
mrmV_SOLHN - mrwHGB_NAS
t
switched released off released
Commercial Code governs
Figure MEREHG02: Setpoint tracking
- Setpoint tracking enabled:
The setpoint tracking is enabled when the difference between the setpoint and
Driving speed is greater than a threshold applicative.
(MrmV_SOLHN - fgmFGAKT> mrwHGB_NAS - released> Set Point Tracking)
The tracking desired value mrmV_SOLHN is set to the desired value mrmV_HGBSW.
Application Note:
The applicative mrwHGB_NAS threshold must be set larger than mrwHGB_NIS,
otherwise, the state is "set point tracking enabled" no longer achieved.
All rights reserved by Robert Bosch GmbH, including in cases of proprietary rights applications. All rights of disposal such as copying and passing on to us.
19 April 2002 Overview - Maximum speed limit DS / ESA
Page 2-112 EDC15 +
Y S01 281/120 - VG2
0 bosch
- Setpoint tracking turned on:
The setpoint tracking is turned on when the difference between nachgefhrtem
Setpoint and the vehicle speed is less than or equal than a threshold applicative.
(MrmV_SOLHN - fgmFGAKT <= mrwHGB_NIS -> Set Point Tracking turned on)
The tracking desired value mrmV_SOLHN, starting with the current speed
fgmFGAKT is a PT1 element to the driving speed setpoint mrmV_HGBSW
introduced. The PT1 mrwPT1_HGB running gear independently. The
Output quantity mrmM_EHGB is limited to mroHGmax.
- Setpoint tracking off:
The setpoint tracking is switched off if the difference between the EEPROM
set speed limit mrmV_HGBSW and the tracked target value
smaller is the same as an applicative threshold
(MrmV_HGBSW - mrmV_SOLHN <= mrwHGB_NAU)
or is the controller limitation is less than a threshold applicative.
(MroHGmax <mrwHGB_MAU)
The tracking desired value mrmV_SOLHN receives the value mrmV_HGBSW and the
Setpoint tracking is turned off. The initial amount mrmM_EHGB is on
mroHGmax limited.
If the difference between mrmV_SOLHN - mrmV_HGBSW> mrwHGB_NAS replaced as
the state of the setpoint tracking of released off after, or of
switched on after released.
Sollwertnach-
released guidance
mrmV_SOLHN =
mrmV_HGBSW
Commercial Code does not
regulate
mroAKTSWN = 1
mrmV_SOLHN - fgmFGAKT
> MrwHGB_NAS
mrmV_SOLHN - fgmFGAKT
<= MrwHGB_NIS
mrmV_SOLHN - fgmFGAKT
> MrwHGB_NAS
Sollwertnach-
off management
mrmV_SOLHN =
mrmV_HGBSW
Commercial Code governs
mroAKT_SWN = 3
mrmV_SOLHN - fgmFGAKT
<= MrwHGB_NAU
or
mroHGmax <mrwHGB_MAU
Sollwertnach-
switched management
mrmV_SOLHN on PT1
to mrmV_HGBSW
bring up
Commercial Code governs
mroAKT_SWN = 2
Figure MEREHG03: States of the set point tracking
All rights reserved by Robert Bosch GmbH, including in cases of proprietary rights applications. All rights of disposal such as copying and passing on to us.
DS / ESA Overview - Maximum speed limit 19 April 2002
0
2.10.3
bosch
EDC15 +
Y S01 281/120 - VG2
Page 2-113
Initializing the set value
The tracking desired value is initialized with the EEPROM value mrmV_SOLEE.
2.10.4 Controller parameters selection
Above the V / N threshold mrwHGB_VZN be for the PI controller, the parameter sets
mrwHP4_ ... mrwHI4_ ... (for courses <= 4th gear) or mrwHP5_ ... mrwHI5_ ... (for the 5th gear)
selected.
2.10.5 HGB PI controller
The speed controller continuously calculates the allowable injection quantity to the
Not to exceed speed limit.
mrmM_EADR
mrmM_EPWG
mrmM_EFGR
mroM_EBEGR
MAX
MIN
mroHGmax
mrwM_EMAX
mroHGP
mroHGI
mroHGB_RA
PI CONTROLS
HGB_Menge
mrmV_SOLHN
fgmFGAKT
mrwHPx_ ...
mrwHIx_ ...
with x = 4 .. 5
mrmASGSTAT.13
&
dimKIK
> 1
mrwASG_BGR.1
Figure MEREHG04: regulation HGB
ASG-ECO mode:
Basically, for this function, the HGB activated (mrwHGBvMAX equal to 0 and
mrmV_SOLEE equal to 0 or equal to 1 mrmHGB_Sta.1 mrmHGB_Sta.5 or equal to 1), see
also safe deactivation of the Commercial Code.
The ASG-ECO mode can be used to reduce the consumption HGB. This
Function is enabled via bit 1 of mrwASG_BGR (mrwASG_BGR.1 = 1).
If the ASG-ECO mode is enabled (mrmASGSTAT.13 = 1) and Kik-down is not actuated
(DimKIK = 0) is switched to the values calculated from the HGB amount mrmM_EHGB.
Is dimKIK = 1 or mrmASGSTAT.13 = 0 then the default amount mrwM_EMAX
connected.
All rights reserved by Robert Bosch GmbH, including in cases of proprietary rights applications. All rights of disposal such as copying and passing on to us.
19 April 2002 Overview - Maximum speed limit DS / ESA
Page 2-114 EDC15 +
Y S01 281/120 - VG2
0 bosch
2:11 External Volume intervention
mroM_EAKT
mroM_EAG4
dimAG4
mroM_EWFr
mrmPWG_roh
mrmPWGfi
dzmNmit
mrmFGR_roh
mroFGR_SAT
mroPWGPBI
mroDZ_GHI
mroAG4akt
mrmINARD_D
mroPWGinv
mrmPWGPBM
mroDZ_GLO
mrmM_EAG4
EGS AG4
Intervention
mrmBI_SOLL
mrmEGSSTAT
mrmM_ELLR
dzmNmit
mrmM_MOT
mroM_EEGS
fgmFGAKT
mrmEGS_roh
mrmEGS_CAN
EGS CAN
Intervention
mroEGSERR
mroM_EEGSx
mroEGSINT
mroMD_EGS
mrmEGSSTAT
mroM_EEGSr
mroM_EEGS
mrmBI_SOLL
mroMD_SOLL
mroM_EXEGS
mroM_ESchf
mrmM_EPWG
mrmM_EFGR
mrmM_EADR
mrmM_EHGB Coordination:
Desired quantity
synchronously
mrmINARD_D
mrmMSR_AKT
mrmM_EWUNF
mrmM_EWUN
mrmBI_SOLL
mrmASR_roh
mrmM_ELLR
mroM_EASR
mrmASR_CAN
mrmMSRSTAT
mrmASRSTAT
ASR CAN
Intervention
mroM_EASR
mroMD_ASR
mroM_EASRr
mroM_EXASR
mrmASRSTAT
MEREEX01
mrmBI_SOLL
mrmMSR_roh
mrmM_ELLR
mroM_EMSR
mrmMSR_CAN
mrmFG_ABS
mrmAUSBL
MSR CAN
Intervention
mroM_EMSR
mroMD_MSR
mroM_EMSRr
mrmMSRSTAT
mroM_EXMSR
mrmLLINIT
mrmSTART_B
mrmM_ELLR
mrmM_EPWGR
Coordination:
Desired quantity
synchronous angle
MEREEX13
mrmM_EWUNL
mrmM_EWUNR
mrmBI_SOLL
mrmASG_roh
mrmM_ELLR
mrmM_EASG
mrmASG_CAN
fgmFGAKT
mrmAUSBL
mrmASG_tsy
dzmNmit
mrmMD_Reib
mrmMD_FAHR
mroMD_KUP
mrmMD_LLR
ASG CAN
Intervention
mroM_EASG
mroMD_ASG
mroM_EASGr
mrmASRSTAT
mroM_EXASG
mroASG_Nso
mroMD_Areg
mroMD_Arei
mroASG_NRA
mroMD_VOR
mroMD_VORm
mroMD_VORr
mroMD_VORI
mroMDASGmx
Figure MEREEX12: External lot of intervention
All rights reserved by Robert Bosch GmbH, including in cases of proprietary rights applications. All rights of disposal such as copying and passing on to us.
DS / ESA Overview - External Amount of intervention 19 April 2002
0 bosch
EDC15 +
Y S01 281/120 - VG2
Page 2-115
mroM_ESchf
mrmM_EPWG
mrmM_EFGR
mrmM_EADR
mrmM_EHGB
MAX
MIN
mrmM_EWUNF
a
<>
mrwM_EMAX
mroM_EEGS
mrmM_EAG4
OFF
CAN
AG4
b
Initialize ARD D component
(MrmINARD_D = 0x01)
is in Parameter Selection
used for the ARD
MIN
a
a <b
cowFUN_EGS
mrmM_EASG
CAN
OFF
MAX
MAX
b
mrmMSR_AKT
enhancing
Amount of intervention
active
cowFUN_ASG
mroM_EASR
mrwM_EMAX
CAN
OFF
MIN
MIN
comM_E_ASR
mrmM_EMSR
CAN
OFF
MAX
MAX
mrmM_EWUN
mrmM_EWUN6
comM_E_MSR
Figure MEREEX01: time synchronous request quantity
mrmM_EWUN
mrmM_ELLR
mrmLLIINIT
mrmSTART_B
mrmM_EPWGR
MAX
mrmM_EWUNL
mrmM_EWUNR
Figure MEREEX13: synchronous angle desired quantity
All rights reserved by Robert Bosch GmbH, including in cases of proprietary rights applications. All rights of disposal such as copying and passing on to us.
19 April 2002 Overview - External Amount of intervention DS / ESA
Page 2-116 EDC15 +
Y S01 281/120 - VG2
0 bosch
The external intervention is the maximum amount of driver request on PWG mrmM_EPWG,
Driver request via the cruise control system GRA mrmM_EFGR and driver on request
the ADR mrmM_EADR work speed control and the PT1-filtered drag quantity
mroM_ESchf.DiesesMaximumwirdbegrenztmitderMengeder
Maximum speed limit mrmM_EHGB and after the start, depending on the
Oil pressure. The limited by this minimum amount of education is the driver's desired quantity
mrmM_EWUNF (for the output of the inverse PWG - value of the characteristic field is mrwIFV_KF
a driver's desired quantity of raw mroM_EWFr, and from the maximum of mrmM_EPWG
unlimited GRA desired quantity mrmFGR_roh formed).
The bit mrmMSR_AKT (Information to redundant thrust monitoring) is set if a
-increasing amount of intervention actually increases the amount.
Description of the status of the olda MSR - Volume intervention by mrmMSR_AKT:
Bit position
0
0
Decimal comment
0No-increasing amount of active intervention
1erhhender amount of active intervention
mrmM_EWUN)
(Causes Increase of
mrmM_EWUN6 is the desired quantity for the desired and actual moments of Motor6 Embassy and
corresponds in principle mrmM_EWUN, but the EGS intervention is not considered.
2.11.1 drag torque limit for CVT
By an injection quantity in the overrun operating below a speed threshold which is implicitly
the map mrwSchmxKF results (1400 1/min), the drag torque to be limited.
The difference in frictional torque without idling torque mrmMD_Rrel and the desired thrust moment
mroMDSchSO gives the deviation mroMDSchRA. The deviation is to the
specific consumption mrmBI_SOLL in a lot mroM_ESchu converted and then
PT1 filter. Depending on the direction of the amount of change is one of two time constants,
(MrwPT1SchP or mrwPT1SchN) selected. The PT1-filtered set is supplied with a
upon speed factor multiplied to give the tow lot mroM_ESchf. The
Multiplication by a factor dependent upon speed is necessary to a sudden
To prevent flow surge to zero. Furthermore, the function of the system-specific error is
zmmF_KRIT.0 = 1 (torque specification inaccurate) switched off.
mrmBI_SOLL
zmmF_KRIT.0
mroMDSchRA
CONTROLS
mrmMD_Rrel
mroM_ESchu
PT1
fgmFGAKT
KF
mrwMDSchmx
mrwMDSchmn
mroMDSchSO
mrwSchmxKF
mrwPT1SchP
mrwPT1SchN
dzmNmit
KL
mroM_ESchf
mrwRSch_KL
Figure MEREEX18: drag torque limiting
All rights reserved by Robert Bosch GmbH, including in cases of proprietary rights applications. All rights of disposal such as copying and passing on to us.
DS / ESA Overview - External Amount of intervention 19 April 2002
0 bosch
EDC15 +
Y S01 281/120 - VG2
Page 2-117
2.11.2 External control units engaged
This driver request amount can now from an external control device in several ways
are affected:
-
-
-
-
External intervention by EGS amount (either AG4 or CAN)
External lot of intervention by ASR (CAN)
External lot of intervention by MSR (CAN)
External lot of intervention by ASG (CAN)
The type of intervention amount is about the software switch cowFUN_EGS, cowFUN_ASR,
cowFUN_MSR and cowFUN_ASG defined. The software switch cowFUN_ASR and
cowFUN_MSR are with deactivated CAN activation by coding for ASR / MSR
(ComCLG_SIG.0 = 0) is active. In comCLG_SIG.0 = 1, the quantity intervention is possible only via CAN
(ComM_E_ASR = 2, comM_E_MSR = 2, configuration see the Chapter "CAN activation by
Coding ").
Description of the software switch External Volume meshing type EGS cowFUN_EGS (Message
comM_E_EGS):
Decimal
0
2
3
Comment
no EGS - Volume intervention
Amount of intervention by EGS via CAN
Amount of intervention by EGS on AG4
Description of the software switch External quantity type of intervention ASR cowFUN_ASR (Message
comM_E_ASR):
Decimal comment
0No ASR - Volume intervention
2Mengeneingriff ASR via CAN
Description of the software switch External Volume meshing type MSR cowFUN_MSR (Message
comM_E_MSR):
Decimal comment
0No MSR - Volume intervention
2Mengeneingriff by MSR via CAN
Description of the software switch External Volume intervention type ASG cowFUN_ASG (olda
mroASG_sel):
Decimal comment
0No ASG - Volume intervention
2Mengeneingriff by ASG via CAN
If no amount of intervention required or an amount of intervention currently active, the
Driver's desired quantity mrmM_EWUNF as synchronous request quantity mrmM_EWUN to the
passed speed synchronous quantity calculation.
All rights reserved by Robert Bosch GmbH, including in cases of proprietary rights applications. All rights of disposal such as copying and passing on to us.
19 April 2002 Overview - External Amount of intervention DS / ESA
Page 2-118 EDC15 +
Y S01 281/120 - VG2
0 bosch
The engagement amount of EGS can reduce the driver's desired quantity mrmM_EWUNF, where
ASG intervention amount subsequently can act increasing again. The highest priority has the
ASR / MSR engagement of irrespectively of the other two interventions demeaning and increasing
can work (as long as is eingekupplet). The resultant intervention amount as time-synchronous
Desired quantity mrmM_EWUN for editing in speed synchronous quantity calculation
passed.
WhrendderDauereinesgltigenundaktivenMengeneingriffs
(MrmM_EWUN <> mrmM_EWUNF) is the D - by percentage of assets Ruckeldmpfers
mrmINARD_D initialized (treatment in the parameter selection for the ARD).
The message mrmMSR_AKT serves as an information whether a quantity-increasing intervention is active.
Is for further processing in other tasks nor the sum of the desired quantity
mrmM_EWUN and the amount of idle controller mrmM_ELLR, or before the start of the discharge
Initialiserungsmenge the idle controller integrator mrmLLIINIT, as a message mrmM_EWUNL
sent. Furthermore, it is about the maximum out mrmM_EWUNL and the sum of PWG -
Desired quantity raw mrmM_EPWGR and the limited amount of idle controller mrmM_ELLR,
or before start shedding the Initialisierungsmenge the idle controller integrator mrmLLIINIT, a
speed synchronous request amount determined raw mrmM_EWUNR.
All rights reserved by Robert Bosch GmbH, including in cases of proprietary rights applications. All rights of disposal such as copying and passing on to us.
DS / ESA Overview - External Amount of intervention 19 April 2002
0 bosch
EDC15 +
Y S01 281/120 - VG2
Page 2-119
2.11.3 EGS intervention
EGS intervention via AG4:
During switching operations of the AG4, the injection quantity to be reduced. The control device receives
these switching operations, a switching signal which worked as a digital input AG4-E and internally
is treated on the Message dimAG4. The AG4, a speed signal (TD - signal), and
a PWM signal corresponding to the current accelerator pedal position, is provided.
cowPBMAUSW.3
cowPBMAUSW.2
mroM_EWFr
mrmFGR_roh
dzmNmit
KF
mroPWGinv
mrmPWGPBM
mrwIFV_KF
ecwECOVPWG
mrmPWGPBI
mrmPWG_roh
mrmPWGfi
MAX SG locked
mroFGR_SAT <> 0
mroFGR_SAT <> 112
cowPBMAUSW.4
cowECOMTC.0
&
Figure MEREEX02: Determination of the PWG - value for the AG4
To also during active cruise control system GRA a reasonable value for the
To transmit accelerator pedal position a through the inverse driveability map mrwIFV_KF
back-calculated value PWG mroPWGinv determined. As an input to the inverse
Driving behavior characteristic field the driver's desired quantity of raw mroM_EWFr or unlimited GRA -
Desired quantity mrmFGR_roh be selected. Depending on the position of the DAMOS - switch
cowPBMAUSW is either the most out mroPWGinv, the PWG value mrmPWG_roh
and the filtered PWG mrmPWGfi or only the back-calculated PWG - value mroPWGinv as
sent mrmPWGPBM about PBM to the AG4 or to the Ecomatik. The output of the Message
mrmPWGPBM as PBM - signal must have the data of the MUX - separately handler on the
Message number for mrmPWGPBM be applied. Also needs to be fixed there, whether
case of a defective PWG (fboSPWG or fboSPGS) an error signal to be output
(Continuous wave low). For systems with Ecomatic is active in the GRA PWG - replacement value
ecwECOVPWG be sent. This prevents that in the overrun mode and Ecomatic
active GRA mrmPWGPBM = 0% receives.
Description of DAMOS - switch PWM Output cowPBMAUSW (IFVKF = inverse
Drivability map):
Bit position
2
Decimal comment
4PBM for AG4 = MAX (PWG IFVKF mroPWGinv,
mrmPWG_roh, mrmPWGfi)
(0: PBM for AG4 = PWG IFVKF mroPWGinv)
8Eingang of IFVKF = (dzoNmit, mrmFGR_roh)
(0: Entrance of IFVKF = (dzoNmit, mroM_EWFr))
16PWG input = mrmPWG_roh
(0: PWG input = MAX (mrmPWG_roh, mrmPWGfi)
3
4
All rights reserved by Robert Bosch GmbH, including in cases of proprietary rights applications. All rights of disposal such as copying and passing on to us.
19 April 2002 Overview - External Amount of intervention DS / ESA
Page 2-120 EDC15 +
Y S01 281/120 - VG2
0
mroAG4AKT.3
Switching back
mroAG4AKT.4
Upshift
bosch
mroDZ_GHI <= mrwDIFSCHW
mrmM_EAG4
RAMP
mroAG4AKT.0
Ramp active
dimAG4 fbbEAG4_L
cowFUN_EGS <> 3
mrwDM_E_R
RAMP
mrwDM_E_H
dimAG4
Speed grade.
normalized to
daeHPPER = N
mroDZ_GLO
mrwM_EMAX
mrwM_EMAX
mrmM_EAG4
Speed grade.
normalized to
daeHPPER =
N / mrwPCOUNT
mroDZ_GHI
d (dimAG4) / dt <0
mroDZ_GLO> = mrwGRDSCHW
dzmNmit
mrmM_EAKT
KF
mroM_EHKF
mrwM_EH_KF
mroM_ERKF
KF
mrwM_ER_KF
t
dimAG4
dimAG4
Troubleshoot-
action
fbbEAG4_L 1 mrmINARD_D
Figure MEREEX03: External lot of engagement by the AG4
Is not active the AG4, is constantly in the time-synchronous part of the quantity calculation
Speed gradient mroDZ_GLO calculated and compared with the threshold mrwGRDSCHW. Is
the speed gradient greater than or equal to this threshold, would at a switching activity of the AG4
a downshift present. If it is smaller, the WG4 would upshift. Depending on the
Result of this comparison is from the map mrwM_EH_KF or mrwM_ER_KF (high-
or downshift characteristic field) a AG4 intervention mrmM_EAG4 amount, depending on the current
DzmNmit speed and the amount mrmM_EAKT determined.
Upon detection of a signal dimAG4 activity of WG4 in time-synchronous part of the
Quantity calculation, the determined switching sense frozen and an engaging amount
mrmM_EAG4 calculated. This quantity is now engaged during the period of activity of AG4
constantly updated in accordance with the speed dzmNmit. While dimAG4 is active, the D -
Share of ARD initialized (mrmINARD_D).
All rights reserved by Robert Bosch GmbH, including in cases of proprietary rights applications. All rights of disposal such as copying and passing on to us.
DS / ESA Overview - External Amount of intervention 19 April 2002
0 bosch
EDC15 +
Y S01 281/120 - VG2
Page 2-121
After the resetting of the switching signal by the AG4 is calculated from the speed at the beginning, the
last speed before the end of the activity phase (negative edge of dimAG4) and the
Number of program runs in the activity phase, a new speed gradient mroDZ_GHI
determined and the AG4 increased engagement amount mrmM_EAG4 in a ramp. The ramp is only
started when mrmM_EWUNF 0 or> 0 The slope of the ramp is from the comparison
the speed gradient mroDZ_GHI determined with the threshold mrwDIFSCHW. If the
Speed gradient mroDZ_GHI greater than the threshold mrwDIFSCHW, the ramp rate is
mrwDM_E_R used for downshift. Is the speed gradient is less than or equal to this
Threshold, the ramp rate mrwDM_E_H is used for high circuit.
Upon detection of a signal of activity AG4 in speed synchronous portion of the amount calculated
is immediately a minimum of current required quantity mrmM_EWUN and AG4 intervention amount
formed mrmM_EAG4 and further processed as requested quantity.
fbbEAG4_L> 0
dimAG4 == 0
cowFUN_EGS <> AG4-intervention
mrmM_EAG4
mrwM_EMAX
mrmM_EWUN
MIN
> 1
mrmM_EWUN
Figure MEREEX04: Speed Synchronous switching signal reaction
This additional processing in the speed-synchronous part is necessary to provide the required
To keep response time of the amount of interference to the switching signal as short as possible (maximum 40
ms).
All rights reserved by Robert Bosch GmbH, including in cases of proprietary rights applications. All rights of disposal such as copying and passing on to us.
19 April 2002 Overview - External Amount of intervention DS / ESA
Page 2-122 EDC15 +
Y S01 281/120 - VG2
0 bosch
Representation of the switching signal reaction:
dimAG4
1
0
N
AG4
inactive
AG4
active
AG4
inactive
t
t
mrmM_EWUN Intervention amount
Ramp active active
t t
t
Figure MEREEX05: AG4 switching signal reaction
t ... response time of the amount of interference to the switching signal (max. 40 ms).
The maximum allowed time during which an AG4 shift engagement may be active, through the
Determined debounce time of the error fbbEAG4_L and implicitly by the error handling
monitored (see monitoring concept).
Detailed information on the state of the amount of intervention by the automatic transmission
AG4 are summarized in the olda mroAG4AKT.
Description of the status of the olda AG4 quantity intervention mroAG4AKT:
Bit position
0
1
2
3
4
Decimal
1
2
4
8
16
Comment
Ramp function is active with the valid switching signal
AG4 switching signal is active (dimAG4 = high)
AG4 switching signal timeout error
last shift was downshift
last shift was upshift
Impact of the intervention on the AG4 quantity desired quantity mrmM_EWUN:
An output of the AG4 amount mrmM_EAG4 intervention takes place only when a valid AG4
Shift engagement. A valid circuit operation is present if the input signal is active and the error
fbbEAG4_L is not set, or if the amount mrmM_EAG4 AG4 intervention after a
valid switching signal within the ramp is and the condition mrmM_EAG4 <
mrmM_EWUNF is satisfied. The ramp is started only when mrmM_EWUNF> 0. Furthermore, it is
with a valid AG4 intervention via the Message mrmINARD_D the D - Percentage of Assets
Ruckeldmpfers initialized (manipulated variable D - percentage = 0).
Is the intervention AG4 valid and the calculated AG4 - intervention mrmM_EAG4 amount less than the
Value of the local copy of the requested quantity mrmM_EWUN, the intervention amount in which is
adopted local copy of the requested quantity.
All rights reserved by Robert Bosch GmbH, including in cases of proprietary rights applications. All rights of disposal such as copying and passing on to us.
DS / ESA Overview - External Amount of intervention 19 April 2002
0 bosch
EDC15 +
Y S01 281/120 - VG2
Page 2-123
EGS intervention via CAN:
a
b
mrmEMOTKOR
mrmBI_SOLL
dzmNmit
KF PT1
a
b
mroMD_SOLL
mrwKFVB_KF mrwPT1_BI
Figure MEREEX14: Calculation spec. ind. Consumption
mrmEGS_roh
mrwMULINF3
mrmBI_SOLL
mrmM_ELLR
MAX
mroMD_EGS mroM_EEGSr
mroM_EEGSx
mroM_EEGS
dzmNmit
KL
mroM_EXEGS
mrwANFAHKL
mroM_EEGS
RAMP
MIN
mrwEGSRAMP
mrwM_EMAX
mrmEGS_roh = 0xFE (neutral value)
fgmFGAKT <mrwV_ANFAH
&
mrmEGSSTAT.7 = 1
mrmEGS_roh = 0xFF
mrmEGSSTAT.8 = 1
> 1
> 1
mrmEGSSTAT.5 = 0
1
mrwEGS_LAB
Integrator
mroEGSINT S
CONTROLS
Q mroEGSERR
-1
mrmEGSSTAT.5
mrwEGS_TIM
0
KL15
R
mrwEGSbegr
Figure MEREEX08: External lot of engagement by the EGS via CAN
Bits 4-8 of mrmEGS_CAN be transferred directly to the same bits of mrmEGSSTAT.
In CAN communication, a normalization is required to torques. Torques are
on the specific consumption indexed mrmBI_SOLL [(mg / stroke) / Nm], which consists of the
Consumption map mrwKFVB_KF with the speed dzmNmit and the corrected
Engine torque mrmEMOTKOR amount is determined, converted into quantities. Quantities are
about the spec. ind. Consumption mroBI_FAHR or mroBI_REIB resulting from the fuel consumption map
be determined by the speed and the amount dzmNmit mrmM_EWUNF or mroM_EREIB,
converted into torques.
All rights reserved by Robert Bosch GmbH, including in cases of proprietary rights applications. All rights of disposal such as copying and passing on to us.
19 April 2002 Overview - External Amount of intervention DS / ESA
Page 2-124 EDC15 +
Y S01 281/120 - VG2
0 bosch
Calculation of the control quantity:
With set EGS - mrmEGSSTAT.5 request bit, the torque signal is mrmEGS_roh
(Value calculated physical value is mrmMD_EGS) with mrmBI_SOLL from the
Consumption map mrwKFVB_KF multiplied. Of this amount is engaging mroM_EEGSr
deducted the actual amount of the idle controller mrmM_ELLR and the result down on
0 limited, hence the relevance to the determination of the desired quantity Quantity mroM_EEGS
results.
Error message transmission (mrmEGSSTAT.4 = 1):
In a CAN error (gesetzem bit mrmEGS_CAN.4) the status bit is mrmEGSSTAT.4
placed. Subsequently, the back-up quantity mroM_EXEGS is activated. The error is during
active CAN - Blanks are not reported.
In this replacement quantity mroM_EXEGS is also not set in EGS - request bit
mrmEGSSTAT.5, gesetzem bit mrmEGS_CAN.7) Transmission - Control unit in emergency
(MrmEGS_CAN.8 = 1) or at the moment of engagement - Error ID = 0xFF mrmEGS_roh
switched (see also monitoring concept).
Determination of information "intervention can not, or not fully carried out":
The engagement mroM_EEGSr amount less than the current amount of the idle controller
mrmM_ELLR reduced by a tolerance value mrwM_E_ToG, the bit mrmEGSSTAT.7
set (flag - Overriding desire can not, or are not fully met). Increases the
Intervention amount mroM_EEGSr on the current amount of idle controller mrmM_ELLR so
will reset this bit. The bit is also at gesetzem bit mrmEGS_CAN.7 or
when the EGS procedure is disabled via Application (cowFUN_EGS2) set. Similarly, in
Mengenzumeungsfehler zmmSYSERR.2 (see Monitoring Concept "summarized
System error "). The state of the bit is also displayed in the olda mroHYSSTAT.0.
Replacement Quantity:
The calculation of the compensation amount mroM_EXEGS is on the current driving speed
fgmFGAKT dependent. Is fgmFGAKT <mrwV_ANFAH, so is the starting curve
mrwANFAHKL and the speed dzoNmit calculates the resultant amount mroM_EEGS. If the
current speed fgmFGAKT> = mrwV_ANFAH, the replacement rate is up to
Maximum mrwM_EMAX increased with an increment of mrwEGSRAMP ((mg / stroke) / s)
(State Information: mrmEGSSTAT). As a special case, when not set, EGS -
Request bit mrmEGSSTAT.5 and simultaneous neutral value in engagement moment
(MrmEGS_roh = 0xFE) of the engagement immediately terminated without ramp (mroM_EXEGS = mrwM_EMAX).
Time limit:
About the Label mrwEGSbegr the EGS procedure time can be monitored. This runs at
active EGS intervention mrmEGSSTAT.5 an integrator to the administrable limit
mrwEGS_TIM. If the integrator the set value mrwEGS_TIM, then
mrmEGSERR set, the engaging amount of the EGS mroM_EEGS engagement is set to 0, the
ASG-intervention is canceled as implausible and the error fbbEEGS_A is set. At
non-active operation is a negative input value mrwEGS_LAB to the integrator
connected. The integrator is bounded below at 0.
All rights reserved by Robert Bosch GmbH, including in cases of proprietary rights applications. All rights of disposal such as copying and passing on to us.
DS / ESA Overview - External Amount of intervention 19 April 2002
0 bosch
EDC15 +
Y S01 281/120 - VG2
Page 2-125
Effect:
The transmission intervention affects quantitative reducing, ie is the amount of the electronically controlled
Transmission mroM_EEGS less than the driver's request mrmM_EWUNF, so goes the quantity
mroM_EEGS in the quantity desired mrmM_EWUN.
Description of olda mrmEGSSTAT - Status of EGS amount procedure:
(Bits 4-6 and 8 from mrmEGSSTAT correspond to those of mrmEGS_CAN).
Bit position
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
Decimal
1
2
4
8
16
32
64
128
Comment
Amount of active intervention by EGS
Amount of intervention by EGS Ramp
no amount of intervention by EGS (ramp limit reached)
Amount of intervention by EGS on start-KL
Error message EGS (timeout or message data inconsistent)
EGS request bit (engaging moment is thus valid)
Suppression of the CAN monitor
mrmEGS_CAN: CAN fault or error message
mrmEGSSTAT: CAN error message or error or
EGS intervention request can not, or not fully met
be (see review of the intervention above, as well as
Monitoring concept). Note: at the same time MSR intervention
(Overrides EGS intervention), this bit is also set when
the MSR intervention torque is greater than the EGS intervention torque.
Gear SG is in emergency mode (see CAN: Gear 1)
8 256
All rights reserved by Robert Bosch GmbH, including in cases of proprietary rights applications. All rights of disposal such as copying and passing on to us.
19 April 2002 Overview - External Amount of intervention DS / ESA
Page 2-126 EDC15 +
Y S01 281/120 - VG2
0 bosch
2.11.4 ASR intervention
ASR intervention via CAN:
mrmASR_roh
mrwMULINF3
mrmBI_SOLL
mrmM_ELLR
0
mroM_EASR
RAMP
MAX
mroMD_ASR mroM_EASRr
mrwASRRAMP
mrwM_EMAX
MIN
mroM_EXASR
mroM_EASR
mrmASR_roh == 0xFE CAN errors mrmASR_CAN.7 OR
mrmASRSTAT.5 = 0 OR
mrmMSRSTAT.5 <> 0 OR
Error detection mrmASR_roh = 0xFF
Figure MEREEX09: ASR intervention
The bits mrmASRSTAT.4 mrmASRSTAT.B to be directly from the bits mrmASR_CAN.4 to
mrmASR_CAN.B taken.
Calculation of the control quantity:
From the ASR / MSR control unit via CAN is the ASR intervention torque mrmASR_roh (the
converted value is output in physical mrmMD_ASR) transmitted. This moment
is for set ASR request bit mrmASRSTAT.5 (simultaneously must mrmMSRSTAT.5 =
Be 0) with the specific fuel consumption indexed (mrmBI_SOLL) multiplied. From this
Intervention mroM_EASRr amount is the actual amount of the idle controller mrmM_ELLR
subtracted and the result is a lower limit of 0, resulting in the determination of the
Desired quantity relevant quantity mroM_EASR results.
Determination of information "intervention can not, or not fully carried out":
The engagement mroM_EASRr amount less than the current amount of the idle controller
mrmM_ELLR reduced by a tolerance value mrwM_E_ToB, the bit mrmASRSTAT.7
set (flag - Overriding desire can not, or are not fully met). Increases the
Intervention mroM_EASRr quantity above or equal to the current amount of idle controller mrmM_ELLR,
This bit is reset. The bit is also set, at mrmASR_CAN.7, or
if the error fbbEMSR_P is finally broken, or when the ASR - intervention on application
disabled (cowFUN_ASR <> 2) and the CAN enable for ASR is also not active
(ComCLG_SIG.0 = 0), set. The state of the bit is in active ASR intervention in the
Olda mroHYSSTAT.1 displayed.
Error message brake (mrmASRSTAT.4 = 1):
When this bit mrmASR_CAN.4 the status mrmASRSTAT.4 and mrmMSRSTAT.4 be
placed.
This replacement rate is also not set at ASR - request bit mrmASRSTAT.5 in
set, MSR - mrmASRSTAT.5 request bit, the bit is set mrmASR_CAN.7 in
Message count error (mrmASR_CAN.11) and the engaging torque - Error code
mrmASR_roh = 0xFF switched (see also monitoring concept).
All rights reserved by Robert Bosch GmbH, including in cases of proprietary rights applications. All rights of disposal such as copying and passing on to us.
DS / ESA Overview - External Amount of intervention 19 April 2002
0 bosch
EDC15 +
Y S01 281/120 - VG2
Page 2-127
Replacement Quantity:
When switching to the compensation amount mroM_EXASR the ASR is engaged quantity
mroM_EASR ramp shape to the neutral value mrwM_EMAX increased (status information:
mrmASRSTAT). As a special case, when not set ASR - request bit mrmASRSTAT.5
and simultaneous neutral value in engagement torque (mrmASR_roh = 0xFE) of the engagement immediately
without ramp is complete (mroM_EXASR = mrwM_EMAX).
Effect:
The ASR - intervention affects quantitative reducing, that is, is smaller than the amount mroM_EASR
Driver request mrmM_EWUNF, the amount mroM_EASR goes into the desired quantity
mrmM_EWUN one.
Description of olda status of the ASR - Volume intervention by mrmASRSTAT:
(Bits 4-6 and B from mrmASRSTAT correspond to those of mrmASR_CAN).
Bit position
0
1
2
4
5
6
7
Decimal
1
2
4
16
32
64
128
Comment
Quantities - active intervention by ASR
Quantities - intervention by ASR Ramp
no amounts - intervention by ASR (ramp limit reached)
BotschaftsfehlerASR / MSR (Timeoutoderinkonsistente
Message data)
ASR - request bit (engaging moment is thus valid)
Suppression of the CAN monitor
mrmASR_CAN: CAN fault or error message
mrmASRSTAT: CAN error message or error or
ASR - Overriding desire can not, or not fully met
be (see review of the intervention above, as well as
Monitoring concept).
see description mrmMSRSTAT.B or mrmMSR_CAN
B 2048
All rights reserved by Robert Bosch GmbH, including in cases of proprietary rights applications. All rights of disposal such as copying and passing on to us.
19 April 2002 Overview - External Amount of intervention DS / ESA
Page 2-128 EDC15 +
Y S01 281/120 - VG2
0 bosch
2.11.5 MSR intervention
MSR intervention via CAN:
mrmMSR_roh
mrwMULINF3
mrmBI_SOLL
mrmM_ELLR
0
mrmM_EMSR
RAMP
MAX
mroMD_MSR mroM_EMSRr
mrwMSRRAMP
0
MAX
mroM_EXMSR
mrmM_EMSR
mrmMSR_roh = 0
(Neutral value)
Termination condition is met
Figure MEREEX10: MSR intervention
The bits mrmMSRSTAT.4 mrmMSRSTAT.B to be directly from the bits mrmMSR_CAN.4 to
mrmMSR_CAN.B taken.
Calculation of the control quantity:
From the ASR / MSR control unit via CAN is the MSR intervention torque mrmMSR_roh
(Value calculated physical value mroMD_MSR (the raw value is in mrmMSR_roh
output) transfer. This moment is for set MSR request bit
mrmMSRSTAT.5 and is not true, the termination condition (see below) with the specific indexed
Fuel consumption (mrmBI_SOLL) multiplied. Of this amount is engaging mroM_EMSRr
deducted the actual amount of the idle controller mrmM_ELLR and the result down on
0 limited, hence the relevance to the determination of the desired quantity Quantity mroM_EMSR
results.
Error message brake (mrmMSRSTAT.4 = 1):
When this bit mrmMSR_CAN.4 the status mrmMSRSTAT.4 and mrmASRSTAT.4 be
placed. Subsequently, the bit is set mrmMSRSTAT.7.
MSR - Overriding desire can not, or not fully met (mrmMSRSTAT.7 = 1):
This bit is set
at MSR-CAN intervention cowFUN_MSR on record activate 2 and also not
active CAN activation by coding for MSR (comCLG_SIG.0 = 0).
with error message ASR / MSR mrmMSR_CAN.4 (timeout or message data inconsistent)
when exceeding the limit amount mroM_EBEGR increased by the tolerance value
mrwM_E_ToB by the engagement amount mroM_EMSRr (mroHYSSTAT.2). If free
Intervention amount mroM_EMSRr again under or on the current limiting amount
mroM_EBEGR, then the bit mroHYSSTAT.2 reset.
All rights reserved by Robert Bosch GmbH, including in cases of proprietary rights applications. All rights of disposal such as copying and passing on to us.
DS / ESA Overview - External Amount of intervention 19 April 2002
0 bosch
EDC15 +
Y S01 281/120 - VG2
Page 2-129
Physical Plausibility violation of the MSR intervention (mrmMSRSTAT.9 = 1):
It will be reviewed when the bit mrmMSRSTAT.A is not set and the MSR request bit
mrmMSRSTAT.5 is set.
The procedure is then physically implausible, if the integral MSR moment mroMDIntdt
mroMDIntdt = ( M MSR - MRe ib )dt
exceeds the threshold mrwMDIntMX. Then, it is also the fault fbbEMSR_H as broken
reported. The current value of the integral is shown in Olda mroMDIntdt. The integral
is limited down to 0. When the integral reaches the value 0 and the neutral value
was sent, the failure fbbEMSR_H is well reported. Be more MSR interventions
however, only be allowed again, if the ABS control unit, at least once to the neutral value
sends as engaging torque and the error is now finally healed.
mroMD_MSR
defective
heal
t
mroMDIntdt
mrwMDIntMX
t
fbbEMSR_H
t
mroMSRSTAT.9
t
Figure MEREEX11: Physical plausibility MSR
Plausibility violation of the MSR intervention (mrmMSRSTAT.A = 1):
This bit is set, in MSR-request bit mrmMSRSTAT.5 to the following conditions
tested and set at least fulfill one condition:
when the bit is mrmMSR_CAN.7,
beiMengenzumessungsfehlern
"Summarized System Error")
zmmSYSERR.2 (See Monitoring concept
with message count error (mrmMSR_CAN.B see Appendix B - CAN, CAN interpreter)
in the intervention torque - Error ID = 0xFF mrmMSR_roh,
with set ASR request bit mrmASRSTAT.5,
case of non-fulfillment of the Binrkomplementbedingung (mrmMSR_roh is not the Binrkomplement
of mrmASR_roh)
in functional plausibility violation
All rights reserved by Robert Bosch GmbH, including in cases of proprietary rights applications. All rights of disposal such as copying and passing on to us.
19 April 2002 Overview - External Amount of intervention DS / ESA
Page 2-130 EDC15 +
Y S01 281/120 - VG2
0 bosch
The procedure is then functionally implausible, if the reference speed of the ABS-SG
mrmFG_ABS <mrwMSRFG_L is. Then the error fbbEMSR_P is malfunctioning and can
can not be cured again. If the error is finally broken, so this is not a driving cycle
TCS or MSR intervention longer allowed.
Replacement Quantity:
On the replacement quantity mroM_EXMSR is in compliance with at least one of the following
Terms of switched:
when the bit is mrmMSRSTAT.7
when not set MSR - request bit mrmMSRSTAT.5,
with set ASR - request bit mrmASRSTAT.5,
beiMengenzumessungsfehlern
"Summarized System Error"),
zmmSYSERR.2 (See Monitoring concept
with message count error (mrmMSR_CAN.B see Appendix B - CAN, CAN interpreter)
case of non-fulfillment of the Binrkomplementbedingung (mrmMSR_roh is not the Binrkomplement
of mrmASR_roh)
when engaged moment -
Monitoring concept).
Misrecognition mrmMSR_roh = 0xFF (See also
When switching to the compensation amount mroM_EXMSR the MSR is engaged quantity
mroM_EMSR ramp shape to the neutral value 0 decreased (state information: olda
mrmMSRSTAT). As a special case, when not set MSR - request bit
mrmMSRSTAT.5 and simultaneous neutral value in engagement torque (mrmMSR_roh = 0)
Intervention immediately terminated without ramp (mroM_EXMSR = 0).
Effect:
The MSR - intervention affects volume increasing, that is, is greater than the amount mroM_EMSR
Driver request mrmM_EWUNF, the amount mroM_EMSR goes into the desired quantity
mrmM_EWUN one. A the same time possibly existing EGS - intervention (volume reduction)
is thereby superimposed (mrmEGSSTAT.7 is set).
All rights reserved by Robert Bosch GmbH, including in cases of proprietary rights applications. All rights of disposal such as copying and passing on to us.
DS / ESA Overview - External Amount of intervention 19 April 2002
0 bosch
EDC15 +
Y S01 281/120 - VG2
Page 2-131
Description of the status of the olda MSR - Volume intervention by mrmMSRSTAT:
(Bits 4-6 and B from mrmMSRSTAT correspond to those of mrmMSR_CAN).
Bit position
0
1
2
4
5
6
7
Decimal
1
2
4
16
32
64
128
Comment
Amount of active intervention by MSR
Amount of intervention by MSR Ramp
no amount of intervention by MSR (ramp limit reached)
Error message ASR / MSR (timeout or message data
inconsistent)
MSR - request bit (engaging moment is thus valid)
Suppression of the CAN monitor
mrmMSR_CAN: CAN fault or error message
mrmMSRSTAT: CAN error message or error or
MSR - Overriding desire can not, or not fully met
be (see review of the intervention above, as well as
Monitoring concept).
Physical plausibility is injured (torque integral to large)
General plausibility criteria Injured (CAN message,
functional plausibility)
Message count error: The message count B_count the last
received message differs by more than
mrwMSR_Bmx the message count of the latest message (no
Review at mrwMSR_Bmx = 15) OR for more than
mrwMSR_Bmn main program periods (= 20 ms) was not
Change in the message counter registers (deactivation of the
Check with mrwMSR_Bmn = 127).
9
A
B
512
1024
2048
All rights reserved by Robert Bosch GmbH, including in cases of proprietary rights applications. All rights of disposal such as copying and passing on to us.
19 April 2002 Overview - External Amount of intervention DS / ESA
Page 2-132 EDC15 +
Y S01 281/120 - VG2
0 bosch
2.11.6 ASG intervention
ASG intervention via CAN:
mrmASG_tsy
mroASG_Nsy
CONTROLS
mrmASG_roh
b
a a
b
mrwASG_Nmx
mrwASG_Nmi
Intervention plausible
dzmNmit
Intervention implausible
mroASG_Nso
mrmKUP_roh
mrwMULINF3
mrmMD_FAHR
mrmMD_Reib
mrmMD_LLR
MIN
mrmMD_KUP
mroMD_VORm mroMD_VORr mroMD_VORl
MAX mroMD_VOR
mrwMDASGm2
mrwMDASGmx
mroMDASGmx
mroASG_NRA mroMD_Areg mroMD_Arei mrwASGvor &
mrmW_KUP = 1
mroMD_ASG
mroASG_Nso
P CONTROLS
dzmNmit
mrmMD_Reib
mrwASGP_ .. mroMDASGmx
min: 0
0
mroMDInAdt
I
mroMD_VOR
cowFUN_CVT.1
mrmBI_SOLL
mroM_EASGr
mrmM_ELLR
MAX
mrmM_EASG
RAMP
mroM_EXASG
mrwASGRAMP
LowByte mrmASG_roh = 0
(Neutral value)
mrmM_EASG
Intervention plausible
Figure MEREEX15: ASG intervention
General:
The ASG-intervention is to allow smooth shifting of the transmission by the
Engine control unit before recoupling the speed the new gear ratio
adapts.
All rights reserved by Robert Bosch GmbH, including in cases of proprietary rights applications. All rights of disposal such as copying and passing on to us.
DS / ESA Overview - External Amount of intervention 19 April 2002
0 bosch
EDC15 +
Y S01 281/120 - VG2
Page 2-133
For the function of the CVT (Continuously Variable Transmission) - transmission is via the
Bit-coded function switch cowFUN_CVT defined:
cowFUN_CVT
(Bit coded)
cowFUN_CVT.0
cowFUN_CVT.1
cowFUN_CVT.2
Importance
Desired idle speed increase via CAN message Getriebe2 enabled
Calculation of the cup without diesel mrmMD_Reib and mroMD_VOR
Intervention aborted by error fbbEASG_G (exceeding the
Speed threshold mrwASGnmax)
All rights reserved by Robert Bosch GmbH, including in cases of proprietary rights applications. All rights of disposal such as copying and passing on to us.
19 April 2002 Overview - External Amount of intervention DS / ESA
Page 2-134 EDC15 +
Y S01 281/120 - VG2
0 bosch
Calculation of the control quantity:
The ASG control device transmits a request via CAN synchronous speed (raw value =
mrmASG_roh) and a synchronization time mrmASG_tsy from which the SG a speed setpoint
calculated to the actual speed in the desired time from the transmission to the desired speed
introduce.
The desired synchronous speed is set to the maximum value mrwASG_Nmx and the minimum value
mrwASG_Nmi limited (= mroASG_Nsy).
In order stationary deviations during engagement (slipping clutch mrmWKUP =
To eliminate 1, a pre-control torque mroMD_VOR calculated. For this purpose, from one of
a minimum selection between the driver's desired torque mrmMD_FAHR and CAN
received clutch torque mrmMD_KUP obtained value mroMD_VORm the
Friction torque mrmMD_Reib and the idling torque mrmMD_LLR subtracted and then
restricted to the positive number range. About the Label mrwASGvor can the
Pre-control torque calculation are activated.
If the Zwischengasflag mrmASGSTAT.5 set and there are no stop conditions (see
Plausibility of the intervention) actively regulates a P controller of the actual speed dzmNmit on the
Speed setpoint mroASG_Nso. The resultant moment of the controller mroMD_Areg is
Addition of the friction torque mrmMD_Reib compensated and the current pre-control torque
mroMD_VOR applied to the maximum value mroMDASGmx and to the minimum value 0
limited (mroMD_ASG). When translated the function switch cowFUN_CVT.1 = 1 (bit coded) is
the friction torque mrmMD_Reib and the pre-control torque mroMD_VOR not included in the calculation
included.
The limitation mroMDASGmx is in active feedforward control from the label mrwMDASGm2 and
when disconnected from feedforward mrwMDASGmx taken.
The ASG-intervention torque mroMD_ASG is the specific fuel consumption indexed
mrmBI_SOLL multiplied. From this engagement mroM_EASGr amount is the actual amount of
Idle controller mrmM_ELLR subtracted and the result is limited down to 0, resulting in
relevant to the determination of the desired quantity Quantity mroM_EASG results.
Suppression:
With CAN-suppression (mrmAUSBL = 1), the error are fbbEASG_P (plausibility coupling)
(too big = "cup Diesel" Quantity integral) unreported and fbbEASG_H and the
Error debouncing reset. A reaction (termination of the procedure) is done but once. For the
However, withdrawal of the replacement reaction must be cured the error.
If the driver's desired torque mrmMD_FAHR greater than or equal to the ASG intervention torque
mroMD_ASG and the clutch is slipping, (mrmW_KUP = 1), the "cup Diesel"
mroMDInAdt frozen.
Abort of the intervention on speed (cowFUN_CVT.2 = 1)
If the speed exceeds dzmNmit during an ASG-intervention, the speed threshold
mrwASGnmax the error fbbEASG_D is set. If the error is debounced defective
(Error debounce time fbwEASG_DA has expired) are an Abort the operation. The
Error correction is performed only when the conditions for a resumption of the procedure (see
"Resumption of the procedure:") applied. The error correction is independent of the
Speed dzmNmit.
All rights reserved by Robert Bosch GmbH, including in cases of proprietary rights applications. All rights of disposal such as copying and passing on to us.
DS / ESA Overview - External Amount of intervention 19 April 2002
0 bosch
EDC15 +
Y S01 281/120 - VG2
Page 2-135
Plausibility of the intervention:
The procedure is performed when
the request bit (Zwischengasflag) mrmASGSTAT.5 is set,
no neutral value (low byte of mrmASG_roh 0)
and any of the following Termination conditions (Error) is present:
formal plausibility:
Binrkompliment of mrmASG_roh (High byte low byte) is not true,
Message count error (mrmASGSTAT.11 = 1 for error) is present,
Message contains error information (one of the raw scores = 0FFh)
Error message, CAN defect (mrmASG_CAN.7 = 1),
Mengenzumessungsfehler zmmSYSERR.2 (see Monitoring Concept "summarized
System Error ")
rest of plausibility:
Speed fgmFGAKT <The threshold mrwASGvmin,
Clutch is opened during the procedure (dimKUP = 0),
or error fbbEASG_P still current
Integral moment mroMDInAdt > = mrwMDIntAX ,
Error fbbEASG_H still current
Error fbbEASG_D is defective debounced
If a termination condition during a ASG-intervention (request bit set and no
Neutral value sent), so the demolition of the replacement quantity mroM_EXASG or carried
Intervention is not started.
Resumption of the procedure:
A new procedure is only allowed again after all the following conditions
've applied simultaneously:
Request bit (Zwischengasflag) mrmASGSTAT.5 not set
Neutral value sent (low byte of mrmASG_roh = 0)
Integral moment mroMDInAdt already set to 0
Message was received correctly (mrmASG_CAN.4 = 0)
no termination condition is more active
Note:
After SG-initialization (K15 a) must once these conditions are achieved to a
Engagement is allowed.
All rights reserved by Robert Bosch GmbH, including in cases of proprietary rights applications. All rights of disposal such as copying and passing on to us.
19 April 2002 Overview - External Amount of intervention DS / ESA
Page 2-136 EDC15 +
Y S01 281/120 - VG2
0 bosch
Coupling plausibility of the ASG-intervention (fbbEASG_P):
General:
The surgery is performed only if is disengaged or is immediately without debouncing
aborted when engaged.
Is this Eingriffsbit set without changing the clutch is disengaged in the state so must
after the debounce fbwEASG_PA the resumption conditions (neutral value, etc.) reaches
be before a new intervention is allowed. This is true for the start and the end of the
Intervention. The error occurs when fbwEASG_P during this state, the suppression of the
Time fbwEASG_PA was continuously inactive.
When not yet healed, up to date adjoining fbbEASG_P error, no action occurs.
Healing of the fault fbbEASG_P:
To cure the error must fbbEASG_P the engagement for the time fbwEASG_PB continuously
be formally plausible, the clutch are disengaged in the state and the CAN
Blanking inactive. During this time the "not engaged" is - bit (S_EGS)
placed. After this time, have the resumption conditions (neutral value, etc.) reaches
be (mroASGSTAT A bit set) until a new intervention is allowed.
This means for the transmission that the procedure for the time fbwEASG_PB
must perform!
ECO mode (mrmASGSTAT (.8) = 1):
In order to reduce the consumption between the two modes, SPORT and ECO ASG changed
be. The condition is transmitted by the gearbox control unit via CAN and in
mrmASGSTAT (.8) mapped.
In ECO mode, a torque limiter (see Chapter quantity limitation illustration
MEREBG02) and a maximum speed limit is configurable (see chapter
Maximum speed limit).
When switching to the torque limit must be ensured that the operator to
this time does not require more torque. This is realized by a flip-flop.
If requesting via CAN ECO mode (mrmASGSTAT.8 = 1) and the amount
mrmM_EWUNF is less than or equal to the ASG-ECO-limiting amount mrmBM_ASG is the
Released flip-flop and set mrmASGSTAT (.13).
a
mrmM_EWUNF
mrmBM_ASG
a <= b
b
S
Q
R
&
mrmASGSTAT.8
mrmASGSTAT.13
Figure MEREEX17: ASG-ECO mode
All rights reserved by Robert Bosch GmbH, including in cases of proprietary rights applications. All rights of disposal such as copying and passing on to us.
DS / ESA Overview - External Amount of intervention 19 April 2002
0 bosch
EDC15 +
Y S01 281/120 - VG2
Page 2-137
Physical Plausibility violation of the ASG-intervention (mrmASGSTAT.9 = 1):
The procedure is then physically implausible, if the integral ASG Moment mroMDInAdt
mroMDInAdt = (M ASG )dt
the threshold mrwMDIntAX exceeds. Where MASG equal mroMD_Areg (momemt to
Compensate the deviation) + mrmMD_Reib (torque to overcome friction) +
mroMD_VOR (pre-control torque against slipping of the clutch) limited to 0 and
mrwMDASGmx (corresponding mroMD_ASG). Then, it is also the fault fbbEASG_H as broken
reported (if no Ausblendbedingung is active). The current value of the integral is in the
Olda mroMDInAdt shown.
The ASG-moment MASG corresponds, as long as the integral moment mroMDInAdt below the threshold
mrwMDIntAX is, the engaging torque mroMD_ASG. Once the threshold mrwMDIntAX
Although is exceeded is the engaging torque mroMD_ASG is set to 0 (operation is
canceled mroASGSTAT.9 = 1), but the torque is integrated Further, the ASG
Moment MASG = MroMD_Areg + + mrmMD_Reib mroMD_VOR limited to 0 and
mrwMDASGmx used.
In cowFUN_CVT.1 = 1, the friction torque is always the integral ASG Moment mroMDInAdt
deducted, in the addition to mroMD_ASG this changes nothing.
When the error has finally broken the integral with the friction torque is reduced (MASG
=-MrmMD_Reib). The integral is bounded below at 0. If the integral value of the 0
achieved and the neutral value is sent, the failure fbbEASG_H is reported as well.
mroMD_ASG
defective heal
t
Broken engagement
mroMDInAdt
mrwMDIntAX
t
fbbEASG_H
fbwEASG_HA fbwEASG_HB
t
mroASGSTAT.9
t
mrmM_EASG
t
Figure MEREEX16: Physical plausibility ASG
Replacement Quantity:
Upon termination or Abort (see Abruchbedingungen) is on the replacement quantity
mroM_EXASG switched and the engaging amount ASG engagement amount mroM_EASG
ramped reduced to zero. If the ASG-SG in addition to the neutral value (low byte
mrmASG_roh = 0) sends so the engagement is terminated immediately with no ramp (mroM_EXASG = 0).
Effect:
All rights reserved by Robert Bosch GmbH, including in cases of proprietary rights applications. All rights of disposal such as copying and passing on to us.
19 April 2002 Overview - External Amount of intervention DS / ESA
Page 2-138 EDC15 +
Y S01 281/120 - VG2
0 bosch
The ASG - intervention affects volume increasing, that is, is greater than the amount mroM_EASG
Driver request mrmM_EWUNF, the amount mroM_EASG goes into the desired quantity
mrmM_EWUN one.
All rights reserved by Robert Bosch GmbH, including in cases of proprietary rights applications. All rights of disposal such as copying and passing on to us.
DS / ESA Overview - External Amount of intervention 19 April 2002
0 bosch
EDC15 +
Y S01 281/120 - VG2
Page 2-139
Description of olda mroASGSTAT "Status of the ASG - Volume intervention":
(Bits 4-6, B and C correspond to those of mrmASGSTAT mrmASG_CAN).
Bit position
0
1
2
4
5
6
7
Decimal
1
2
4
16
32
64
128
Comment
Amount of active intervention by ASG
Amount of intervention by ASG Ramp
no amount of intervention by ASG (ramp limit reached)
Error message ASG (timeout or message data inconsistent)
ASG - request bit (engaging moment is thus valid)
Suppression of monitoring
ASG - operation can not be performed (wegappliziert).
Seated at one of the following conditions:
mroM_EASGr> (mrmM_EBEGR + mrwM_E_ToG)
(Interference amount is greater than limit amount)
mrmASG_CAN bit 7 is set (CAN defect, Bus Off,
Message timeout, Botschaftsinkonsistenz)
fbbEASG_P (clutch plausibility) or not clutch
operated (dimKUP = 0) and the engagement remained over time
fbwEASG_PA set out formally plausible (and Eingriffsbit
no error in the message).
Speed to low
Intervention is plausible, but A bit is still set (bit A is
by sending the neutral value deleted)
Physical plausibility is injured (torque integral to large
or threshold mrwASGnmax exceeded during the procedure)
(The bit remains set until the point under "resume
have applied conditions of engagement "described above.)
General plausibility criteria injured. It was after the
Initialization (K15 A) before the engagement request the
It OR does not meet resumption conditions occurred during
of the procedure one or more of the following conditions:
(Only when Wunschdrehzahlrohwert 0 and request bit)
one of the raw scores is 0ffh (ABY, tsy)
Message count error
Binrkompliment not true
mrmASG_CAN bit 7 is set (error message, CAN-defect).
MengenzumessungsfehlerzmmSYSERR.2 (see
Monitoring concept "summarized System Error")
fbbEASG_P (clutch plausibility) or not clutch
operated (dimKUP = 0) and the engagement remained over time
fbwEASG_PA set out formally plausible (and Eingriffsbit
no error in the message).
Replacement reaction is always without fault debouncing. Healing with
Error condition bruise. With CAN-suppression is the fault neither
reported yet healed.
Speed to low
(The bit remains set until the point under "resume
have applied the procedure described conditions.)
9 512
A 1024
All rights reserved by Robert Bosch GmbH, including in cases of proprietary rights applications. All rights of disposal such as copying and passing on to us.
19 April 2002 Overview - External Amount of intervention DS / ESA
Page 2-140 EDC15 +
Y S01 281/120 - VG2
0 bosch
Continuing with the description of the olda mroASGSTAT "Status of the ASG - Volume intervention":
(Bits 4-6, B and C correspond to those of mrmASGSTAT mrmASG_CAN).
Bit position
B
Decimal comment
2048Botschaftszhler error: The message count B_count the last
received message is no different or more than
mrwASG_Bmx the message count of the latest message (no
Review at mrwASG_Bmx = 15)
4096Synchronisationszeit mrmASG_tsy implausible (raw value = 0FFh)
C
All rights reserved by Robert Bosch GmbH, including in cases of proprietary rights applications. All rights of disposal such as copying and passing on to us.
DS / ESA Overview - External Amount of intervention 19 April 2002
0 bosch
EDC15 +
Y S01 281/120 - VG2
Page 2-141
2:12 Active Ruckeldmpfer
2.12.1 transition detection
The transition detection is carried out centrally. See Section idle controller - transition detection.
2.12.2 Parameter set selection
mrmGANG
= 5 (5TH GEAR)
mroCASE_FF.9
MIN
mrwFF1gOH
mrwFF2gOH
mrwFF3gOH
mrwFF4gOH
mrwFF5gOH
mrwFF_OHH
dzmNmit
PT1
mrwFGF_GF
mrmCASE_A.F
mrwARD_LS
mrwARD_LR1
mrwARD_LR2
mrwARD_LR3
mrwARD_LR4
mrwARD_LR5
mrmN_LLBAS
mrmM_EWUN <> mrmM_EWUNF
cowFUN_ADR.2 = 0
cowFUN_ADR.1 = 1
mrmM_EADR> 0
mrwMD_iakt.3
mrmNfilt
2 1 0
mrmCASE_A1
mroGG
&
mrwARD_LRH
mrwGNG_OGG
mrwGNG_MGG
> 1
&
> 1 > 1
&
mrmEGS_akt
mrmEGS_CAN.5
mrwMD_iakt.1
mrmM_EWUNF
mrmM_EEGS
mrmCASE_A1.1
mrmMSRSTAT.5 = 1
mrmASRSTAT.5 = 1
mrmASGSTAT.5 = 1
1
mrwMD_iakt.2
dimKUP
cowFUN_ADR.2 = 1
cowFUN_ADR.1 = 1
Configured ADR
(CowFUN_FGR = 7 or 8)
mrmM_EADR = 0
a
F E D C B A 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
mrmCASE_A
Initialization
Load-
Idle controller
active
Coupling SR
Roll out
a <b
b
External intervention SR
&
External
Intervention FF
&
&
&
> 1
&
FF coupling
&
Figure MEREAR01: Parameter set selection for the ARD
All rights reserved by Robert Bosch GmbH, including in cases of proprietary rights applications. All rights of disposal such as copying and passing on to us.
19 April 2002 Overview - Active Ruckeldmpfer DS / ESA
Page 2-142 EDC15 +
Y S01 281/120 - VG2
0 bosch
mrmM_EWUNF
mrmM_EWUSO
a
a> b
b
mroLSausBg
DEAD TIME
mrwLSausVz
cowFUN_LSE.1
dimKup
> 1
dzmNmit
mrwND_LS
a
mroLS_aus
cowFUN_LSE.0
0
mroTD_Sper
a <b
b
mroCASE_FF.9
KF
TIMER
mrwDLS_neg
a
mrwTD_Sper
a <b
b
mrmGANG
KF
mroLS_akt
TIMER
mrwDLS_pos
F E D C
mrwTD_Wirk 0 Load-
B A 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
mroM_ARDSu
AMOUNT
TIMER
mrmCASE_A
mrwARDRL_T
mrmPWG_roh <= mrwARDRPWG
dzmNmit <mrmN_LLBAS + mrwARDRL_N
mrmM_EFGR = 0
mrmM_EADR = 0
no ext. Intervention mrmCASE_A.6 = 0
mrmSTART_B
mrmINARD_D
&
Roll out
> 1
fboSDZG
fgmFGAKT <mrwARD_V
Initialization
&
mrmM_EADR = 0
Figure MEREAR11: Parameter set selection 2 for the ARD
The following groups of parameters that are associated with a control type (such as are D2T2
Member for the disturbance controller, clutch and backlash active consisting of: mrwDSKUPK and
mrwDSKUPX), for reasons of clarity only the structure-determining part of the
Parameter set name specified with "..." (in this example mrwDSKUP ...).
Similarly, a specific value from different parameter blocks (eg mrwDSKUPK,
mrwDSR1GK or mrwDSL1GK) addressed when its structure-determining part by ".."
(Ie mrwDS ... K) is replaced. This simplification is possible because the allocation of the types of controllers
to their parameter structures remains unique.
All rights reserved by Robert Bosch GmbH, including in cases of proprietary rights applications. All rights of disposal such as copying and passing on to us.
DS / ESA Overview - Active Ruckeldmpfer 19 April 2002
0 bosch
EDC15 +
Y S01 281/120 - VG2
Page 2-143
The Active Ruckeldmpfer (ARD) consists of reference-forming and disturbance controller which each other
are decoupled. The guide is a former PDT1 member (lead-lag element of the first order) with
a slope limitation in a predetermined band range. Input variable is the
Command desired amount mrmM_EWUSO, output the amount mroM_ARDFF. The band in which the
Inclination limitation is active, to be applied from the fuel efficiency map
calculated loss amount clamped. The bandwidth and the characteristics mrwFPoO_KL
mrwFPuU_KL with pos. Amount tendency and mrwFNoO_KL and mrwFNuU_KL for neg
Amount tendency set depending on the speed dzmNmit. The max. Slope is also
to apply. With pos. Amount tendency it is on the map mrwFPPA_KF and with neg
Amount tendency over mrwFNRA_KF specified input and speed dependent. If an external
The clutch is actuated amount before or intervention, it is as max. Slope mrwFFRaoff
be used.
The disturbance controller is implemented as D2T2 member with ARD-speed dzmN_ARD as input and
the limited amount of intervention mroM_ARDSR as output. The limitation of the Strregleranteils
is achieved by the characteristics as mrwARDSoKL upper limit and as a lower mrwARDSuKL
Barrier was if not detected on load impact. In detektiertem load impact is on the
Limitation of mrwARDDoKL as an upper limit and a lower bound mrwARDDuKL
switched.
Exceeds the speed dzmNmit the activation limit mrwND_LS and are the
Shutdown mroLS_aus not given, then the load-detection is enabled.
Switching off occurs when the bit cowFUN_LSE.1, by pressing the clutch, by
the lock timer mrwTD_Sper, as well as a time delay by mrwLSausVz, when crossing the
unlimited desire amount mrmM_EWUNF against the limited amount requested
mrmM_EWUSO. Is the amount of the unlimited output of the gate is greater than the D2T2
speed and gear-dependent size from the map mrwDLS_neg or mrwDLS_pos so
two timers are started.
The lock timer with the duration mrwTD_Sper switched over mroTD_Sper the limitations of the
Strreglers to and inhibits a re-triggering of the function of the active timer with the duration
mrwTD_Wirk switched over mrmCASE_A.F the disturbance controller on load impact parameter.
The load-detection can be disabled with cowFUN_LSE.0 = 0 in order to save run time.
The selection of the parameter sets, the structure of the Ruckeldmpfers accordingly, for the
Control signal-forming and disturbance controller separated and is essentially a function of the ratio
Speed to speed mroVzuNfil and the speed dzmNmit. The parameters of the
Strreglers and ARD-reference-forming element differ in the higher gears (mroVzuNfil
large) only slightly. It therefore takes place in the parameter selection, a limit, so that from the
5 Transition (mrmGANG> = 5), only the parameter sets of the 5th Ganges are available.
The parameter set "coasting" for the disturbance controller and guide shaper (status bit C for the
Parameter selection in mrmCASE_A) is used under the following conditions:
Driver's desired quantity mrmPWG_roh <= mrwARDRPWG
Speed dzmNmit <threshold mrmN_LLBAS + mrwARDRL_N
no FGR-intervention (mrmM_EFGR = 0)
no ADR engagement. (MrmM_EADR = 0)
Timer duration> mrwARDRL_T
AND
AND
AND
AND
All rights reserved by Robert Bosch GmbH, including in cases of proprietary rights applications. All rights of disposal such as copying and passing on to us.
19 April 2002 Overview - Active Ruckeldmpfer DS / ESA
Page 2-144 EDC15 +
Y S01 281/120 - VG2
0 bosch
The timer starts as soon as the value mrmPWG_roh under the applicable threshold
mrwARDRPWG drops. The timer is reset once the threshold is exceeded again
will.
When actuated clutch (dimKUP = 1) eligible for the ARD, the coupling parameters for
Deployment. For external intervention amount mrmM_EWUNF <> mrmM_EWUN and EGS is active
on its own CAN parameter sets mrwDSCAN ... (D2T2 controller coefficient), mrwPSCAN ... (D2T2
Term memory factor polynomial) for the disturbance controller and not active ARD FF CAN
Parameter block skip switches also for the guide shaper.
This can be set via the application label mrwMD_iakt.1 whether transmission message
mrmEGS_akt ("active circuit") or bit 8 EGS active intervention from the CAN message
To be mapped gear 1, used in mrmEGS_CAN.5.
If a sole external intervention quantity (no ASR, MSR, ASG) through the transmission message
(MrmEGS_akt or mrmEGS_CAN.5) can be obtained by the application label mrwMD_iakt.3 the
Switching to the ARD parameter "external intervention" are suppressed and the ARD
Parameters for the selected gear remain in effect. If other external interventions quantity
(ASR, ASG, MSR), but the causes may well constitute a change to the parameter "external
Intervention ".
The corresponding guide shaper parameters are mrwFFCAN ... p, n and mrwFFCAN ...
mrwFPCAN_ ... mrwFNCAN_ ... (coefficients for the PDT1 member). Is amount of external intervention
or the manual transmission is active and the clutch pressed simultaneously, subject to the CAN-
Parameter sets.
In the case of a negative quantity tendency not active ASR, MSR or ASG-intervention but active EGS
Intervention is at mrmM_EWUNF <mrmM_EEGS via the application label mrwMD_iakt.2
switched off prevented the switch to the guide Shaper CAN parameter set. Instead of
the CAN parameters are then activated the gait parameters.
This function prevents that by the CAN parameter set abruptly, the injection quantity
mrmM_EARD is lowered to zero mg / stroke, although the external quantity requirement greater
Zero mg / stroke is. The actual injection quantity is bar when the CAN parameter set
filtered (out parameter) of the desired quantity tracked.
Configuration data cowFUN_ADR ARD is configurable by the ADR
(Working speed controller) to assist in its control. Bit 1 of cowFUN_ADR determines whether
the ARD parameter sets to be used for the ADR. Bit 2 of switches cowFUN_ADR
between a use of the CAN parameter sets and the All use
Transition parameter sets in order. If bit 2 is set by cowFUN_ADR, then with active ADR
(MrmM_EADR> 0) selected the gait parameters for the ADR, ADR with inactive (mrmM_EADR
= 0) is used only of the coupling parameter set. To this end, with configured ADR
(Released cowFUN_FGR = 7 or 8, and ADR operation to the EEPROM), the coupling
hidden. If bit 2 of cowFUN_ADR not set, with active ADR (mrmM_EADR
> 0) of the CAN parameter set used in the normal inactive ADR parameter sets are in
Selected if the operating conditions.
All rights reserved by Robert Bosch GmbH, including in cases of proprietary rights applications. All rights of disposal such as copying and passing on to us.
DS / ESA Overview - Active Ruckeldmpfer 19 April 2002
0 bosch
EDC15 +
Y S01 281/120 - VG2
Page 2-145
For driving, and for the coupling are in the case of reference-forming element 20 parameter sets
available. These are made we follows:
Clutch:
Rolling:
lower gear group:
average transmission group:
upper gear group:
increasing amount tendency:
falling tendency quantity:
high speed range:
top speed:
low speed:
mrwFFKg ... /
mrwFFRg ... /
mrwFFUg ... /
mrwFFMg ... /
mrwFFOg ... /
mrwFF.g .. p /
mrwFF.g .. n /
nrwFF.gH.n /
mrwFF.gO .. /
mrwFF.gU .. /
mrwF.Kg._.
mrwF.Rg._.
mrwF.Ug._.
mrwF.Mg._.
mrwF.Og._.
mrwFP.g._.
mrwFN.g._.
mrwFN.g._.
mrwF .. Go_.
mrwF .. gU_.
The switching of the Fhrungsformerparameter depending on the filter direction
mrmM_EWUSO - mroM_ARDFF
happens speed synchronous.
Is smaller than the filter output of the filter input, the parameters mrwFF.g.Kp,
mrwFF.g.Xp, mrwFP.g._a, mrwFP.g._b and mrwFP.g._c used. If the filter output greater
as the filter input, the parameters mrwFF.g.Kn, mrwFF.g.Xn, mrwFN.g._a,
mrwFN.g._b and mrwFN.g._c used. This change depends on mroCASE_FF.9.
The switching of the Fhrungsformerparameter a function of the filtered speed
mrmNfilt done speed synchronous two hystereses. The hysteresis detects the
Threshold between lower and upper speed range and has an upper limit (as a function of
Transmission group) mrwFFUggUO, mrwFFMggUO, mrwFFOggUO or mrwFFKupUO and the
Hysteresis mrwFF_UOH. Is this Drehzahlhysterese active (corresponds to top speed) and is
the second hysteresis is inactive, the parameters mrwFF.gOK., mrwFF.gOX., mrwF .. gO_a,
mrwF .. gO_b and mrwF .. gO_c used. Are both Drehzahlhysteresen inactive, then the
Parameters mrwFF.gUK., MrwFF.gUX., MrwF .. gU_a, mrwF .. gU_b and mrwF .. gU_c used.
This change depends on mroCASE_FF.8. The second hysteresis, the hysteresis width
mrwFF_OHH, compares the filtered speed mrmNfilt with the gangabhgigen limits
mrwFF1gOH, mrwFF2gOH, mrwFF3gOH, mrwFF4gOH and mrwFF5gOH. If this
Hysteresis condition is active (corresponding to high speed) is at a negative quantity tendency
(MroCASE_FF.9 = 0) in this in mrmCASE_A1.2 and guide former with the
Parameters mrwFF.gHKn, mrwFF.gXn, mrwFN.gH_a, mrwFN.gH_b and mrwFN.gH_c provided.
Exceeds the threshold mrwFF.ggUO the threshold mrwFF.gOH then immediately to the
Parameters set for the high speed range is switched without the parameter set for the
the upper part is activated.
Condition
mrmM_EWUSO - mroM_ARDFF> 0
mrmM_EWUSO - mroM_ARDFF <= 0
Hysteresis "high speed"
Hysteresis "top speed"
Hysteresis "low speed"
mroCASE_FF
mrmoCASE_FF.9 = 1
mrmoCASE_FF.9 = 0
mrmCASE_A1.2 = 1
mrmoCASE_FF.8 = 1
and
mrmCASE_A1.2 = 0
mroCASE_FF.8 = 0 and
mrmCASE_A1.2 = 0
Time constant
mrwFP.g._a,
mrwFN.g._a,
mrwFNgH_a,
mrwF.gO_a,
_b,
_b,
_b,
_b,
_c
_c
_c
_c
P gain
mrwFF.g.Kp
mrwFF.g.Kn
mrwFF.gOKn
mrwFF.gOK.
mrwF.gU_a, _b, _c mrwFF.gUK.
All rights reserved by Robert Bosch GmbH, including in cases of proprietary rights applications. All rights of disposal such as copying and passing on to us.
19 April 2002 Overview - Active Ruckeldmpfer DS / ESA
Page 2-146 EDC15 +
Y S01 281/120 - VG2
0 bosch
Gear
5
Top
Transmission group
4
3
2
mrdFLOgUp
mrdFPOgUp
mrdFLOgOp
mrdFPOgOp
Average
Transmission group
mrdFLMgOp
mrdFPMgOp
mrdFLMgUp
mrdFPMgUp
Lower
1
Transmission group
mrdFLUgUp
mrdFPUgUp
mrdFLUgOp
mrdFPUgOp
Number of revolutions
mrwFFOggUO
mrwFFUggUO
mrwFFMggUO
Figure MEREAR15: Parameter sets of reference-forming element with a positive amount tendency
mrwFF5gOH
Gear
5
4
3
2
Lower
1
Transmission group
mrdFLMgUn
mrdFPMgUn
mrdFLMgOn
mrdFPMgOn
mrdFLOgUn
mrdFPOgUn
mrdFLOgOn
mrdFPOgOn
mrwFF4gOH
Top
Transmission group
mrdFLOgHn
mrdFPOgHn
Average
Transmission group
mrdFLMgHn
mrdFPMgHn
mrdFLUgUn
mrdFPUgUn
mrdFLUgOn
mrdFPUgOn
mrdFLUgHn
mrdFPUgHn
Number of revolutions
mrwFFOggUO
mrwFFUggUO
mrwFF3gOH
mrwFF2gOH
mrwFF1gOH
mrwFFMggUO
Figure MEREAR16: Parameter sets of reference-forming element with a negative amount tendency
Also have their own sets of parameters for the vehicle operation at idle, depending on the
Driving speed ratio to speed mroVzuNfil available. The changeover
between "ARD bucking" (LLR not in gear) and "ARD idle" occurs (LLR engaged)
depends on the speed by means of input-dependent thresholds mrwARD_LR1 to mrwARD_LR5 and the
Threshold for load-mrwARD_LS and hysteresis mrwARD_LRH. The state "ARD
Idle "is for the case" no load-recognized "as a function of the detected Ganges
mrmGANG drops below the speed threshold (mrmN_LLBAS + mrwARD_LR.)
enabled, when crossing from (mrmN_LLBAS + mrwARD_LR. + mrwARD_LRH) on
"ARD bucking" switched. If the state "Bonanza" before (mrmCASE_A.F) as is used for the
Calculation of the speed threshold parameter mrwARD_LS instead of a transition parameter
be used. The determined on the hysteresis speed range is displayed in mrmCASE_A1.0.
All rights reserved by Robert Bosch GmbH, including in cases of proprietary rights applications. All rights of disposal such as copying and passing on to us.
DS / ESA Overview - Active Ruckeldmpfer 19 April 2002
0 bosch
EDC15 +
Y S01 281/120 - VG2
Page 2-147
Gear engaged
mrmGANG = 1
mrmGANG = 2
mrmGANG = 3
mrmGANG = 4
mrmGANG = 5
mrmCASE_A.F
Speed condition
for "ARD idle"
n <+ mrmN_LLBAS mrwARD_LR1
n <+ mrmN_LLBAS mrwARD_LR2
n <+ mrmN_LLBAS mrwARD_LR3
n <+ mrmN_LLBAS mrwARD_LR4
n <+ mrmN_LLBAS mrwARD_LR5
n <+ mrmN_LLBAS mrwARD_LS
Speed condition
for "ARD bucking"
n> mrmN_LLBAS + + mrwARD_LR1 mrwARD_LRH
n> mrmN_LLBAS + + mrwARD_LR2 mrwARD_LRH
n> mrmN_LLBAS + + mrwARD_LR3 mrwARD_LRH
n> mrmN_LLBAS + + mrwARD_LR4 mrwARD_LRH
n> mrmN_LLBAS + + mrwARD_LR5 mrwARD_LRH
n> mrmN_LLBAS + + mrwARD_LS mrwARD_LRH
The disturbance controller is initialized when one of the conditions is true:
-
-
-
-
MrmSTART_B start bit = 1
Speed sensor defective fboSDZG <> 0
ARD-D initialization mrmINARD_D <> 0 by
external quantity intervention
Speed fgmFGAKT <speed threshold
mrwARD_V for speed branch initialization
Quantity desired speed governor mrmM_EADR = 0
OR
OR
OR
AND
All rights reserved by Robert Bosch GmbH, including in cases of proprietary rights applications. All rights of disposal such as copying and passing on to us.
19 April 2002 Overview - Active Ruckeldmpfer DS / ESA
Page 2-148 EDC15 +
Y S01 281/120 - VG2
0 bosch
Value range of the olda state bits of the active Ruckeldmpfung mrmCASE_A (high byte
hexadezimalkodiert: Selection Fhrungsformerparametersatz, in the low byte hexadezimalkodiert:
Selection Strreglerparametersatz; Low Byte Bit 7: disturbance controller off and initialized):
Bitmask
0000 0001 0000 0000
0000 0010 0000 0000
0000 0011 0000 0000
0001 0000 0000 0000
WertHex Active Parameters
lower Getriebegruppe0100
0200
0300
1000
Fhrungsformerparametersatz =
mrwFFUg .... mrwF ... Ug ....
average transmission group
Fhrungsformerparametersatz =
mrwFFMg .... mrwF ... Mg ...
upper transmission group
Fhrungsformerparametersatz =
mrwFFOg .... mrwF ... Og ....
"Coasting"
Strreglerparametersatz =
mrwDSROLK, mrwDSROLX
mrwPSROL_a, mrwPSROL_b, mrwPSROL_c
Fhrungsformerparametersatz =
mrwFFRg ... mrwF ... Rg ..
Clutch or neutral gear
Fhrungsformerparametersatz =
mrwFFKg ... mrwF ... Kg ...
amount of external intervention
Fhrungsformerparametersatz =
mrwFFCan ... mrwF ... CAN ...
Detected load-
Strreglerparametersatz =
Low speed, amount falling: mrwDSLLSn .., mrwPSLLSn ..
High speed, amount falling: mrwDSRLSn .., mrwPSRLSn ..
Low speed, amount increasing: mrwDSLLSp .., mrwPSLLSp ..
High speed, amount increasing: mrwDSRLSp .., mrwPSRLSp ..
1 Gear
Strreglerparametersatz =
mrwDS ... 1GK, mrwDS ... 1GX
mrwPS ... 1G_a, mrwPS ... 1G_b, mrwPS ... 1G_c
2 Gear
Strreglerparametersatz =
mrwDS ... 2GK, mrwDS ... 2GX
mrwPS ... 2G_a, mrwPS ... 2G_b, mrwPS ... 2G_c
3 Gear
Strreglerparametersatz =
mrwDS ... 3GK, mrwDS ... 3GX
mrwPS ... 3G_a, mrwPS ... 3G_b, mrwPS ... 3G_c
4 Gear
Strreglerparametersatz =
mrwDS ... 4GK, mrwDS ... 4GX
mrwPS ... 4G_a, mrwPS ... 4G_b, mrwPS ... 4G_c
5 Gear
Strreglerparametersatz =
mrwDS ... 5GK, mrwDS ... 5GX
mrwPS ... 5G_a, mrwPS ... 5G_b, mrwPS ... 5G_c
0010 0000 0000 0000
0100 0000 0000 0000
1000 0000 0000 0000
2000
4000
8000
0000 0000 000X 0001 0001
0000 0000 000X 0010 0002
0000 0000 000X 0011 0003
0000 0000 000X 0100 0004
0000 0000 000X 0101 0005
All rights reserved by Robert Bosch GmbH, including in cases of proprietary rights applications. All rights of disposal such as copying and passing on to us.
DS / ESA Overview - Active Ruckeldmpfer 19 April 2002
0 bosch
EDC15 +
Y S01 281/120 - VG2
Page 2-149
Bitmask
0000 0000 0001 XXXX
WertHex Active Parameters
Idle controller aktiv0010
Strreglerparametersatz =
mrwDSL ... K, mrwDSL ... X
mrwPSL ... _a, _b ... mrwPSL, mrwPSL _c ...
Actuated clutch
Strreglerparametersatz =
mrwDSKUPK, mrwDSKUPX
mrwPSKUP_a, mrwPSKUP_b, mrwPSKUP_c
amount of external intervention
Strreglerparametersatz =
mrwDSCANK, mrwDSCANX
mrwPSCAN_a, mrwPSCAN_b, mrwPSCAN_c
Initialize disturbance controller
0000 0000 0010 0000 0020
0000 0000 0100 0000 0040
0000 0000 1000 0000 0080
Range of values of the extended status bits active Ruckeldmpfung mrmCASE_A1
hexadezimalkodiert:
Bitmask
0000 0001
0000 0010
0000 0100
xxxx x000
WertHex
01
02
04
Active Parameters
upper speed range
positive volume trend
high speed range
not used
The parameter set selection for the ARD happens when driving in the corridors, on the basis of
Ratio speed / speed (mroVzuNfil). In the case of using the Strreglers is
engaged gear (mrmGANG) the corresponding parameter set, taking into account the
State "ARD idle" or "ARD bucking" selected.
In the case of reference-forming element are 25 parameter sets are available, where 2 ("Quantity tendency
") for" be made available to external intervention quantity "ascending / descending. When driving in
the aisles, is closed in one of three transmission groups. Per transmission group and for
"Coupling" as well as for the state are rolling out each 4 parameter sets provided (2 times
"Quantity tendency decrease / increase" in combination with "upper / lower speed"). Additional
is in a negative quantity tendency for the three transmission groups between high and lower
Speed differentiated. Then, three other sets of parameters for the high speed range
Available.
Transmission group
mroGG
top 3
medium 2
lower 1
Gear
mrmGANG
0
mrwGNG_OGG
mrwGNG_MGG
Figure MEREAR03: Parameter set selection for the guide shaper
All rights reserved by Robert Bosch GmbH, including in cases of proprietary rights applications. All rights of disposal such as copying and passing on to us.
19 April 2002 Overview - Active Ruckeldmpfer DS / ESA
DS / ESA
mrmM_EWUS
O
MIN
mroM_ELLBE
Page 2-150
ro m M _ E W
C E S
mroM_ARD
WU
mrwBGR_off
2.12.3 Control Algorithm
mrmdMD_EF
F
mrmM_EMOT
CONTROLS
mrmM_EWU
N
mrwFFBGSC
H
MIN
> 0:
mrwFF.g.KpmrwFF.g.Xpmrw
FP.g._amrwFP.g._bmrwFP.g._
c
Lead-lag Gliedmit
slope limitation
<0:
mrwFF.g.KnmrwFF.g.Xnmrw
FN.g._amrwFN.g._bmrwFN.g.
_c
dzmNmit
MIN
KL
mrmM_EARD
mrwFFBgrKL
MEREAR_14
EDC15 +
mrmNfilt
mroCASE_FFdzmNmit
mrmGANGmrmMD_Re
ib
mroM_ARDF
F
Y S01 281/120 - VG2
CONTROLS
mroM_ARDS
R
mrmCASE_A
KL
mrwFF_UOHmrwFFUggU
OmrwFFMggUOmrwFFOg
gUOmrwFFKupUO
mrwFF.gOX.mrwFF.gOK.
mrwF gO_amrwF .. .. ..
gO_bmrwF gO_c
mrwARDDuK
L
mroM_ARDSu
D2T2
KL
mrwFF.gUX.mrwFF.gUK.
mrwF gU_amrwF .. .. ..
gU_bmrwF gU_c
Figure MEREAR04: Active Ruckeldmpfer
All rights reserved by Robert Bosch GmbH, including in cases of proprietary rights applications. All rights of disposal such as copying and passing on to us.
Overview - Active Ruckeldmpfer
mrwDS ... K, mrwDS
... XmrwPS ... _a, _c
mrwPS ... _bmrwPS
...
mrwARDSuK
L
KL
dzmN_ARD
mrmNfilt
mrwARDSoK
L
mrmM_EBEG
R
0
dzmNmit
KL
KL
mroTD_Sper
mrwARDDoK
L
19 April 2002
bosch
mrwABegOK
L
0 bosch
mroCASE_FF.5
mroCASE_FF.6
mroCASE_FF.9
dzmNmit
KF
EDC15 +
Y S01 281/120 - VG2
Page 2-151
> 1
mrwFFRaoff mroFRamp
mrwFPRA_KF
mrmGANG
mrmM_EWUSO
KF
mrwFNRA_KF
Lead-lag R
mroM_ARDFF
dzmNmit
KL
mroFZug
mrwFPoO_KL
mroFSchub
KL
mrwFNoO_KL
KL
mrwFPoU_KL
KL mroMEVerl
mrwFNoU_KL
Z -1
KF
mrwKFVB_KF
mrmMD_Reib
Figure MEREAR14: lead-lag element with slope limiting
Active dampening of Ruckeldmpfer speed fluctuations of the reactions
Vehicle (drive train) are formed on the motor, by controlling the amount of fuel. He
consists of a D2T2 link with asymmetric boundary (fault controller / speed branch)
and a PDT1 element with slope limitation (reference-forming / Lot branch).
Through the switch, the input size of the mrwFFBGSCH reference-forming element mrmM_EWUSO
be selected:
Driver's desired quantity limited by limiting amount mroMEBEGR (limited by
Torque and smoke map mrwFFBGSCH = 0).
Driver's desired quantity limited by characteristic mrwFFBgrKL (mrwFFBGSCH = 1).
The choice of parameters is performed synchronously for the disturbance controller (see chapter
Parameter set selection). When external quantity are directly engaged the CAN
All rights reserved by Robert Bosch GmbH, including in cases of proprietary rights applications. All rights of disposal such as copying and passing on to us.
19 April 2002 Overview - Active Ruckeldmpfer DS / ESA
Page 2-152 EDC15 +
Y S01 281/120 - VG2
0 bosch
Parameter sets taken. While applying the clutch, the clutch, parameters will be
applied if no external amount of intervention longer present. The switch to
Load shock parameters are, it was detected on load impact and neither the parameter sets for
external quantity engagement, coasting or clutch are active. In the transition from "external
Amount of intervention "to" Driving in transition "are in the speed category, the specific gait parameters
immediately accepted. Be the transition from "clutch pressed" to "Driving in transition"
used until the specific gait parameters in the speed class if the output of the
Strreglers has changed its sign. In the transition from "Driving in progress" to "clutch
operated "or" external intervention quantity ", the respective parameter sets directly
taken.
State
External intervention quantity (CAN)
Roll out
Coupling
+ No external intervention amount
+ No VZ-exchange
+ No coasting
Load-
Low speed, amount decreasing
High speed, amount decreasing
Low speed, quantity increasing
High speed, quantity increasing
5 Response + LLR not active
4 Response + LLR not active
3 Response + LLR not active
2 Response + LLR not active
1 Response + LLR not active
5 Response + LLR active
4 Response + LLR active
3 Response + LLR active
2 Response + LLR active
1 Response + LLR active
Error in mrmCASE_A
mroCASE_SR
01000000
see mroCASE_FF
00100000
D2T2 member
mrwDSCAN.
mrwDSROL.
mrwDSKUP.
T-polynomial
mrwPSCAN.
mrwPSROL.
mrwPSKUP.
see mroCASE_FF
u mrmCASE_A1mrwDSLLSn.mrwDS
RLSn.mrwDSLLSp.
mrwDSRLSp.
00000101
00000100
00000011
00000010
00000001
00010101
00010100
00010011
00010010
00010001
11111111
mrwDSR5G.
mrwDSR4G.
mrwDSR3G.
mrwDSR2G.
mrwDSR1G.
mrwDSL5G.
mrwDSL4G.
mrwDSL3G.
mrwDSL2G.
mrwDSL1G.
mrwDSKUP.
mrwPSLLSn.
mrwPSRLSn.
mrwPSLLSp.
mrwPSRLSp.
mrwPSR5G.
mrwPSR4G.
mrwPSR3G.
mrwPSR2G.
mrwPSR1G.
mrwPSL5G.
mrwPSL4G.
mrwPSL3G.
mrwPSL2G.
mrwPSL1G.
mrwPSKUP.
All rights reserved by Robert Bosch GmbH, including in cases of proprietary rights applications. All rights of disposal such as copying and passing on to us.
DS / ESA Overview - Active Ruckeldmpfer 19 April 2002
0 bosch
EDC15 +
Y S01 281/120 - VG2
Page 2-153
The gear-dependent selection of the parameters of the reference-forming element is time-synchronous, the
Distinction between the parameters for positive and negative volume trend and
takes place between high and low speed synchronous speed.
State
Roll out, positive volume trend n, low
Roll out, negative volume trend n, low
Roll out, positive volume trend, n high
Roll out, negative volume trend, n high
Coupling, positive volume trend n, low
Coupling, negative volume trend n, low
Coupling, positive volume trend, n high
Coupling, negative volume trend, n high
Upper GG, positive volume trend n, low
Upper GG, negative volume trend n, low
Upper GG, positive volume trend, n high
Upper GG, negative volume trend, n high
Medium GG, positive volume trend n, low
Medium GG, negative volume trend n, low
Medium GG, positive volume trend, n high
Medium GG, negative volume trend, n high
Lower GG, positive volume trend n, low
Lower GG, negative volume trend n, low
Lower GG, positive volume trend, n high
Lower GG, negative volume trend, n high
Ext lot of intervention, positive volume trend
Ext lot of intervention, negative volume trend
Error in mrmCASE_A positive amount tendency
Error in mrmCASE_A negative amount tendency
mroCASE_FF
0000
0000
0000
0000
0000
0000
0000
0000
0000
0000
0000
0000
0000
0000
0000
0000
0000
0000
0000
0000
0000
0000
XXXX
XXXX
0010
0000
0011
0001
0010
0000
0011
0001
0010
0000
0011
0001
0010
0000
0011
0001
0010
0000
0011
0001
0010
0000
XXXX
XXXX
0001
0001
0001
0001
0010
0010
0010
0010
0000
0000
0000
0000
0000
0000
0000
0000
0000
0000
0000
0000
0100
0100
1111
1111
0000
0000
0000
0000
0000
0000
0000
0000
0011
0011
0011
0011
0010
0010
0010
0010
0001
0001
0001
0001
0000
0000
1111
1111
Lead-lag
mrwFFRgU.p
mrwFFRgU.n
mrwFFRgO.p
mrwFFRgO.n
mrwFFKgU.p
mrwFFKgU.n
mrwFFKgO.p
mrwFFKgO.n
mrwFFOgU.p
mrwFFOgU.n
mrwFFOgO.p
mrwFFOgO.n
mrwFFMgU.p
mrwFFMgU.n
mrwFFMgO.p
mrwFFMgO.n
mrwFFUgU.p
mrwFFUgU.n
mrwFFUgO.p
mrwFFUgO.n
mrwFFCAN.p
mrwFFCAN.n
mrwFFKgO.p
mrwFFKgO.p
T-polynomial
mrwFPRgU_.
mrwFNRgU_.
mrwFPRgO_.
mrwFNRgO_.
mrwFPKgU_.
mrwFNKgU_.
mrwFPKgO_.
mrwFNKgO_.
mrwFPOgU_.
mrwFNOgU_.
mrwFPOgO_.
mrwFNOgO_.
mrwFPMgU_.
mrwFNMgU_.
mrwFPMgO_.
mrwFNMgO_.
mrwFPUgU_.
mrwFNUgU_.
mrwFPUgO_.
mrwFNUgO_.
mrwFPCAN_.
mrwFNCAN_.
mrwFPKgO_.
mrwFPKgO_.
All rights reserved by Robert Bosch GmbH, including in cases of proprietary rights applications. All rights of disposal such as copying and passing on to us.
19 April 2002 Overview - Active Ruckeldmpfer DS / ESA
Page 2-154 EDC15 +
Y S01 281/120 - VG2
0 bosch
2:13 smoothness controller
dzmNakt
Setpoint from
Segment (k) ...
Segment (k-2z +1)
mroLRRSoll
mroLRRReg
mroLRRIST
Actual value of
Segment (k-z +1) ...
Segment (k-z-1)
mrwLRR_BEW
Figure MERELR03: control difference
Synchronization (dzmABTAS maxima
each fall on the same
dzmSEGM-meter data)
dzmSEGM
dzmABTAS
1 .. z
Drift correction
I component (z)
z
NBF
PI
MIN:
-MrwLRR_BGR
MAX:
+ MrwLRR_BGR
SYNC
with
NBF
mrmM_ELD2
.
.
.
mrmM_ELD6
PI
MIN:
-MrwLRR_BGR
MAX:
+ MrwLRR_BGR
Output
Delay
mroLRRReg
mroM_ELRR
Dead time
z-4 segments
mroLRRegel.0
MIN:
-MrwLRR_BGR
MAX:
+ MrwLRR_BGR
mroLRRegel.1
PI
1
mroAB
Figure MERELR01: smoothness controller
All rights reserved by Robert Bosch GmbH, including in cases of proprietary rights applications. All rights of disposal such as copying and passing on to us.
DS / ESA Overview - Smoothness controller 19 April 2002
0 bosch
EDC15 +
Y S01 281/120 - VG2
Page 2-155
fgmFGAKT
mrmM_EMOT
dzmNmit
mrmN_LLBAS
Control / regulate
mrwLRR_MOR
mrwLRR_MUR
mrwLRR_OFR
mrwLRR_NOR
mrwLRR_NUR
mrwLRR_TW
mrwLRR_V10
mrwLRR_V21
mrwLRR_V30
mroLRRegel.0
mroABM_E
Controlling factor
mrmM_EMOT
1
0
mrwLRR_MO0
mrwLRR_MO1
mrwLRR_MU0
mrwLRR_MU1
MIN mroAB
Controlling factor
dzmNmit
1
0
mrwLRR_N0
mrwLRR_N1
mroABN
dzmNmit <mrwLRR_LOW
dzmNmit> mrwLRR_HIG
mrmSTART_B = 1
fboSDZG
dzmNmit> 0
2 synchronization
error within
mrwLRR_SEG
Segments
> 1
> 1
> 1
z integrators
initialize
mroLRRegel.1
Figure MERELR02: smoothness controller monitoring
The smooth-running control regulates the speed variations of the injection system, which essentially
vonsystembedingten, unterschiedlichenZylindereinspritzmengenherrhren, in
Idle speed range. This is done by rapid intrusion of controlled
Correction injection amount for each cylinder. Can from the different speeds dzmNakt
be derived when the correction amount mroM_ELRR for the next cylinder
issue is.
For correct function of the smooth-running control a flawless synchronization is required.
It occurs when Abtastzeitmaxima respectively the same values of the message segment number
dzmSEGM fall.
The smooth-running control is outside the speed window lower speed limit for LRR -
Calculation mrwLRR_LOW and upper speed limit for LRR - control mrwLRR_HIG not
calculated. When start condition mrmSTART_B = 1, for speed sensor defect fboSDZG <> 0, at
Motor standstill dzmNmit = 0 or if twice within mrwLRR_SEG segments
Coincide with unforeseen Abtastzeitmaxima segment counts, the
overall smoothness control zwischeninitialisiert. The olda - value mroLRRegel takes in these
Cases the value to 2.
All rights reserved by Robert Bosch GmbH, including in cases of proprietary rights applications. All rights of disposal such as copying and passing on to us.
19 April 2002 Overview - Smoothness controller DS / ESA
Page 2-156 EDC15 +
Y S01 281/120 - VG2
0 bosch
For the Control process z (one per cylinder) PI controllers are used. The calculation of the
Correction amount is in each case (z-2) interrupts prior to injection in the cylinder under consideration, as
at this point (k = 0), the controller setpoint formation is complete for this cylinder. To
Setpoint generation, the current speeds (k) to (k - 2z +1) is used, which is two full
Engine revolutions corresponds. The actual value is determined using the segment weighting factor
mrwLRR_BEW from the weighted average of the current speeds (k - z + 1) to (k - z -1)
determined. This is the regulator of the significant for the considered cylinder speed cut-
available. The calculation is in each case with the parameter set mrwLRP_ .. (P - controller) or
mrwLRI_ .. (I - controller) made. Actual value and setpoint values are calculated as follows:
(1 - mrwLRR_BEW ) * n(k- z- 1) + n(k- z)+ mrwLRR_BEW *n(k- z+ 1)
2
n(k- 2z+ 1) + n(k- 2z+ 2)+...+ n(k)
TARGET =
2Z
IS =
The integrators and the manipulated variables for all cylinders are on the LRR - limit amount
(+ / -) MrwLRR_BGR limited. The smoothness integrators are further every two
Engine revolutions corrected to maintain the smooth running proportion on average equal to zero. The
Differences in the smoothness integrators of the individual cylinders to the cylinder of the NBF - signal is
mrmM_ELD6 issued, wherein, when the cylinders of the NBF - - in the signal mrmM_ELD2
Cylinder 1 is mrmM_ELD2 the difference in the smoothness integrators between cylinders 1 and
Cylinder 2 includes mrmM_ELD3 the difference in the smoothness integrators between cylinder 1
and cylinder 3 includes etc. On the OLDAs mroM_ELA1 - mroM_ELA6 be the
Output absolute amounts of the individual smoothness integrators.
In certain operating conditions of the engine or the vehicle is on smoothness control
converted. During the control of the smooth running of the integrator values are frozen, and to a
Rated Abregelungsfaktor. The variable output follows (z-4) interrupts after its
Calculation.
You switch to control when at least one of the following conditions are met
is:
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
Current Speed fgmFGAKT> mrwLRR_V10UND
(FgmFGAKT mrwLRR_V21ODER
fgmFGAKT> mrwLRR_V30)
Speed dzmNmit Desired idle speed mrmN_LLBAS + idle speed offset for
Rules mrwLRR_OFR
Speed dzmNmit upper speed limit for rules mrwLRR_NOR
Speed dzmNmit Desired idle speed mrmN_LLBAS - idle speed offset for
Rules mrwLRR_OFR
Speed dzmNmit lower speed limit for rules mrwLRR_NUR
Engine torque amount mrmM_EMOT lower quantity limit for rules mrwLRR_MUR
Engine torque amount mrmM_EMOT upper amount limit for rules mrwLRR_MOR.
All rights reserved by Robert Bosch GmbH, including in cases of proprietary rights applications. All rights of disposal such as copying and passing on to us.
DS / ESA Overview - Smoothness controller 19 April 2002
0 bosch
EDC15 +
Y S01 281/120 - VG2
Page 2-157
The return to normal operation is also to minimize waiting time transition tax -> Rules
mrwLRR_TW delayed.
The Abregelungsfaktor in control mode is determined from the minimum of a speed component and
a quantity component formed. The Mengenabregelungsfaktor mroABM_E is up to the lower
Quantity limit mrwLRR_MU0 equal to zero (push operation), increases linearly up to the quantity limit
mrwLRR_MU1 to the value one, up to the upper limit amount is constant mrwLRR_MO1
and decreases linearly up to the limit amount mrwLRR_MO0 back to the value zero. The
Drehzahlabregelungsfaktor mroABN is up to the speed limit mrwLRR_N1 constant one and
decreases linearly up to the speed limit mrwLRR_N0 to zero.
Description of the status bits olda the smooth-running control mroLRRegel:
Decimal
0
1
2
Comment
LRR taxes
LRR rules
LRR inactive
All rights reserved by Robert Bosch GmbH, including in cases of proprietary rights applications. All rights of disposal such as copying and passing on to us.
19 April 2002 Overview - Smoothness controller DS / ESA
0 bosch
EDC15 +
Y S01 281/120 - VG2
Page 3-1
3 exhaust gas recirculation
3.1 Survey
The exhaust gas recirculation system consists of five tasks together: the actual value calculation, the
Setpoint calculation, the scheme of parallel control and the surveillance and
Shutdown. In the Volume Select the amount to be used for aroM_Eroh is determined.
mrmFGR_roh
mroM_EBEGR
mrmM_EAKT
mrmM_EWUN
mrmSTART_B
dzmNmit
anmT_MOT
ehmFLD_DK
ECEC ...
aroAUS_B
aroREG_B
aroE
ldmADF
anmLTF
dzmNmit
anmT_MOT
armARF_AGL
dzmUMDRsta
zmmVEAKTIV
Setpoint
calculation
ARF_02
Monitoring
and shutdown
ARF_06, ARF_07 ecmDK_zu
nlmDK_zu
zmmDKTL
zmmF_KRIT
anmLTF
mrmLDFUaus
dzmNmit
Quantity selection
ARF_20
armM_E armM_Lsoll
Regulator
ARF_03
Actuator 1: ehmFAR1
Actuator 2: ehmFAR2
Actuator 3: ehmFAR3
mrmM_EAKT
mrmM_EWUNL
mrmM_EWUNR
anmRME
aroRGsteu
Actual value
calculation
ARF_15
armM_List
Parallel
Control
ARF_05
anmLMM
ldmADF
anmSTF
anmLTF
dzmNmit
armM_LBiT
ldmP_Llin
mrmM_EAKT
ldmADF
anmLTF
dzmNmit
anmT_MOT
armARF_AGL
Figure ARF_01: structure of the exhaust gas recirculation
With the software switch cowFUN_ARF the exhaust gas recirculation is on or off (0 =
off, 1 = on)
All rights reserved by Robert Bosch GmbH, including in cases of proprietary rights applications. All rights of disposal such as copying and passing on to us.
19 April 2002 Exhaust gas recirculation - Overview DS / ESA
Page 3-2 EDC15 +
Y S01 281/120 - VG2
0 bosch
3.2 Quantity selection
mrmM_EAKT
mrmM_EWUNL
mrmM_EWUNR
aroM_Eroh
armM_E
cowARF_ME
KL
armM_ERME
arwRMEKL
anmRME_ON
anmRME
arwRMEHyA
arwRMEHyE
cowFUN_RME.0
&
Figure ARF_20: quantity selection
With the software switch cowARF_ME sets which fuel quantity signal is used
should be. The partial functions will still work armM_E with the crowd.
About cowFUN_RME.0 = 1, in recognition of RME fuel (anmRME_ON = 1) a
Correcting the fuel quantity signal by means of characteristic arwRMEKL.
The signal anmRME_ON is always calculated regardless of cowFUN_ARF.
Description of the software switch ARF - quantity input request cowARF_ME:
Decimal
1
2
3
Comment
current injection quantity
Desired Amount of idle amount
Desired quantity raw + idle amount
All rights reserved by Robert Bosch GmbH, including in cases of proprietary rights applications. All rights of disposal such as copying and passing on to us.
DS / ESA Exhaust gas recirculation - quantity selection 19 April 2002
0 bosch
EDC15 +
Y S01 281/120 - VG2
Page 3-3
3.3 Process value
dzmNmit
ldmP_Llin
anmSTF / anmLTF
mrmM_EWUNR
arwHFP ...
ehmFAR1
ehmFAR2
mrmSTART_B
anmWTF
ldmADF
mrmM_EAKT
fboSLDF
fboSADF
fboSSTF
fboSLTF
fboSDZG
fboSLMM
fboSAR1
fboSAR2
fboSLDS
Calculate the mass of air from the air volume:
Normalized
Air mass
arwLDF_nrm
arwPB_LTF
arwtNorm ...
armRatio
armIST_4
aroIST_1 aroIST_5
arwLMBNORM
Averaging
old + new
2
Division by
Speed and
Standardization
anmLMM
KL
Plausibility
examination
fbbELM5_P
arwHFP ...
arwFAR ...
arwWTF ..
arwLDF_hi
arwM_E_hi
arwn_PB ...
arwLDF ...
arwRat ...
arwLMBLIKL
cowV_LMM_S = 4
arwLMBEKOF
arwLMBEKTD
ldmADF
anmLTF
KF
dzmNmit
arwLMBKOKF
armM_List
[Mg / stroke]
armM_LBiT
dzmNmit
ldmP_Llin KF
1
2
fboSLMM &
cowVAR_2HF
cowVAR_2HF = 1
arwLMVGWKF
zmmHF2_DEF
> 1
fboSHFM
arwKF_ena = 1
&
Figure ARF_15: air mass calculation from the analog value
DernachdemEinschaltenauftretendeFehlereinesnichtratiometrischen
Hot-film air mass meter (cowV_LMM_S = 1) is multiplicative means of the power-up correction
balanced. The power-up correction factor by means of the time constant and the arwLMBEKOF
arwLMBEKTD applied. The timer is started from the detection of the first speed> 0.
t
aroIST _1 = anmLMM *arwLMBEKOF + (1- arwLMBEKOF ) *

arwLMBEKTD
UE
valid for all t <= arwLMBEKTD
For a cowV_LMM_S = 1 or 3, this correction has to be shut down in the application. For
cowV_LMM_S = 4, this power-up correction never been activated as the amount of air already linearized and
averaged in the air mass calculation is received.
All rights reserved by Robert Bosch GmbH, including in cases of proprietary rights applications. All rights of disposal such as copying and passing on to us.
19 April 2002 Exhaust gas recirculation - Process value DS / ESA
Page 3-4 EDC15 +
Y S01 281/120 - VG2
0 bosch
The so-corrected input signals are linearized about the correction characteristic curve arwLMBLIKL.
After averaging with the previous measurement value, this value is divided by the rotational speed and
the normalization constant arwLMBNORM (= number of cylinders) to an air mass value per stroke
normalized:
12
mg UE kg UE 11h
aroIST _ 5= Armist _ 4 ** *
Stroke UE hdzmNmit U / min 60 min arwLMBNORM
U
Stroke
EU
The normalized size aroIST_5 is a correction factor and the air temperature
the atmospheric pressure on the map depends arwLMBKOKF corrected multiplicative.
3.3.1 Plausibility check of the air mass measurement
3.3.1.1 Normalized air mass
For systems with a boost pressure sensor and air temperature sensor ldmP_Llin anmSTF or anmLTF
after the boost pressure cooler, a replacement air mass can (normalized) from dzmNmit speed, current
Injection quantity mrmM_EAKT, boost pressure and air temperature ldmP_Llin anmSTF or anmLTF
are calculated and the measured by the HFM with the air mass flow armIST_4
Ratio to be set.
It is checked whether the armRatio ratio within an allowable tolerance band arwRatmin
and arwRatmax is, otherwise there is a sensitivity drift error fboSHFM ago.
armM_Lber
dzmNmit
KL
armRatio
arwLMnKL
ldmP_Llin
arwLDF_nrm
anmSTF
anmLTF
KL
aroT_Korr
aroFakKorr
aroKorrmp
arwPB_LTF
arwtNorm
dzmNmit
mrmM_EAKT
arwLMltfKL
KF
arwLMmrKF
armIST_4
Figure ARF_21: Normalized air mass
3.3.1.2 plausibility check (OBD) of the sensitivity drift
The general condition for an examination of the sensitivity drift and error handling
are:

no active EGR and throttle open:
arwFAR1_lo <= ehmFAR1 <= arwFAR1_hi
arwFAR2_lo <= ehmFAR2 <= arwFAR2_hi
at least for the time arwtAR1AR2. When the condition for EGR or
Throttle valve is not satisfied, the dead time is reset.
arwt_PBOBD the time since start dropping (since mrmSTART_B = 0) has expired.

All rights reserved by Robert Bosch GmbH, including in cases of proprietary rights applications. All rights of disposal such as copying and passing on to us.
DS / ESA Exhaust gas recirculation - Process value 19 April 2002
0




bosch
EDC15 +
Y S01 281/120 - VG2
Page 3-5
When engine is warm and not overheated:
arwWTF_lo <anmWTF <arwWTF_hi
Vehicle is not at high altitude ldmADF> arwLDF_hi
Injection quantity is not too large mrmM_EAKT <arwM_E_hi
no error in the following components:
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
fboSLDF
fboSADF
fboSSTF
fboSLTF
fboSDZG
fboSLMM
fboSAR1
fboSAR2
fboSLDS

If one of these conditions are met, the error handling is stopped and the
Debounce reset, otherwise the general release condition is given.
&
DEAD TIME
arwtAR1AR2
arwFAR1_lo <= ehmFAR1 <= arwFAR1_hi
arwFAR2_lo <= ehmFAR2 <= arwFAR2_hi
mrmSTART_B
1
DEAD TIME
arwt_PBOBD
arwWTF_lo <anmWTF <arwWTF_hi
ldmADF
arwLDF_hi
mrmM_EAKT
arwM_E_hi
fboSLDF = 0
fboSADF = 0
fboSSTF = 0
fboSLTF = 0
fboSDZG = 0
fboSLMM = 0
fboSAR1 = 0
fboSAR2 = 0
fboSLDS = 0
a &
aroPB_ena.0
a> b
b
a
a <b
b
Figure ARF_22: plausibility check release
3.3.1.3 Sensitivity drift low
The conditions for an examination of the sensitivity drift low, and error handling are:
All rights reserved by Robert Bosch GmbH, including in cases of proprietary rights applications. All rights of disposal such as copying and passing on to us.
19 April 2002 Exhaust gas recirculation - Process value DS / ESA
Page 3-6 EDC15 +
Y S01 281/120 - VG2
0 bosch



the average motor speed is in the monitoring area
arwn_PBllo <dzmNmit <arwn_PBlhi
the boost pressure is greater than a threshold
ldmP_Llin> arwLDFmin
given general release aroPB_ena.0
otherwise, the error handling is stopped and reset the debounce times.
An error occurs if the ratio between normalized and current mass of air per hour
less than a threshold:
armRatio <arwRatmin
If the ratio between normalized and current mass of air per hour for the time armRatio
fbwEHFM_LA currently broken, so it will be recorded as faulty and the
Replacement functions are activated. The normalized air mass will continue to be valid
analyzed. If the ratio between normalized and current mass of air per hour for a
Time fbwEHFM_LB currently OK, so it will be finally saved and healed the
Substitute functions are withdrawn.
aroPB_ena.0
dzmNmit
arwn_PBlhi
a
a <b
b
a
aroPB_ena.1
a> b
&
arwn_PBllo
ldmP_Llin
arwLDFmin
armRatio
arwRatmin
b
a
a> b
b
a
fbbEHFM_L
a <b
ENT
Contusion b
Stop error condition contusion
fbbEHFM_LA
fbbEHFM_LB
Figure ARF_23: low sensitivity drift
3.3.1.4 Sensitivity drift high
The conditions for an examination of the sensitivity drift high and error handling are:



the average motor speed is in the monitoring area
arwn_PBhlo <dzmNmit <arwn_PBhhi
the boost pressure is less than an upper threshold
ldmP_Llin <arwLDFmax
given general release aroPB_ena.0
otherwise, the error handling is stopped and reset the debounce times.
An error occurs if the ratio between normalized and current mass of air per hour
greater than a threshold:
armRatio> arwRatmin
All rights reserved by Robert Bosch GmbH, including in cases of proprietary rights applications. All rights of disposal such as copying and passing on to us.
DS / ESA Exhaust gas recirculation - Process value 19 April 2002
0 bosch
EDC15 +
Y S01 281/120 - VG2
Page 3-7
If the ratio between normalized and current mass of air per hour for the time armRatio
fbwEHFM_HA currently broken, so it will be recorded as faulty and the
Replacement functions are activated. The normalized air mass will continue to be valid
analyzed. If the ratio between normalized and current mass of air per hour for a
Time fbwEHFM_HB currently OK, so it will be finally saved and healed the
Substitute functions are withdrawn.
aroPB_ena.0
dzmNmit
arwn_PBhhi
a
a <b
b
a
aroPB_ena.2
a> b
&
arwn_PBhlo
ldmP_Llin
arwLDFmax
armRatio
arwRatmax
b
a
a <b
b
a
fbbEHFM_H
a> b
ENT
Contusion b
Stop error condition contusion
fbbEHFM_HA
fbbEHFM_HB
Figure ARF_24: high sensitivity drift
3.3.1.5 Next plausibility check of the air mass
The air mass is checked for plausibility. If the speed is within a window
(ArwHFPNu <dzmNmit arwHFPNo), the air temperature within arwHFPTu <anmLTF
arwHFPTo, the boost pressure within arwHFPPu <ldmP_Llin arwHFPPo and is not the ARF
active (arwHFPA.u ehmFAR. arwHFPA.o for all 3 ARF-actuators) is as if, for the time
fbwELM5_PA the condition air mass / stroke within a window (arwHFPMmin <
armM_List (without replacement function) arwHFPMax) is not satisfied, a plausibility error. At
SRC error of LMM (fbbELMM_L, fbbELMM_H, fbbELM2_L, fbbELM2_H, fbbELM5_L,
fbbELM5_H) or defective DZG, LTF or LDF sensors (fboSDZG, fboSLTF, fboSLDF,
fboSLDP) can not be checked for plausibility.
For the BiTurbo control the air mass must be able to be detected in the two turbochargers strands.
In cowVAR_2HF = 2, the total air mass and the air mass in the second part is Loader strand detected. Is
built a part-HFM in each strand loader (cowVAR_2HF = 1), the total air mass from the need
Sum of the two air masses are formed.
EDC15C:
With a defective HFM (fboSLMM 0) and more than one installed HFM (cowVAR_2HF 0), the
Air mass of 2 HFM armM_LBiT used as a substitute value.
If in addition, the second HFM defective or are the two HFM implausible to each other are
about zmmHF2_DEF = 1 (see Chapter monitoring concept) both HFM to the same
Default value from the map arwLMVGWKF set.
all other systems:
In a defective HFM (fboSLMM ZmmHF2_DEF 0 and cowVAR_2HF = 0) to one
set and used the air mass replacement value from the map arwLMVGWKF. The
All rights reserved by Robert Bosch GmbH, including in cases of proprietary rights applications. All rights of disposal such as copying and passing on to us.
19 April 2002 Exhaust gas recirculation - Process value DS / ESA
Page 3-8 EDC15 +
Y S01 281/120 - VG2
0 bosch
Replacement value is a model of speed and boost pressure dzmNmit ldmP_lin. Is the replacement value
is also accessed when fboSHFM is defective and arwKF_ena = 1.
All rights reserved by Robert Bosch GmbH, including in cases of proprietary rights applications. All rights of disposal such as copying and passing on to us.
DS / ESA Exhaust gas recirculation - Process value 19 April 2002
0 bosch
EDC15 +
Y S01 281/120 - VG2
Page 3-9
3.4 Setpoint calculation
zmmVEAKTIV
dzmNmit
armM_E
KF
arwMLGRDKF aroSOLL_0
KF
arwVEGRDKF
cowV_AGL_A
1: Addition
2: Multiplication
armARF_AGL
CONTROLS
arwSWBAGMX
arwSWBAGMN
aroSOLL_1
KF
arwPAKORKF
cowV_ATK_A
1: Addition
2: Multiplication
aroSOLL_2
ldmADF
KL
aroSOLL_8
arwPAKORKL
anmLTF
KF
arwTLKORKF
aroSOLL_3
KL
arwMEKORKL
anmT_MOT
KF
arwTWKORKF
KL
arwVEKORKL
aroSOLL_9
KF
aroSOLL_4
arwTWVEKF
aroSOLL_12
KL
arwMLBkKL
mrmWH_POSb.1 or .3
dimBRE
dimBRK
aroSOLL_13
> 1
aroSOLL_6
aroSOLL_11
DT1
dzmUMDRsta
ldmADF
EGR adjustment in
the amount of starting
ARF_17
arwDV_
aroSOLL_5 armM_Lsoll aroSOLL_10
CONTROLS
arwSWBSWMX
arwSWBSWMN
Figure ARF_02: Setpoint Calculation
All rights reserved by Robert Bosch GmbH, including in cases of proprietary rights applications. All rights of disposal such as copying and passing on to us.
19 April 2002 Exhaust gas recirculation - desired value calculation DS / ESA
Page 3-10 EDC15 +
Y S01 281/120 - VG2
0 bosch
The target value of the exhaust gas recirculation is a function of rotational speed, amount of air temperature,
Engine temperature and atmospheric pressure. The maps and curves must in air mass /
Stroke are normalized. The default value is with quantity and speed armM_E dzmNmit from the
Basic characteristic field arwMLGRDKF determined (olda aroSOLL_0). With active pilot (only
VP44) zmmVEAKTIV = 1, the basic map arwVEGRDKF used.
The correction of this fundamental value is done in the following sizes:
-
-
-
-
-
-
Balance value armARF_AGL (initialized with cowAGL_ARF) via diagnostic interface
limited by arwSWBAGMX and arwSWBAGMN (olda aroSOLL_1). The correction
can be done either multiplicative or additive (by DAMOS - switch
cowV_AGL_A: 1 = additive [unit mass of air], 2 = multiplicative [unitless])
Height correction of the characteristic times arwPAKORKL map arwPAKORKF, the
Correction can be done either multiplicative or additive (olda aroSOLL_2). (By means of
DAMOS - switch cowV_ATK_A: 1 = additive [unit air mass]
2 = multiplicative [unitless])
Ansauglufttemperaturkorrektur in dependence on the speed of the characteristic field
arwTLKORKF, the correction is multiplicative (olda aroSOLL_3).
Engine temperature correction as a function of the speed and the amount of about
Map arwTWKORKF times characteristic arwMEKORKL, the correction is additive
(Olda aroSOLL_4). With active pilot (only VP44), the map is
arwTWVEKF and the characteristic arwVEKORKL used.
Speed correction via the characteristic arwMLBkKL (olda aroSOLL_12) is not actuated
Brake and shift lever of the automatic transmission is not in position N or P ((dimBRE
OR OR dimBRK mrmWH_POSb.1 (s) or mrmWH_POSb.3 (P)) = 0), the corrected
Value in olda aroSOLL_13. This helps to reduce the Anfahrrauchens.
To reach operating temperature in the combustion chamber in the amount of the starting speed,
can the ARF rate for a motor temperature-dependent duration be adjusted.
The correction value aroSOLL_10 for the EGR setpoint is atmospheric pressure-dependent
(LdmADF) is formed from the characteristic curve after the start of discharge and arwPSKORKL
(MrmSTART_B = 0), a motor temperature dependent (anmT_MOT) number of
Engine revolutions aroUMDRp long additive fed.
The number of engine revolutions since the start shedding delivers the message dzmUMDRsta.
This value is the engine temperature dependent threshold aroUMDRp from the characteristic
arwUMDRpKL compared. Upon reaching the threshold is just the current
Stored correction value and to zero over the ramp slope arwPSKRamp.
aroUMDRp
KL
anmT_MOT
arwUMDRpKL
a
dzmUMDRsta
a> b
b
ldmADF
KL
aroPSKW
RAMP
aroSOLL_10
arwPSKORKL
arwPSKRamp
Figure ARF_17: EGR adjustment in the amount of starting
All rights reserved by Robert Bosch GmbH, including in cases of proprietary rights applications. All rights of disposal such as copying and passing on to us.
DS / ESA Exhaust gas recirculation - desired value calculation 19 April 2002
0 bosch
EDC15 +
Y S01 281/120 - VG2
Page 3-11
The calculated setpoint is limited to the boundaries arwSWBSWMX and arwSWBSWMN. The
Setpoint aroSOLL_5 is in the dynamic feedforward arwDV_ .. with DT1 - Characteristics
processed (olda aroSOLL_6).
Setpoint _Feedforward = KD *
d(Setpoint )
dt
And large-signal behavior - separate parameters for small For the differential gain
stored. Within a window with small-signal differential gain, outside the
Window reckoned with large-signal differential gain. The setpoint - feedforward control is additive in
the setpoint armM_Lsoll a.
All rights reserved by Robert Bosch GmbH, including in cases of proprietary rights applications. All rights of disposal such as copying and passing on to us.
19 April 2002 Exhaust gas recirculation - desired value calculation DS / ESA
Page 3-12 EDC15 +
Y S01 281/120 - VG2
0 bosch
3.5 Regulator
Actuator 2:
ehmFAR2
arwFAR2MAX
arwFAR2MIN Limit
mrmLDFUaus zmmF_KRIT.4
cowARF_hys arwARF_var
nlmDK_zu ecmDK_zu
zmmDKTL.0
aroREG_4
dzmNmit
armM_E
KF
> 1
> 1
nlmDK_auf
Hysteresis
aro2ST1 aro2ST2
arwHYSEIN
arwHYSME
arwHYSMA
arwHYSAUS
arw2TVEIN
arw2TVMIT
arw2TVAUS
arw2STAUS
arw2ST_KF
arwFAR2_MV
arwFAR2ab1
arwFAR2aus
arwFAR2_NL
anmT_MOT
KF
arw2TW_KF
KF
aroPkorr
KF arwREG2KF
arw2LM_KF
aroAUS_B
aroREG_2 = 3
1
> 1
aroLTF_aus aroREG_1
anmLTF
0
Hysteresis
arwHYSTein
arwHYSTaus
aroE
aroRGPAnt
aroRGIAnt
aroRGpi aroTVunbeg
armM_Lsoll
PI controller
aroREG_3
armM_List
arwPR_ ...
arwIR_ ...
aroRGsteu
aroRGst
1
Limit
arwGR_MAX
arwGR_MIN
Integrator
freeze
arwFAR1_MV
arwFAR1ab1
arwFAR1aus arwFAR1_NL
Actuator 1:
ehmFAR1
0
Hysteresis
arw1HYSsch
arw1HYS ...
dzmNmit
KF
KL
VGW 1
arwREGTVG1
arwREGIVG1
or
anwREGTVG1
arwREGIVG2
(At aroREG_2 = 3)
arwREG1KF
arwREG1KL
KL
arwREG0KL
1
armM_E
aroREG_B
0
Hysteresis
Figure ARF_03: ARF-controller and the control of the AR3-amplifier
All rights reserved by Robert Bosch GmbH, including in cases of proprietary rights applications. All rights of disposal such as copying and passing on to us.
DS / ESA Exhaust gas recirculation - regulator 19 April 2002
0 bosch
EDC15 +
Y S01 281/120 - VG2
Page 3-13
3.5.1 function while driving
The exhaust gas recirculation is adjusted with 3 different actuators. The actuator 1 is
regulated depending on the work area and controlled in parallel, only controlled or switched off. In the
Case arwARF_var = 0 This is also true for the actuator 2 The two manipulated variables and ehmFAR1
ehmFAR2 then hang in a manner analogous to the duty cycle of aroREG_1 and the speed
dzmNmit from. In the case arwARF_var = 1 the actuator 2 is dependent on the work area fully
switched on or off is controlled. The controller can continuously (cowARF_hys = 0)
or by a 3-hysteresis (cowARF_hys = 1).
Three different systems are used. The first actuator 1 is a
Exhaust gas recirculation valve and a throttle actuator 2, both controller continuously
be regulated (arwARF_var = 0). The second system only differs by a
Interchange of ARF valve and throttle valve. The third system (arwARF_var = 1) is reacted with
ehmFAR1 the exhaust gas recirculation valve is continuously controlled, and with a throttle valve ehmFAR2
controlled, which is optionally not used in the driving operation.
armM_E
Area 3
Range 1/3
(Hysteresis)
Area 1
arwREG1KL
arwREG0KL
Range of 0/1 (Hysteresis)
Range 0
dzmNmit
arwMEAB1KL
arwMEAB0KL
Figure ARF_04: working areas of the ARF
Range 0 (control switch-off in small amounts): aroREG_2 = 0
When the amount reaches a threshold of the speed-dependent characteristic curve or arwREG0KL
below, the ARF is controlled with aroRGsteu. In the case arwARF_var = 1 affects
aroRGsteu only ehmFAR1 for arwARF_var = 0 also ehmFAR2 (see area 1). The purpose of the pure
Control is hiring the right ARF rate despite the inaccuracy of the air-
quantitative measurement of small amounts of air. The scheme is only switched on when the
Injection amount armM_E a speed-dependent threshold of the characteristic arwREG1KL
exceeds.
The hysteresis arw1HYS ... and the shutdown of the PI controller over arwREG0KL can at
Output ehmFAR1 also a 2-point control with the control value aroRGst be achieved.
All rights reserved by Robert Bosch GmbH, including in cases of proprietary rights applications. All rights of disposal such as copying and passing on to us.
19 April 2002 Exhaust gas recirculation - regulator DS / ESA
Page 3-14 EDC15 +
Y S01 281/120 - VG2
0
aroREG_2 = 1
bosch
Area 1 (control with parallel control):
Increases the amount armM_E via the characteristic arwREG1KL, the Luftmassenistwert is
armM_List (see chapter "Input / Output Signals"), with a PI controller to the desired value
armM_Lsoll regulated. The fixed values .. arwIR_ apply for the I-and P parameters and arwPR_ ..
In the small-signal case are within the window arwIR_FEN and arwPR_FEN the reinforcements
arwIR_SIG and arwPR_SIG. In the large-signal case apply to the window over rising share
the deviation, the gains or arwIR_POS arwIR_NEG and arwPR_POS or
arwPR_NEG. Parallel to the PI controller is controlled. Control value aroRGst and PI controller output
aroRGpi are added and then limited. Output of the limiting element is the
Duty cycle aroREG_1.
On reaching the limit or arwGR_MAX arwGR_MIN the integrator of the PI controller is
frozen. When connecting the control (= transition from area 0 into area 1), the
Integrator preset with 0. When you turn the control (= transition from region 2 or 3 in
Area 1), the integrator with arwREGIVG1 or arwREGIVG2 (aroREG_2 = 3,
Shear mode) preset. The label must be applied arwREGIVG1 so large that the sum of
Integratorvorbelegung and current control value (arwREGIVG1 + aroRGst) undershoot
prevents the air mass at power, the label arwREGIV2 for low exhaust gas recirculation rates
a loader to prevent noise in transitions from the thrust.
In the case arwARF_var = 1 aroREG_1 directly and exclusively to the actuator ehmFAR1
output. The actuator is then driven through ehmFAR2 arw2ST_KF. Is cowARF_hys
0, then the output value is still out on a Dreifachhysterese.
In the case arwARF_var = 0, the duty cycle aroREG_1 other hand, is on ehmFAR1 and ehmFAR2
distributed. The manipulated variable splitting is done via the linearization maps arwREG1KF and
arwREG2KF in dependence on the speed dzmNmit.
Area 2 (shutdown of the ARF-setter 1 with air temperature): aroREG_2 = 2
If the air temperature falls below the value anmLTF arwHYSTaus so ehmFAR1 is with
arwREGTVG1 applied. The manipulated variable ehmFAR2 shall not be affected. Increases the
Air temperature anmLTF again arwHYSTein on the value, so will be back in area 1
changed. This function can be used only useful if it is actuator 1
is the throttle valve and arwARF_var = 1.
Area 3 (shutdown of ARF): aroREG_2> = 3
Increases the amount armM_E via the characteristic arwMEAB1KL, or is another
Met shutdown condition, so be ehmFAR1 and ehmFAR2 with arwREGTVG1 or
arw2STAUS applied. These default values are to be applied so that the throttle valve fully
is opened and the exhaust gas recirculation valve is fully closed. Decreases the amount armM_E again
under the curve arwMEAB0KL, or the shutdown falls away again, then again in
Range 0 or 1 changed. The reversing valve is ehmFAR3 at shutdown of the ARF on the
Value arwREGTVG1 provided.
All rights reserved by Robert Bosch GmbH, including in cases of proprietary rights applications. All rights of disposal such as copying and passing on to us.
DS / ESA Exhaust gas recirculation - regulator 19 April 2002
0 bosch
EDC15 +
Y S01 281/120 - VG2
Page 3-15
Application Notes:
In order to ensure a proper switch between the fields, it is necessary that the
Output values of the characteristic arwREG1KL larger than the output values of the characteristic
arwREG0KL. To prevent constant switching between the areas, it is advantageous
the two curves to be applied with a sufficiently large hysteresis.
The two maps arwREG1KF and arwREG2KF are coordinated with one another, that when
any speed the air volume increases approximately linearly with the manipulated variable aroREG_1
(ArwARF_var = 0). The parallel control can only be interpreted useful if the
Maps arwREG1KF and arwREG2KF are fixed.
Function when engine is switched off (caster, Ecomatic) or upon the occurrence of manifold vacuum:
As a measure to prevent the Abstellschlagens be in the wake and at a
Amount shutdown by the Ecomatic the two actuators ehmFAR1, 2 on the respective
administrable value arwFAR1ab1 or arwFAR2ab1 switch as soon nlmDK_zu or
ecmDK_zu has the value 1. Upon detection of manifold vacuum (mrmLDFUaus = 1), the
2 actuators ehmFAR1, 2 on each administrable value arwFAR1aus or arwFAR2aus
connected.
Intervention throttle test:
If requested by throttle test (zmmDKTL.0 = 1), then the two actuators
ehmFAR1-2 switched to the administered values arwFAR1_MV or arwFAR2_MV.
Intervention in case of error "solenoid valve stuck closed (zmmF_KRIT.4, only EDC15M):
When solenoid valve is stuck the two actuators ehmFAR1-2 are the same as for suction
pipe under pressure connected to the two administrable values arwFAR1aus or arwFAR2aus.
Intervention "to throttle" in the wake:
Through the interface message nlmDK_auf the throttle valve is opened in the wake
(NlmDK_auf = 1) and the actuators with values administrable arwFAR1_NL and
arwFAR2_NL driven.
Limit for ehmFAR2 (damper):
With the label arwFAR2MAX and arwFAR2MIN can limit the PWM duty cycle
for controlling the control valve (throttle) ehmFAR2 independently from the text
Encoder password predetermined values (5% to 95%) are applied. This can
Tatverhltnisse <5% and> 95% is spent.
All rights reserved by Robert Bosch GmbH, including in cases of proprietary rights applications. All rights of disposal such as copying and passing on to us.
19 April 2002 Exhaust gas recirculation - regulator DS / ESA
Page 3-16 EDC15 +
Y S01 281/120 - VG2
0
aroST1 aroST2
bosch
aroRGsteu
dzmNmit
armM_E
KF
arwSTTVKF
armARF_AGL
CONTROLS
aroARFAGL
KL
arwSWBAGMX
arwSWBAGMN
arwMLTVKL
anmT_MOT
KF
arwSTTWKF
ldmADF
anmLTF
KF
aroPkorr
KF
arwSTPAKF
mrwPKOR_KF
Figure ARF_05: Parallel control
The tax value aroRGsteu is a function of speed dzmNmit, quantity armM_E, engine tempera-
ture anmT_MOT, corrected atmospheric pressure aroPkorr and balance value armARF_AGL. The
Maps and characteristics must be normalized in duty ratios of the exhaust gas recirculation plate.
Is dzmNmit With the amount armM_E and the averaged speed of the base value from the
Map arwSTTVKF determined.
The correction of this fundamental value is done in the following sizes:
-
Accept the adjustment diagnostic interface, limited by arwSWBAGMX and
arwSWBAGMN. This air flow correction value is in the characteristic arwMLTVKL
a duty cycle converted. The correction is additive.
- Correction of altitude map arwSTPAKF. The correction is additive.
- Engine temperature correction of the characteristic field arwSTTWKF. The correction is additive.
All rights reserved by Robert Bosch GmbH, including in cases of proprietary rights applications. All rights of disposal such as copying and passing on to us.
DS / ESA Exhaust gas recirculation - regulator 19 April 2002
0
3.6
bosch
EDC15 +
Y S01 281/120 - VG2
Page 3-17
Control of an EGR cooler bypass valve
The cooler of the exhaust gas recirculation is switched depending on the water temperature of the engine
be. At higher water temperatures is an electrical change-over valve (EUV) and
a vacuum unit, a bypass around the EGR cooler is turned off, that is, EGR cooling is
activated only when the engine is warm.
Over the two speed dependent characteristics arwEGRnEin and arwEGRnAus is the A-
or switch-off (air mass setpoint) of the hysteresis set. The EGR cooling is
be switched off when armM_Lsoll is <arwEGRnAus or anmWTF <arwEGRHyA. If
the ARF is turned applies the default value arw3STAUS.
arwEGRKein
arwEGRKaus
Actuator 3:
ehmFAR3
arw3STAUS
anmWTF
aroWTF_aus
> 1
arwEGRHyE
arwEGRHyA
aroAUS_B
armM_Lsoll
aroML_aus
dzmNmit
KL
arwEGRnEin
KL
arwEGRnAus
Figure ARF_19: driving an EGR cooler bypass valve
All rights reserved by Robert Bosch GmbH, including in cases of proprietary rights applications. All rights of disposal such as copying and passing on to us.
19 April 2002Abgasrckfhrung - Control of an EGR cooler bypass valve DS / ESA
Page 3-18 EDC15 +
Y S01 281/120 - VG2
0 bosch
3.7 Monitoring and Shutdown
dzmNmit
armM_Lsoll
KF
3.7.1 Monitoring of control error
aroEmaxG
arwEmaxGKF
aroEmaxF
mrmM_EAKT KF
aroEmax
arwEmaxFKF
aroE <aroEmax
&
aroEmax> = arwEueAUS
aroAUS_B
aroEueb.0
DEAD TIME
fbbEARSnR
fbwEARSnRA
> 1
aroLTF_aus
aroREG_B
aroEueb.2
&
aroE> aroEmax
aroEueb.1
DEAD TIME
fbbEARSpR
fbwEARSpRA
Figure ARF_06: Monitoring of control error
Two characteristic diagrams (arwEmaxGKF and arwEmaxFKF) is a function of air mass
setpoint, speed and load a maximum allowable deviation aroEmax calculated with
the current control deviation aroE compared. Represents a time fbwEARSpRA a greater re-
trol error as aroEmax, so the control loop is determined to be defective. Represents a time
fbwEARSnRA a smaller deviation than - (aroEmax), so the loop is as
defect detected. This deactivation is irreversible in the driving cycle.
Application Note:
Each speed has its maximum and minimum amount of fresh air. The further the air mass setpoint
from these limits, the lower the allowable deviation applied
be. This allowable deviation is corrected with a load-dependent factor. At
large and small loads, so the monitoring of the control deviation to be adjusted.
All rights reserved by Robert Bosch GmbH, including in cases of proprietary rights applications. All rights of disposal such as copying and passing on to us.
DS / ESA Exhaust gas recirculation - Monitoring and Shutdown 19 April 2002
0 bosch
EDC15 +
Y S01 281/120 - VG2
Page 3-19
3.7.2 Shutdown
The regulation or control of the ARF is switched off under the following conditions or
switched (description of the ARF status aroREG_2):
Decimal
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
Comment
Taxes for small quantities
Regulate
Shutdown of the AR1 - Steller ehmFAR1 with air temperature
Shutdown with default value due to the overrun mode
Shutdown with default value (see olda cause aroAB_VGW1)
Shutdown due to throttle test
Overrun active - ARF shutdown
Manifold vacuum - ARF shutdown
"Throttle on" in the wake
Basic setting for LDR or ARF
The bit olda aroAB_VGW1 indicates the cause of the shutdown with default value 1:
Bit position
0
1
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
A
Decimal
1
2
8
16
32
64
128
256
512
1024
Comment
Exceeding a threshold quantity
permanent deviation - (fbbEARSpR or fbbEARSnR)
Prolonged periods of engine idling -
(DzmNmit <arwREGNLL1 & t> arwREGTLL1)
in case of errors (see shutdown due to system errors)
Falls below the battery voltage threshold -
(AnmUBATT <arwREGUBAB)
Start condition
Shutdown after start
Exceeding the limit amount with FGR desired quantity
Boost pressure requirement
ADR-state "rules"
All rights reserved by Robert Bosch GmbH, including in cases of proprietary rights applications. All rights of disposal such as copying and passing on to us.
19 April 2002 Exhaust gas recirculation - Monitoring and Shutdown DS / ESA
Page 3-20 EDC15 +
Y S01 281/120 - VG2
0 bosch
At a cut-off, the ARF is - valve closed with a default value. At
Occurrence of multiple causes displays the status with the higher ID on aroREG_2
and its action executed.
Status:
(AroAB_VGW1.x)
Status:
(AroREG_2)
Cause:
ehmFAR1
TAXES with
aroRGSTEU
RULES
ehmFAR2
TAXES with
arw2ST_KF
TAXES with
arw2ST_KF
TAXES with
arw2ST_KF
OFF with
arw2STAUS
Bit olda
0
1 aroREG_B = 1
Air temperature too low
Push operation
Exceeding a threshold quantity
(Figure: ARF_09)
Control deviation too large
(Figure: ARF_06)
0
1
Longer engine idle
as time threshold
System error
(Illustrations: SYSFEHL1 and SYSFEHL2)
Below a threshold UBatt
At the start
After the start (Figure: ARF_11)
Exceeding the limit amount
(Figure: ARF_10)
Boost pressure requirement
(Figure: ARF_16)
ADR-state "rules"
AND cowFUN_ADR.3 = 1
(Figure: ARF_18)
Throttle test
In the wake
Manifold vacuum
"Throttle on" in the wake
Basic setting LDR or ARF
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
A
2
3
OFF with
arwREGTVG1
OFF with
arwREGTVG1
aroLTF_aus = 1
aroAUS_B = 1
> 1 4
OFF with
arwREGTVG1
OFF with
arw2STAUS
aroAUS_B = 1
5
6
7
8
9
OFF with
arwFAR1_MV
OFF with
arwFAR1ab1
OFF with
arwFAR1aus
OFF with
arwFAR1_NL
OFF with
arwREGTVG1
OFF with
arwFAR2_MV
OFF with
arwFAR2ab1
OFF with
arwFAR2aus
OFF with
arwFAR2_NL
OFF with
arw2STAUS
aroAUS_B = 1
aroAUS_B = 1
aroAUS_B = 1
aroAUS_B = 1
aroAUS_B = 1
Figure ARF_07: Shutdown
All rights reserved by Robert Bosch GmbH, including in cases of proprietary rights applications. All rights of disposal such as copying and passing on to us.
DS / ESA Exhaust gas recirculation - Monitoring and Shutdown 19 April 2002
0 bosch
EDC15 +
Y S01 281/120 - VG2
Page 3-21
Shutdown at a set threshold is exceeded:
As a reference quantity for shutting down or restarting the ARF can with cowFUN_RME.1 =
Between 1 and armM_E aroM_ERME upon detection of RME fuel (anmRME_ON = 1)
be selected.
If the amount is greater than a threshold from the characteristic arwMEAB1KL = f (n) is then
ARF is turned off. If the amount is less than the threshold again from the characteristic
arwMEAB0KL is, the ARF may be switched on again.
If the amount exceeds the threshold arwMEAB2KL positive amount tendency, a timer is
started with the runtime aroTi_abKL. If the timer expires and aroTi_Ein still the same
one, the ARF is turned off. Only when the amount is less than arwMEAB2KL that ARF
switched on again.
Where the quantity threshold arwMEAB2KL while the timer is running, the timer is
stopped and reset, and the ARF remain on.
armM_E
armM_ERME
a
aroTi_Ein
a> b
TIMER
&
anmRME_ON
cowFUN_RME.1
b
&
KL
arwMEAB2KL
dzmNmit
KL
aroTi_Ab
arwTi_abKL
> 1
Status:
aroREG_2 = 4
(AroAB_VGW1.0)
KL
arwMEAB0KL
KL
arwMEAB1KL
Figure ARF_09: exceeding a threshold quantity
All rights reserved by Robert Bosch GmbH, including in cases of proprietary rights applications. All rights of disposal such as copying and passing on to us.
19 April 2002 Exhaust gas recirculation - Monitoring and Shutdown DS / ESA
Page 3-22 EDC15 +
Y S01 281/120 - VG2
0 bosch
Shutdown in excess of the limitation amount:
If the request unlimited amount FGR mrmFGR_roh greater than the limiting amount
mroM_EBEGR, there is a shutdown of the ARF. Is mrmFGR_roh + mrwFGR_OFF less than
mroM_EBEGR, the ARF is again turned on. Since the ARF over armM_List directly into the
Limiting amount of cuts in, by means of this measure allows a greater FGR area.
mrmFGR_roh
Status:
aroREG_2 = 4
(AroAB_VGW1.8)
mrwFGR_OFF
mroM_EBEGR
Figure ARF_10: Exceeding the limit amount
Shutdown after start:
A motor-temperature-dependent time (characteristic arwANSTWKL) to start shedding remains the ARF
off.
anmT_MOT
KL
arwANSTWKL
mrmSTART_B
t <arwANSWt
Status:
aroREG_2 = 4
(AroAB_VGW1.7)
Figure ARF_11: shutdown after start
All rights reserved by Robert Bosch GmbH, including in cases of proprietary rights applications. All rights of disposal such as copying and passing on to us.
DS / ESA Exhaust gas recirculation - Monitoring and Shutdown 19 April 2002
0 bosch
EDC15 +
Y S01 281/120 - VG2
Page 3-23
Shutdown at boost pressure requirement:
In the partial load range, the exhaust gas recirculation is fast at high positive desired quantity change
are closed to allow a fast charging pressure buildup. To fast
Close the loading shovels until after shutdown of the ARF allow, the LDR-TV is
frozen. The work area is defined by a speed and volume range
(ArwABdzu, arwABdzo and arwABmeu, arwABmeo). Only when the valve is relatively wide open
the shutdown done (ehmFAR1 <arwAB_TV). Find in this operating range, a strong
Increasing the LDR TV instead of (change greater arwABldmax) of a positive
Caused lot of wishful (mrmM_EWUN> arwABwunmx), then takes the
Shutdown. The shutdown is arwABmint after each trip at least for the time
remain off. Find a shutdown instead, then the triggering, the LDR
TV output for an applicable time frozen (TV before the rise), at this time is
ldmVZ_akt = 1 The freezing time is dependent on the average speed (characteristics
ldwVZDZ_KL) and the ARF-TV (characteristic ldwVZAR_KL) before the shutdown. With a
applied from 0 o the function is not executed. The freeze only once
started only after the release of the LDR-screen TVs, the function is triggered again.
ehmFLD_DK
PT1
d / dt
arwABldPT1
a
a> b
b
arwABldmax
dzmNmit
arwABdzu
a
a> b
b
a
arwABdzo
a <b
b
mrmM_EWUN
arwABwunmx
mrmM_EAKT
arwABmeu
d / dt
a
a> b
b
&
> 1
Status:
aroREG_2 = 4
(AroAB_VGW1.9)
a
a> b
b
TIMER
arwABmint
a
arwABmeo
arwAB_TV
a <b
b
b
ehmFAR1
PT1
aroREG3pt1
a
a <b
TIMER
ldmVZ_akt
arwABarPT1
KL
ldwVZAR_KL
dzmNmit
KL
ldwVZDZ_KL
Figure ARF_16: shutdown at boost pressure requirement
All rights reserved by Robert Bosch GmbH, including in cases of proprietary rights applications. All rights of disposal such as copying and passing on to us.
19 April 2002 Exhaust gas recirculation - Monitoring and Shutdown DS / ESA
Page 3-24 EDC15 +
Y S01 281/120 - VG2
0 bosch
Shutdown at work speed control:
Is the work speed control is in the "rules" (mrmADR_SAT = 3) and bit 3 of
Software cowFUN_ADR switch is set, the EGR is switched off.
Status:
aroREG_2 = 4
(AroAB_VGW1.A)
cowFUN_ADR.3
&
mrmADR_SAT == 3
Figure ARF_18: shutdown work speed control
Basic setting for LDR:
As long as the basic setting for LDR is active, the ARF must be turned off.
Basic setting for ARF
With default setting for ARF ARF shut-off is activated on one hand, so that the
Integrator when restarting is initialized properly and therefore the error condition contusion in
Control deviation is stopped. On the other hand, all three actuators ehmFAR1, ehmFAR2 and
ehmFAR3 driven by the basic setting.
Overrun active:
As long as the follower is active and sets the ARF actuators on default values must ARF
be turned off.
Manifold vacuum:
If manifold vacuum occurs, the ARF are set actuators on default values and the
ARF must be turned off.
All rights reserved by Robert Bosch GmbH, including in cases of proprietary rights applications. All rights of disposal such as copying and passing on to us.
DS / ESA Exhaust gas recirculation - Monitoring and Shutdown 19 April 2002
0 bosch
EDC15 +
Y S01 281/120 - VG2
Page 3-25
3.7.3 Monitoring the status line
The control valve is to be monitored in their function. This requires the status line
the damper evaluate. The control valve is an intelligent control element, the internal
Malfunctions on a status line signals. If an internal error occurs, it activates the
Damper the status line and goes into the predetermined, open position.
Monitoring the function of the status line:
After a K15 an edge change from LOW to HIGH must be recognized on the status line
(See Figure ARF_12). If the line is beginning to HIGH or LOW or too long
then long enough in the high state, the status line to be defective
accepted. Does the status line to be defective, the error bit is set fbbEAR1_S.
Monitoring the function of the damper:
Is the function of the control flap ensures may by a defect in the control flap
be monitored. If the line is HIGH, the damper is considered to be in order. Is the line
LOW, then the damper is considered defective. Depending on the error fbbEAR1_S is
set or cleared.
dimRKSTAT
HIGH
LOW
o e P K A T o e P K H T
fbwEAR1_DA fbwEAR1_DB
t
Figure ARF_12: waveform of status line dimRKSTAT
All rights reserved by Robert Bosch GmbH, including in cases of proprietary rights applications. All rights of disposal such as copying and passing on to us.
19 April 2002 Exhaust gas recirculation - Monitoring and Shutdown DS / ESA
Page 3-26 EDC15 +
Y S01 281/120 - VG2
0 bosch
edmSTAUSNL = 1
yes
Start of follow-up?
No edmSTAUSNL = 0
00
Start arwRK_LT
First digital value
available
dimRKSTAT = 0
dimRKSTAT = 1
04
Delay
arwt_noSTL
01
Waiting for
High
dimRKSTAT = 1
arwRK_LT
expired
FF
Status line
defective
02
High level
wait
arwRK_HT
expired
dimRKSTAT = 0
10
Control flap
"Good"
dimRKSTAT = 0
20
Control flap
"Defective"
dimRKSTAT = 1
Figure ARF_13: monitoring states of the status line in aroRKSTAT
Initialization:
If, because of "K15 A" through an initialization, it must then slide the status line
to be checked. If the caster canceled by "K15 A" before the HRL had fallen
(EdmSTAUSNL = 1) is administered after a delay time arwt_noSTL only
Supervised control valve and verify the line performed (note: since the
Status line is not checked, can not "tested" state for fbbELDK_S achieved
be).
00H - Waiting for the first digital value:
Since the digital values are not in the initialization is available, can be checked here first
be whether the status line is really LOW. If this is the case, then the first time
started arwRK_LT and waited for the change of edge. If the line is HIGH, then it is
defective and it will be changed to the state FF.
01H - Waiting for the first digital value:
Waiting for the edge change from LOW to HIGH. Runs before the time arwRK_LT
from, the line is considered defective and it will be changed in the state FF. If the state
is HIGH, is started at the time arwRK_HT and switched to the state 02. The smallest
adjustable time is 20ms, would as a time of 0 to a high level match from the start
and thus a faulty status line is detected. Also, must the LOW level at the
Rest status line at least 150ms, because as long as takes an initialization and are thus
only the values that are then on the line. Why has a set time arwRK_LT = 0
the same effect as arwRK_LT = 20ms.
All rights reserved by Robert Bosch GmbH, including in cases of proprietary rights applications. All rights of disposal such as copying and passing on to us.
DS / ESA Exhaust gas recirculation - Monitoring and Shutdown 19 April 2002
0 bosch
EDC15 +
Y S01 281/120 - VG2
Page 3-27
02H - Waiting for the end of the test sequence:
It is a time arwRK_HT serviced. During this time, it may by at any level change
LOW come. If this occurs but on, the status line is considered defective and it is in the state
FF switched. But If the time expires, the error is reported and fbbEAR1_S well in the
State 10 is switched and the status line is therefore considered functional.
04H - delay due to start from Trail:
The monitoring of the control flap is suspended for the time arwt_noSTL unwanted
To avoid error messages due to the SG-initialization.
10H - control flap in order:
Is the level on line LOW, then is switched to the state 20, as a defect
is signaled. Otherwise, the damper is considered good, and the error fbbEAR1_D is good
reported.
20H - control flap in order:
Is the HIGH level on the line, then it is switched to the state 10, as no defect
is signaled. Otherwise, the control valve is considered defective and the error is fbbEAR1_D
defect reported.
FFH - Status line defective:
The status line is considered defective. Therefore, the error is reported fbbEAR1_S defective. For this
State is switched over in no other state.
All rights reserved by Robert Bosch GmbH, including in cases of proprietary rights applications. All rights of disposal such as copying and passing on to us.
19 April 2002 Exhaust gas recirculation - Monitoring and Shutdown DS / ESA
0 bosch
EDC15 +
Y S01 281/120 - VG2
Page 4-1
4 boost pressure control
4.1 Overview
The boost control is the regulation or control of an exhaust gas turbocharger with waste -
Gate as well as a charger with variable turbine geometry (VTG - Loader) used.
When controlling an exhaust gas turbocharger with waste - gate the actuator is a bypass valve, by
which can be guided by the exhaust gas flow to the turbine or the turbine. In the
Controlling a VTG - charger serves as an actuator, the variable turbine geometry.
The boost control is divided into setpoint calculation, wastegate, boost pressure control,
controlled adaptation of the control parameters and monitoring and shutdown.
mrmM_EAKT
mrmM_EWUNL
mrmM_EWUNR
mrmM_EMOT
cowLDR_ME
zmmLDRsoK
Setpoint
ldmP_Lsoll
calculation
LDR_03
Control
LDR_04
ldmP_Llin
ldmADF
dzmNmit
mrmVERB
fgm_VzuN
ldmM_E
ldmADF
anmLTF
dzmNmit
mrmM_EAKT
mrmM_EWUNL
mrmM_EWUNR
MAX
mrmVERB
dzmNmit
fgm_VzuN
Controlled adaptation
the control parameters
LDR_06
ldmADF
anmLTF
dzmNmit
anmWTF
P gain
I gain
D gain
DT1 memory
factor
LDME
ldoRG_TVun
ldoRG_TV2
ldoRG_TV
ldoRG_TV2
ehmFLD_DK
Monitoring
ehmFLS2
and shutdown
LDR_07
Loader noise
suppression
LDR_04a
ldoTVsteu
Control
LDR_05
dzmNmit
mrmM_EAKT
anmWTF
mrmSTART_B
ldmVZ_akt
zmmDKTL
ldmLDRSTAT
FBOs ...
ECEC ...
Figure LDR_01: Structure of the boost pressure control
With the software switch cowFUN_LDR you switch the boost control on / off (0 =
off, 1 = on). Simultaneously with the software switch cowVAR_LDR = 8
LDS - final stage activated, deactivated with cowVAR_LDR = 0.
With the software switch cowLDR_ME does one determine which uses fuel quantity signal
should be. The partial functions will still work ldmM_E with the crowd. Switch position 4 uses the
Desired amount for a quick response of the supercharger and the engine size to the
Boost pressure reduction delay and thus to prevent snarling of the loader.
Description of the software switch LDR - quantity input request cowLDR_ME:
Decimal
1
2
3
4
Comment
current injection quantity
Desired Amount of idle amount
Desired quantity raw + idle amount
Maximum amount of engine and desired quantity raw + idle amount
All rights reserved by Robert Bosch GmbH, including in cases of proprietary rights applications. All rights of disposal such as copying and passing on to us.
19 April 2002 Charge pressure control - Overview DS / ESA
Page 4-2 EDC15 +
Y S01 281/120 - VG2
0 bosch
4.2 Generation of setpoint
dzmNmit
ldmM_E KF
ldoSWPLGKF
ldwSWBGKF
anmWTF
anmLTF
ldoSW_TW
KF
cowWTF_LTF
ldwTW_KF
ldoSWTW_K0
KF
ldwTWGRDKF
ldoSWPA_K1
ldmADF
KF
ldoSWPL_K0
ldwPAUEKF
ldoSWTL_K2
KL
ldoSWPL_K1
anmLTF
ldwTLUEKL
ldoSWPL_K2
ldoSWPLBEG
ldoSWPLMAX
KF
MIN
ldwMXWKF
ldoSWDYANT
DT1
ldwSDV_
ldoSWP_L
CONTROLS
ldmP_Lsoll
ldwSWBLDMX
ldwSWBLDMN
Figure LDR_03: Setpoint Education
The absolute or relative boost pressure from the target map ldwSWBGKF depending
formed by dzmNmit speed and amount ldmM_E. Whether the applied field in the desired characteristic
Boost pressure setpoint an absolute pressure or a positive pressure relative to the atmospheric pressure is
depends on the switch position cowLDR_R_A.
To minimize noise, the boost pressure setpoint temperature dependence is corrected additively.
About the switch cowWTF_LTF is either the water temperature or the anmWTF
AnmLTF air temperature used for correction. The correction value from the basic characteristic map
ldwTWGRDKF calculated, the output value of water temperature-dependent with the
Weighting factor from the characteristic diagram is calibrated ldwTW_KF. The thus obtained
Correction value can be increasing, decreasing and act on the charging pressure setpoint.
All rights reserved by Robert Bosch GmbH, including in cases of proprietary rights applications. All rights of disposal such as copying and passing on to us.
DS / ESA Charge pressure control - Generation of setpoint 19 April 2002
0 bosch
EDC15 +
Y S01 281/120 - VG2
Page 4-3
Depending on the atmospheric pressure and quantity ldmADF ldmM_E an additive takes place
Correction, which is formed on the map ldwPAUEKF. Depending on the
Air temperature anmLTF is a multiplicative correction factor on the characteristic ldwTLUEKL
formed.
This value is limited to a maximum. The maximum is from the dependence
Atmospheric pressure ldmADF and the speed dzmNmit calculated from the map ldwMXWKF.
The reference is in a dynamic feedforward control with DT1 - processed characteristics.
Setpoint feedforward = KD *
d(Setpoint )
dt
And large-signal behavior - separate parameters for small For the differential gain
stored (ldwSDV_). If the input signal change within a window with
Small-signal differential gain, outside is expected to be large-signal differential gain. The
Selection of the memory factor takes place due to the sign of the output signal.
The result represents the dynamic setpoint portion dar. This proportion is the previously designated
Nominal value added.
The set point is thus formed to the minimum value to the maximum value and ldwSWBLDMN
ldwSWBLDMX limited.
All rights reserved by Robert Bosch GmbH, including in cases of proprietary rights applications. All rights of disposal such as copying and passing on to us.
19 April 2002 Charge pressure control - Generation of setpoint DS / ESA
Page 4-4 EDC15 +
Y S01 281/120 - VG2
0 bosch
4.3 Control
DT1 memory factor
D gain
LDME
DT1
ldoRGDAnt
ldwDR_NEX
cowLDR_ARW
2
1
ldoIFRZ.0
P gain
I gain
ldoRGPAnt
ldoRGIAnt
ldoRGPITV
back-a-
freeze expected
a-
freeze
ldoRG_TVUB
ldmP_Lsoll
PI
Limitation and ARW
ldmP_Llin
ldmADF
Monoflop
ldoRG_TVun
TIMER
> 1
CONTROLS
cowLDR_R_A
ldmM_E
ldwRGDELt
ldoRGSunv
dzmNmit
KL
ldwREG0KL
a a
b
b
2
cowVAR_BiT.0
ldmGLTV
KL
ldwREG1KL
ldoTVsteu
CONTROLS
ldoRG_TV2
mrmVERB
dzmNmit
fgm_VzuN
ldoGRmin
KL
ldwGRminKL
cowLDR_BEG
KL
ldoGRmax
ldwGRmaxKL
Figure LDR_04: wastegate
All rights reserved by Robert Bosch GmbH, including in cases of proprietary rights applications. All rights of disposal such as copying and passing on to us.
DS / ESA Charge pressure control - control 19 April 2002
0 bosch
EDC15 +
Y S01 281/120 - VG2
Page 4-5
The wastegate is a bypass - realize controller, ie - PI the tax value ldoTVsteu the
Manipulated variable of the PI - controller ldoRGPITV added. Parallel to the PI - controller and control is
still a DT1 - regulator. Since the VTG - Loader, the controlled system during operation
changed, there will be a controlled adaptation of the control parameters. The control parameters are of
the deviation LDME and dzmNmit from consumption mrmVERB or of the speed or
from the transition fgm_VzuN dependent. Monitoring the engagement of the control switches and the
Control of certain system faults and outputs setting values to the actuator. The
Boost pressure ldmP_Llin (= filtered value anmLDF) is by specifying the desired pressure
ldmP_Lsoll by PIDT1 - controlled controller with parallel control. The control remains in
small amounts off.
The scheme is only switched on when the amount a speed-dependent threshold of the
Exceeds characteristic ldwREG1KL. Share initialized with zero - When the I is.
If, when the controller is switched to a deviation, the P produced - share a crack at
Output.
D - controller is turned on, that its output is zero immediately after the switching.
The control is switched off, if the amount of a speed-dependent threshold of the
LdwREG0KL characteristic reaches or falls below. Laying down the wiring after the Hsyterese
The timer ensures that the switching of rules after tax by the time ldwRGDELt
is delayed. Each negative edge starts the timer and the timer provides as output signal
as long as high until the timer expires. The instantaneous value of the hysteresis is on the
Olda ldoRGSunv shown. Turning the control is, however, without delay, if
the amount exceeds the threshold of the speed-dependent characteristic ldwREG1KL. In
Off the duty cycle at the output will change by leaps and bounds, because the manipulated variable of the
PIDT1 - controller will no longer be added. If the controller is switched off, shall not
Monitoring instead of the control deviation (S.U.).
To perform the loader balance, the duty cycle at the output of the boost pressure control is
before the boundary changed by the engagement of the bi-turbo scheme. In cowVAR_BiT.0 = 0
both boost pressure plates are driven with the same duty cycle. With activated
BiTurbo control the duty cycle for the first Boost pressure plate to ldmGLTV / 2
(Loader balance value) decreases and the duty cycle for the 2nd Boost pressure plate to ldmGLTV / 2
increased.
Application Note: For a real one - to ensure and off the control, it is
necessary for the output value of the characteristic ldwREG1KL for all speeds is greater than the
Initial value of the characteristic ldwREG0KL. To start ups - to avoid and off, is
it is convenient, the two curves with a correspondingly large hysteresis to
apply. Be controller ldoRGPITV - The tax value ldoTVsteu and the output of the PI
added and limited by the characteristics ldwGRmaxKL and ldwGRminKL. Upon reaching the
Limit, there are three ways the integrator treatment:
cowLDR_ARW = 0: ARW (Anti reset windup) by recalculation of the integrator: In
Limitation is the I - share as calculated back that ldoTVsteu + ldoRGPITV exactly at the
Limit is.
cowLDR_ARW = 1: ARW by freezing of the integrator: When the upper limit
ldoGRmax the integrator may not be increased - ie its value is frozen. The
Integrator may also be reduced when the control input is negative and at the same time
upper limit is exceeded. The same applies in reverse when reaching the lower limit
ldoGRmin.
All rights reserved by Robert Bosch GmbH, including in cases of proprietary rights applications. All rights of disposal such as copying and passing on to us.
19 April 2002 Charge pressure control - control DS / ESA
Page 4-6 EDC15 +
Y S01 281/120 - VG2
0 bosch
cowLDR_ARW = 2: ARW by freezing of the integrator 2: When the upper limit
ldoGRmax the integrator may not be increased - ie its value is frozen
(LdoIFRZ (.0) = 1). Freezing of the integrator is only reversed (ldoIFRZ (.0) = 0),
when the boost pressure falls or is greater than the target value.
After addition of the D - proportion is again a limitation by the characteristics ldwGRmaxKL
and ldwGRminKL instead. It takes place on this no - ARW measure.
Through the software switch cowLDR_R_A can be selected if an absolute pressure control
to be taken or a relative pressure control. An absolute pressure control represents the absolute
Pressure ldmP_Lsoll one in the intake manifold. A relative pressure control adjusts the pressure to atmospheric
relative excess pressure in the intake manifold. The actual value for the controller is given by ldmP_Llin -
anmADF, the setpoint is a pressure value.
Description of the software switch type of pressure control cowLDR_R_A:
Decimal comment
0Absolutdruckregelung (actual value = boost)
1Relativdruckregelung (actual value = boost pressure - atmospheric pressure)
Description of DAMOS - limit switch of the controller output cowLDR_BEG:
Decimal
0
1
2
Comment
on consumption
on the rotational speed
about the course
All rights reserved by Robert Bosch GmbH, including in cases of proprietary rights applications. All rights of disposal such as copying and passing on to us.
DS / ESA Charge pressure control - control 19 April 2002
0 bosch
EDC15 +
Y S01 281/120 - VG2
Page 4-7
4.3.1 loader noise suppression
ldmSWPLBEG (t-1)
ldmSWPLBEG
ldwLGU_LDG
a
a> b
b
ldoLGU_STA.0
&
mrmM_EMOT
a
ldoLGU_STA.2
DELAY
a> = b
b
ldoLGU_STA.1
ldwLGU_DLY
dzmNmit
KL
ldwLGUMEKL
ldoRG_TV
ldoRG_TVun
PT1
ldwLGU_GF
Figure LDR_04a: loader noise suppression
In train-slide transitions in large programs, it is especially for large compressors to a
disturbing noise ("hiss") when at low engine speeds, the boost pressure to quickly
is reduced.
Therefore, in a large quantity and low speed (about characteristic ldwLGUMEKL,
ldoLGU_STA.1 = 1), the gradient of the boost pressure setpoint value monitored. If strong negative values
(<LdwLGU_LDG) to (ldoLGU_STA.0 = 1), the controller output is ldoRG_TV (from
ldoRG_TVun) for a short time (ldwLGU_DLY) PT1-filtered (ldwLGU_GF). Thus, a
avoided to rapid opening of VTG, which "hiss" can be reliably prevented.
All rights reserved by Robert Bosch GmbH, including in cases of proprietary rights applications. All rights of disposal such as copying and passing on to us.
19 April 2002 Charge pressure control - control DS / ESA
Page 4-8 EDC15 +
Y S01 281/120 - VG2
0 bosch
4.4 Control
cowLDR_MS
mrmM_EAKT
mrmM_EWUNL
mrmM_EWUNR
dzmNmit
ldoM_Est
KF
ldwTV_KF
ldoTV1
ldmADF
KF
ldwTVPAKF ldoTV2
ldoTVsteu
anmLTF
KL
ldwTVTLKL
Figure LDR_05: boost pressure control
Description of the software switch quantity input for control cowLDR_MS:
Decimal
1
2
3
Comment
current injection quantity
Desired Amount of idle amount
Desired quantity raw + idle amount
The structure for the calculation of the taxable value ldoTVsteu is partially identical with the structure for
Setpoint calculation. The maps and curves have the same input signals. It is
analogous to what is described in the chapter setpoint calculation (see above).
All rights reserved by Robert Bosch GmbH, including in cases of proprietary rights applications. All rights of disposal such as copying and passing on to us.
DS / ESA Charge pressure control - control 19 April 2002
0 bosch
EDC15 +
Y S01 281/120 - VG2
Page 4-9
4.5 Adaptation of the control parameters
mrmVERB
dzmNmit
fgm_VzuN
P gain
KL
ldwPRfakKL
cowLDR_ADA
LDME
Switching to
Dependence of
the control deviation
ldwPR_ ...
I gain
KL
ldwIRfakKL
Switching to
Dependence of
the control deviation
ldwIR_ ...
D gain
KL
LDME
ldwDRfakKL
Switching to
Dependence of
the control deviation
ldwDR_ ...
DT1 memory factor
KL
LDME
ldwDR_gfKL
Figure LDR_06: Controlled adaptation of the control parameters
The charge pressure is with a PIDT1 - controlled regulator. Apply here to the I -, P - and D -
Parameters fixed values ldwIR_ .., .. ldwPR_ or ldwDR_ ...
For small-signal within the window ldwIR_FEN and ldwPR_FEN the gains are
ldwIR_SIG and ldwPR_SIG. For large signal apply to the excess of the window
Controller input values, the gains or ldwIR_POS ldwIR_NEG and ldwPR_POS or
ldwPR_NEG. For the DT1 - link the fixed values ldwDR_ .. apply to the D - gain. It
there is a D - controller with a dynamic feedforward control with DT1 -
Description: for the differential amplification are separate parameters for small - and
Large-signal behavior stored. Within a window (ldwDR_FEN, ldwDR_FEP) is with
Small-signal differential gain (ldwDR_SIP, ldwDR_SIN), outside of the window with
Large-signal differential gain (ldwDR_POS, ldwDR_NEG) expected.
All rights reserved by Robert Bosch GmbH, including in cases of proprietary rights applications. All rights of disposal such as copying and passing on to us.
19 April 2002 Charge pressure control - adaptation of the control parameters DS / ESA
Page 4-10 EDC15 +
Y S01 281/120 - VG2
0 bosch
Due to the VTG - loader, the control system changes during operation, so that a
controlled adaptation of the control parameters is required. Therefore, the I -, P - and D -
Gain of PIDT1 - each with a controller multiplied by three factors. The three factors
be determined by means of characteristic curves. Input size of these curves is either the
MrmVERB consumption, the speed dzmNmit or going fgm_VzuN. With the DAMOS -
CowLDR_ADA switch can be selected whether the factor of consumption, speed of
to or dependent on the transition.
Description of DAMOS - switch adaptation of the controller gains cowLDR_ADA:
Decimal
0
1
2
Comment
on consumption
on the rotational speed
about the course
The P - reinforcements ldwPR_SIG, ldwPR_POS and ldwPR_NEG be by the factor from the
Characteristic Line ldwPRfakKL multiplied. The multiplication result is the current P - gain
the PIDT1 - controller. The I - reinforcements ldwIR_SIG, ldwIR_POS and ldwIR_NEG be with
the factor from the characteristic line ldwIRfakKL multiplied. The multiplication result is the current
I - gain of PIDT1 - controller. The D - reinforcements ldwDR_SIP, ldwDR_POS,
ldwDR_SIN and ldwDR_NEG be the factor of the characteristic line ldwDRfakKL
multiplied. The multiplication result is the current D - gain of PIDT1 - controller.
The memory factor is interpolated from the characteristic ldwDR_gfKL. Again, with the
DAMOS - switch cowLDR_ADA as an input variable of the characteristic either the consumption
mrmVERB, the speed dzmNmit or going fgm_VzuN be used.
All rights reserved by Robert Bosch GmbH, including in cases of proprietary rights applications. All rights of disposal such as copying and passing on to us.
DS / ESA Charge pressure control - adaptation of the control parameters 19 April 2002
0 bosch
EDC15 +
Y S01 281/120 - VG2
Page 4-11
4.6 Shutdown
Shutdown
because of
Cold start
LDR_10
dzmNmit <ldwREGN1
dzmNmit
mrmM_EAKT
fbbELDSpR
fbbELDSnR
ldmBereich = 1
anmWTF
mrmSTART_B
ldmBereich = 7
> 1
Shutdown
ldmBereich = 5wegen
Deviation
zmmDKTL.1
ldmBereich = 8
ldm LDRSTAT = 1
fbbELDSpR
> 1
fbbELDSnR
&
ldmBereich <> 3
> 1
ldm
LDRSTAT = 1
ldm
LDRSTAT = 1
FBOs ...
ECEC ...
Shutdown
because of
System error
SYS_FEHL
ldmBereich = 6
ldoRG_TV
ehmFLD_DK
ldwREGVGW2
ldwREGVGW1
ldwDKvgwLD
ehmFLS2
ldoRG_TV2
ldmVZ_akt
Figure LDR_07: Monitoring and Shutdown
In the partial load range, the exhaust gas recirculation is fast at high positive desired quantity change
are closed to allow a fast charging pressure buildup. To fast
Close the loading shovels until after shutdown of the ARF allow, the LDR-TV is
frozen (ldmVZ_akt = 1). Otherwise, would an early closing of the loader buckets
Exhaust stream press briefly through the exhaust gas recirculation.
All rights reserved by Robert Bosch GmbH, including in cases of proprietary rights applications. All rights of disposal such as copying and passing on to us.
19 April 2002 Charge pressure control - shutdown DS / ESA
Page 4-12 EDC15 +
Y S01 281/120 - VG2
0 bosch
The shutdown of the boost pressure control system depends on the operating condition ldmBereich from (Workspace
see Figure LDR_08):
Operating condition ldmBereich
Work Measure Measure at
area constant RA
0 0Steuerung nachldwREGVGW2
Maps
1 1ldwREGVGW1ldwREGVGW1
2 2RegelungldwREGVGW2
3 3RegelungRegelung
4 4RegelungldwREGVGW2
5 4ldwREGVGW2 in respect of permanent RA
6-ldwREGVGW2 due to system error
7-ldwREGVGW1 for cold start
8-ldwDKvgwLD for throttle test
(Has the highest switch-off priority)
Monitoring
on RA
no
no
no
yes
yes
no
no
no
no
Healing of RA
no
no
no
yes
no
no
no
no
no
The data ldwREGVGW1 and ldwREGVGW2 are default values for the drive duty
the boost pressure actuator. Share with ldwREGIVG1 - When you turn the controller off I will
or ldwREGIVG2 initialized. The initialization ldwREGIVG1 and ldwREGIVG2 are only
useful if no parallel control is applied. In this case the two values are
usually applied with the same values as ldwREGVGW1 and ldwREGVGW2. Are
but the maps for the parallel control as applied to ldwREGIVG1 and
ldwREGIVG2 be applied with zero.
Due to the load, the boost pressure control with the data ldwREGN1, ldwREGN2 and
ldwREGN3 and ldwREGME3 and ldwREGME4 and by the hysteresis characteristics
(Functions of ldmM_E) ldwREG0KL and ldwREG1KL divided into five work areas. This
Data represent thresholds for the averaged speed dzmNmit and the amount mrmM_EAKT is:
mrmM_EAKT
ldwREGN1 ldwREGN2 ldwREGN3 Limiting amount
1 2 3 4
ldwREG1KL
ldwREG0KL
ldwREGME4
ldwREGME3
dzmNmit
Figure LDR_08: Workspaces
All rights reserved by Robert Bosch GmbH, including in cases of proprietary rights applications. All rights of disposal such as copying and passing on to us.
DS / ESA Charge pressure control - shutdown 19 April 2002
0 bosch
EDC15 +
Y S01 281/120 - VG2
Page 4-13
If the boost pressure control in the work areas 0,2,3 or 4 and no deviation, so
means that the charge pressure control regulates or controls while driving. In the Message
ldmRGST is provided this information other functions.
fbbELDSpR
fbbELDSnR
ldmBereich = 0
ldmBereich = 2
ldmBereich = 4
ldmBereich = 3
> 1 1
> 1
&
> 1
ldmRGST
Figure LDR_11: Message ldmRGST
4.6.1 Shutdown due to constant control deviation
The boost control is dependent on the work area, by steady-state error
off. (Steady-state error, see chapter "Monitoring concept").
4.6.2 Shutdown due to cold start
dzmNmit> ldwN_Abs
anmWTF
KL
ldwKSTWKL
&
mrmSTART_B
DEAD TIME
ldoN_Abs
> 1
ldoRG_BER = 7
Figure LDR_10: shutdown due to cold start
When starting from cold (ldmBereich = 7) a shutdown occurs by setting the duty cycle
ldwREGVGW1. Cold start is during startup (mrmSTART_B = 1) and also a
applicable time after the start of discharge, but only when the speed threshold ldwN_Abs
is exceeded. This maximum break time (ldoKSTWt) is water temperature dependent
(Characteristic ldwKSTWKL) and with the water temperature at the time of anmWTF
Start shedding determined.
All rights reserved by Robert Bosch GmbH, including in cases of proprietary rights applications. All rights of disposal such as copying and passing on to us.
19 April 2002 Charge pressure control - shutdown DS / ESA
0
cowVAR_GS
K = 1
cowVAR_GS
K = 2
> 1
19 April 2002
1
bosch
gswUB_N ..
anmUBATT
gswUB_ ..
> 1
zmmSYSERR.
3
anmT_MOT
gsoGS_tGAZ
gsmDIA_GAZ
TIMER
5.1 glow time
KL
5.1.1 Glhkerzenansteuerung
gswGAZ_KL
Incandescent
display
cowVAR_GA
Z
5 Other Features
Preheating
Ready-
nomic glow
cowVAR_GS
K> 0
Motor standstill
EDC15 +
Y S01 281/120 - VG2
Start annealing
ehmFGRS
> 1
Main glow
2 Generation
Afterglow
Figure SONSGZ01: Glhkerzenansteuerung
All rights reserved by Robert Bosch GmbH, including in cases of proprietary rights applications. All rights of disposal such as copying and passing on to us.
Other Features -Glow time
&
gsoGS_TV4
gsoGS_t1
gsoGS_TVx
gswGS_ ...
Intermediate
glow
cowVARSGT
V
gswGS_SGTV
ehmFGRS
mrmM_EAKT
dzmNmit
KF
gswTV4_KF
Main glow
3 Generation
Page 5-1
DS / ESA
anmT_MOT
KL
gswGS_t1KL
Page 5-2 EDC15 +
Y S01 281/120 - VG2
0 bosch
Control of the glow indicator:
About the variant cowVAR_GAZ switch, regardless of the actual preheating time a
applied any control period in the motor temperature dependent characteristic gswGAZ_KL
be. About the Batteriespannungshysterese gswUB_ .. or if any useful speed
present (zmmSYSERR.3 is set), the glow indicator is turned off.
Selection of Glhkerzengeneration:
cowVAR_GSK = 0 GSK 2
cowVAR_GSK = 1 GSK 3, Bosch Product
cowVAR_GSK = 2 GSK 3, competitor product
Glhkerzenansteuerung, 2 Generation (cowVAR_GSK = 0):
About the Batteriespannungshysterese gswUB_ .. or if any useful speed is present
(ZmmSYSERR.3 is set), the relays are switched off.
Control in
Dependence of
Battery voltage
gswUB_S2
1
0
anmUBATT
gswUB_S1
Control in dependence of the battery voltage
1: Controlling allowed
0: Controlling not allowed
Figure SONSGZ07: Batteriespannungshysterese GSK 2
At motor standstill all except Glhphasen ago - and is ready to start glow off.
The glow relay will be in low and middle glow only after a delay time
gswGS_T_1G driven.
Glhkerzenansteuerung, 3 Generation (cowVAR_GSK 0) The control in the
Preheating phase consists of three areas:
In area 1, the glow plugs with the duty ratio gswGS_TV1 be for the period
gsoGS_t1 (be applied in the motor temperature dependent characteristic gswGS_t1KL)
activated.
In region 2, the glow plugs with the duty ratio gswGS_TV2 be for the period
gswGS_t2 driven.
In region 3, the glow plugs with the duty ratio gswGS_TV3 be for the period
gsmGS_t_VG (preheating time from the map gswGS_VGKF) - gswGS_t2 - gsoGS_t1
activated. If the map gswGS_VGKF is applied to zero, there is no
Preheating.
-
-
-
All rights reserved by Robert Bosch GmbH, including in cases of proprietary rights applications. All rights of disposal such as copying and passing on to us.
DS / ESA Other functions - glow time 19 April 2002
0 bosch
TV
[%]
gswGS_TV1
gswGS_TV2
gswGS_TV3
EDC15 +
Y S01 281/120 - VG2
Page 5-3
t1 t2 t3
t [ms]
t1 ... gsoGS_t1 (from characteristic gswGS_t1KL)
t2 ... gswGS_t2
t3 ... gsmGS_t_VG (preheating time from mapped gswGS_VGKF) - gswGS_t2 - gsoGS_t1
Figure SONSGZ03: preheating for Glhkerzenansteuerung, 3 Generation
For the states of readiness annealing, intermediate annealing and post-heating the glow plugs with
a duty cycle gsoGS_TV4 driven. This value is derived from the map
gswTV4_KF in dependence on the actual quantity and the engine speed mrmM_EAKT
dzmNmit. If during the starting annealing cowVARSGTV = 0, the amplifier with the
Duty cycle gswGS_SGTV driven. Is cowVARSGTV = 1 gsoGS_TV4 to
Control used. About the Batteriespannungshysterese gswUB_ .. or if no
present evaluable speed (zmmSYSERR.3 is set), no duty cycle is output.
Control in
Dependence of
Battery voltage
gswUB_S2N
1
gswUB_S2
0
anmUBATT
gswUB_S1N gswUB_S1
Control in dependence of the battery voltage
1: Controlling allowed
0: Controlling not allowed
Figure SONSGZ08: Batteriespannungshysterese GSK 3
Battery voltage correction: see chapter "Input and Output Signals" - Glhrelaissteller
All rights reserved by Robert Bosch GmbH, including in cases of proprietary rights applications. All rights of disposal such as copying and passing on to us.
19 April 2002 Other functions - glow time DS / ESA
Page 5-4 EDC15 +
Y S01 281/120 - VG2
0 bosch
Illustrate the operation of the hysteresis:
(The picture shown is only an example. Through application can swapped the hysteresis and
be inverted.)
gswUB_S2
gswUB_S1
anmUBATT
gswUB_S2N
gswUB_S1N
t
gswUB_W1
gswUB_W2N
GRL - Control
gswUB_W1N
gswUB_W2
Unterspgs - Protection berspgs - Protection
t
Figure SONSGZ09: Batteriespannungshysterese GSK 3
All rights reserved by Robert Bosch GmbH, including in cases of proprietary rights applications. All rights of disposal such as copying and passing on to us.
DS / ESA Other functions - glow time 19 April 2002
0 bosch
possible from any state when
Ecomatic available and
dzmNmit == 0 and
mrmStart_B <> 1 and
! Waiting for T_MOT and
! Overrun active and
! Dimeco
waiting for
ECO Startan-
demand
[01]
EDC15 +
Y S01 281/120 - VG2
Page 5-5
Init
from each state of
possible if
dimK15 == 0
dimeco join. Flank
waiting for
T_MOT
[00]
dimK15 == 1
Overrun active
[100]
Preheating time> 0
Preheating time == 0
Preheating
[10]
keinVorglhenCondition 2
[50] or
dzmNmit> gswGS_N_VG
debounced with gswGS_T_G
Condition1
Condition1
Condition 2
Preheating time
(GsmGS_t_VG)
expired
or
(DzmNmit == 0
and
gswGS_t1 +
gswGS_t2
expired)
gswGS_t_BG
expired
Condition1
no
Start annealing
[C0]
gswGS_t_SG
expired or
anmT_MOT> = gswGS_TWSG
Start annealing
[70]
Preparedness
glow
[30]
Condition 2
Condition 1
dzmNmit> gswGS_N_G or
dimK50> 0
(Debounced with gswGS_T_G)
and
anmT_MOT > = gswGS_TWSG
Condition 2
dzmNmit> gswGS_N_G or
dimK50> 0
(Debounced with gswGS_T_G)
and
anmT_MOT <gswGS_TWSG
mrmSTART_B == 0
mrmSTART_B == 0
no re-
glow
[D0]
Figure SONSGZ02_1:
All rights reserved by Robert Bosch GmbH, including in cases of proprietary rights applications. All rights of disposal such as copying and passing on to us.
19 April 2002 Other functions - glow time DS / ESA
Page 5-6 EDC15 +
Y S01 281/120 - VG2
0 bosch
Condition 3
dzmNmit> = gswGS_N_NG or
mrmM_EAKT> = gswGS_M_NG
mrmSTART_B == 0
mrmSTART_B == 0
dzmNmit <gswGS_N_NG and
mrmM_EAKT <gswGS_M_NG
Intermediate
glow
[F0]
no re-
glow
[D0]
mrmM_EAKT> = gsw_MEZG
(For gswGS_T2ZG) or
gswt_ZGmax expired
(GsoZG_Erl = 0)
gswGS_T_1G
expired
Condition 3
waiting for
Afterglow
[B1]
Afterglow
(GsoGS_t_NG)
expired
mrmM_EAKT> 0 (for gswGS_T3ZG)
Condition 3
gswGS_T_1G
expired
waiting for
Intermediate
glow
[F1]
no annealing
[FF]
mrmM_EAKT <gswGS_MZGV
(For gswGS_T1ZG)
gswGS_T1ZG = f (anmLTF) and
gswt_ZGgsp expired (gsoZG_Erl = 1)
Afterglow
(GsoGS_t_NG - gswGS_T_1G)
expired
Afterglow
[B0]
[XX] ... value of the status message gsmGS_Pha
Figure SONSGZ02_2
State diagram of the glow time
If several conditions are fulfilled simultaneously, not all transitions on the status
Message displayed.
5.1.2 Determination of Glhanforderung
The glow time can be activated by two conditions.
1) The control unit is located by K15 - A in the state "waiting for T_MOT". It is during
this condition from the engine temperature determines a preheating time.
2) When activated ECOMATIC (cowECOMTC.0 == 1) Vorglhzeitberechnung is always at
Speed 0 (state "ECOMATIC - Waiting") performed. In this case, in a
Preheating time gsmGS_t_VG> 0 and dzmNmit = 0 in all states other than the state 0x30
"Willingness glow" for information on the Ecomatic-SG incandescent - information bit gsmGLUEH
placed. In the state 0x10 "Preheating" is only after a start request (signal change of
Motor - off - bits dimeco) changed by the Ecomatic.
All rights reserved by Robert Bosch GmbH, including in cases of proprietary rights applications. All rights of disposal such as copying and passing on to us.
DS / ESA Other functions - glow time 19 April 2002
0 bosch
EDC15 +
Y S01 281/120 - VG2
Page 5-7
5.1.3 Description of the states of glow time
gsmAGL_VGK
CONTROLS
gswWTFmxAG
gswWTFmiAG
anmT_MOT
gswGS_VGWT
gsoWTFAGL
fboSWTF
anmUBATT
KF
gswGS_VGKF
anmADF
KF
gsmGS_t_VG
gswGS_VGKF
cowV_GZS_V
gsoGS_t_NG
KL
gswGS_NGKL
Figure SONSGZ04: identification of pre-and after-glow
Preheating:
After switching on the control unit supply voltage is started when the computation of the
Preheating time has a value greater than zero determined, the preheating phase.
Preheating is terminated when one of the three conditions is met:
- The preheating time (gsmGS_t_VG) has elapsed from mapped gswGS_VGKF or
the timer gsoGS_t1 + gswGS_t2 expired and the speed is equal to zero (transition to
Willingness annealing)
- Condition 1: the engine speed dzmNmit is greater than the speed threshold gswGS_N_G
or the initiator is greater than zero dimK50 (debounced with gswGS_T_G) and the engine temperature
anmT_MOT is is> = the temperature threshold gswGS_TWSG (transition to no
Start annealing)
- cowVAR_GSK = 0:
Condition 2: the engine speed dzmNmit is greater than the speed threshold gswGS_N_G
or the initiator is greater than zero dimK50 (debounced with gswGS_T_G) and the engine temperature
anmT_MOT is gswGS_TWSG is <the temperature threshold (transition to start annealing)
cowVAR_GSK = 1 or 2:
Condition 4: the engine speed dzmNmit is greater than the speed threshold
gswGS_N_VG or the starter dimK50 is greater than zero (debounced with gswGS_T_G) and the
Engine temperature anmT_MOT is <the temperature threshold is gswGS_TWSG (transition to
Start annealing)
All rights reserved by Robert Bosch GmbH, including in cases of proprietary rights applications. All rights of disposal such as copying and passing on to us.
19 April 2002 Other functions - glow time DS / ESA
Page 5-8 EDC15 +
Y S01 281/120 - VG2
0 bosch
No Preheating:
Returns the calculation of the pre-glow time a value equal to zero, the state begins no
Preheating.
No preheating is terminated when one of two requirements is met:
- Condition 1: the engine speed dzmNmit is greater than the speed threshold gswGS_N_G
or the initiator is greater than zero dimK50 (debounced with gswGS_T_G) and the engine temperature
anmT_MOT is is> = the temperature threshold gswGS_TWSG (transition to no
Start annealing)
- Condition 2: the engine speed dzmNmit is greater than the speed threshold gswGS_N_G
or the initiator is greater than zero dimK50 (debounced with gswGS_T_G) and the engine temperature
anmT_MOT is gswGS_TWSG <the temperature threshold is [End of Condition 2]
The preheating time is gsmGS_t_VG before the preheating phase from the map gswGS_VGKF =
f (anmUBATT, anmT_MOT) or f (anmADF, anmT_MOT) plus the adjustment value
gsmAGL_VGK (initialized with cowAGL_VGK) calculated. The adjusted value gsmAGL_VGK
(Olda gsoWTFAGL) is limited by gswWTFmxAG and gswWTFmiAG and is on the
Diagnostic interface can be changed. The change of the input variable of the characteristic field by means of
DAMOS - switch cowV_GZS_V (0 = pre-glow battery voltage dependent, 1 = pre-heating time
height-dependent). With a defective water temperature sensor the preheating time is measured using a
Default value gswGS_VGWT from the map determined.
All rights reserved by Robert Bosch GmbH, including in cases of proprietary rights applications. All rights of disposal such as copying and passing on to us.
DS / ESA Other functions - glow time 19 April 2002
0 bosch
EDC15 +
Y S01 281/120 - VG2
Page 5-9
Ready to start annealing:
The launch readiness glow closes only at the pre-heating phase, when one of two
Conditions is satisfied:
-
the preheat cycle was ended by the end of the preheating time and gsmGS_t_VG
calculated at the beginning of preheating time gsmGS_t_VG was> 0
- The time is t1 + t2, the preheat expired and the speed dzmNmit is == 0.
The launch readiness annealing is terminated when a is met by three conditions:
(Declaration of condition1 and condition2 of: see no preheating)
-
the Startbereitschaftsglhzeit gswGS_t_BG has expired and not condition1 and
Condition2 are met. (Transition to no preheating)
Condition 1: (transition to no start annealing)
dzmNmit> gswGS_N_G or
dimk50> 0
(Debounced with gswGS_T_G)
and
anmT_MOT> = gswGS_TWSG
-
- Condition 2: (Transition to start annealing)
dzmNmit> gswGS_N_G or
dimk50> 0
(Debounced with gswGS_T_G)
and
anmT_MOT <gswGS_TWSG
Start annealing:
The annealing can start from the phases pre-heating, no Preheating and Bereitschaftgluehen
be activated. The following requirements must be met.
Preheating: Condition 2 or the speed dzmNmit is> than the speed threshold gswGS_T_G
(This is debounced with time gswGS_T_G)
No Preheating: Condition 2
dzmNmit> gswGS_N_G or
dimk50> 0
(Debounced with gswGS_T_G)
and
anmT_MOT <gswGS_TWSG
Willingness annealing: Condition 2
dzmNmit> gswGS_N_G or
dimk50> 0
(Debounced with gswGS_T_G)
and
anmT_MOT <gswGS_TWSG
All rights reserved by Robert Bosch GmbH, including in cases of proprietary rights applications. All rights of disposal such as copying and passing on to us.
19 April 2002 Other functions - glow time DS / ESA
Page 5-10 EDC15 +
Y S01 281/120 - VG2
0 bosch
With a defective WTF the default value gswGS_VGWT is used for the motor temperature.
The starting annealing is terminated
-
-
-
after the Startglhzeit gswGS_t_SG
if the starting amount of shedding speed has been exceeded or
after exceeding the motor temperature threshold gswGS_TWSG
The Startglhphase is not interrupted when the speed threshold gswGS_N_G below
will. If the starting annealing is completed, takes place at below the speed threshold
gswGS_N_G no new start glowing.
For the Startgluehen the duty cycle gswGS_SGTV is used in cowVARSGTV = 0,
otherwise as in the other Glhzustnden the duty cycle from the map gswTV4_KF
(GsoGS_TV4) is used.
Afterglow:
The afterglow begins with crossing the starting amount of shedding speed (mrmSTART_B = 0).
It is at the end of the afterglow (gsoGS_t_NG - gswGS_T_1G) ended. The time
gsoGS_t_NG is unique from the motor temperature dependent characteristic gswGS_NGKL
calculated.
With a defective water temperature sensor to calculate the afterglow is the default value
gswGS_VGWT used.
Afterglow is interrupted when the condition3 is met:
a threshold quantity gswGS_M_NG
or
a speed threshold is exceeded gswGS_N_NG.
During this interruption, the time gsoGS_t_NG continues.
Intermediate annealing:
After the end of the afterglow phase (= no annealing) is in the state "waiting for intermediate annealing"
changing, if the current amount mrmM_EAKT longer than the time of the smaller gswGS_T1ZG
Threshold quantity gswGS_MZGV is (this time is in the air temperature-dependent characteristic
gswGS_T1ZG determined). After expiry of the time with the intermediate annealing is gswGS_T_1G
begun. If in state "waiting for intermediate annealing" the current set is longer than the time
gswGS_T3ZG is greater than zero, then "no anneal" back to the state. The
Intermediate annealing is ended when the current amount of time is longer than the larger gswGS_T2ZG
than the threshold gswGS_MEZG. The intermediate annealing is the applicable time
gswt_ZGmax limited. After this time is in the state "no glow" (gsmGS_Pha =
FF) returned and started the blocking timer gswt_ZGgsp. Is only after the blocking time
Intermediate annealing again possible. On the Olda channel gsoZG_Erl the status of the
Intermediate annealing (0: Disabled, 1: Permits) are shown.
Overrun active:
If the requested follow-up (terminal 15 = 0), the status of the glow phase, "active tracking" to
(Value of the Status Message gsmGS_Pha = 100). If terminal 15 is turned on again before the
All rights reserved by Robert Bosch GmbH, including in cases of proprietary rights applications. All rights of disposal such as copying and passing on to us.
DS / ESA Other functions - glow time 19 April 2002
0 bosch
EDC15 +
Y S01 281/120 - VG2
Page 5-11
Follow-ended (follow-aborted) then again with "Waiting for T_MOT" the
Preheat restarted.
All rights reserved by Robert Bosch GmbH, including in cases of proprietary rights applications. All rights of disposal such as copying and passing on to us.
19 April 2002 Other functions - glow time DS / ESA
Page 5-12 EDC15 +
Y S01 281/120 - VG2
0 bosch
5.1.4 "pushing" for the glow plugs 3 Generation
By "pushing" is the lifting of the RMS value of the pulse width modulated drive signal
(CRL-line) for the GZS called. "Pushing" is in the preheating phase and during the
Start annealing allows. For this, the battery voltage correction must be carried out in the MSG
(CowVAR_GSK = 1). In all other states (ready to start glow, afterglow,
Intermediate annealing and in the wake) is "pushing" forbidden. During the "Pushens" is gsmGS_Vor1
= 1
5.1.5 Protection of GSK 3 from overheating
The glow plugs of 3 Generation from overheating by repeatedly "pushing"
protected by the information in the EEPROM "allows pushing the next cycle / prohibited"
is stored.
Process:
In the initialization of the glow time the information is "pushing allowed" (edmPsh_erl = 1)
or "pushing locked" (edmPsh_erl = 0) are read from the EEPROM.
- Pushing allowed: In the states "Preheating" (gsmGS_Pha = 10h) as well as in the state
"Start glow" (gsmGS_Pha = 70h) is pushed. This is pushing for the next cycle
locked (gsmPsh_erl_). Once the glow time in the state "no glow" (gsmGS_Pha =
FFh) is a timer is started. After expiration of the applicable time gswt_Psh_E is in
EEPROM pushing for the next cycle enabled (gsmPsh_erl = 1). Furthermore, the
Timer also queried if the glow time in the state "Overrun active" (gsmGS_Pha =
100h) changes. If the timer is not running it is started. If the applicable time
gswt_Psh_E expired, the message is gsmPsh_erl = 1.
- Pushing locked: During the entire cycle is not pushed. Once the annealing-
control in the state "no glow" (gsmGS_Pha = FFh) or "follower active" (gsmGS_Pha =
100h) is, a timer is started (in the "Overrun active" if the state he is "not a
Glow was "not yet started). After expiration of the applicable time gswt_Psh_E is in
EEPROM pushing for the next cycle enabled (gsmPsh_erl = 1).
Messages:
edmPsh_erl: contains the information whether data can be pushed in this driving cycle
the information is read from the EEPROM
1 = pushing allowed
Banned 0 = Pushen
gsmPsh_erl: contains the information whether data can be pushed in the next cycle
the information is written in the EEPROM
1 = pushing allowed
Banned 0 = Pushen
All rights reserved by Robert Bosch GmbH, including in cases of proprietary rights applications. All rights of disposal such as copying and passing on to us.
DS / ESA Other functions - glow time 19 April 2002
0 bosch
EDC15 +
Y S01 281/120 - VG2
Page 5-13
5.1.6 sum fault diagnosis
In the sum fault diagnosis the glow relay will no longer be controlled directly, but by
a glow plug that turns on the glow relay depending on ehmFGRS or
off. Since the Glhgert does not have a memory error, it may notify emerging
Error to the control unit via a dedicated line with (input dimGZR).
If the GRS - stage defective, the error fbbEGZS_I is not reported until the final stage
again is regarded as intact - hence the defect detection time of this error must be greater than that of the
End stage failure.
If the sum of fault diagnosis actively and the output stage is not defective, then the output signal is the
GRS - final stage (glow time ehmFGRS or diagnosis ehmDGRS) with the input signal
dimGZR-checked. Is dimGZR not inverse to the output stage control, then the error
fbbEGZS_I reported defective, otherwise it will be reported intact.
5.1.7 GSK3 diagnosis
Since the GZS (3rd generation) has no inherent fault memory, the MSG clocked serially the
Diagnostic information from the GZS. After each falling edge on the GRL-line
(Control line), the GZS sets the GZR-line (diagnosis wire) to high or low level to the
MSG thereby transmitting a logical 1 or 0.
The transmission is divided into two phases:
1 Synchronization
While the GZS diagnosed the candles, is output on the diagnostic line logic 1.
The MSG is one internally the number of synchronization bits (gsoCO_Bit). To prevent
that a fault on the line is erroneously regarded as the start bit, you must first at least
gswSYNC_HI synchronization bits have been detected.
2 Data transmission
In this section, the diagnostic data is transmitted serially to the MSG.
It is transmitted a total of 32 bits (22 bits synchronization 8-bit data 1 start and 1 stop bit)
The status of the transfer will be shipped in the olda gsoDIA_STA, and can have the following values
accept:
Decimal
1
2
Importance
Synchronization, waiting for start bit
Read data
All rights reserved by Robert Bosch GmbH, including in cases of proprietary rights applications. All rights of disposal such as copying and passing on to us.
19 April 2002 Other functions - glow time DS / ESA
Page 5-14 EDC15 +
Y S01 281/120 - VG2
0 bosch
GRL-0
GZR-E
SYNC SYNC
gswSYNC_HI START bit0 Bit1 Bit 2 Bit 3 Bit 4 Bit 5 Bit 6 Bit 7 STOP
Figure SONSGZ05: transmission of diagnostic data
Bit No.
0
...
5
6
7
Description
State glow plugs G1
...
State glow plugs G6
Overcurrent
Total Error
Level
0 glow plug error-free or overcurrent
1 for Glhkerzenausfall
...
0 glow plug error-free or overcurrent
1 for Glhkerzenausfall
0 glow plug error-free or failure
1 for overcurrent at any glow plug
0 No error
1 Glhkerzenausfall, Current, or relay adhesive
is not evaluated by MSG
GRL-0
gswTV_MIN gswTV_MAX
GZR-E
BITX
gswT_Delay
ehwEST_T8
Figure SONSGZ06: data
If ehmFGRS_K (battery voltage duty cycle corrected) <gswTV_MIN or
ehmFGRS_K> gswTV_MAX, it can no longer be ensured that the signal GZS
recognizes as a clock. Therefore, the current transmission is aborted. If the TV back in
valid range, the diagnosis is restarted with a synchronization cycle.
The information on the GZR-E line has a delay from the falling edge on
the CRL-0-line. With the help of the label gswT_Delay the minimum time can be applied, the
the MSG has to elapse before valid data from GZR-E are read.
All rights reserved by Robert Bosch GmbH, including in cases of proprietary rights applications. All rights of disposal such as copying and passing on to us.
DS / ESA Other functions - glow time 19 April 2002
0 bosch
EDC15 +
Y S01 281/120 - VG2
Page 5-15
Are read all the data bits, or a transmission error occurred, so the information is in
the message gsmGSK3_ST (Initial = 0) shipped and the "data valid bit"
(GsmGSK3_ST.F = 1).
If an error occurs, the low byte is cleared, and the corresponding high byte in
Error and the "data valid bit" (gsmGSK3_ST.F = 1).
gsmGSK3_ST
Bit position
0-7
8
9
A
B
C
F
Description
Diagnostic data
1 = Stop bit - error
1 = Flatline Low - error
1 = Flatline High - Error
1 = Timeout - Error
1 = 3 different encodings received
1 = valid data sent
All errors reported by the drive, then the message "reported error" set
(GsmER_READ = 1) and the diagnosis takes the "valid data bit" until the next
Diagnostic cycle back (gsmGSK3_ST.F = 0).
Application Note:
Delay time gswT_Delay + 20ms <period ehwEST_T8
There must be at least (10 bit + 22 bit Init Sync. + 10 bit data) * ehwEST_T8 by a K15 annealed
be to allow one valid transmission data in the driving cycle.
5.1.8 Coding GSK3
The encoding GSK 3 allows an unambiguous mapping between application in the MSG and
verbautem glow time. This prevents, that the glow plug with a too high
Zerzrt power or heated not be strong enough to low performance. The
Encoding function compares the installed GZS via diagnostic line (GZR-E)
transmitted coding with the label gswGZS_TYP. Returns the subsequent 2 out of 3 selection,
from the received Codierworten a match, the glow function in the EEPROM
enabled (gsmGZS_Cok = FFh). The initialization of the EEPROM flag is in the
Olda gsoGZS_Cok displayed. In the cycle, after which the encoding is carried out, showing the
GsoGZS_Cok olda = 0 and the message gsmGZS_Cok = FFh. After show KL15 change
both FFh when the storage in the EEPROM was successful. After the coding for that is
no longer checked entire lifetime of the control unit (not even after changing the
Glhzeitsteuergertes). As long as the coding is not complete (gsmGZS_Cok = 0) and no
Error (fbbEGZS_C, fbbEGZS_P) was added, the duty ratio ehmFGRS_K =
gswTV_Code. The encoding consists of 3 bits, the first after the Transmitted synchronization bit
be.
All rights reserved by Robert Bosch GmbH, including in cases of proprietary rights applications. All rights of disposal such as copying and passing on to us.
19 April 2002 Other functions - glow time DS / ESA
Page 5-16 EDC15 +
Y S01 281/120 - VG2
0 bosch
GRL-0
GZR-E
Encoding
Synchronization
Bit0 Bit1 Bit 2 Bit 3 Bit 4 Bit 5 Bit 6 Bit 7 Bit8 Bit9 Bit10 ..... Bit21
Figure SONSGZ10: Schematic representation of the synchronization
The 3 bits which are transmitted within a diagnosis cycle can be in a
Buffer (gsoGZS_BUF) secured. After three successful diagnosis cycles, the 2 is from
3 Selection started.
Example with Bosch GZS-T after three diagnostic cycles (gsoGZS_BUF):
internal flag
1111
Coding word coding word 1 2 3 coding word
0111 0111 0111
Tab1: Codierwortbuffer gsoGZS_BUF
The olda gsoGZS_BUF is only with the active coding (gsmGZS_Cok = 0) and in the
Driving cycle in which the coding was completed successfully (gsmGZS_Cok = FFh), with
Values filled. Is the receiving coding word does not match the label gswGZS_TYP,
the error fbbEGZS_C (fboSGRS.6) is reported and the flag in the EEPROM
(GsmGZS_Cok) remains 0 at the value The evaluation is terminated for this driving cycle
(EhmFGRS_K = 0). Is it possible not 2 out of 3 choices because in all diagnostic cycles
different Codierworte been received, the bit is set gsmGSK3_ST.12. Thereby
the error is reported fbbEGZS_P (transmission errors GZS). The EEPROM flag remains on
0, and the evaluation of the coding is restarted. The Codierwortbuffer is reinitialized
(GsoGZS_BUF = 000Fh). We the error as "permanently damaged" (depending on fbwEGZS_PA =
Number of error messages to finally broken) entered into the fault-olda (fboSGZS.7) so
the evaluation is aborted (ehmFGRS_K = 0) and only in the next cycle (KL15
OFF / ON) restarted.
All rights reserved by Robert Bosch GmbH, including in cases of proprietary rights applications. All rights of disposal such as copying and passing on to us.
DS / ESA Other functions - glow time 19 April 2002
0 bosch
EDC15 +
Y S01 281/120 - VG2
Page 5-17
Mapping table between GZS type and application of gswGZS_TYP:
Bit 3
0
0
0
0
1
1
1
1
Bit 2
0
0
1
1
0
0
1
1
Bit 1
0
1
0
1
0
1
0
1
Decimal
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
Assignment
open
open
open
open
open
open
open
BOSCH GZS
Tab2: Assignment of codes
Application Note:
The error fbbEGZS_P is set by the bit gsmGSK3_ST.C. If the bit C is set, it remains
set until back 3 valid diagnostic cycles have been read.
All rights reserved by Robert Bosch GmbH, including in cases of proprietary rights applications. All rights of disposal such as copying and passing on to us.
19 April 2002 Other functions - glow time DS / ESA
Page 5-18 EDC15 +
Y S01 281/120 - VG2
0 bosch
5.2 fuel cooling
Thus, the fuel temperature anmKTF in the return line to the tank certain temperature thresholds
does not exceed, is a fuel cooling. For this purpose, a circulating pump
ehmFKSK controlled by a relay.
dzoNmit
kkoSTATE.0
&
kkwHYSN_ *
kkoSTATE.2
anmKTF
kkoSTATE.1
kkwHYSTK_ *
kkoSTATE.3
* Each with H, L, O and U
TIMER
> 1
kkwTEINMIN
&
ehmFKSK
DEAD TIME TIMER
cowFUN_KSK
kkwKSK_wns
mrmSTART_B
kkwKSK_on
1
Figure SONSKK01: fuel cooling
Above the threshold temperature kkwHYSTK_O and above the speed threshold kkwHYSN_O
the output ehmFKSK for the minimum on kkwTEINMIN activated. After
below the hysteresis thresholds kkwHYSTK_U or kkwHYSN_U and after the
Minimum on the output is disabled.
About the function switch cowFUN_KSK
Disable fuel cooling.
(CowFUN_KSK = 0) can be the entire
The initial states of the two hysteresis loops are set in the BIT olda kkoSTATE shown.
This is indicated by bit 0 and bit 1 Drehzahlhysterese the temperature hysteresis.
In addition, while the minimum on bit 2 is set.
The fuel circulation pump is only switched on when already the start shedding
(MrmSTART_B = 0) is reached.
In order to prevent siltation of the fuel cooling circuit is once per driving cycle
after start shedding and the waiting time kkwKSK_wns the fuel circulation pump for
Duration kkwKSK_on turned on.
All rights reserved by Robert Bosch GmbH, including in cases of proprietary rights applications. All rights of disposal such as copying and passing on to us.
DS / ESA Other functions - fuel cooling 19 April 2002
0 bosch
EDC15 +
Y S01 281/120 - VG2
Page 5-19
5.3 Air Compressor
The air conditioning compressor is dependent on various vehicle - switched or SG states.
Using the air compressor control logic is in a short-term high
Torque requirement (starting, accelerating, undercutting the idle speed) by
Switching off the air conditioning compressor, a sufficiently high torque provided. Furthermore, in
an erroneous measurement of the speed (fboSFGG), the pedal position sensor (fboSPWG
or fboSPGS) or the speed (fboSDZG) turning on the air conditioning compressor is below
a speed threshold (hysteresis) is prevented. If the water temperature (anmWTF_CAN) is too high,
this also leads to the lockout. Also on CAN (message transmission 1 or BSG_Last)
can of air compressor are switched off.
To increase the idle speed, the air conditioning compressor drive sets the message
klmN_LLKLM always to the value klwKLM_NLL, the parameter selection of the idle controller
increases while the air conditioner compressor (dimKLB = 1), the idle speed to this value.
The query of the climate control input is independent of the air output and ehmFKLI0
is processed at the idle control.
The following text is in all Hyteresegrenzwerten a ".." for U (lower hysteresis threshold)
or O (upper hysteresis threshold).
Each switch-off causes an elimination of an applicable minimum time.
All rights reserved by Robert Bosch GmbH, including in cases of proprietary rights applications. All rights of disposal such as copying and passing on to us.
19 April 2002 Other features - air conditioning compressor DS / ESA
Page 5-20 EDC15 +
Y S01 281/120 - VG2
0 bosch
5.3.1 Conditions for switch-
The conditions that can lead to the disconnection of the air-conditioning compressor, are OR
linked, that is, that at least one condition must be met for the switching of the
Prevents air compressor (output ehmFKLI0 to 0%).
In the olda klmSTAT the current states of individual shutdown are
coded bitwise summarized. In the olda klmHYS the individual Hystereseausgnge be
displayed in bits.
Description of olda klmHYS:
Bit position
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
Decimal comment
Recognized 1Vollgas (anmPWG> klwH_PWG_ ..)
2Fahrzeug driving in neutral or 1st Transition (fgm_VzuN <
klwH_VZN_ ..)
4rel. low speed (fgmFGAKT <klwH_FGG1 ..)
8rel. Low speed (dzoNmit <klwH_DZG1 ..)
16hohe accelerator pedal change (anmPWG - diff> .. klwH_PWGD.)
32rel. low speed (fgmFGAKT <klwH_FGG2 ..)
64rel. Low speed (dzoNmit <klwH_DZG2 ..)
128rel. Low speed (dzoNmit <klwH_DZG3 ..)
256rel. Low speed (dzoNmit <klwH_DZG4 ..)
512rel. high water temperature (anmWTF_CAN> klwH_WTF_ ..)
1024rel. low temp. and high air pressure (low height)
2048rel. low temp. and
Kompressoreinschaltdauer> klwTMIN_BS
Description of olda klmSTAT:
Bit position
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
A
B
F
Decimal
1
2
4
8
16
32
64
128
256
512
1024
2048
32768
Comment
Vehicle is in the starting
Shutdown due to the starting state
Vehicle is in acceleration state
Shutdown due to acceleration
Shutdown due to startup process
System error detected (FGG - PWG - or DZG - Error)
Shutdown due to system error
Shutdown due to undercutting of the idle speed
Shutdown due to excessive water temperature
Off via CAN - Transmission 1
Off via CAN - BSG_Last
Shutdown due to refrigerant pressure or ambient temperature
Minimum on
All rights reserved by Robert Bosch GmbH, including in cases of proprietary rights applications. All rights of disposal such as copying and passing on to us.
DS / ESA Other features - air conditioning compressor 19 April 2002
0 bosch
k ln S T A T .1
EDC15 +
Y S01 281/120 - VG2
Page 5-21
A b sc ha LTUn g w e ge n A nfa hrz u sta nd
S O N S K L 03
A b sc ha LTUn g w e ge n B it ch le un ig un g
S O N S K L 05
A b sc ha LTUn g w e ge n S tartvo ck ng
S O N S K L 07
A b sc ha LTUn g w e ge n S ys te m missing ler
S O N S K L 09
A b sc ha LTUn g w e ge n U nth rsc h ne ide n
de r L ee rla ufd reh z ah lS O N S K L 11
A b sc ha LTUn g w e ge n er ter practice rh
W a s se RTEM p era tuRs O N S K L 13
A b sc ha LTUn g be r C A N - G peration s 1
S O N S K L 15
A b sc ha LTUn g be r C A N - B S G _ La st
S O N S K L 16
A b sc ha LTUn g w e ge n K ltem itteldru ck
od he U m g eb un gs te m p. S O N S K L 17
k ln S T A T .3
k ln S T A T .4
k ln S T A T .6
> 1
k ln S T A T .7
1 = F Reiga be
Ze itlic he B e gre na un g:
M:. Lw k T M IN _E S
M ax:. -
Brehm FK L I0
K lim ak om pres so r-
Fre e ig from
k ln S T A T .8
k ln S T A T .9
k ln S T A T. A
k ln S T A T. B
m rm E G S _a kt
Ze itlic he B e gre na un g:
M:. -
M ax:. K lw TM A X _F R
Figure SONSKL01: Consideration of the minimum on
k ln S T A T .1
Z e it
k ln S T A T .3
Z e it
k ln S T A T .4
Z e it
k ln S T A T .6
Z e it
k ln S T A T .7
Z e it
k ln S T A T .8
Z e it
k ln S T A T .9
Z e it
k ln S T A T. A
Z e it
e h m F K L I 0
Z e it
A u s e a n d g e s
M in d e s te in s c h a lt-
d a u e r - Z e itg e b e r s
Z e it
Figure SONSKL02: Time diagram shutdown / enable the air conditioning compressor
When released, the air conditioning compressor (ie setting the output ehmFKLI0 to 100%), the
Minimum on klwTMIN_ES wait while the no shutdown of the
Air compressor is possible. Thus, a too rapid switching of the air compressor
prevented.
During a switching operation (mrmEGS_akt = 1), but a maximum time for the
klwTMAX_FR is, the air compressor release frozen ehmFKLI0. Is klwTMAX_FR = 0,
so ehmFKLI0 is never frozen.
All rights reserved by Robert Bosch GmbH, including in cases of proprietary rights applications. All rights of disposal such as copying and passing on to us.
19 April 2002 Other features - air conditioning compressor DS / ESA
Page 5-22 EDC15 +
Y S01 281/120 - VG2
0 bosch
The following conditions are checked:
Starting state:
(Accelerator pedal value anmPWG> klwH_PWG_ ..) AND
[(Speed ratio. / Engine speed fgm_VzuN <klwH_VZN_ ..)
OR (speed fgmFGAKT <klwH_FGG1 ..)] AND
(Speed dzoNmit <klwH_DZG1 ..)
If the conditions are shorter than kloTMIN_AN met, there is a shutdown for the
Mindestabschaltdauer time kloTMIN_AN. If the conditions are longer than the
Maximalabschaltdauer kloTMAX_AN met, the air conditioning compressor is alternately released
(Minimum on klwTMIN_ES) and off (Maximalabschaltdauer kloTMAX_AN)
until disappearance of the switch-off condition.
anmPWG
klmHYS bit 0
Full throttle
klwH_PWG_U
klwH_PWG_O
klmHYS bit 1
1 Gear
klwH_VZN_U
klwH_VZN_O
klmSTAT bit 0
Starting state
recognized
time limit:
min:. kloTMIN_AN
max:. kloTMAX_AN
klmSTAT bit 1
Shutdown
due to start
fgm_VzuN
> 1 &
fgmFGAKT
klmHYS bit 2
Speed
klwH_FGG1U
klwH_FGG1O
klmHYS bit 3
Number of revolutions
klwH_DZG1U
klwH_DZG1O
dzoNmit
anmT_MOT
kloTMIN_AN
min. time limit
anmADF
KF
klwTMIN_KF
kloTMAX_AN
max. time limit
KF
klwTMAX_KF
Figure SONSKL03: switch-off approach
All rights reserved by Robert Bosch GmbH, including in cases of proprietary rights applications. All rights of disposal such as copying and passing on to us.
DS / ESA Other features - air conditioning compressor 19 April 2002
0 bosch
a n m
fg m
P W G
EDC15 +
Y S01 281/120 - VG2
Page 5-23
Z e it
_ V z u N
Z e it
fg m F G A C T
Z e it
d z o N m it
Z e it
k lm H Y S .0
Z e it
k lm H Y S .1
Z e it
k lm H Y S .2
Z e it
k lm H Y S .3
Z e it
k lm S T A T .0
Z e it
k lm S T A T .1
Z e it
Figure SONSKL04: Timing diagram of switch-off approach
Starting off, accelerating with rapid acceleration:
(Accelerator pedal change> klwH_PWGD ..)
(Speed fgmFGAKT <klwH_FGG2 ..)
(Speed dzoNmit <klwH_DZG2 ..)
NOT ((Ta anmUTF <klwH_UTF1 ..) AND
(Ambient pressure anmADF> klwH_ADF ..))
NOT ((Ta anmUTF <klwH_UTF2 ..) AND
(Start-> klwTMIN_BS))
AND
AND
AND
AND
If these conditions are met, there is a shutdown for the duration klwTMIN_B. Shall
an accelerating operation detected within this period, again, this time period is, in
the remains off the air conditioning, restarted, ie Shutdown can be retriggered.
Through the last two conditions are unnecessary compressor shutdowns (where the
Air compressor hardly absorbs moment) avoided:


UTF1, ADF1
UTF2, switch-
: Full engine torque available
: No high cooling capacity needed
due to low ambient temperature and already longer compressor duty cycle
All rights reserved by Robert Bosch GmbH, including in cases of proprietary rights applications. All rights of disposal such as copying and passing on to us.
19 April 2002 Other features - air conditioning compressor DS / ESA
Page 5-24 EDC15 +
Y S01 281/120 - VG2
0 bosch
Difference
anmPWG -
old value
anmPWG
klwH_PWGDU
klwH_PWGDO
klmHYS Bit 4
fgmFGAKT
klwH_FGG2U
klwH_FGG2O
klmHYS Bit 5
&
klmSTAT bit 2
Acceleration
recognized
Time limit:
Min: klwTMIN_B
Max: -
klmSTAT bit 3
Shutdown
due to acceleration
dzoNmit
klmHYS Bit 6
klwH_DZG2U
klwH_DZG2O
anmUTF
klwH_UTF1U
klwH_UTF1O
&
klmHYS bit 10
anmADF
klwH_ADFU
klwH_ADFO
anmUTF
klwH_UTF2U
klwH_UTF2O
mrmKLK_EIN = 1 for longer than
klwTMIN_BS
&
klmHYS bit 11
Figure SONSKL05: switch-off acceleration
All rights reserved by Robert Bosch GmbH, including in cases of proprietary rights applications. All rights of disposal such as copying and passing on to us.
DS / ESA Other features - air conditioning compressor 19 April 2002
0 bosch
EDC15 +
Y S01 281/120 - VG2
Page 5-25
PWG difference Time
fgmFGAKT
Time
dzoNmit
Time
klmHYS.4
Time
klmHYS.5
Time
klmHYS.6
Time
klmHYS.10
Time
klmHYS.11
Time
klmSTAT.2
Time
klmSTAT.3
Time
klwTMIN_B
Figure SONSKL06: Timing diagram of acceleration
Booting:
If the start bit mrmSTART_B deleted, a release of the air compressor is driven by
The delay time klwTMIN_ST.
mrmSTART_B
Time limit:
Delay after negative
Edge by klwTMIN_ST
klmSTAT.4
Shutdown
due to start
Figure SONSKL07: switch-off startup
mrmSTART_B
Time
klwTMIN_ST
klmSTAT.4
Time
Figure SONSKL08: Time diagram startup
System error:
[(Error in the vehicle speed sensor fboSFGG) OR
(Accelerator pedal defect fboSPWG or fboSPGS) OR
(Speed sensor defective fboSDZG)] AND
(Speed dzoNmit <klwH_DZG3 ..)
It takes place in fulfillment of these conditions, a cut-off for the duration klwTMIN_SF.
All rights reserved by Robert Bosch GmbH, including in cases of proprietary rights applications. All rights of disposal such as copying and passing on to us.
19 April 2002 Other features - air conditioning compressor DS / ESA
Page 5-26 EDC15 +
Y S01 281/120 - VG2
0 bosch
dzoNmit
Hysteresis
klmHYS bit 7
&
klwH_DZG3U
klwH_DZG3O
Time limit:
Min: klwTMIN_SF
Max: -
klmSTAT Bit 6
Shutdown
due to system error
fbosFGG
fbosPWG
fbosDZG
> 1
klmSTAT Bit 5
Recognized Error
Figure SONSKL09: switch-off system error
dzoNmit
Time
fboSFGG
Time
fboSWPG
Time
fboSDZG
Time
klmSTAT.7
Time
klmSTAT.5
Time
klmSTAT.6
Time
Figure SONSKL10: Timing diagram of system error
Undercutting the idle speed:
Speed dzoNmit <klwH_DZG4 ..
With the fulfillment of this condition, a cut-off for the duration klwTMIN_SG done.
dzoNmit klmHYS.8
Time limit:
MIN. : KlwTMIN_SG
MAX:. -
klmSTAT.7
Shutdown
cause falls gas
Hysteresis
klwH_DZG4U
klwH_DZG4O
Undercutting the
Idle speed
recognized
Figure SONSKL11: Switch-off undercutting the idle speed
dzoNmit
Time
klmHYS.8
Time
klmSTAT.7
Time
Figure SONSKL12: Time diagram undercutting the idle speed
All rights reserved by Robert Bosch GmbH, including in cases of proprietary rights applications. All rights of disposal such as copying and passing on to us.
DS / ESA Other features - air conditioning compressor 19 April 2002
0 bosch
EDC15 +
Y S01 281/120 - VG2
Page 5-27
Water temperature:
Exceeds the water temperature anmWTF_CAN one of the characteristic of the klwWTab_KL
Speed fgmFGAKT dependent threshold kloWTFschw, the air compressor is
switched off and the turn-off hysteresis klmHYS.9 active.
Falls below the water temperature anmWTF_CAN around a hysteresis klwWTHyst
decreased threshold kloWTFschw, the turn-off hysteresis is disabled. The minimum duration
the air conditioning compressor off time is klwTMIN_WT.
anmWTF_CAN
klmHYS.9
Switch-off
Water temperature
recognized
Time limit:
MIN:. KlwTMIN_WT
MAX:. -
klmSTAT.8
Shutdown due
Water temperature
klwWTHyst
fgmFGAKT
KL
kloWTFschw
klwWTab_KL
Figure SONSKL13: Switch-off water temperature
fgmFGAKT
Time
kloWTFschw
Time
anmWTF
Time
klmHYS.9
Time
klmSTAT.8
Time
Figure SONSKL14: Timing diagram of water temperature
All rights reserved by Robert Bosch GmbH, including in cases of proprietary rights applications. All rights of disposal such as copying and passing on to us.
19 April 2002 Other features - air conditioning compressor DS / ESA
Page 5-28 EDC15 +
Y S01 281/120 - VG2
0 bosch
Off via CAN - Gear 1:
Is CAN enabled (comCLG_SIG.15 = 1) and was the message transmission 1 (Identfier 440H)
correctly received, it is checked whether the bit 2 is set in byte 1. If this is the case, then the
Message mrmCAN_KL set to 1 and made a shutdown of the air compressor.
If no CAN is available or in case of error no disconnection is made. The
Disconnection is carried out for the Mindestabschaltdauer klwTMIN_CN.
mrmCAN_KL Time limit:
Min: klwTMIN_CN
Max: -
klmSTAT.9
Figure SONSKL15: Switch-off CAN - Transmission 1
Off via CAN - BSG_Last:
Is CAN enabled (comCLG_SIG.15 = 1) and was the message BSG_Last (Identfier 570H)
correctly received, it is checked whether the bit 7 is set in byte 3. If this is the case, then the
Message mrmBSG_KLI set to 1 and made a shutdown of the air compressor.
If no CAN is available or in case of error no disconnection is made. The
Disconnection is carried out for the Mindestabschaltdauer klwTMIN_C2.
mrmBSG_KLI Time limit:
Min: klwTMIN_C2
Max: -
klmSTAT.A
Figure SONSKL16: Switch-off CAN - BSG_Last
All rights reserved by Robert Bosch GmbH, including in cases of proprietary rights applications. All rights of disposal such as copying and passing on to us.
DS / ESA Other features - air conditioning compressor 19 April 2002
0 bosch
EDC15 +
Y S01 281/120 - VG2
Page 5-29
Shutdown due to refrigerant pressure or ambient temperature:
kumKMDneu
klwH_KMD1U
klwH_KMD1O
klwH_KMD2U
klwH_KMD2O
> 1
fboSKMD
anmUTF
Temporal klmSTAT.B
Min: klwTMIN_KU
Max: -
> 1
klwH_UTF3U
klwH_UTF3O
fboSUTF
cowFUN_KMT.2
&
comFUN_KLI = 1
&
dimKLI = 1
Figure SONSKL17: shutdown due to refrigerant pressure or ambient temperature
The additional switch-off for the air compressor is only when the refrigerant pressure
is read via PWM input (comFUN_KLI = 1) and the air conditioning is turned on
(DimKLI = 1). The switch-off is carried out via the refrigerant pressure or the kumKMDneu
Ambient temperature anmUTF. If the refrigerant pressure is less than or equal than a kumKMDneu
minimum air pressure klwH_KMD1 (U / O) or greater or equal than a maximum air pressure
klwH_KMD2 (U / O) or is an error in the error path fboSKMD occurred, then the
Compressor off.
If the ambient temperature is less than or equal to a minimum temperature anmUTF
klwH_UTF3 (U / O) or if an error in the error path fboSUTF has occurred and no
Climatronic is installed (cowFUN_KMT.2 = 1), also there is a shutdown.
It is switched off for a minimum period klwTMIN_KU.
Is this additional shutdown condition is active, the bit is set klmSTAT.B.
All rights reserved by Robert Bosch GmbH, including in cases of proprietary rights applications. All rights of disposal such as copying and passing on to us.
19 April 2002 Other features - air conditioning compressor DS / ESA
Page 5-30 EDC15 +
Y S01 281/120 - VG2
0 bosch
5.4 Cooling water heating
t
phmPBM_T4 Generator
Load-
(GEN_E)
Determination
SRC active
khmGENLAST
PT1
khwKHGL
khoHE_AB
KL
Relay
Switching logic
khwKH_tVER
khwKH_tSE
ehmFGSK1
khoRelais
ehmFGSK2
dzmNmit
khwKH_ABKL
khoHE_ZU
khmNORAB.12
Switching threshold
lowered
khmNORAB.13
khmNORAB.14
khwKH_TVSE
KL
khwKH_ZUKL
anmLTF
frozen
anmUTF
frozen
anmLTF
anmUTF
khwN_LLKWH khmN_LLKWH
khoTL
khoTWAUS_O
KL
> 1 > 1
khwKH_TLKL
cowKWHTAUS
khwKH_TWHY
khoTWAUS_U
anmWTF
t
khwUTF_FRZ
khmNORAB.0
SRC active
khmNORAB.11
khmGENLAST
mrmSTART_B
khmNORAB.1Fehler-
debouncing generator defective
fbbEKWH_L
khmNORAB.2
khwHYSU_ ..
anmUBATT
dzmNmit
khmNORAB.3
khwHYSN_ ..
khmNORAB.8
corresponds
mrmBSG_Anf
(See Chapter CAN)
mrmSTART_B
fboSLTF
fboSWTF
DEAD TIME
khmNORAB.4
khwkh_tVST
> 1
ehmSGSK1.E
ehmSGSK2.E
dimKWH
mrmCAN_KLI.1
comFUN_KLI = 2
dimKLI
anmUTF
khwHUTF_ ..
khmNORAB.5
> 1
ehmFGSK3
1
> 1
khmNORAB.6
&
1
cowFUN_HZE.0
khmNORAB.7
khmNORAB.9
mrmCAN_KLI.5
mrwCAN_KLI.5
khmNORAB.A
mrwCAN_KLI.6
Figure SONSKW01: Heating capacity increase
All rights reserved by Robert Bosch GmbH, including in cases of proprietary rights applications. All rights of disposal such as copying and passing on to us.
DS / ESA Other functions - Cooling water heating 19 April 2002
0 bosch
EDC15 +
Y S01 281/120 - VG2
Page 5-31
The heating capacity increase is used to heat the cooling water by electrical heating elements
(Amplifiers ehmFGSK1, ehmFGSK2) or Dieselzuheizer (output stage ehmFGSK3) to the low
Compensate for heat loss at high engine efficiencies. The heating elements are only
electric power reserves connected. The number of the connected heating elements (0-3)
can be set with the software switch cowKWHKERZ, which is the number of 0
Heating elements of a shutdown of the function "heating power increase" corresponds.
There are two power amplifiers ehmFGSK1 and ehmFGSK2 for controlling the heating elements to
Available. With 3 heating elements of the desired amplifier output must ehmFGSK1 with a
Heating element and the amplifier output ehmFGSK2 with two heating elements are connected. At
At the - and disconnection of heating elements is taken into account the arrangement of the heating elements
and the number of active heating elements khoRELAIS increased by 1 or is reduced.
Description of the software switch number of heating elements cowKWHKERZ:
Decimal
0
1
2
3
Comment
Function increase heat output not active
1 heating element to output stage 1
1 heating element to output stage 1, 1 heating element to output stage 2
1 heating element to output stage 1, 2 heating elements at output stage 2
To determine the existing capacity reserves the alternator on PBM provides a
Duty cycle, which corresponds to the current generator load. The assignment of high-
level duration of the PBM - signal to the sampling time or blanking of the duty cycle via
the data set parameters khwPBMINV. Since this generator load signal at idle strong
Fluctuations, it is prior to use by a PT1 - filtered filter khwKHGL.
Description of the status information heating power increase khmNORAB:
Bit position
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
A
B
C
D
E
F
Decimal
1
2
4
8
16
32
64
128
256
512
1024
2048
4096
8192
16384
32768
Comment
Switch-off temperature sufficiently
Generator load switch-off SRC error fbbEKWH_L
Switch-off Battery voltage too low
Switch-off speed too low
Switch-off start-up delay active
Switch-off WTF, LTF or stage defective
Switch-off control panel (driver required)
Ambient temperature is not too high anmUTF
Switch-off request from the onboard supply control unit BSG
Abschaltbed. Clima 1 - no heating required ehmFGSK1 / 2
Abschaltbed. Clima 1 - no heating required ehmFGSK3
State generator load in the SRC and mrmSTART_B = 0
Lowered state in threshold
State gene. Burden. Switch-on delay active
State gene. Burden. Off delay active
unused
All rights reserved by Robert Bosch GmbH, including in cases of proprietary rights applications. All rights of disposal such as copying and passing on to us.
19 April 2002 Other functions - Cooling water heating DS / ESA
Page 5-32 EDC15 +
Y S01 281/120 - VG2
0 bosch
The auxiliary heating (= Dieselzuheizer) is used for faster heating of the passenger compartment
and corresponds to a heater for the cooling water. Is in the Zuheizerverbrauch
Consumption signal calculation takes into account (see "Input undAusgangssignale-
TQS / MFA / VBS / signal ").
The auxiliary heating ehmFGSK3 is switched off when at least one of the following
Conditions are met:
o) The ambient temperature is above the hysteresis anmUTF khwHUTF_ ..
o) The start bit is set mrmSTART_B
o) The speed dzmNmit is below the threshold khwHYSN_ ..
o) The driver turns off by input dimKWH or dimKLI
o) The bit "No heating required," the CAN message Clima 1 is set
5.4.1 switch-on condition
From the current speed dzmNmit is a characteristic of the khwKH_ZUKL
Generator threshold khoHE_ZU determined. Drops below this value, the generator load and remains
For a time khwKH_tVER (Message khmNORAB.13 - switch-on delay active) under
this threshold, a (nother) heating element is switched on. Simultaneously, the first
KhoHE_ZU lowered threshold for the time khwKH_tSE the value khwKH_TVSE
(Message khmNORAB.12 - switching threshold is lowered) in order to avoid an unstable switching operation.
Even with a shutdown caused by the fulfillment of any
Switch-off condition, the threshold for the switching is reduced in this way.
Increases the generator load khoHE_AB a threshold from the current speed
dzoNmit and khwKH_ABKL characteristic is detected and remains for a time
khwKH_tVER (Message khmNORAB.14 - off delay active) above this threshold, so
is switched off a heater.
The number of active heating elements is displayed in the Olda khoRELAIS.
All rights reserved by Robert Bosch GmbH, including in cases of proprietary rights applications. All rights of disposal such as copying and passing on to us.
DS / ESA Other functions - Cooling water heating 19 April 2002
0 bosch
EDC15 +
Y S01 281/120 - VG2
Page 5-33
5.4.2 Shutdown
Operating element:
The heating capacity increase can be switched off by a control unit. This control panel is
either directly via the digital input GSK-E (dimKWH) or via CAN message
Clima1 Byte1 Bit 1 driver request auxiliary heater in mrmCAN_KLI.1 if Clima1 message
is evaluated (comFUN_KLI = 2), or via the digital input KLI-E (dimKLI)
executed. If this input is active (digital input logic high), the
Increase heat output switched off (Message khmNORAB.6 - deactivation control panel).
The selection of the control panel is done with the software switch cowFUN_HZE.
Description of the software switch cowFUN_HZE:
cowFUN_HZE
XXX XXX0
XXX XXX1
XXX XX1X
XXX X1XX
Start:
During the starting process, no heat output increase is allowed. A heating power increase
is only after the time khwKH_tVST after the start shedding possible (Message khmNORAB.4
- Start delay active).
Speed:
The heating power increase is made possible according to the Drehzahlhysterese khwHYSN_ ..
(Message khmNORAB.3 - Drehzahlhysterese below).
Battery voltage:
The heat output will increase according to the Batteriespannungshysterese khwHYSU_ ..
allows (Message khmNORAB.2 - Batteriespannungshysterese below)
Generator fault:
The generator delivers to the control unit, a duty ratio, which is the generator load.
Since this signal is subject to large fluctuations in the open circuit, it will be before the processing PT1 -
filtered. After start shedding (mrmSTART_B = 0) SRC-examination of the duty cycle is at
less than or equal khwNULLAST (error fbbEKWH_L). While the generator load in the SRC
is (Message khmNORAB.11 - generator load in SRC), though is with the last valid value
the generator load continued to work, however, prevented a switching of heating elements. After
The end of the debounce time (error finally broken recognized) is the heating power increase
switched off (Message khmNORAB.1 - Generator defective).
Temperature:
From the air temperature anmLTF or the ambient temperature is anmUTF with the characteristic
determined khwKH_TLKL a temperature threshold that must be exceeded in order for the
Increase heat output is switched off. The temperature sensor - selection is made with the
Software switch cowKWHTAUS. Done Restarting the heating power increase
only when this temperature threshold less the hysteresis khwKH_TWHYY,
is exceeded (Message khmNORAB.0 - temperature sufficient). If the
Water temperature is below the lower hysteresis threshold and the delay time after deleting
All rights reserved by Robert Bosch GmbH, including in cases of proprietary rights applications. All rights of disposal such as copying and passing on to us.
Comment
Input dimKLI
Input dimKWH or no driver's desired heater via CAN
see ECOMATIC (no effect on the cooling water heating)
see ECOMATIC (no effect on the cooling water heating)
19 April 2002 Other functions - Cooling water heating DS / ESA
Page 5-34 EDC15 +
Y S01 281/120 - VG2
0 bosch
of the start bit has expired and is khwUTF_FRZ equal to zero, the recently identified
Temperature threshold frozen. The freeze will be lifted when the water temperature
exceeds the upper hysteresis threshold.
Description of the software switch cowKWHTAUS:
Decimal comment
0Temperaturabschaltung by ambient temperature anmUTF
1Temperaturabschaltung by LufttemperaturanmLTF
Error:
A defective air temperature sensor (fboSLTF) or water temperature sensor (fboSWTF), and in
a malfunction of the power amplifiers ehmFGSK1 or ehmFGSK2 (information from the output stage handler
on the Status Messages ehmSGSK1 and ehmSGSK2) no heating power increase is possible
(Message khmNORAB.5).
BSG request:
At idle target speed increases by the onboard supply control unit BSG to the load to be
reduce, the glow plugs turned off or PTC elements for the time of the request.
To this end, as a shutdown condition for the KWH bit khmNORAB.8 used, which the state
the message mrmBSG_Anf (request bit 1.0 bit of the received message BSG_Last)
corresponds.
Clima1 request:
When the bit is "No heating required" the CAN message Clima1 (no heating
means that the thermostat is set to "blue") and the procedure is applied
Set (mrwCAN_KLI.5 means engaging on ehmFGSK1 / 2, set mrwCAN_KLI.6 means
Engaging on ehmFGSK3) are for the time of the request, the heating elements or diesel
heater switched off.
Idle speed boost:
Idle speed is independent of the number of currently active heating elements (the
Idle speed is also raised when due to high generator load no heating element
is activated). This function can be wegappliziert by khwN_LLKWH = 0.
All rights reserved by Robert Bosch GmbH, including in cases of proprietary rights applications. All rights of disposal such as copying and passing on to us.
DS / ESA Other functions - Cooling water heating 19 April 2002
0 bosch
EDC15 +
Y S01 281/120 - VG2
Page 5-35
5.5 Motor Warehouse Control
The rigid connection between the engine and body leads to higher moments that
undesirable vibrations are transferred from the engine to the body. The
Engine mount control is used to adjust the coupling degree between the engine and body
means of control of pneumatic valves, the oil pressure in the variable (hydraulic)
Adjust damper.
mrmM_EAKT
PT1
mloEAKTPT1
mloZustand
Blocking time
mlwML_spzt
mlwML_PT1
dzmNmit
mlwML_TVVG
dimK15 = 0
KF
mlo_MLTV
mlwTV_KF
mlwHYS1_S1
mlwHYS1_S2
&
dzmNmit> = mlwML_naus
TIMER
mlwML_over
mlwHYS2_S1
mlwHYS2_S2
Figure SONSML01 engine mounts control
With the software switch mlwML_on you switch the engine mount control on / off (0 = no
Engine mount control, 1 = enabled).
About the map mlwTV_KF a duty cycle for the output stages is determined. Input variables
are the mean speed, and the filtered current across mlwML_PT1 injection quantity.
As long as the speed remains after "K15 from" above an applicable threshold mlwML_naus, is
a duty cycle over the data set parameters mlwML_TVVG specified. This default value
can remain for a maximum of an applicable time mlwML_over long.
The calculated or predetermined duty cycle is the olda mlo_MLTV to display
placed and then a two-stage hysteresis with the boundaries mlwHYS1_S1, mlwHYS1_S2
(adds the outputs of the two hysteresis) and mlwHYS2_S1, mlwHYS2_S2 in a
State signal changed.
This state signal (result of the addition) is written in the olda mloZustand and
mloZustand then remains an applicable lock time mlwML_spzt long unchanged. Only after the
Expiration of this time is taken, the current status. With the help of an applicable table
is evaluated mloZustand and the result of the messages ehmFML1 and ehmFML2 the
Output stage control provided.
State / mloZustand
0
1
2
Output 1 / ehmFML1
mlwML_1_0 (Off)
mlwML_1_1 (Off)
mlwML_1_2 (A)
Output 2 / ehmFML2
mlwML_2_0 (A)
mlwML_2_1 (Off)
mlwML_2_2 (A)
The motor bearings states can use the data set parameters mlwML_1_ .. and mlwML_2_ ..
be applied. Can the engine mount control disabled mlwML_on With the software switch
(Wegappliziert) are.
All rights reserved by Robert Bosch GmbH, including in cases of proprietary rights applications. All rights of disposal such as copying and passing on to us.
19 April 2002 Other functions - engine mount control DS / ESA
Page 5-36 EDC15 +
Y S01 281/120 - VG2
0 bosch
5.6 Ecomatic
Is an optimum running of Schwungnutzbetriebes and the switching operations
Data exchange between the engine-SG and SG-DigiSwing necessary. With the SW-switch
cowECOMTC.0 the function is turned on / off (1 = on, 0 = off).
The communication between the engine-SG and SG-DigiSwing can optionally via CAN or
Digital inputs take place. With the SW switches cowECOMTC.1 can choose whether the
Ecomaticsignal via CAN or digital input is (1 = CAN, 0 = Digital input). If the
Digital input LOW level at which means "motor off", HIGH means "start request".
The CAN message (1 = "engine", 0 = "start request") is inverted in mrmCAN_ECO,
so that the information is encoded as in dimeco (TRUE = "start request", FALSE = "Motor
off ').
With the SW switches cowECOMTC.2 can choose whether the clutch signal via CAN or
Digital input is (1 = CAN, 0 = Digital input). If the digital input HIGH level at
means "clutch operated / disengaged" LOW level does not mean "clutch
activated / engaged. "CAN message can represent multiple coupling conditions, it is in
the analysis, however, only "open coupling" between and "not open clutch"
distinguished. The information is in the message dimKUP accordingly prepared (TRUE =
"Operated clutch / disengaged" "clutch not disengaged", FALSE =.
With the SW switches cowECOMTC.3 you can choose whether for a Ecomatic error
(EcoECO_STA = 4) of the motor via ecmUso_ECO = 0 is to be switched off or not (1 =
Engine off, 0 = engine not out).
Description of the status Ecomatic ecoECO_STA:
Decimal
0
4
8
28
12
20
Comment
No ECOMATIC function
Ecomatic error (dimeco not HIGH to ecwINIT_T or CAN error)
Waiting for the first high-level
Wait, that start bit is cleared
dimeco == TRUE to mrmSTART_B = 0, Waiting for 'engine'
dimeco == FALSE to TRUE, waiting for 'a motor'
All rights reserved by Robert Bosch GmbH, including in cases of proprietary rights applications. All rights of disposal such as copying and passing on to us.
DS / ESA Other functions - Ecomatic 19 April 2002
0 bosch
EDC15 +
Y S01 281/120 - VG2
Page 5-37
5.6.1 Ecomaticfunktion via digital input
Init
cowECOMTC == 1 cowECOMTC == 0
S
Legend:
Condition
08
dimeco
Timeout
dimeco == TRUE
00
S ... value of olda
ecoECO_STA
28 04
mrmSTART_B == 0
ecmUso_ECO = -1
12
dimeco == FALSE
20
dimeco == TRUE
ecmUso_ECO = 0
Figure SONSEC02: Flow chart with Ecomaticfunktion via digital input
After a reset, the SG Message dimeco within the time ecwINIT_T must be TRUE.
Will not occur this, the Ecomatic is ignored for the current drive cycle. The Message
dimeco is already debounced available. If dimeco FALSE, ecmUso_ECO is set to 0
placed. If dimeco TRUE, ecmUso_ECO is reset to -1, and the actual amount
released. Furthermore, the speed dzmNmit to the difference of mrmN_LLBAS is -
ecwN_LOW tested. If it is below this threshold, the starting amount is released. For this purpose,
is occupied with 20H mrmSTART_B.
5.6.2 Ecomaticfunktion with CAN
Legend:
cowECOMTC.0 = 0
Init 00
S
Condition
S. .. value from ecoECO_STA
cowECOMTC.4 = 0 CAN_Fehler = fbbEEGS_1 or
fbbECA0_D or
fbbEASG_Q or
fboSCA0
04
cowECOMTC.4 = 1
28
CAN_Fehler
mrmSTART_B = 0
CAN_Fehler
dimeco = FALSE
12
dimeco = TRUE
CAN_Fehler
20
Figure SONSEC03: Flow chart with Ecomaticfunktion via CAN
All rights reserved by Robert Bosch GmbH, including in cases of proprietary rights applications. All rights of disposal such as copying and passing on to us.
19 April 2002 Other functions - Ecomatic DS / ESA
Page 5-38 EDC15 +
Y S01 281/120 - VG2
0 bosch
The function corresponds to that described under Ecomatic via digital input, with the following
Exceptions:
the state no longer 08 (waiting for dimeco)
one comes from any operating state (except 00) by a CAN error fboSCAN
or fbbEEGS_1 or fbbEASG_Q or fbbECA0_D in the state 04 (Ecomatic error)
Value range of the olda mroEGSECST status (bit-coded) Ecomatic with CAN:
Bit position
4
6
Decimal comment
16Botschaftsfehler EGS (timeout or message data inconsistent)
64Ausblendung monitoring
Error message transmission (mroEGSECST.4 = 1):
In a message timeout (final message older than caw .. _RTO) or inconsistent
Message data (for two immediately successive experiments, the data of the message
read the content was already back partially overwritten), the status
mroEGSECST.4 set. Subsequently the error is reported fbbEEGS_1 as long as the
Error condition is present. The error is during active CAN - unreported suppression.
The error fbbEEGS_1 must be zeitentprellt because he also from the treatment "External
Amount of intervention "can be sent (ie, the error could be sent more often than
desired, see also "EGS intervention" / "EGS intervention via CAN").
5.6.3 'engine' / 'a motor' command (from the gearbox control unit to MSG)
dimeco
1
0
dzmNmit
t
0
mrmSTART_B
20H
01H
t
ecmUso_ECO
0
-1
t
t
Figure SONSEC04: shut - off / switch-
Is dimeco == FALSE, the actual injection quantity is withdrawn, resulting in the shutdown
the motor leads. This function is active only over a water temperature threshold ecwWTF_O.
The calculation runs during the 'engine' - further condition.
Is dimeco == TRUE, the current injection quantity is released. The calculation
runs during the 'engine' - further condition. Go dimeco below an applicable
Speed threshold from FALSE to TRUE, the addition is going to release the current
Injection quantity, the quantity released and start a boot without a previous SG Reset
performed.
All rights reserved by Robert Bosch GmbH, including in cases of proprietary rights applications. All rights of disposal such as copying and passing on to us.
DS / ESA Other functions - Ecomatic 19 April 2002
0 bosch
EDC15 +
Y S01 281/120 - VG2
Page 5-39
No 'engine' command (from the engine control unit to the gearbox control unit)
ASG in a vehicle it may be necessary, the gearbox control unit (CAN)
inform you that no engine cut-off shall take place. The message khmKWH_CAN (equivalent
S_ECO in the CAN layout) is set to one if any of the following conditions is met:
- Which depends on the ambient air temperature and time has not yet expired. (This
Shutdown condition is only once after the initial start (if mrmSTART_B is zero)
determined. Even when the motor restart after shutdown by Ecomatic is this
Shutdown condition is not activated.)
- The generator load exceeds the value khwGEN_MAX.
- The water temperature is less than the value khwWTF_MIN.
- This bit is set and no cowFUN_HZE.1 cooling water heating deactivation
(DimKWH or dimKLI) is available.
- The bit cowFUN_HZE.2 set and turned on the air conditioning compressor is (mrmKLK_EIN = 1)
anmLTF
anmUTF
KL
khoTMP_AN
TIMER
khoTMP_TIM
khwUTF_KL
cowKWHTAUS
khmGENLAST> khwGEN_MAX
anmWTF <khwWTF_MIN
> 1
khmNORAB.6
(See Figure SONSKW01)
khmKWH_CAN
CAN message:
S_ECO
1
cowFUN_HZE.1
mrmKLK_EIN
cowFUN_HZE.2
Figure SONSEC05: No 'engine' command
The transmission control unit is in this case the switching off of the engine prohibited (except
Security issues). The decision lies with the gearbox control unit.
All rights reserved by Robert Bosch GmbH, including in cases of proprietary rights applications. All rights of disposal such as copying and passing on to us.
19 April 2002 Other functions - Ecomatic DS / ESA
Page 5-40 EDC15 +
Y S01 281/120 - VG2
0 bosch
5.7 Coolant Temperature Control
The coolant temperature control involves three functions "coolant thermostat
Control "," radiator fan control "and" caster and caster pump ". The purpose of this function
the targeted influencing of the coolant around the engine in its operating ranges
consumption and emissions optimized to operate.
5.7.1 Overview
anmHZA
anmOTF
anmLTF
anmUTF
anmWTF
dzmNmit
mrmM_EAKT
fgmFGAKT
anmWTK
anmUTF
nlmNLact
anmWTF
mrmVB_FIL
nlmLUENL
anmOTF
anmUTF
anmWTF_CAN
anmWTK
dimKLI
anmKMD
mrmKMD
dzmNmit
mrmM_EAKT
mrmSTART_B
mrmVB_FIL
fgmFGAKT
nlmLUENL
nlmLUENLrd
dimKLB
anmLTF
anmADF
mrmCAN_KLI
nlmNLact
Coolant
thermostatic
Control
ehmFTST
kumNL_akt
Caster and
Lag pump
ehmFZWP
kumNL_akt
ehmFHYL
Radiator fan
Control
ehmFGER
Figure SONSKM01: Overview coolant temperature control
All rights reserved by Robert Bosch GmbH, including in cases of proprietary rights applications. All rights of disposal such as copying and passing on to us.
DS / ESA Other functions - Coolant Temperature Control 19 April 2002
0 bosch
EDC15 +
Y S01 281/120 - VG2
Page 5-41
5.7.2 Coolant Thermostat control
The coolant thermostat control is enabled through the software switch cowFUN_KFK
(CowFUN_KFK = 1) or disables (cowFUN_KFK = 0).
dzmNmit
mrmM_EAKT
KF
kmoWTF_so1
kmwGRD_KF
fgmFGAKT
anmUTF
anmLTF
KF
kmoWTF_so2
kmwSO_VGW
kmoWTF_sor
kmwKOR2_KF
anmOTF
KL
kmoWTF_so3
kmwKOR3_KL
kmwSO_VGW3
cowFUN_KMT.1 = 1
MIN
kmmWTFsoll
MAX
PT1
kmwPT1_ZP
kmwPT1_ZN
anmHZA
KL
kmoWTF_so4
kmwKOR4_KL
kmwSO_VGW4
fboSFGG
kmoWTF_so5
KL
fboSOTF
> 1
fboSHZA
fboSUTF
fboSLTF
kmwKOR5_KL
kmwSO_VGW5
cowFUN_KMT.2 = 1
cowFUN_KMT.0 = 1
Figure SONSKM02: water temperature setpoint calculation
From the basic characteristic map kmwGRD_KF is dependent on the engine speed and the dzmNmit
current amount mrmM_EAKT a water temperature setpoint for the cylinder head outlet
kmoWTF_so1 determined. There is a minimum formation with the target values to kmoWTF_so1
kmoWTF_so4 performed. The second setpoint kmoWTF_so2 results from the
KmwKOR2_KF correction map as a function of the driving speed and fgmFGAKT
the ambient temperature or the air temperature anmUTF anmLTF (applicable by
cowFUN_KMT.0. On the VS100 always anmUTF is displayed even if anmLTF applied
is. However, it is still anmLTF used to calculate). If a flexible
Service interval indicator is present (cowFUN_KMT.1 = 1), the third setpoint is
kmoWTF_so3 from the correction curve kmwKOR3_KL depending on the oil temperature
anmOTF determined. Otherwise, the default value kmwSO_VGW3 at the minimum education is
be used. If no Climatronic is present (cowFUN_KMT.2 = 1), the fourth setpoint
kmoWTF_so4 from the correction characteristic depending on the kmwKOR4_KL
Heating requirement anmHZA formed. Otherwise, the default value for kmwSO_VGW4
Minimum Education used. Order to provide sufficient heating power can be made available,
is performed with maximum selection kmoWTF_so5 after the minimum selection, which
All rights reserved by Robert Bosch GmbH, including in cases of proprietary rights applications. All rights of disposal such as copying and passing on to us.
19 April 2002 Other functions - Coolant Temperature Control DS / ESA
Page 5-42 EDC15 +
Y S01 281/120 - VG2
0 bosch
results from the heating requirement about kmwKOR5_KL.
The determined water temperature setpoint kmoWTF_sor PT1-filtered. Depending on the direction of the
Temperature change is one of two time constants (kmwPT1_ZP or kmwPT1_ZN)
selected. (NOTE: This PT1 filtering is processed in 100 ms grid The.
Memory factor may therefore not calculated, as with all other filters at the sampling rate of 20 ms
be.)
If an error occurs in the error paths for UTF or LTF, OTF, or FGG HZA, the
Setpoint kmmWTFsoll assigned the default value kmwSO_VGW. The selection of the error path
UTF or LTF is also via cowFUN_KMT (cowFUN_KMT.0 = 0 fboSUTF,
cowFUN_KMT.0 = 1 fboSLTF).
kmoWTFist kmmWTF_ra
anmWTF_CAN
kmwWTF_VGW
I CONTROLS
kmoTSTreg
fbbEWTF_L
fbbEWTF_H
kmwIReg ... kmwIAnt_mn
kmwIAnt_mx
> 1
fbbEWTF_D
fbbEWTF_B
fbbEKO2_Q
fbbEWTF_U
fbbEWTF_N
fbbEWTF_S
cowWTF_CAN
kmmWTFsoll
&
kmoTSTsteu
> 1
1
ehmFTST
KF
kmwSTEU_KF
kmwST_VGW
kumNL_akt
CONTROLS
kmwTST_max
kmwTST_min
> 1
anmWTK> kmwWTK_max
Figure SONSKM03: Command and control
If the water temperature is not received via CAN, now, when defective WTF probe the
Default value kmwWTF_VGW used. If the water temperature anmWTF_CAN via CAN
(Kombi2 message) is received, only errors of WTF over analog channel AND the fault of
WTF used via CAN to the default value.
In the control map kmwSTEU_KF is from the setpoint temperature and the kmmWTFsoll
Deviation kmmWTF_ra the drive duty determined kmoTSTsteu. Parallel to this,
is the deviation kmmWTF_ra an I-controller, which in positive and negative directions
(KmwIAnt_mx and kmwIAnt_mn) is limited.
The scheme is only in the small signal range active (within an applicable
Temperature window). If the control deviation is outside of the small signal range the I-
Share initialized to zero.
The difference between the duty cycles of control (kmoTSTsteu) and control (kmoTSTreg) is
limited to a minimum and maximum value (kmwTST_min and kmwTST_max) and is the
Drive duty for the coolant thermostat.
All rights reserved by Robert Bosch GmbH, including in cases of proprietary rights applications. All rights of disposal such as copying and passing on to us.
DS / ESA Other functions - Coolant Temperature Control 19 April 2002
0 bosch
EDC15 +
Y S01 281/120 - VG2
Page 5-43
If the caster is active (kumNL_akt = 1) OR the water temperature at cooler outlet is greater
than the threshold kmwWTK_max then the coolant thermostat amplifier with the
Default value kmwST_VGW driven.
5.7.3 Education of bits "characteristic map cooling":
fbbEWTF_L
fbbEWTF_H
> 1
fbbEWTF_D
fbbEWTF_B
fbbEKO2_Q
fbbEWTF_U
fbbEWTF_N
fbbEWTF_S
cowWTF_CAN
fboSHYL
fboSGER
cowFUN_KFK
fboSTST
fboSFGG
fboSOTF
fboSHZA
fboSUTF
fboSLTF
> 1
1
&
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
&
kmmKFK_CAN
cowFUN_KMT.0
Figure SONSKM04: formation of the bit "characteristic map cooling"
This bit has the following meaning: "The characteristic map cooling is installed in this vehicle and has
no system error ". The error paths fboSWTF and an error of Kombi2-Boschaft, fboSHYL,
fboSGER, fboSTST, fboSFGG, fboSOTF, fboSHZA and fboSLTF / fboSUTF (depending on
Selection switch cowFUN_KMT.0) must not show any error set. If the
Not receive water temperature via CAN (Kombi2 Embassy), is defective in WTF-sensor
immediately detected system error. If, in addition to water temperature anmWTF the
Receive water temperature via CAN anmWTF_CAN, only used in error messages in both
detected system error. The message is in the message kmmKFK_CAN Motor5, Byte2,
Bit 6 sent via CAN. (See Chapter 10 - CAN)
All rights reserved by Robert Bosch GmbH, including in cases of proprietary rights applications. All rights of disposal such as copying and passing on to us.
19 April 2002 Other functions - Coolant Temperature Control DS / ESA
DS / ESA
kuwSO_VGW
kuoWTKsoll
kuoWTK_so6
kuoWTK_so2
kuwSOLL2KF
kmmWTF_ra
KF
KF
Page 5-44
anmWTF_CANkm
mWTF_soll
kuoWTK_so5
kuwSO_VGW2
cowFUN_KMT
.5
dzmNmit
PT1
kuoWTK_so1
mrmM_EAKT
KF
kuwSOLL1KF
kuoWTDIFF
anmWTF_CAN
anmWTK
ehmFTST>
kuwTV1
cowFUN_KLS
kuwT1
ehmFTST
<kuwTV2
kmmWTF_ra>
kuwRa2
R
kuwPT1_WEPkuw
PT1_WEN
kuwSOLL4KF
cowFUN_KLS
kuoWTK_so4
5.7.4 radiator fan control
dzmNmit
kuoWTKkorr
KL
kuwKOR1_KL
fboSUTF fboSWTK
anmUTF
> 1
kuoWTK_so3
anmWTF_CAN
kmmWTF_ra
<kuwRa1
DEAD TIME
S
KF
EDC15 +
kuwSOLL3KF
&
Y S01 281/120 - VG2
Q
fbbEWTF_L
fbbEWTF_H fbbEWTF_D
&
DEAD TIME
> 1
kuoSOdyn
fbbEWTF_B fbbEKO2_Q
&
kuwT2
kuoRel1
kuoRel2
fbbEWTF_U
fbbEWTF_N
kuwRelVGW
fbbEWTF_S
cowWTF_CAN
> 1
1
0
Figure SONSKU01: water temperature setpoint calculation (at the radiator outlet)
All rights reserved by Robert Bosch GmbH, including in cases of proprietary rights applications. All rights of disposal such as copying and passing on to us.
Other functions - Coolant Temperature Control 19 April 2002
bosch
0 bosch
EDC15 +
Y S01 281/120 - VG2
Page 5-45
Depending on the position of the switch DAMOS cowFUN_KLS are available for the determination of the
Fan cooling power applied two variants.
Variante1 (cowFUN_KLS = 1):
The water temperature setpoint at the cooler outlet kuoWTKsoll results from the water temperature
on the cylinder head outlet anmWTF_CAN (cowFUN_KMT.5 = 0) or the water temperature setpoint
kmmWTFsoll for the cylinder head outlet (cowFUN_KMT.5 = 1) and from the temperature
kuoWTK_so2, resulting from a load-dependent feedforward control. About the map
kuwSoll2KF is given a predetermined temperature above the temperature difference kuoWTK_so4,
which reflects the influence of the cooler, is corrected.
From the map kuwSoll1KF is dependent on the engine speed and the current dzmNmit
Amount mrmM_EAKT a target temperature kuoWTK_so1 for the cooler outlet determined. This
Temperature is PT1 filter. Depending on the direction of the change is one of two time constants,
selected (kuwPT1_WEP or kuwPT1_WEN). The output value is kuoWTK_so2.
From the map kuwSoll3KF is dependent on the ambient temperature and the anmUTF
Water temperature at the cylinder head outlet anmWTF_CAN a desired temperature difference
kuoWTK_so3 determined via the radiator. This difference is multiplicatively by a factor
kuoWTKkorr corrected. The speed-dependent factor is derived from the characteristic curve
kuwKOR1_KL.
To recognize early on when the thermostat is fully activated, the desired
Desired temperature is reached at the cylinder head outlet but not at an appropriate pace, the fan should
if necessary, provide a higher cooling performance. Here, the setpoint can at
Cooler outlet to the following conditions be reduced accordingly.
If the drive duty of the thermostat ehmFTST greater than the comparison value
kuwTV1 and the deviation for cylinder head outlet kmmWTF_ra smaller than the
Comparison value kuwra1, then, after the time kuwT1 a temperature offset in dependence
the deviation for cylinder head outlet kmmWTF_ra and the temperature difference
(AnmWTF_CAN-anmWTK) determined. This is subtracted from the setpoint kuoWTK_so5 to the
To increase the cooling output requirement of the fan.
The temperature offset is reset when the time after the kuwT2
Drive duty of the thermostat ehmFTST less than the comparison value kuwTV2 and the
Is deviation on the cylinder head outlet kmmWTF_ra greater than the comparison value kuwra2.
If an error in the error paths fboSUTF, fboSWTK or fboSWTF AND (fbbEKO2_Q
OR OR fbbEKO2_W cowWTFCAN = 0) occurs, as a replacement value for the setpoint temperature
used at the cooler outlet kuwSO_VGW.
Variant 2 (cowFUN_KLS = 0):
The relative cooling demand from kuwSOLL3KF and kuwSOLL4KF will kuorel1 added. If
one of the above-mentioned Error occurs is switched to the default kuwrelVGW.
The outputs of the maps kuwSOLL2_KF and kuwKOR4_KF are not here in the unit
C, but in% relative cooling power.
For negative values of kmmWTF_ra to a cooling down of the engine by the / fan
are supported. The fan support is also function of the temperature gradient
the cooler (anmWTF_CAN-anmWTK) desired. About the map kuwSOLL4KF is the
relative dynamic cooling requirements kuoSOdyn determined.
All rights reserved by Robert Bosch GmbH, including in cases of proprietary rights applications. All rights of disposal such as copying and passing on to us.
19 April 2002 Other functions - Coolant Temperature Control DS / ESA
Page 5-46 EDC15 +
Y S01 281/120 - VG2
0 bosch
Fan control because of increased water temperature on the cylinder head outlet:
Depending on the water temperature at the cylinder head outlet and the anmWTF_CAN
Ambient temperature anmUTF is the characteristic field kuwSOLL3KF the relative cooling demand
kuoWTK_so3 determined due to engine heat.
Note:
For concepts with Tata thermal control (and a sensor on the radiator outlet), this
Characteristic map used to determine the / fan at temperatures above the maximum target temperature
(Cylinder head outlet) to control. For concepts without thermal Tata control is based solely on
this map, the fan control determined due to engine heat.
The dynamic cooling demand and cooling demand due to increased water temperature at
Cylinder head outlet are summed (kuorel1).
All rights reserved by Robert Bosch GmbH, including in cases of proprietary rights applications. All rights of disposal such as copying and passing on to us.
DS / ESA Other functions - Coolant Temperature Control 19 April 2002
0 bosch
kuoWTK_ra
I
EDC15 +
Y S01 281/120 - VG2
Page 5-47
kuoWTKsoll
anmWTK
kuoKB_reg
CONTROLS
kuwIReg ...
kuoWTKist
kuwIAnt_mn
kuwIAnt_mx
kuwWTK_VGW
fboSWTK kuoRel2
cowFUN_KLS
kuoKB_steu
fgmFGAKT
kuwFG_VGW
kuoV_ist
KF CONTROLS
cowFUN_KLS
kuoZusKB
kuwSTEU_KF
fboSFGG
kuwZusKBmn
kuwZusKBmx
Figure SONSKU02: Calculation of the additional cooling requirements
Variante1 (cowFUN_KLS = 1):
There is a new water temperature sensor, which is installed at the cooler outlet. If this is missing
or an error in the error path fboSWTK occurs, as the water temperature value
Cooler outlet kuoWTKist the default value kuwWTK_VGW used.
Go The control deviation at cooler outlet kuoWTK_ra and the driving speed kuoV_ist
the control map kuwSTEU_KF from which a relative cooling requirement is determined. If a
Error in the error path fboSFGG occurs, instead of the default value fgmFGAKT kuwFG_VGW
used for the vehicle speed.
In parallel, the control deviation kuoWTK_ra goes on an I controller, and in the positive
negative direction (kuwIANT_mx and kuwIANT_mn) is limited.
The scheme is only in the small signal range active (within an applicable
Temperature window). If the control deviation is outside of the small signal range the I-
Share initialized to zero.
The relative total cooling capacity is calculated from the difference between control (kuoKB_steu) and
Control (kuoKB_reg) (this figure is negative one) and is at a minimum and
Maximum value (kuwZusKBmn and kuwZusKBmx) limited. The particular here relative
The cooling power is to be applied by the fan.
Variant 2 (cowFUN_KLS = 0):
Instead kuoWTK_ra is given kuorel2 on the control map kuwSTEU_KF. About this
Map, the relative cooling requirements are reduced with increasing speed. If
an error in the error path for FGG occurs, the default value instead of kuwFG_VGW is
Driving speed used. Parallel to the disconnection of kuoWTK_ra over the DAMOS-
Switch cowFUN_KLS the regulator component kuoKB_reg is switched to zero.
All rights reserved by Robert Bosch GmbH, including in cases of proprietary rights applications. All rights of disposal such as copying and passing on to us.
19 April 2002 Other functions - Coolant Temperature Control DS / ESA
DS / ESA
kuoHy_N
MAX
RAMP
KF
kuwKBRHyp
dzmNmit

kuwHyGRDKF
kuwKBRHyn
Suppression
Page 5-48
kuoZusKB
On and off
schalthystereseHydrolft
ersonsku06
kuoHy_NAbl
kuoHy_KB
kuoKLLFT
mrmKLI_LUE
kuoV_ist2
fboSFGG
MAX
RAMP
KF
kuwKBRElp
dzmNmit

kuwElGRDKF
kuwKBREln

fgmFGaktkuwFG_
VGW3
KL
kuwHy_N1UkuwHy_N1O
:
kuwHy_N5UkuwHy_N5O
kuwKlmftKL
kuoEl_KB
kuoEl_NAbl
Suppression
On and off
schalthystereseElektrolf
tersonsku07
5.7.5 radiator fan output stage control
EDC15 +
anmLTF
kuoEl_N
kuoANFBA
cowFUN_KM
T.3 = 1
Y S01 281/120 - VG2
ldmADF
KF
kuwEl_N1UkuwEl_N1O
:
kuwEl_N5UkuwEl_N5O
kuwANF_KF
fgmFGAKT
KL
kuwANKORK
L
mrmKMDanmKM
D
kuoKMDneu
kuoKMDgesp
KL
kuoKB_KVM
kuoKLIBA
kuwKVM_KL
dimKLI
Figure SONSKU03: radiator fan output stage control (1)
> 1
kuoSchalt
dimKLB
mrmCAN_KLI
.4
cowFUN_KM
T.4 = 1
0
kumKMDneu>
kuoKMDgesp
+ kuwKMDHP
> 1
All rights reserved by Robert Bosch GmbH, including in cases of proprietary rights applications. All rights of disposal such as copying and passing on to us.
Other functions - Coolant Temperature Control 19 April 2002
kumKMDneu
<kuoKMDges
p -
kuwKMDHN
bosch
0 bosch
EDC15 +
Y S01 281/120 - VG2
Page 5-49
anmWTF
anmUTF
dzmNmit
kuoHy_NAbl
KF
KF
kuwNLHy_KF
kuoHy_VGW3 kuwHy_VGW4
ehmFHYL
kuwHyLFTKF
kuwHy_VGW1
kuoEl_NAbl
kuwHy_VGW2
CONTROLS
kuwHy_min
kuwHy_max
kuwEl_VGW4
ehmFGER
KL
kuwElLFTKL
CONTROLS
kuwEl_VGW1
kuwEl_VGW2
kumNL_akt
kuwEl_min
kuwEl_max
nlmNLact
kuoEl_VGW3
kumState <> 5
kumState <> 6
&
> 1
anmWTF_CAN
mrmVB_FIL
KF
kuoWTFkrit
kuwWTFkrKF kuwWTFHys1
kuwWTFHys2
> 1
anmWTF
anmUTF
KF
anmWTK - kuwWTFGR
kuwWTKHys1
kuwWTKHys2
mrmSTART_B
DEAD TIME
kuwNLEl_KF
kumNL_akt
&
kuwt_Start
dzmNmit> mrwSTNMIN1
Figure SONSKU04: radiator fan output stage control (2)
There is a maximum range between the additional cooling, kuoZusKB from the
Function "radiator fan control", derKlimabedarfsanforderungkuoKLIBA, the
Air demand request via CAN kuoKLLFT that are in from the map kuwKlmftKL
Dependence of mrmKLI_LUE results, and a cooling demand requirement for starting in the
Height kuoANFBA hit.
The cooling demand requirement for starting in height kuoANFBA arises from the map
kuwANF_KF in dependence on the intake air temperature and the atmospheric pressure anmLTF
ldmADF. This value is a factor of the characteristic curve depending kuwKORANFKL
the driving speed fgmFGAKT corrected. The fan selection is by cowFUN_KMT
(CowFUN_KMT.3 = 0 = 1 hydraulic fan electric fan and cowFUN_KMT.3) taken.
Ensure that the air function is not impaired, the air demand requirement is kuoKLIBA
considered. When the air conditioning (dimKLI = 1, dimKLB = 1 or
All rights reserved by Robert Bosch GmbH, including in cases of proprietary rights applications. All rights of disposal such as copying and passing on to us.
19 April 2002 Other functions - Coolant Temperature Control DS / ESA
Page 5-50 EDC15 +
Y S01 281/120 - VG2
0 bosch
mrmCAN_KLI.4 = 1), the cooling load exceeds the characteristic kuwKVM_KL from the
Refrigerant pressure kumKMDneu (hysteresis) was determined. Via cowFUN_KMT
are selected, if the refrigerant pressure by a pressure sensor anmKMD
(CowFUN_KMT.4 = 1) or via CAN mrmKMD (cowFUN_KMT.4 = 0) is provided.
About the switch and the OR gate is a hysteresehnliches behavior with administrable
Thresholds (kuwKMDH..) Realized in positve and negative direction.
The demand for cooling is via a ramp with a slope of kuwKBR ... p with positive or
kuwKBR ... n filtered for negative changes. The ramp is designed to prevent "fan saws".
After the maximum selection from the cooling demand (kuo. _KB ..) as a function of the
Engine speed dzmNmit over the respective fan base map (kuw. .. GRDKF) the
Fan speed for the corresponding fan (kuoHy_N for the hydraulic fan and kuoEl_N for the
Electric fan) determined.
It is possible up to five speed ranges (kuwHy_N. .. U to kuwHy_N ... O and
kuwEl_N ... U to kuwEl_N ... O) to suppress acoustic reasons. Instead of these
Fan speeds is the smaller of the limit (kuwHy_N. .. O and O kuwEl_N ...)
be used.
kuoV_ist2
KL
kuoElnmin
kuwElmin_KL
0
MAX
MAX
kuwElnmin
kuoEl_N
kuoEl_N3
kuoEl_N2
kuwElminU
kuwElminO
Figure SONSKU06: A and switch-off electric fan
kuoV_ist2
KL
kuoHynmin
kuwHymin_KL
0
MAX
MAX
kuwHynmin
kuoHy_N
kuoHy_N3
kuoHy_N2
kuwHyminU
kuwHyminO
Figure SONSKU07: A switch-off and hydraulic fan
All rights reserved by Robert Bosch GmbH, including in cases of proprietary rights applications. All rights of disposal such as copying and passing on to us.
DS / ESA Other functions - Coolant Temperature Control 19 April 2002
0 bosch
EDC15 +
Y S01 281/120 - VG2
Page 5-51
In order to prevent small fan revs jumping back and forth, the fan speed is
the blanked still preceded by a one-and switch-off.
There is a speed threshold KUW ... nmin set, under which the fan must not be running.
Increases the fan speed kuo ... _N0 about the value (> =) KUW ... Mino is, the fan speed
kuo .... _N2 from zero to maximum of minimum speed nmin KUW ... and kuo ..... set _N0. If
the fan speed kuo ... _N0 back below the threshold (<=) KUW .... minU, the fan speed is
kuo .... _N2 reset to zero.
The selection is extended to the characteristic KUW ... min_KL that the dependent
Speed kuoV_ist2 a minimum fan speed kuo ... nmin pretending. Subsequently
a further maximum range between nmin and kuo kuo ... ... _N2 taken, from which
kuo ... _N3 results.
If no hydraulic fan installed, the characteristic KUW ... min_KL is to be applied with zero.
If an error in the error path fboSFGG occurs, instead of the default value fgmFGAKT
kuwFG_VGW3 used for the driving speed, which is to be applied so that the maximum
possible minimum fan speed is shown in kuoHynmin.
With the electric fan speed is in the implementation of duty cycle on the characteristic
kuwElLFTKL. In the hydraulic fan this is done via the map kuwHyLFTKF in
Depending on the engine speed dzmNmit, since the operating point is just in the near-idle
Area can move. There may be areas where the fan speed is only in
Depending on the engine speed changes. Thereby resulting fluctuations
prevent the fan speed must be lowered. This amplifier can also be for another
Electric fans are used.
During the startup process (mrmSTART_B = 1 and dzmNmit> mrwSTNMIN1) the fans are
for the applicable time kuwt_Start with the default values kuwHy_VGW2 and kuwEl_VGW2
activated.
When the water temperature at the radiator outlet is greater than the anmWTK
Water temperature threshold kuwWTFGR or if a critical water temperature at
Head leaving kuoWTFkrit is reached, and the default values kuwHy_VGW1
kuwEl_VGW1 switched. The critical temperature is obtained from the map kuwWTkrKF
depending on the water temperature at the top outlet anmWTF and the filtered consumption
mrmVB_FIL. Switching is done via a hysteresis (kuwWTFHys. ..). The query
anmWTK - anmWTF is also hysteresis (kuwWTKHys1 and kuwWTKHys2).
While the caster (kumNL_akt = 1), the cooling fan power amplifiers with kuoHyVGW3 be or
kuoElVGW3 driven. KuoElVGW3, kuoHyVGW3 arise here at the beginning of the wake
from the map kuwNLEl_KF, kuwNLHy_KF depending on anmWTF and anmUTF. At the
End of the follow-up time, the duty cycles for both fans kuwElVGW3, kuwHyVGW3 be
changed so that the fan speed ramp-like down to the minimum value (kuw. _min.) on
Fan run-on end can be reduced. (Use with 2 electric fans)
If a hydraulic fan installed, so this is to disable the wake.
The control of the electric fan ehmFGER and the hydraulic fan ehmFHYL done by the end of
the cooler caster kumNLact by the end of MSG caster with the duty ratio
kuwEl_VGW4 or kuwHy_VGW4.
All rights reserved by Robert Bosch GmbH, including in cases of proprietary rights applications. All rights of disposal such as copying and passing on to us.
19 April 2002 Other functions - Coolant Temperature Control DS / ESA
Page 5-52 EDC15 +
Y S01 281/120 - VG2
0 bosch
5.7.6 Education of the relative cooling power for CAN
ehmFHYL
ehmFGER
KL
kumCAN_LUE
0xFFh
CAN message
Engine 5, byte 5
kuwTV_KL
fboSHYL
fboSGER
kuwLFTAUSW
Figure SONSKU08 Education of the relative cooling power for CAN
For the onboard supply control unit is dependent on kuwLFTAUSW (0: ehmFHYL, 1: ehmFGER) the
respective duty ratio of the characteristic curve in a relative cooling power kuwTV_KL converted
and sent via CAN (motor 5, byte 5). If an error occurs in one of the stages (fboSGER,
fboSHYL) on will be shipped via CAN, the value 0xFFh (Error Identification).
All rights reserved by Robert Bosch GmbH, including in cases of proprietary rights applications. All rights of disposal such as copying and passing on to us.
DS / ESA Other functions - Coolant Temperature Control 19 April 2002
0 bosch
EDC15 +
Y S01 281/120 - VG2
Page 5-53
5.7.7 caster and caster pump
anmWTF
kuwWTSCHW
a
a <b
b
second follow-up phase
is active
nlmLUENL
&
&
nlmNLact
see
Text description
kumNL_akt
anmUTF
anmWTF
kuoVB_gesp
KF
kuwNLVGWmn
kuwNLVGWmx
kuwNLKORKF
MAX
ehmFZWP
mrmVB_FIL
KF
Reduction of
Follow-up time - kuwNL_tab kuoEl_VGW3
and
kuoHy_VGW3 on
kuwNLpro% of
Minimum value
NL time expired
kuwNLGRDKFnlmNLact
anmWTF
anmUTF
KL
kuwNLF_KL
anmOTF
KL
kuwNLOELKL
kuwNLOEL
cowFUN_KMT.1 = 1
anmWTF
anmUTF
MAX
KF
kuwNLKORK2
Remaining
Follow-up time
Figure SONSKU05: caster and caster pump
All rights reserved by Robert Bosch GmbH, including in cases of proprietary rights applications. All rights of disposal such as copying and passing on to us.
19 April 2002 Other functions - Coolant Temperature Control DS / ESA
Page 5-54 EDC15 +
Y S01 281/120 - VG2
0 bosch
6
Driving
nlmNLact = 1
Amplifiers ehmFGER,
ehmFHYL, ehmFTST
and ehmFZWP
turn off
X. .. value of the Status Message kumState
5
Waiting for
Fan Sharing
nlmLUENL = 1
Determine NL-time and
limit to maximum
1
First follow-up
Phase
NL-time <kuwNL_tab NL-time <kuwNLtmin
kuwNL_pro the
NL-time expired
2
Second NL
Phase
Time of the second NL-phase
expired
OR
anmWTF <kuwWTSCHW
3
Ramp
ehmFGER and ehmFHYL
in time kuwNL_tab
reduce to the minimum value
finished
4
End of ramp
ehmFGER = kuwEl_VGW4
ehmFHYL = kuwHy_VGW4
ehmFZWP and ehmFTST
turn off
kumNL_akt = 0
7
Luefter-NL
End
Figure SONSKU09: States of the fan run
All rights reserved by Robert Bosch GmbH, including in cases of proprietary rights applications. All rights of disposal such as copying and passing on to us.
DS / ESA Other functions - Coolant Temperature Control 19 April 2002
0 bosch
EDC15 +
Y S01 281/120 - VG2
Page 5-55
The meaning of the message kumState be seen in the following table:
kumState (dec.)
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
Importance
First follow-up phase
Second follow-up phase
Ramp runs
Completed ramp
Waiting for fan release
Driving
Fan run-end
If the Nachlaufpase active (nlmNLact = 1) and the release for the fan run or
Thermostat overrun was granted (nlmLUENL = 1) is the lag pump to the default value
kuwNLVGWmx driven. While the caster the fan stages and are
Thermostat output stage driven with the corresponding default values.
At the beginning of the wake, the timer is started with a time of from the maximum
Caster basic characteristic field kuwNLGRDKF and the follow-correction map kuwNLKORKF
results. The input variables of the tracking basic characteristic field are the filtered consumption
mrmVB_FIL and the water temperature at the cylinder head outlet anmWTF. The filtered consumption
mrmVB_FIL is frozen in the wake thus also at the second maximum selection of
same consumption value will be used. The output value of this characteristic field is by a factor
multiplied, which results from the characteristic kuwNLF_KL depending on the ambient temperature
results, where appropriate, to shorten the lag time in cool temperatures. The
Input variables of the follow-correction map are the ambient temperature and anmUTF
the water temperature at the cylinder head outlet anmWTF. The tracking characteristic kuwNLOELKL
is only active if enabled WIV (cowFUN_KMT.1 = 1). The first calculation of the
Follow-up time should be designed so that the maximum temperature of the post-heating
is exceeded. The filtered consumption mrmVB_FIL is at the beginning of the wake in the
E2PROM saved.
Description of the black box:
After kuwNLpro% of such specific follow-up time, the maximum range between the will
Map kuwNLKORKF2 and the remaining follow-up time performed. (Second
Follow-up phase). The time for the trailing extension should include the trailing
Correction map kuwNLKORKF result. These must be the filtered consumption kuoVB_gesp,
before the maximum selection is performed again be reset. If the newly determined
Follow-up time greater than the remaining old follow-up time, the follow-up phase is correspondingly
extended. At the time trailing end - kuwNL_tab is the Nachlauftastverhltnis
kuoEl_VGW3 and kuoHy_VGW3 (from the "control of the cooling fan power amplifiers")
reduced via a ramp in time kuwNL_tab to the minimum value. If the newly determined
Follow-up time less than or equal than the remaining old follow-up time, the follow-up phase runs up to
the end. The lowering of the Nachlauftastverhltnisses kuoEl_VGW3 and kuoHy_VGW3
also takes place.
During the second follow-up phase, there is a premature termination condition. The
Termination condition is met and the timer is cleared when the water temperature
anmWTF is below an applicable threshold temperature kuwWTSCHW. The
All rights reserved by Robert Bosch GmbH, including in cases of proprietary rights applications. All rights of disposal such as copying and passing on to us.
19 April 2002 Other functions - Coolant Temperature Control DS / ESA
Page 5-56 EDC15 +
Y S01 281/120 - VG2
0 bosch
Lowering of Nachlauftastverhltnisses kuoEl_VGW3 and kuoHy_VGW3 also takes place for the
Demolition case.
It must kuwNLpro% of the minimum follow-up time kuwNLtmin (> 0 s delay time) greater than or equal
be as kuwNL_tab. For stopping times smaller kuwNLtmin is detected on follow-0s and the
Reduced power amp without a ramp to the minimum.
The follow-up time must be limited to a maximum follow-up time kuwNLtmax.
The following condition must for proper function fulfilled (Application Note):
(KuwNL_tab + run-time * (kuwNL_pro / 100)) <= lag time
All rights reserved by Robert Bosch GmbH, including in cases of proprietary rights applications. All rights of disposal such as copying and passing on to us.
DS / ESA Other functions - Coolant Temperature Control 19 April 2002
0 bosch
EDC15 +
Y S01 281/120 - VG2
Page 5-57
5.8 Thermostat Diagnosis
The function is divided into three sub-functions:
Release 1) operating range of diagnostic
2) Model temperature and ambient temperature calculation
3) error detection
dzmNmit
anmWTF
fboSWTF
fboSUTF
fboSKBI
fboSLDF
fboSLDP
fboSADF
fboSLTF
Enable diagnostics
Enable diagnostics
kmmDiaStat
Error detection
fbbETHS_L
kmmDiaStat.7
kmmDiaStat.6
anmUTF
ldmP_Llin
ldmADF
anmLTF
mrmVERB
ehmFGSK1
ehmFGSK2
ehmFGSK3
anmWTF
Error detection
Model temperature
and temp-
calculation
Modell_Umgebungstemp
kmmTMotBer
Figure SONSTD01: Functional Overview
All rights reserved by Robert Bosch GmbH, including in cases of proprietary rights applications. All rights of disposal such as copying and passing on to us.
19 April 2002 Other functions - Thermostat Diagnosis DS / ESA
Page 5-58 EDC15 +
Y S01 281/120 - VG2
0 bosch
5.8.1 State Description "Enable Diagnostics"
The implementation of the diagnosis depends on the state of the bits of the message from kmmDiaStat.
Bit of the
Message
kmmDiaStat
0
1
Value of the
Bits
1
1
Description
Diagnosis does not start 3)
Speed must be greater than or equal kmw_DZ_gr
Demolition of diagnosis 1oder2)
The dead time (= product of kmwTDZeit and kmwTDZaehl) was
exceeded
Diagnosis does not start 1)
The water temperature is less than anmWTF
the lower threshold kmw_Th_AbU
Diagnosis does not start 1)
The first value of the water temperature is greater than anmWTF
the upper threshold kmw_Th_AbO
Diagnosis does not start 1) or discontinuation of diagnosis 2)
Defective water temperature sensor
Diagnosis does not start 1) or discontinuation of diagnosis 2)
Error of another sensor (switch position cowVAR_ThU!)
Demolition of diagnosis 2)
Diagnosed error
Demolition of diagnosis 2)
Performed test
2 1
3 1
4
5
6
7
1
1
1
1
Diagnosis does not start: The diagnosis can not be performed in this cycle, as
at least one condition is not satisfied. The re-activation can only be through a
Initialization done.
Demolition of diagnosis: The diagnosis can not be performed for this driving cycle
or the test is completed. The re-activation can only occur through an initialization.
3)
2)
1)
Diagnosis does not start: The diagnosis starts when the bit is 0.
Note to kmmDiaStat: Once a bit from bit 0 to bit 5 ONE, the following messages and
Oldas indeterminate: kmmDiaStat.6, kmmDiaStat.7, kmmTMotBer, kmoVerbPT1, kmoMotQzu,
kmoMotQab, kmoUmgebQ, kmmUTFkor1, kmmUTFBer, kmoWTFPT1, kmoPdiff, kmoTUmPT1.
Depending on the switch cowVAR_ThU following error paths are queried:
All rights reserved by Robert Bosch GmbH, including in cases of proprietary rights applications. All rights of disposal such as copying and passing on to us.
DS / ESA Other functions - Thermostat Diagnosis 19 April 2002
0 bosch
EDC15 +
Y S01 281/120 - VG2
Page 5-59
For cowVAR_ThU = 1:
The error detection is performed when no error
- The UTF sensor
or
- CAN combi - Embassy
occurs.
For cowVAR_ThU = 0
The error detection is performed when no error
- The LDF sensor
or
- ADF sensor
or
- The LTF sensor
occurs.
dzmNmit <kmw_DZ_gr
kmmDiaStat.x
x = 0
DEAD TIME
1
kmwTDZeit, kmwTDZaehl, Init = 0
anmWTF <kmw_Th_AbU
(First valid value of anmWTF)> kmw_Th_AbO
fboSWTF
x = 1
x = 2
x = 3
x = 4
x = 5
> 1
fboSUTF
fboSKBI
> 1
fboSLDF
fboSLDP
fboSADF
fboSLTF
cowVAR_ThU
> 1
Figure SONSTD02: Enable Diagnostic
All rights reserved by Robert Bosch GmbH, including in cases of proprietary rights applications. All rights of disposal such as copying and passing on to us.
19 April 2002 Other functions - Thermostat Diagnosis DS / ESA
Page 5-60 EDC15 +
Y S01 281/120 - VG2
0 bosch
5.8.2 Error Detection
An error occurs if the calculated motor temperature kmmTMotBer greater than kmw_THSauf
and anmWTF is less than or equal kmw_THStol.
The test is terminated when the measured water temperature anmWTF greater than kmw_THStol
or a fault has occurred.
For the end of the tape test Readiness is for the thermostat diagnosis with the "Readiness
Speed "(password xcwPRDYm1) set. For customer service Readiness is for the
Error path fboSTHS set after deleting the error memory.
If an error occurs, the error bit is set fbbETHS_L and the MIL lamp (be applied)
activated.
kmmTMoTBer
kmw_THSauf
anmWTF
kmw_THStol
a
&
a> b
Init
S
fbbETHS_L
kmmDiaStat.6
Q
b
R
a
a> b
b > 1
Init
S
kmmDiaStat.7
Q
R
Figure SONSTD03: error detection
All rights reserved by Robert Bosch GmbH, including in cases of proprietary rights applications. All rights of disposal such as copying and passing on to us.
DS / ESA Other functions - Thermostat Diagnosis 19 April 2002
0 bosch
EDC15 +
Y S01 281/120 - VG2
Page 5-61
5.8.3 temperature calculation model and ambient temperature calculation
5.8.3.1 model temperature
The calculation of the model temperature is the PT1-like course of the cooling water temperature
by the after engine warming. The cooling water can absorb heat (the heat flux is
counted as positive) or leave (the heat flux is counted negatively).
positive heat Posts:
Warming due to the burning:
The consumption mrmVERB is smoothed with kmw_MePT1, via the characteristic kmw_ThMeKl
is determined, the amount of heat supplied.
Heating because of the cooling water heating:
Are the power amplifiers ehmFGSK1, ehmFGSK2 or ehmFGSK3 active, the amounts of heat are
kmw_HLGSK1, kmw_HLGSK2 or kmw_HLGSK3 added.
All positive amounts are visible on the Olda kmoTMotQzu.
negative thermal contribution:
The negative thermal contribution is
Ambient temperature determined.
about the Water temperature anmWTF and the
Depending on the switch position of cowVAR_ThU (Fig. 5), the measured ambient temperature
anmUTF or the calculated value kmmUTF_ber taken.
About the characteristic kmw_ThHzKL the amount of heat is determined and on the Olda
kmoMotQab visible.
All rights reserved by Robert Bosch GmbH, including in cases of proprietary rights applications. All rights of disposal such as copying and passing on to us.
19 April 2002 Other functions - Thermostat Diagnosis DS / ESA
Page 5-62 EDC15 +
Y S01 281/120 - VG2
0 bosch
kmoVerbPT1
kmoMotQzu
mrmVERB
PT1 KL
kmmTMotBer
kmoQint
I
kmw_MePT1 kmw_ThMeKL Init with 1 valid
anmWTF measured value
0
kmw_HLGSK1
ehmFGSK1
0
kmw_HLGSK2
ehmFGSK2
0
kmw_HLGSK3
ehmFGSK3
anmWTF
kmoUmgebQ
KL
kmoMotQab
kmmUTF_ber
anmUTF
cowVAR_ThU
kmw_ThHzKL
Figure SONSTD04: Temperature Model
The initial value for the integrator of the model is the first valid measurement of water temperature
anmWTF.
The termination of the model temperature determination is described in Section 5.8.1.
Model the temperature determination is carried out when kmmDiaStat is zero.
5.8.3.2 ambient temperature
kmoWTFPT1
kmmUTFkor1
anmWTF
PT1 KL
kmwWTkorGF
anmLTF
kmoPdiff
ldmP_Llin
ldmADF
KF
kmwWTkorKL
kmmUTF_BER
PT1
kmoTUmPT1
kmwLTkorKF
kmwLTkorGF
Init with 1 valid
anmLTF measured value
Figure SONSTD05: Mod_Umgebungstemp
Ambient temperature detection is performed when kmmDiaStat is zero.
All rights reserved by Robert Bosch GmbH, including in cases of proprietary rights applications. All rights of disposal such as copying and passing on to us.
DS / ESA Other functions - Thermostat Diagnosis 19 April 2002
0 bosch
EDC15 +
Y S01 281/120 - VG2
Page 5-63
5.9 Flexible service interval display
The flexible service interval display allows the oil change intervals depending
oil actual load can be carried out. This is an optimal use of
Be the engine oil reaches.
As a function of rotational speed dzmNmit, Injection quantity mrmM_EAKT and oil temperature anmOTF
will identify the specific oil pollution. The oil load is composed of a thermal
Wear value (low byte of simOEL_BEL) and a particle entry value (high byte of
simOEL_BEL) together.
The thermal wear value of the characteristic field siwOEL_tKF (Thermal stress) in
Depending on RPM and oil temperature calculated.
The particle entry value of the characteristic field siwOEL_rKF (Soot entry) in accordance with
Speed and injection quantity.
These values are staggered determined (so that every 100ms new values are available) and
applied as for the CAN message cyclically every 1000ms transferred to the instrument cluster.
Until the start shedding and further in the wake of the telegram identifier 0 is transmitted. At
Telegram identifier 0 are not evaluated the wear values from the instrument cluster.
thermal load
anmOTF
dzmNmit KF
LB simOEL_BEL
(First parameter CAN messages.)
siwOEL_tKF
Soot entry
HB simOEL_BEL
(2nd parameter CAN messages.)
KF
mrmM_EAKT
siwOEL_rKF
Figure SONSSI01: specific oil pollution
The instrument cluster sums the values and determines the root mean square of
Soot entry, thermal stress index and distance. When a limit is reached
is signaled to the driver that an oil change is carried out.
All rights reserved by Robert Bosch GmbH, including in cases of proprietary rights applications. All rights of disposal such as copying and passing on to us.
19 April 2002 Other Features - Flexible service interval display DS / ESA
Page 5-64 EDC15 +
Y S01 281/120 - VG2
0 bosch
5:10 generator excitation
In order the startup behavior of the engine to improve the excitation of the alternator only
sent off after the start shedding is done, or a speed threshold has been exceeded.
For this purpose, the excitation of the generator is carried out by the EDC. To this end, by a
negative pulse on the GEA final stage a relay is connected. This activation occurs during
an operating cycle only once in the startup process. If the condition for the first time in the wake
met, the excitement is not supplied switch. GEA output stage is powered by the
Message ehmFGEA.
After initialization ehmFGEA is ON (TV 100%). After the start shedding is done
or the speed threshold mlwERR_n has been exceeded, if the filtered battery
zmmUBATT voltage less than the applicable threshold mlwUBATT is the order of the
Map mlwERR_KF a function of the atmospheric pressure and the ldmADF
Engine temperature anmT_MOT calculated time delay, for the duration of the message mlwERR_tda
ehmFGEA set to OFF (TV 0%). At the end of mlwERR_tda ehmFGEA goes for the
remaining operating cycle back on again.
a
zmmUBATT
mlwUBATT
dimK15
a <b
b
> 1
fbbEK15_P
&
dzmNmit> mlwERR_n
> 1
DEAD TIME DEAD TIME
&
mlwERR_tda
ehmFGEA
> 1
mrmSTART_B
ldmADF
anmT_MOT
KF
mlwERR_KF
Figure: SONSGEA1: connection of the generator excitation
All rights reserved by Robert Bosch GmbH, including in cases of proprietary rights applications. All rights of disposal such as copying and passing on to us.
DS / ESA Other features - generator excitation 19 April 2002
0 bosch
EDC15 +
Y S01 281/120 - VG2
Page 5-65
5:11 odometer
The odometer (edoKMZ) is integration takes the current speed
counted during the ride. (Not, however, in the wake)
To obtain this size information about the cycle beyond the store in the EEPROM is needed.
This, moreover, is carried out after (if gespeichtert edoKMZ_STA.0 = 1) in each case after
Said stretch edwKMZ_ZYK. In the next cycle the odometer with
the value stored in the EEPROM initialized.
If edwKMZ_ZYK applied to "0", the mileage, and the error is
Overflow bit in the EEPROM deleted ("reset everything").
Exceeds the odometer (edoKMZ) its maximum value, then an overflow occurs
and the overflow bit (OVB) edoKMZ_STA.1 is set. The overflow occurs once, it remains
obtained for the life of the SG.
(Except when the KMZ is reset)
In addition, a parity bit to save the odometer reading is determined and the
Information saved in the EEPROM.
When reading from the EEPROM from the stored mileage again a parity
is calculated and compared with the stored data. If the comparison shows a negative result,
is an error (ERB edoKMZ_STA.2) set, however, is with the read-
Mileage continue working so that possible test intervals may be further carried out
can be. (Eg: every 1000km check a particular actuator)
The error occurs once, it remains for the life of the SG.
(Except when the KMZ is reset)
The resolution of the counter was elected km with 0.01 km. This results in a maximum
Mileage of 5,368,709.11 km = [(229 -1) * 0.01 km].
Application values:
Input values:
Output values:
edwKMZ_ZYK
fgmFGAKT, current speed
nlmNLact, Overrun active (true / false)
edoKMZ_L, Olda LOW - Word (16-bit)
edoKMZ_H, Olda HIGH - Word (16-bit)
edoKMZ_STA, Olda status km level
X
edoKMZ_H
X X X X X
29 Bit km level
(Lower 16bit edoKMZ_L)
ERB OVB
saved
in NL
X X
edoKMZ_STA (8-bit)
All rights reserved by Robert Bosch GmbH, including in cases of proprietary rights applications. All rights of disposal such as copying and passing on to us.
19 April 2002 Other features - Odometer DS / ESA
Page 5-66 EDC15 +
Y S01 281/120 - VG2
0 bosch
5:12 EOBD - odometer
With this function, the distance traveled is determined with activated MIL. This
to a requirement according EOBD legislation.
The counter xcmKmMILon is as long as long as summed up the MIL is activated. As
Input variable is the current driving speed fgmFGAKT. Extinguish the MIL remains the
Count constant. In re-activation of the MIL, the count is set to 0 and the
Summation restarted. By deleting the error memory via KW71 or
KWP2000 - Mode04, the count is reset.
There will be no overflow takes i.e. upon reaching the maximum count of 65535 km
(Equivalent FFFFhex) this value remains constant. The resolution is 1 km.
The status xcmKmMILch is defined as follows:
Bit 0
Bit 1
Bit 2
Bit 3
Error
Parity
Delete
MIL active
Error when saving
Parity
Required to delete the counter
MIL was active when last task cycle
Application Notes:
Label
edwKMZ_ZYK
State
0 Function EOBD odometer inactive, the
Mileage is with activated MIL
not summed
EOBD Odometer active; function as
above
Umrechnug CARB. The memory value is 1:1
from the memory to the diagnostic interface
transfer
<> 0
xcwCARxx_E 0
fbwFFRM_09 33
All rights reserved by Robert Bosch GmbH, including in cases of proprietary rights applications. All rights of disposal such as copying and passing on to us.
DS / ESA Other functions - EOBD - odometer 19 April 2002
0 bosch
EDC15 +
Y S01 281/120 - VG2
Page 5-67
All rights reserved by Robert Bosch GmbH, including in cases of proprietary rights applications. All rights of disposal such as copying and passing on to us.
19 April 2002 Overview - EOBD - Odometer DS / ESA
Page 5-68 EDC15 +
Y S01 281/120 - VG2
0 bosch
5:13 Misfire Detection
5.13.1 General
The Misfire Detection (OBDII demand) is used to detect and report periodically
occurring misfire of a cylinder as a result of strong compression loss or lack of
Fuel injection. Intermittent misfires are called OBDII relevant error in the
Fault memory registered.
The subtask includes the following functions:
-
-
-
-
Review of the monitoring conditions
Delayed detection start / early detection end
Misfire detection
Results Analysis
5.13.2 Monitoring conditions
The monitor for misfire is performed only under the following conditions:
-
-
Speed dzmNmit <max. Speed for monitoring mrwAUS_Nmx
Speed dzmNmit> min. Speed for monitoring mrwAUS_Nmi
AND
- Current amount mrmM_EAKT <max. Quantity for monitoring mrwAUS_Mmx
- Current amount mrmM_EAKT> min. Quantity for monitoring mrwAUS_Mmi
- Travel speed act. fgmFGAKT
<= Max. Speed for Superv mrwAUS_Vmx
- Water temperature anmWTF> min. Water temp. for monitoring mrwAUS_WT
- Time since last state change in dimKUP
> Kupplungsbettigungsausblendezeit mrwAUS_KUt
- Time since engine start (mrmSTART_B)> Startausblendezeit mrwAUS_Stt
- ((Clutch dimKUP = 1 AND
Monitoring of clutch engaged mrwAUS_KUP)
OR
- (Clutch dimKUP = 0 AND
Monitoring is not actuated clutch mrwAUS_nKU))
AND
AND
AND
AND
AND
AND
AND
All rights reserved by Robert Bosch GmbH, including in cases of proprietary rights applications. All rights of disposal such as copying and passing on to us.
DS / ESA Other functions - Misfire Detection 19 April 2002
0 bosch
dzmNmit <mrwAUS_Nmx
dzmNmit> mrwAUS_Nmi
mrmM_EAKT <mrwAUS_Mmx
mrmM_EAKT> mrwAUS_Mmi
fgmFGAKT <= mrwAUS_Vmx
anmWTF> mrwAUS_WT
t (SRC)> mrwAUS_KUt
t (start)> mrwAUS_SH
dimKUP = 1
EDC15 +
Y S01 281/120 - VG2
Page 5-69
&
Monitoring active
&
mrwAUS_KUP = 1 > 1
dimKUP = 0
&
mrwAUS_nKU = 1
Figure SONSZA01: Misfiring monitoring conditions
The ranges for monitoring the speed dzmNmit must be within the speed limits
are for the LRR calculation mrwLRR_LOW or mrwLRR_HIG.
An intermittent test is continued after re-entering the surveillance area.
5.13.3 Delayed detection start / early detection end
This function is used to mask the transient engine operating conditions such as the
Can be expected to leave or on entering the surveillance area.
mroAUSZsta = 0
&
Monitoring active
mrwAUS_max
fbbEAUZ_ ..
Dropout
detection
Buffer 1
mroAUSZZ ..
mroAUSZUM1
Buffer 2
mroAUSZUM2
Result-
determination
mroAUSZUpM
Error
debouncing
dzmNakt
mroAUSZUpM1 = mrwAUS_blk
mroAUSZUpM = mrwAUS_anz
* MrwAUS_blk
Figure SONSZA02: Delay of detection or the results analysis
After completing the monitoring conditions, the acquisition is to mrwAUS_blk
Engine revolutions delayed. The recording starts when the olda mroAUSZsta the value 0
has been reached.
By recording the rated motor revolutions (mroAUSZUM1) in Buffer 1 and
Reallocate after mrwAUS_blk motor turns in a buffer (Buffer 2,
mroAUSZUM2) ensures that the actual test results analysis after 2 x
mrwAUS_blk motor revolutions is delayed. If now the Condition Monitoring
away, the two memory buffer are discarded and thus the last motor revolutions with the
Results Analysis not be considered. This is for the test continued the olda
mroAUSZsta initialized with mrwAUS_blk.
All rights reserved by Robert Bosch GmbH, including in cases of proprietary rights applications. All rights of disposal such as copying and passing on to us.
19 April 2002 Other Features -Misfire Detection DS / ESA
Page 5-70 EDC15 +
Y S01 281/120 - VG2
0 bosch
5.13.4 misfire detection
Per two engine revolutions once the required minimum speed increase mroAUSZ_dN
formed, resulting from the percentage share of the average mrwAUS_dN
Speed rise calculated.
k= z-1
mroAUSZ _ dN =

k=0
n [2 * k] -
k= z-1
k=0
n [2 * k + 1]
z
*
mrwAUS_ dN
100%
dzmNakt
Minimum speed increase
n (k) - n (k-1) mrwAUS_dn
*
Z
mroAUSZ_dn
mroAUSZZ ..
increase
n (k) - n (k-1) <mroAUSZ_dn
Figure SONSZA03: misfire detection
The misfire detection to check whether each of the rotational speed increases after injection via
the minimum mroAUSZ_dN lie. Insufficient speed increases to increase the
Cylinder associated error event counter (mroAUSZZ..) In Buffer 1
All rights reserved by Robert Bosch GmbH, including in cases of proprietary rights applications. All rights of disposal such as copying and passing on to us.
DS / ESA Other functions - Misfire Detection 19 April 2002
0 bosch
EDC15 +
Y S01 281/120 - VG2
Page 5-71
5.13.5 Test Result
The error status of the misfire detection does not result from the finding of a single
Misfire, but due to its frequency.
The error message misfire in a cylinder fbbEAUZ_ .. (.. = 1 .. z) is reported when
within a test frame of mrwAUS_anz * mrwAUS_blk motor turns over
mrwAUS_max misfiring of this cylinder were detected. Subsequently, the test is again
starts.
T1 ... is the time that elapses before mrwAUS_blk rotations were made
1
Monitoring
condition
0 t
Test frame
Number of
rated
Revolutions
(MroAUSZUpM)
Error entry when
more than mrwAUS_max
Misfiring recognized
were
t
1
Capture
0 t
Figure SONSZA04: Timing
Error fbEAUZ_M the path misfire detection has the meaning: have more cylinders
simultaneously dropouts.
All rights reserved by Robert Bosch GmbH, including in cases of proprietary rights applications. All rights of disposal such as copying and passing on to us.
19 April 2002 Other Features -Misfire Detection DS / ESA
Page 5-72 EDC15 +
Y S01 281/120 - VG2
0 bosch
5:14 hour meter
The operating hours counter (olda's mroBSTZl and mroBSTZh) and the experimental threshold (olda's
mroBTSSl and mroBTSSh) in the EEPROM have a value range of 4 byte (against wear
the low - bytes, overflow, etc.-secure). Operating intervals are only counted if the
DzmNmit speed greater than the threshold mrwBTS_NMX, and the actual injection quantity
mrmM_EAKT are greater than the threshold mrwBTS_MMX. This state is driving
mentioned. An operating interval consists of mrwBTS_BIN times the period mrwBTS_TIK.
Thereafter, the operation hours counter is incremented. Outside of the driving operation, the current
Interval can be stopped. If the cycle completed, commenced operation intervals
ignored.
Reaches the operating hours counter the test threshold + mrwBTS_TIN, the test flag is
mrmBTSM for ELAB - test set and the test threshold of the current value
Operating hours counter set.
All rights reserved by Robert Bosch GmbH, including in cases of proprietary rights applications. All rights of disposal such as copying and passing on to us.
DS / ESA Other Features - Operating hours counter 19 April 2002
0 bosch
EDC15 +
Y S01 281/120 - VG2
Page 5-73
5:15 Electric fuel pump / TAV
&
dimeco
DEAD TIME
mrwEKP_Dly
dzmNmit> 0
dimK15
> 1
&
fbbECRA_B (croCR_STAT> = crwCR_ST_B)
ecmUso_ECO = -1
ehmFEKP
ehmFTAV
Figure EKP_01: electric fuel pump / Tankabschaltventil
About the function switch cowFUN_EKP (cowFUN_EKP = 0) can the control of the
electric fuel pump and Tankabschaltventils deaktivieren.Sobald terminal 15 active
is not about the crash error fbbECRA_B is not final malfunctioning and mrmUsoll
To be ECOMATIC off (ecmUso_ECO = -1), the fuel pump stage can in
Two different types are switched on:-if the speed is greater than zero dzmNmit
ehmFEKP and ehmFTAV be turned on or
when a ECOMATIC request is present (dimeco = 1). If the ECOMATIC-
Requirement, so be administered for the duration mrwEKP_Dly the output stages
Fuel pump ehmFEKP and Tankabschaltventil ehmFTAV driven.
5.15.1 Electrical fuel pump / TAV during the initialization phase
In initialization, a ECOMATIC request is independent of dimeco simulated
which ehmFEKP and ehmFTAV for the duty mrwEKP_Dly be switched
(If the above conditions for dimK15, fbbECRA_B and ecmUso_ECO are met).
Application Note:
The task of the electric fuel pump and Tankabschaltventil is performed every 100 ms, this should
be considered in the application of mrwEKP_Dly.
-
All rights reserved by Robert Bosch GmbH, including in cases of proprietary rights applications. All rights of disposal such as copying and passing on to us.
19 April 2002 Other Features -Electrical fuel pump / TAV DS / ESA
0 bosch
EDC15 +
Y S01 281/120 - VG2
Page 6-1
6 Error Handling
6.1 Survey
The error handling is organized as follows:
Data set parameters for each error
(FbwE. .. A, FBWE ... B, FBWE ... T,
FBWE ... V, FBWE ... C)
Data set parameters for each error path
(FbwS. .. UB., FBWS ... FLC,
FBWS ... HLC, FBWS ... PRI)
Error
vorentprellung
Test condition
(Tested: YES / NO)
Vorentprellzustand
(Intact, finally broken)
Fault memory
Management
Fault memory
Diagnosis
Result of
Error tests
Replacement reactions
with substitute values
MILSYS
Lamp
KW71 CARB
Figure UEBEFB01: Error Handling
Each SG function group (eg, quantity calculation, exhaust gas recirculation, ...) performs monitoring
from. The result of this monitoring (hereinafter referred to as error) is applied to the
Fehlervorentprellung reported.
The Fehlervorentprellung carried out for each fault individually. It is used to detect security (for example,
must be a "Signal Range Check" SRC hurt for a limited period of time, that's not even short
Cause glitches an error). There is a separate data set parameter block for each error. Is
the error finally broken a message is sent to the error memory management.
Individual errors are combined to error paths. The error memory management performs the
Eintragsentprellung per error path through. If an error is finally broken reported, it is
to substitute functions in driver software and a preliminary fault memory entry of the path
which must be confirmed in the Eintragsentprellung.
The state of an error path in the error memory determining whether the MIL lamp or SYS
and whether the fault entry for the diagnosis is visible.
All rights reserved by Robert Bosch GmbH, including in cases of proprietary rights applications. All rights of disposal such as copying and passing on to us.
19 April 2002 Error handling - Overview DS / ESA
Page 6-2 EDC15 +
Y S01 281/120 - VG2
0 bosch
6.2 Fehlervorentprellung
Error
classified
as
provisionally
defective
intact
provisionally
defective
final
defektvorlufig
cured
final
defective
provisionally
cured
operational
cured
Error
FBOs ...
FBWE ... A FBWE ... B
Figure UEBEFB02: Fehlervorentprellung
6.2.1 defect detection
When an error occurs, this is for the time being as provisionally defective and after the debounce time
FBWE .. A as finally broken classified. When you heal during the debounce time, the error is
again as intact classified. The Fehlervorentprellung can be obtained by application of FBWE .. A with zero
or maximum value can be switched off, which at the maximum value of the error at zero and never
immediately as finally broken is classified.
6.2.2 Intact recognition
When you heal a defect that is as provisionally cured and after the Heilungsentprellzeit
FBWE .. B as healed in operation classified. Recurrence during the debounce time is the
Error as finally broken reported. The error condition can bruise by applying FBWE .. B
zero or maximum value can be switched off, wherein the error in the maximum value
can not be cured and he as at zero immediately healed in operation is classified.
Warning:
The replacement function of an error and its entry in the error memory takes place in
Vorentprellzustand finally broken. Upon detection and classification of an error as provisionally
defective is frozen, the last valid state for the duration of the debounce FBWE .. A! The
Switching of substitute to normal function when done in Operation healed.
All rights reserved by Robert Bosch GmbH, including in cases of proprietary rights applications. All rights of disposal such as copying and passing on to us.
DS / ESA Error Handling - Fehlervorentprellung 19 April 2002
0 bosch
EDC15 +
Y S01 281/120 - VG2
Page 6-3
6.2.3 Test condition
An error is given the status "tested" for the first time after ignition when a intact or
finally broken is reported by the Vorentprellung.
An error path (see next section) is considered tested when an error occurs in the path or all
Error of the path were tested.
If FBWE ... A with the maximum value applied (= error is never finally broken) applies the error
after the onset of the first monitor as tested.
Example:
If an error occurs after "ignition on" reported by monitoring as well the first time so applies
the error immediately when tested, he other hand, is reported as bad as it is only after the
Vorentprellung classified as tested.
6.2.4 caster - Low voltage K15
It may be monitoring for any errors depends on the Terminal 15 voltage level applicative
be hidden that is, There is no Vorentprellung an error and therefore no
Fault memory.
The problem is not definitely defective but not cured. There is no replacement function.
The detection of the state of the terminal 15 is done both as a digital and analog signal. If free
Recognizes; voltage drops below the threshold determined by the hardware (approximately 4.5 V voltage to K15)
the EDC control unit Caster (Message dimK15 = 0 nlmNLact = 1).
Some vehicle components (CAN-bus, power amplifiers ..) or control devices switch already at
Below from a higher terminal 15 voltage threshold. In order for monitoring these
Components to avoid unwanted error messages, the voltage of the terminal 15 as is
analog value anmK15 recorded analog. Falls below the lower hysteresis threshold anmK15
anmwK15_H_U, this is recognized as analog K15 OFF (Message anmK15_ON = 0) and for those
Errors in which low-voltage terminal 15 will be excluded from monitoring,
Vorentprellung disabled. Exceeds the upper hysteresis threshold anmK15 anwK15_H_O is
this as analogous K15 ON (Message anmK15_ON = 1) detected and the debouncing again
released.
It can be used for error suppression of each error either the analog or digital signal K15
be used. It can also be any error regardless of K15 (ie also in
Trailing) are treated. (See data set parameter error per 6.4.2)
All rights reserved by Robert Bosch GmbH, including in cases of proprietary rights applications. All rights of disposal such as copying and passing on to us.
19 April 2002 Error Handling - Fehlervorentprellung DS / ESA
Page 6-4 EDC15 +
Y S01 281/120 - VG2
0 bosch
6.3 Data set parameters for each error path
Description
Environmental Condition 1 (message number)
Environmental Condition 2
Environmental Condition 3
Environmental Condition 4
Environmental Condition 5
Starting value debounce counter for debounced error entry
Starting value debounce Error Clear
Priority
The following error memory parameters are be applied separately for each error path:
Parameter
FBWS .. UB1
FBWS .. UB2
FBWS .. UB3
FBWS .. UB4
FBWS .. UB5
FBWS .. FLC
FBWS .. HLC
FBWS .. PRI
6.3.1 Environmental conditions
The first time the error entry, the current data of the applied environmental conditions
(= Record FBWS ... UB1 to FBWS ... UB5) is read, and normalized to the error memory
taken. A change in a defect entry has no effect on the
Environmental conditions. That is, stay the once registered environmental conditions to obtain
the fault memory entry is deleted.
The environmental conditions to be applied are selected via message numbers (see
Appendix "list of environmental conditions").
Application Note:
These environmental conditions are only the custom diagnosis (not for OBDII
Tester). It should therefor only the message numbers be used h0F00.
All rights reserved by Robert Bosch GmbH, including in cases of proprietary rights applications. All rights of disposal such as copying and passing on to us.
DS / ESA Error Handling - Data set parameters for each error path 19 April 2002
0 bosch
EDC15 +
Y S01 281/120 - VG2
Page 6-5
6.3.2 debounce counter for error entry
First occurrence error (FLC 2 applied)
FLC
2
1
FLC
2
1
Next cycle over the next driving cycle
Start
FLC
2
1
Error
(DC)
Engine
FLC
2
1
Start Error, DC
debounced
Entry
Engine
FLC
2
1
re prov entry
Start
FLC
2
1
DC Error Engine
FLC
2
1
Start DC Engine
FLC
2
1
Start DC,
Entry
deleted.
Engine
Start Error k.Fehl.
(DC)
Error from engine
FLC
2
1
Start DC Engine Start Error, DC
debounced
Entry
Engine
Start DC error, engine off
debounced
Entry
Figure UEBEFB04: Counter for debounced entry FBWS .. FLC
For each path, the number of parameters in Entprellzyklen FBWS can .. FLC for debounced entry
be defined. If an error path finally broken (Vorentprellung) is, it is provisionally
stored in the fault memory and the Eintragsentprellzhler (byte 4 in the corresponding entry FSP)
set to the value FBWS .. FLC. Within the same DC's changes the state of the
Then error entry, no more (Only Fehlerzustandsbits, frequency counter and sporadic bits
will be constantly updated). At each subsequent DC the entry counter is decremented.
When the counter reaches 0, without the fault path in a further DC finally broken was so
the error entry is deleted completely. If the error path in one of the other DC
finally broken (Vorentprellung) before the entry counter reaches 0, the error entry is
debounced stored in the fault memory. That means: If the error occurs in at least 2 DC's
within FBWS .. FLC DC's on, the error is entered debounced.
Application Note:
If FBWS ... FLC applied to a value of 0 as is done in "Permanently broken"
(Vorentprellung) classification, an immediate debounced error entry in the fault memory.
If FBWS ... FLC applied to a value of 255, so no error entry of the path is done in
Fault memory. The replacement function is performed when it is applied in label FBWE ... T.
All rights reserved by Robert Bosch GmbH, including in cases of proprietary rights applications. All rights of disposal such as copying and passing on to us.
19 April 2002 Error Handling - Data set parameters for each error path DS / ESA
Page 6-6 EDC15 +
Y S01 281/120 - VG2
0 bosch
After CARB definition, there is a DC motor, engine operation test of the respective error
and engine. It is therefore not permissible immediately after ignition on the second DC a bug
immediately to delete it, so should the starting value of FLCs are set to at least 2.
This is the deletion of a not confirmatory error only at the beginning of the da-
up following DC instead (at least after the running of the 2.DC).
The lamp is however controlled in the second DC even during operation (after
Eintragsentprellung) if the fault confirmed.
6.3.3 debounce Error Clear
1 Cycle (debounced registration) 2.Fahrzylus
HLC HLC HLC 3 Driving cycle
Debounced
Entry, DC
HLC
No error Error Engine StartDC error
no error
HLC 5 Driving cycle
No error Engine StartDC engine
no error
HLC 6 Driving cycle 4 Driving cycle
Failure to start, DC
no error
HLC 7 Driving cycle
No error Engine StartDC
no error
HLC 8 Driving cycle
Engine StartDC engine
no error
HLC 9 Driving cycle
StartDC
no error
HLC HLC start value = 0
Engine StartDC
cured no error
HLC
Engine Failure to start engine
No error again
registered debounced
HLC
1 Driving cycle 2 Driving cycle
3 Driving cycle
Debounced error error
Entry, DC finally in operation
geheiltdefekt
Engine Start,
Error
Error
operational
cured
Engine Start engine failure from
No error finally
defective
Figure UEBEFB05: Counter for debounced healing FBWS .. HLC
For each path, the number of healing cycles in parameter FBWS .. HLC can be defined for healing
be. The healing counter (byte 5 in the corresponding entry FSP) remains at debounced entries so
long on the start value FBWS .. HLC how the error path in the Vorentprellung finally broken
is detected. If the error path is not defective, will be recognized in each DC of the counters
reduced by one. Achieved the healing counter reaches the value 0, then the error as is "cured"
entered. If the error occurs again, the counter is re-initialized with a starting value
(Immediate re-entry debounced). That is, for error recovery of the error path must
FBWS .. HLC DC's have been continuously not defective.
All rights reserved by Robert Bosch GmbH, including in cases of proprietary rights applications. All rights of disposal such as copying and passing on to us.
DS / ESA Error Handling - Data set parameters for each error path 19 April 2002
0 bosch
EDC15 +
Y S01 281/120 - VG2
Page 6-7
Application Notes:
If FBWS ... HLC applied to a value of 0, in case of "healed in operation"
(Vorentprellung) Classification immediate error correction of the path in the error memory (lamp
off). The healing counter in the FSP entry will remain set at initial value of 0 to 1, as the error
debounced defective.
If FBWS ... HLC applied to a value of 255, so there is no error recovery. This means
the error light will stay on until about the diagnostic interface of the whole fault
is deleted.
After OBDII 3 DC for healing are required. In order to prevent the lamp in the MIL 3
DC goes out (before engine off) should the label FBWS ... HLC are applied to 4.
6.3.4 Priority and Readiness
For each error path its priority can be defined using FBWS .. PRI. With the priority of a
Error can affect the reaction in full error memory and the type of
Define lamp control (MIL, SYS lamp). Higher-priority error displace at full
Lower-priority fault memory error.
The priority is encoded in the two least significant bits of FBWS ... PRI as follows:
FBWS PRI ...
xxxx xx00
xxxx xx01
xxxx xx10
xxxx xx11
Priority
0 LOWEST
1
2
3 MAXIMUM
emission-relevant
NO
NO
YES
YES
MIL drive + OBD diagnostic
(If debouncing is done)
NO
NO
YES
YES
In addition to the MIL lamp is a lamp system is available. Whether it is driven can
be applied also on FBWS ... PRI:
FBWS .. PRI Drive SYS lamp
(If debouncing is done)
xxxx x0xx
xxxx x1xx
NO
YES
All rights reserved by Robert Bosch GmbH, including in cases of proprietary rights applications. All rights of disposal such as copying and passing on to us.
19 April 2002 Error Handling - Data set parameters for each error path DS / ESA
Page 6-8 EDC15 +
Y S01 281/120 - VG2
0 bosch
6.4 Data set parameters for each error
To determine the Vorentprellzeiten or number of events for each error a
Parameter block defines constructed as follows:
Parameter Name Unit Function
FBWE .. A microseconds /
Number
Debouncing for final
defective
Must with event-triggered errors
be administered in a 0, if the
-Supervision only once per
Driving cycle.
FBWE .. B
FBWE .. T
LOW byte
FBWE .. T
HIGH byte
FBWE .. V
FBWE .. C
microseconds /
Number
-
-
-
-
Debouncing for operational
cured
Bit mask for
Error Description
VAG Code - Error
VAG Code - Fault
CARB code by SAE1979
see Section 6.4.1
Memory code: reading the
Error memory via KW71
Memory code: reading the
Error memory via KW71
Memory code: reading the
Error memory via OBD Scan Tools
with word address 33hex
6.4.1 debouncing for entry and healing
In Applikaton of records must distinguish between time-and event-driven errors
be. In timed errors corresponds to the entry of the absolute time at
event-driven mistakes of the number of error messages of this error.
6.4.2 Error type (fbwE.. T Low byte)
Bit No. State function
0
01d
01h
1
0
1
02d
02h
1
0
time-controlled;
An error has for a time
are detected continuously, thus
the classification on finally broken
takes place. The review is carried out of time
only if an error is a test
Result reports!
event-driven;
An error has for a number of
Messages of error test
be reported continuously, thus
the finally broken Classification is.
no fault storage;
Is not for this error
Fault memory performed. The
Vorentprellung and the replacement function
takes place as applied.
Fault memory
MUST NOT BE CHANGED!
MUST TO TYPE OF TEST ERROR
(CALL FREQUENCY) BEWARE!
IS ONLY BY SW UNCHANGEABLE!
be applied
All rights reserved by Robert Bosch GmbH, including in cases of proprietary rights applications. All rights of disposal such as copying and passing on to us.
DS / ESA Error Handling - Data set parameters for each error 19 April 2002
0
Bit No.
bosch
State function
EDC15 +
Y S01 281/120 - VG2
Page 6-9
2
04d
04h
1
3
08d
08h
0
1
0
not self-extinguishing (By Warm Up
Cycle);
An error from the error memory
not automatically deleted, but after
Expiration of the clear counter for CARB
invisible.
self-extinguishing (By Warm Up Cycle)
MIL drive (flashing) even then,
when errors finally broken classified
is
MIL-control when errors in
Error memory according FBWS .. PRI
in the wake there is no
Vorentprellung an error and thus
no error storage.
The error is not permanently damaged
but also not healed! There is also
no replacement function !
Treatment in the wake as in
Normal operation
No replacement function on these
Error, that is the fault memory
occurs normally, but the driving software
do not get to see the error
All replacement functions to this error
be performed
At low voltage terminal 15
4.5 V <anmK15 <anwK15_H_U
there is no debouncing of an error
and therefore no fault storage.
Error is not defective but not
healed! There is also no
Replacement function !
The error analysis is carried out as in
Driving.
A possible State "Final
defective " shall in the next
Taken over the driving cycle and remains on until
get to the next test.
The error is considered in the next cycle
but not until tested if the test
is made.
The error has the State "Intact" at the
Beginning the next drive cycle.
be applied
For all errors of the path should
this bit are applied equally,
otherwise inherits the next error bit
from the error of the path-Ersteintrages.
4
16d
10h
1
be applied
For all errors of the path should
this bit is
be applied, otherwise inherits the
next error from the bit error of the
Path Ersteintrages.
be applied
0
5
32d
20h
0
6
64d
40h
1
1 be applied
be applied
The debouncing of the error
depending on the analog K15
Evaluation (see chapters
"Inputs", "Error Handling
- Follow-detection ").
0
7
128d
80h
1 be applied for tests in the wake
are performed and the
Replacement function in the next cycle
to take place.
For all errors of the path should
this bit is
be applied, otherwise inherits the
next error from the bit error of the
Path Ersteintrages.
0
All rights reserved by Robert Bosch GmbH, including in cases of proprietary rights applications. All rights of disposal such as copying and passing on to us.
19 April 2002 Error Handling - Data set parameters for each error DS / ESA
Page 6-10 EDC15 +
Y S01 281/120 - VG2
0 bosch
The monitoring of the error can be hidden in the function of the Terminal 15 voltage.
If the corresponding bit of the parameter set FBWE .... T is no Vorentprellung and therefore
no error entry and no replacement reaction. (See also "Delay - Low voltage K15")
FBWE .... T
x0x0xxxx
x0x1xxxx
x1x0xxxx
x1x1xxxx
Error suppression at low K15
Voltage (anmK15 <anwK15_H_U)
NO
NO
YES
YES
Error suppression when detected
Follow-on dimK15
NO
YES
NO
YES
The high byte of the label FBWE ... T is used for application of fault diagnosis in the function
used (see also section Error handling - memory codes).
All rights reserved by Robert Bosch GmbH, including in cases of proprietary rights applications. All rights of disposal such as copying and passing on to us.
DS / ESA Error Handling - Data set parameters for each error 19 April 2002
0 bosch
EDC15 +
Y S01 281/120 - VG2
Page 6-11
6.4.3 Memory Codes
6.4.3.1 VAG codes - FSP read with VAG Tester - KW71
Each error will be applied three independent bytes as text pointer for the tester
assigned (error location and error type).
In VAG-Mode (address word 01) is the 2-byte error on the error parameter label
determined FBWE ... V and 1 byte on the type of error (fbwE. .. T / high byte).
"Read error memory" Through the VAG tester function, the fault memory of the SG read
be. For this purpose, three data bytes in the ISO block (07) are transmitted per fault memory entry,
which are constructed as follows:
Error Code HIGH
15
Error Code LOW
8 7
Error type
0 7 0
Error code
With the error code, the component or the function is described, which is defective, for example:
"PEDAL TRANSDUCER". For this code (administrable records: FBWE ... V) is in the tester a
Plaintext generated, which is output on the display. However, the memory code is not set to 0
be applied, otherwise the "output end" appears on the VAG tester.
Error type
Bit_7 in the state of the error that is static (0), or sporadically (1) is stored on the tester
by means of "/ SP" is displayed at the right edge in the second line of the display.
In Bit_0-6, a code is stored (administrable record: High byte of FBWE ... T) over the
Reason for the error information out there, such as: "SIGNAL TOO BIG ". From this code is in the tester
a plaintext generated which is given on the second line of the display.
Note:
In VAG codes (from ... FBWE V) already generate two-line displays on the tester (usually in
VAG Code converted CARB codes), should the error type (high byte of the label FBWE ... T) only
to $ 23 (= no display) are applied to avoid text overlapping.
Example for display on VAG tester:
Pedal position sensor
Signal too large
Attention!
/ SP
Are in a Error path several Set error's, so be on the
Tester output according to many mistakes.
All rights reserved by Robert Bosch GmbH, including in cases of proprietary rights applications. All rights of disposal such as copying and passing on to us.
19 April 2002 Error Handling - Data set parameters for each error DS / ESA
Page 6-12 EDC15 +
Y S01 281/120 - VG2
0 bosch
6.4.3.2 CARB Codes - FSP foreign. with OBD II scan tool with word Addr 33
In OBD mode (address word 33, Mode03 and 07), the error code from the error parameter is
Label FBWE ... C determined. (See Interface Description from 08/04/97 VAG 1551 and SAE J2012)
This error word consists of 4 nibbles (= 16 bit) the first nibble of a classification of the errors
performs in classes. The last 3 nibbles are the actual code in BCD representation (0-999).
See also: DRAFT SAE J1979 Revised for ISO 14230-4 Mode $ 03 Request Emission-Related
Powertrain Diagnostic Trouble Codes
It issued $ 03 only emissions-related faults in fashion, ie the corresponding error paths
need with priority 2 or 3 (fbwSPRI. .. is then greater than 1) are applied.
Example of the construction of a CARB conformal error codes (Throttle Position Sensor Reference
Voltage Error p1219):
Vehicle system
(P = Powertrain)
CARB code
Application binary value
Application value of Hex
P
00
1
Diagnostic code
(0-3)
1
01
2
0010
2
Error code
(0-999)
1
0001
1
9
1001
9
All rights reserved by Robert Bosch GmbH, including in cases of proprietary rights applications. All rights of disposal such as copying and passing on to us.
DS / ESA Error Handling - Data set parameters for each error 19 April 2002
0 bosch
EDC15 +
Y S01 281/120 - VG2
Page 6-13
6.5 Error memory management
Up to eight errors in an error path summarized (see Appendix E). A fault is
defined by the error in the error path, where 0 means intact and one defective.
The example of the speed encoder, this looks as follows: The sensor speed sensor (DZG) is the
Associated error path fboSDZG. He is on static plausibility (fbbEDZG_S = Bit 6)
dynamic plausibility (fbbEDZG_D = Bit 5), plausibility with the boost pressure (fbbEDZG_L =
Bit 4) and overspeed (fbbEDZG_U bit = 1) monitors. If an error (= an error) in a
Error path set and the error as finally broken classified, an error entry in the
Error memory. There can be a maximum fault memory entry per error path. That
For example, the error fbbEDZG_D set "speed encoder dynamically broken", it is the
Error path fboSDZG saved. If the error occurs healed and instead the error
fbbEDZG_U (overspeed) on, then there is no further entry, but the already existing
is updated.
The fault debouncing starts after Steuergerteinitialisierung always with the condition "no
Error exists ". That is, when the control device reset is always the same condition exists.
Error conditions from previous trips have no more impact.
Exception
About the T parameter can be applied, that the last test result from a previous
Driving cycle is visible to the replacement function. (Application: tracking tests)
For each fault path a olda FBOs .. exists with eight Fehlerzustandsbits and a olda fboO ..
with eight status bits that provide information on whether a monitoring since "ignition on" already
is carried out (bit = 1), i.e. the error was once gutgemeldet or is permanently damaged. Not
Unused bits are initialized to 1. In addition, collection are olda's (path error: fboS_00,
FBOs .. 02, ..., path tested: fboO_00, fboO .. 02, ...) available in which 16 per olda error paths
are combined (1 bit per path in the order of the paths see Appendix E).
All rights reserved by Robert Bosch GmbH, including in cases of proprietary rights applications. All rights of disposal such as copying and passing on to us.
19 April 2002 Error Handling - Error memory management DS / ESA
Page 6-14 EDC15 +
Y S01 281/120 - VG2
0 bosch
Fault conditions in the fault memory:
final defect detection
Not path
in the FSP
registered
after Fehlervorentprellung
1
provisionally
registered:
- Environments
saved
- MIL-out
- Diagnostic Mode 7
Error not confirmed
during Eintragsentprellung
delete
on WUC
direct error
entry
Error
confirmed
during
Entry
debouncing
3
cured
registered:
- Environments
saved
- Diagnostic Mode 3
2
Error disappeared,
Heilungsentprellung
expired
debounced
registered:
- Environments
saved
- MIL lamp system to
- Diagnostic Mode 3
Reported error again
Figure UEBEFB03: Error states
Condition 1 (Provisional error):
After an error by the Vorentprellung as finally broken was classified, he is in
Fault memory stored as a temporary error with the associated environmental conditions.
Condition 2 (Debounced error):
If this is confirmed a provisional registered error in further error checks, then it is
debounced entered. In this state, the associated error light turns on and by OBDII errors
then the error on the diagnostic to the OBDII tester (generic scan tool) is reported.
Condition 3 (healed error):
If the error no longer occurred long enough he will be healed. The indicator lamp is not
more controlled (for this error) and the error waiting for extinction by "warm up" cycles.
In this condition, the error is still visible on the diagnostic interface. The diagram is
the condition for the diagnosis of the OBDII tester indicated. For the VAG tester all
States (1-3) reported.
All rights reserved by Robert Bosch GmbH, including in cases of proprietary rights applications. All rights of disposal such as copying and passing on to us.
DS / ESA Error Handling - Error memory management 19 April 2002
0 bosch
EDC15 +
Y S01 281/120 - VG2
Page 6-15
6.5.1 Driving Cycle (DC)
As Entprellzyklus comes the "Driving Cycle" (DC) used:
The DC is determined separately for each path, ie any error of the path must state
have tested. (Collective olda fboO_ .. or path olda fboO ...)
A DC is reached when all the errors testing of a path were executed at least once
and no Fehlervorentprellung for one of these error checks stopped running or an error in the path
occurred.
After a DC ignition is first reached for a path. After a path reaching the DC
has the Error debounce counter are updated. Thereafter, the state of the DC to change
Off no longer the ignition. That is, it can per "trip" (per basic initialization of the
SG) only one DC can be achieved.
6.5.2 Warm Up Cycle (WUC)
The counter for the self-quenching are decremented only when reaching a warm-up cycle.
This is detected if for "ignition on" AND Once the waiting time fbwVERW_SZ the
Water temperature has increased by at least fbwVERW_DT AND the value fbwVERW_ET
has reached (fbmWUC = 255). If this is the case, for all faults, for which for the debouncing
Healing has expired (Bit_6 the status is cleared), decrements the counter for self-quenching.
If this counter reaches zero, the corresponding error is removed from the error memory,
but only under the condition that the self-quenching is not disabled by FBWE .. T.
Any existing related Freeze Frame is also deleted. With a defective
Water temperature sensor can not warm up cycle can be achieved.
6.5.3 General data set parameters
The following parameters are defined for the general administration of:
Parameter
fbwVERW_ET
fbwVERW_DT
fbwVERW_SZ
fbwVERW_ZB
fbwVERW_LI
Function
Warm Up Cycle final temperature
Warm Up Cycle differential temperature
Warm Up Cycle blocking time after initialization (time at which the detection of the
Is delayed starting temperature after ignition on)
Time base for cycle management
Initial value for the self-quenching (value, with the clear counter during
is initialized current entry value is in realization of present
meaningless, only needs to be> 0.)
Starting value for the self-quenching (value, with the clear counter at entprelltem
Is initialized fault memory entry) This value indicates how many WUC's
are necessary for a healed fault memory entry from the
Fault memory must be erased.
fbwVERW_LS
With the switch cowVAR_OBD (bit 0), one can apply if a MIL lamp is available:
cowVAR_OBD (bit 0) = 1 MIL lamp available
cowVAR_OBD (bit 0) = 0 MIL lamp is not available, the SYS lamp is additionally
controls if the MIL lamp should be activated.
All rights reserved by Robert Bosch GmbH, including in cases of proprietary rights applications. All rights of disposal such as copying and passing on to us.
19 April 2002 Error Handling - Error memory management DS / ESA
Page 6-16 EDC15 +
Y S01 281/120 - VG2
0 bosch
Readiness
In SG, there are the following emission-related components that are monitored:





Review the overall system
Test fuel system
Zndaussetzerberwachung
Catalyst
Exhaust gas recirculation
=Comprehensive component monitoring
=Fuel system monitoring
= Misfire monitoring
= Catalyst monitoring
= EGR system monitoring
Each component can be assigned to several Readinessbits and error paths in SG. Readiness
a component (= Readinessbit set) is the deadline set in the component
fbwRDY_Cnt applied number of DC reached, ie all members of the Readiness error tests
must be done as often. The result of the fault test is not relevant. Error paths that the
Can prevent an emission related test path must exhaust-relevant (priority 2 and 3)
be applied and assigned to a Readinessbit. This ensures that the MIL
Lamp comes on and Readiness is achieved.
The allocation error path - Readinessbit done with FBWS ... PRI:
Record
FBWS PRI ...
0000 0xxx
1000 0xxx
0100 0xxx
0010 0xxx
0001 0xxx
0000 1xxx
Path belongs to: DatensatzOLDA
Bit Pos CARB number of paths
Olda
Number
tested
fboO_COM_T
fboO_FUE_T
fboO_MIS_T
fboO_CAT_T
fboO_EGR_T
no OBD path
"Comprehensive components"
"Fuel system"
"Misfire monitoring"
"Catalyst monitoring"
"EGR system monitoring"
fbwRBP_COM
fbwRBP_FUE
fbwRBP_MIS
fbwRBP_CAT
fbwRBP_EGR
fboO_COM_P
fboO_FUE_P
fboO_MIS_P
fboO_CAT_P
fboO_EGR_P
It is possible to simultaneously assign a path several Readinessbits. This can be, for example, the
Ensuring compliance with statutory requirement to set Readiness for continuous tests only after
Readiness of the non-continuous tests was achieved.
Readinessbits that were not associated with a path can be automatically when not in the diagnosis
support reported. About the OLDAS (fboO_. .. _P, fboO_ ... _T), for each Readinessbit the
Number of the corresponding paths and the number of paths corresponding tested are determined.
(The number of associated paths is determined once at the initialization).
The messages fbmCPID1AB (Mode 01 - Pid 01 - Data A and Data B) and fbmCPID1CD (Carb
Fashion 01 - Pid 01 - Data C Data and D) show the Readinessbits to the way they have the diagnosis
be issued. With fbwRBP_ ... you can apply the bit position within the display
(See chapter Diagnostics - parameter identification).
In addition to the messages fbmCPID1AB and fbmCPID1CD the readiness information is also
displayed in the Message xcmRdBits to display on VAG tester. The message is only
updated when the diagnosis to the tester is activated. The number of relevant OBD error
is in the message xcmOBD_ANZ available that also updates only with active diagnosis
will.
All rights reserved by Robert Bosch GmbH, including in cases of proprietary rights applications. All rights of disposal such as copying and passing on to us.
DS / ESA Error Handling - Error memory management 19 April 2002
0 bosch
EDC15 +
Y S01 281/120 - VG2
Page 6-17
xcmRdBits:
Bit7Bit6
compreh.fuel
system components
Bit 5
misfire
monitoring
Bit 4
catalyst
monitoring
Bit 3
EGR
system
Bit 2
unoccupied,
always 0
Bit1
unoccupied,
always 0
Bit0
unoccupied,
always 0
Reaches 0 ... Readinessbit
Not reached 1 ... Readinessbit
In addition to the Readinessbits status bits are determined and in the olda fbmRyBits
displayed:
Bit7Bit6
compreh.fuel
system components
Bit 5
misfire
monitoring
Bit 4
catalyst
monitoring
Bit 3
EGR
system
Bit 2
unoccupied,
always 0
Bit1
unoccupied,
always 0
Bit0
unoccupied,
always 0
0 ... all belonging to this Readinessbit paths has already been tested during this DC
1 ... there have not been tested all belonging to this Readinessbit paths.
Warning:
For the status bit fbmRyBit.3 EGR system monitoring, in addition to the test status as the relevant
applied error paths, two other release conditions for setting the status to tested
necessary. The monitoring of the control deviation aroEueb.2 must for the applicable time
arwRdyARUe permanently released, the exhaust gas recirculation for the time aroAUS_B arwRdyARau
have been permanently disabled. These conditions are the only initializes
SG reset. Visible are armAGRstat in the message, bit 0 for monitoring, bit
1 for deactivation of exhaust gas recirculation.
With the first condition, the Readiness to be only achieved if the SG long enough
in the monitoring area was to be able to recognize an ARF deviation.
The second condition Readiness should be long delayed until HFM / LDF
Plausibility detection was possible.
For each Readinesbit in the EEPROM is a 2-bit counter carried (= DC a counter
Readinessbits). The counters are summarized in the Message fbmRDYNES.
Assignment of olda fbmRDYNES:
Bit15 Bit14 Bit13 Bit12 Bit11 Bit10 Bit9 Bit8
00000010
EGR system
monitoring
Bit 7 Bit 6
10
catalyst
monitoring
Bit 5 Bit 4
10
misfire
monitoring
Bit 3 Bit 2
10
fuel system
monitoring
Bit1 bit0
10
comprehens.
comp. monit.
These counters are set to 0 when deleting the error memory. Each time the a
The corresponding 2-bit counter is readiness bit associated status from 1 to 0 increases. The
Counter is hereby limited to 3. When the counter reaches a value greater than a value which
in fbwRDY_Cnt (Coded as well as fbmRDYNES) is applied, then the Readinessbit is set.
If an error is registered debounced, so the counter is set to the value 3 (so that
ensures that, when of driven MIL lamp also Readiness is reported).
Application Note:
After sensor change, the fault memory must wait deleted and Readiness! (Only
then it can be determined that, for example error no longer exists).
All rights reserved by Robert Bosch GmbH, including in cases of proprietary rights applications. All rights of disposal such as copying and passing on to us.
19 April 2002 Error Handling - Error memory management DS / ESA
Page 6-18 EDC15 +
Y S01 281/120 - VG2
0 bosch
6.6 Fault memory
The error memory consists of up to five error entries and a freeze frame. A
Fault memory entry is structured as follows:
Byte Description
No.
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
Path number (see Appendix F)
Status
Of fault current
Debounced error type
Debounce counter for Statusbit_6 start value in FBWS ... FLC
Debounce counter for error recovery start value in FBWS ... HLC
Counter for self-quenching starting value in fbwVERW_LS
Frequency counter
Environmental condition 1appl. by FBWS ... UB1
Environmental condition 2appl. by FBWS ... UB2
Environmental condition 3appl. by FBWS ... UB3
Environmental condition 4appl. by FBWS ... UB4
Environmental condition 5appl. by FBWS ... UB5
Influence by
Application
NO
YES (Bit_0, 1.4)
NO
NO
NO
NO
NO
NO
YES
YES
YES
YES
YES
Olda
fboFS.PFD
fboFS.STA
fboFS.FAA
fboFS.FAE
fboFS.FLZ
fboFS.HLZ
fboFS.SLZ
fboFS.HFZ
fboFS.UB1
fboFS.UB2
fboFS.UB3
fboFS.UB4
fboFS.UB5
Status (1-byte)
In this byte, relevant control bits are added for error handling.
The structure of this byte is as follows:
7 6 4 3 2 1 0
Bit Value Meaning
0
1
1
1
Exhaust Relevant error (Priority 2 or 3 applied, FBWS .. PRI)
For classification of an error as finally broken is used to trigger the MIL
(Flashing), regardless of the status of the AVR. This is for catalyst
dangerous error provided and can be applied by means of 3 FBWE .. T bit.
Errors are currently available, is set when errors than finally broken is recognized
or cleared when the error is classified as cured in operation
Sporadic error exists is set if the frequency counter is greater than 1
will.
Error is not self-extinguishing can be administered using FBWE .. T bit 2.
unused
is set after debouncing has expired or deleted if
Heilungsentprellung has expired. Activation of the MIL or SYS lamp when
applied by FBWS .. PRI.
All errors in byte 2 (fault current) of the FSP are at the beginning of the next
Driving cycle to the state of "final defective " set if the status bit 2 (error
currently available) is also set. This bit can be administered using FBWE .. T bit 7
be.
2
3
4
5
6
1
1
1
1
7 1
All rights reserved by Robert Bosch GmbH, including in cases of proprietary rights applications. All rights of disposal such as copying and passing on to us.
DS / ESA Error Handling - Error memory 19 April 2002
0 bosch
EDC15 +
Y S01 281/120 - VG2
Page 6-19
Of fault current (byte 2)
Last error condition (error bits) of the error path. Is not preserved even if path more
is defective. Will be updated if path is again defective. About the diagnosis, only the
Error whose bits are set in this byte output.
Of error softened (byte 3)
Is a copy of the error path of error (bit) s if this the first time faulty as final
is classified and stored in the fault memory.
Debounce counter for Statusbit_6 (byte 4)
Counter with the debouncing is performed when the fault entry. This is used as long as a
Fault memory entry is currently registered. Initialization FBWS .. FLC.
Debounce counter for error recovery (Byte_5)
Contains the count of the debouncing for error recovery. After debouncing Bit_6 is
(Error debounced) of the status deleted. The counter is initialized with FBWS .. HLC when an error
the first time is entered debounced. After an initialization always occurs when the
Error occurs again.
Counter for self-quenching (Byte_6)
Contains the count of self-quenching. With the value of the counter is fbwVERW_LS
initialized when the error path is entered debounced and then whenever the
Error path is currently broken. The counter is decremented when a warm up cycle is reached
AND when the debounce counter for Statusbit_6 AND Error correction are zero. When it reaches the value 0,
the error entry is removed from the error memory, if not by the parameter
FBWE .. T (Bit_2) is locked. If the deletion is locked, the error of the tester OBDII
invisible.
Frequency counter (Byte_7)
Is incremented each time a fault in the operation of cured finally broken changes.
He has an upper limit to the value 255.
Environmental conditions 1-5 (Byte_8 - 12)
These are when first entering an error when the error as finally broken
is classified, read, standardized and stored in the fault memory. The environmental conditions
are not updated when changes in the error path. That is, they correspond to the conditions at
initial recognition of the fault damaged as final, so the third Byte an error entry
(Fault-bounced).
All rights reserved by Robert Bosch GmbH, including in cases of proprietary rights applications. All rights of disposal such as copying and passing on to us.
19 April 2002 Error Handling - Error memory DS / ESA
Page 6-20 EDC15 +
Y S01 281/120 - VG2
0 bosch
6.6.1 Behaviour at full fault memory
If the error memory is full and a new error as finally broken recognized its error path is
not yet in the error memory, the fault memory after low-priority errors is
searched. If such an entry is found, it is removed. At the time
Order to obtain the registered error upright, the following
Moved up error messages and entered the new error at the end.
6.6.2 Freeze frame
The freeze frame is an applicable comprehensive set of environmental conditions. About the
OBDII Diagnostic Tester (SAE generic scan tool) can only read these environmental conditions
(not the 5 per custom fault memory entry). By means of fbwFFRM_01 - 15
can be applied at the freeze frame up to 15 environmental conditions. The environmental conditions
be selected via message numbers, where for OBDII only the message numbers h0f00
should be used (some other normalization to the diagnostic interface).
Allocation of freeze frames:
The freeze frame is occupied when the first time a fault path with priority 2 or 3 final
is defective and stored in the fault memory.
About the variant switch cowVAR_OBD can be applied whether the freeze frame for the
Diagnosis only becomes visible when the error has confirmed (debounced or cured entered,
cowVAR_OBD bit 7 = 1) or is visible as soon as the freeze frame is used (cowVAR_OBD
Bit 7 = 0).
Is the Freeze frame with an error path with priority 2 proves he can from an error path
be re-assigned priority 3. If the belonging to a freeze frame
Delete fault memory entry from the error memory, the freeze frame will be erased.
It may happen, therefore, that the fault memory is almost full and no valid freezeframe
exists. The next occurring fault with priority 2 or 3 will then seize him again.
Construction:
Byte Description
No.
0
1
2
...
16
Path number of the error path (see Appendix E) = FFH when unoccupied
Error type (copy of byte 3 of the associated error memory entry)
1 Environmental condition
...
15 Environmental condition
All rights reserved by Robert Bosch GmbH, including in cases of proprietary rights applications. All rights of disposal such as copying and passing on to us.
DS / ESA Error Handling - Error memory 19 April 2002
0 bosch
EDC15 +
Y S01 281/120 - VG2
Page 6-21
Replacement value treatment for Freeze Frame and diagnosis:
In OBDII law it is required that as environmental conditions (freeze frame and live values) the
actual values, not substitute values are used. If only used replacement values
, so this must be clearly distinguished from valid values. The analog value acquisition
holds the last valid value before an SRC error. After the Vorentprellung is the
Replacement value is specified. Which belongs to such analog value message has therefore always
Values which do not differ from current sensor values. To the OBDII requirement still
functionality, can for the message numbers 0000h - 0011h applied a special treatment
be. If the associated path for message number (assigned by fbwPIDPF ..) SRC low
or SRC high is defective, a instead of the current members of the Message number Message
administrable value stored. The value to be stored can be used for SRC low (fbwEWLO_..) And
SRC high (fbwEWHI_..) Are applied separately for each message number.
fbwPIDPF00
.....
fbwPIDPF11 (hex)
Path number for PID 00 .. 11h (Message numbers 0000h - 0011h).
If the path number applied to 255, it is always the current PID
Value is stored.
Replacement value at SRC low error in the path fbwPIDPF .. for associated PID
(Message number)
fbwEWLO_00
....
fbwEWLO_11 (hex)
fbwEWHI_00Ersatzwert at SRC high error in the path fbwPIDPF .. for its PID
...... (Message number)
fbwEWHI_11 (hex)
PID: see chapter "Parameter Identification".
All rights reserved by Robert Bosch GmbH, including in cases of proprietary rights applications. All rights of disposal such as copying and passing on to us.
19 April 2002 Error Handling - Error memory DS / ESA
Page 6-22 EDC15 +
Y S01 281/120 - VG2
0 bosch
6.7 Activation of the MIL - lamp
The MIL lamp (ehmFMIL) is activated under the following conditions (fbmMIL):
Value range of the olda fbmMIL (bit-coded):
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
= An emission-related fault (fbwS.. PRI.1 = 1) is registered debounced in the fault memory.
= An emission-related, catalyst hazardous error (fbwE.. Bit_3 T) is
finally broken (Flashing lamp)
= Continuous light (fbwT_MIMAX = infinite)
= Lamp test 1 (n <fbwT_MIDRZ)
= Lamp test 2 (n> = fbwT_MIDRZ and t <fbwT_MITES)
= Delay time expired fbwT_MIVER
= Lamp
= Not used
The MIL lamp test is used for visual check of the functionality of the driver.
It takes place after "ignition on" and is as follows be applied:
Name
fbwT_MIMAX
fbwT_MIDRZ
fbwT_MITES
FbwT_MIVER
FbwT_MIBLK
Description
Duration of the lamp testing, and if maximum value is automatically shut down after
Exceeding fbwT_MIDRZ and sequence of fbwT_MITES
Speed threshold
Duration of the lamp test after exceeding of fbwT_MIDRZ, the lamp is
also switched off when the time has not expired fbwT_MIMAX.
If a emission-related error, the activation of the MIL is delayed
around the time fbwT_MIVER (see olda fbmMIL).
Flashing frequency emissions related, catalyst hazardous error (half
Period)
Is a catalyst hazardous faults are active (MIL flashes), so has the demand from an external
Control unit to control the MIL no effect in all other cases, the ext.
Requirements and the requirements of the EDC ORs.
The gearbox control unit has the opportunity to request a MIL request via CAN (RCOS
Message mrmCANMIL).
All rights reserved by Robert Bosch GmbH, including in cases of proprietary rights applications. All rights of disposal such as copying and passing on to us.
DS / ESA Error handling - Control of MIL - lamp 19 April 2002
0 bosch
EDC15 +
Y S01 281/120 - VG2
Page 6-23
6.8 Control of the system lamp
The diagnostic lamp (ehmFDIA) is activated under the following conditions (fbmDIAL):
Value range of the Olda fbmDIAL (bit-coded):
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
= An error (at FBWS .. PRI - bit 2 = 1) is entered in the fault memory and debounced
not healed in the status (HLC = 0)
= Not used
= Continuous light (fbwT_DIMAX = infinite)
= Lamp test 1 (n <fbwT_DIDRZ)
= Lamp test 2 (n> = fbwT_DIDRZ and t <fbwT_DITES)
= Delay time expired fbwT_DIVER
= Lamp
= If using cowSYS_LMP a lighting system is applied (OR of
DIA and Vorglhlampe) AND the glow time in
Operating condition is preheating.
The lamp test is used for visual check of the functionality of the driver. He
takes place after "ignition on" and is as follows be applied:
Name
fbwT_DIMAX
fbwT_DIDRZ
fbwT_DITES
fbwT_DIVER
fbwT_DIBLK
Description
Duration of the lamp testing, and if maximum value is automatically shut down after
Exceeding fbwT_DIDRZ and sequence of fbwT_DITES
Speed threshold
Duration of the lamp test after exceeding of fbwT_DIDRZ, the lamp is
also switched off when the time has not expired fbwT_DIMAX.
If an error (at FBWS .. PRI - bit 2 = 1) debounced stored in the fault memory,
Thus, the driving of the lamp is delayed by the time fbwT_DIVER.
Flashing frequency to be displayed in error (half the period)
CowSYS_LMP means a lamp at the same time as pre - heat and used as a fault lamp
(0 for incandescent lamp and error separately, 1 = System lamp). To distinguish an error
Preheating of the lamp is driven with the blinking frequency fbwT_DIBLK.
All rights reserved by Robert Bosch GmbH, including in cases of proprietary rights applications. All rights of disposal such as copying and passing on to us.
19 April 2002 Error handling - Control of the lamp system DS / ESA
Page 6-24 EDC15 +
Y S01 281/120 - VG2
0 bosch
6.9 Terminology used
Error
Smallest monitoring unit (eg: "Signal range check low" is a mistake).
Timed error (Vorentprellung)
The debounce a timed error is administrable by expiration times.
Event-driven error (Vorentprellung)
The debounce an event-driven error made by counting certain error-dependent
Events such as Actuating a contact. The values until a state is debounced can
be applied.
Error path
Summary of up to eight individual errors, the same component / function / Sensor
concern.
"Provisionally defective" (Vorentprellung, per error)
Due to a faulty state is determined by the error handling error as provisional
defective set. If this during the assigned debounce time (be applied) healed
is, it will reset again. An analog inputs while the state "provisionally
defective, the last valid value is "frozen.
"Permanently damaged" (Vorentprellung, per error)
An error condition remains throughout, assigned to debounce time (be applied)
upright. Any substitute functions are performed.
"Provisionally healed" (Vorentprellung, per error)
An error had been "permanently broken" no longer occurs. As long debounce time for healing
running error is provisionally cured.
"Cured in operation" (Vorentprellung, per error)
An error had been "permanently broken" is longer than the debounce time for cure is no longer
occurred. Replacement reactions are withdrawn.
current fault (fault memory management, path):
An error was detected in the diagnosis. It is tentatively including in the error memory
Environmental conditions have been entered. The diagnostic lamp is still pending. If it is within the
Eintragsentprellzyklenzeit not confirmed, it will be deleted.
debounced error (error memory management, path):
A current fault has been confirmed after the debouncing. He is correct in the error memory
entered, the warning lamp comes on. The error is only through healing and erase procedure (or
Delete on Tester) removed.
healed error (error memory management, path):
An error in the already "de-bounced" in the fault memory was registered long enough not
available and was healed on the Heilungsentprellung. The diagnostic lamp was
off.
All rights reserved by Robert Bosch GmbH, including in cases of proprietary rights applications. All rights of disposal such as copying and passing on to us.
DS / ESA Error handling - Terms used 19 April 2002
0 bosch
EDC15 +
Y S01 281/120 - VG2
Page 6-25
CARB (California Air Resource Board)
California exhaust Authority
OBDII (On Board Diagnostics II)
Is a statute enacted by the California CARB exhaust Authority Act. It prescribes, in all
Passenger cars, light trucks and other medium to heavy vehicles all electronically controlled,
emission-related functions to be monitored. In addition, a fault indicator lamp (MIL) and
standardized diagnostic interface required. It shall be observed constraints on when the lamp
is controlled and cleared. If a vehicle is not for certification in California
is applied, the notes do not apply with respect to OBDII in this chapter. It can then
all possibilities are exhausted!
Driving Cycle (DC)
A DC consists of engine start, engine operation and engine. There is any error now individually
debounced, that is, regardless of whether other test have been performed. A DC is for
an error path can only be achieved if the error path has been fully tested.
Warm Up Cycle (WUC)
OBDII Entprellzyklus Error Clear (self-extinguishing), is achieved when the
Water temperature has reached an applicable value and since the engine is started by a
administrable value has risen.
Readiness (bits)
Is retrieved from the scan tool, and is given when the counter of the respective Readinessbits
(Counter in fbmRDYNES, see text) has the value in fbwRDY_Cnt reached or exceeded. The
Counter is incremented each time the bit error associated with all paths have been tested
(All related paths have reached a DC). Using the Readiness information, a
see attached tester whether since the last erasing the fault memory already
(was gone) sufficient tests were carried out so that any existing errors
is also in the fault memory.
Freeze Frame
Memory in which at one emission-related fault occurs (Priority 2 or 3) administered
Environmental conditions are stored.
MIL (Malfunction Indicator Lamp)
A required by the CARB for OBDII fault lamp for emission-related fault.
MIL Request
The MIL can be controlled only by the EDC, other control units have the option
MIL request to drive the MIL. This is achieved via the input MIL-E on the EDC,
is monitored and analyzed by the software. Alternatively, instead of the CAN and
Bus are used.
VAG tester
Workshops tester VAG Group. Tool for diagnosis of all control units in a
Vehicle.
All rights reserved by Robert Bosch GmbH, including in cases of proprietary rights applications. All rights of disposal such as copying and passing on to us.
19 April 2002 Error handling - Terms used DS / ESA
0 bosch
EDC15 +
Y S01 281/120 - VG2
Page 7-1
7 Diagnostics
7.1 Survey
External communication can KW 71 (Standard test device), or KW 2000 (OBDII
Scan Tool) take place. It is determined during stimulation of the control device by the test device,
which operating mode should be used.
The irritation (initialization) with 5 Baud is divided into a functional and a
physical part, the basis of the communication structure (initialization, addressing)
is distinguishable. With functional addresses systems are addressed (eg emission-relevant
System) and physical addresses individual control devices (SG), wherein a system also
only a SG can be made. The selection of the operating mode to be used will be based on
Address word, which clearly defines the required type of communication.
The irritation is carried out by a from the tester (TG) on the K-line rendered with 5 baud
Address word and is as follows (in order of transmission):
-
-
1 start bit (logical "0", low-potential)
7 data bits (address word), starting with the LSB
wherein:
xcwSGADR phys SG-address = 71 KW
33 hexfunkt. SG-address = emission-relevant system
08 hexphys. SG-address = controller
- 1 parity bit
The parity is checked in KW 71 corresponding to the entry in xcwDIASCH. For the
functional. Addressing applies even parity, while for the physical addressing
odd parity applies.
- One stop bit (logic "1" HIGH potential)
The baud rate for further communication is established for the standard tester with 9600 baud,
while valid for the "OBDII scan tool" 10400 baud.
The control unit stops the irritation when
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
the start bit is invalid (even on failure)
or after all data bits have been received and
the data bits are disturbed
has received the address wrong parity
the received address is not known
is recognized not a valid stop bit (even on failure)
the average speed exceeds the threshold xcw_n_Reiz (only 71 KW)
When canceling the irritation recognition is after the time xcwt_ini automatically resets
Irritation detection enabled.
All rights reserved by Robert Bosch GmbH, including in cases of proprietary rights applications. All rights of disposal such as copying and passing on to us.
19 April 2002 Diagnosis - Overview DS / ESA
Page 7-2 EDC15 +
Y S01 281/120 - VG2
0 bosch
7.2
-
-
Standard protocol
Communications handler
Command interpreter
The external communication by KW71 consists of two tasks:
The communication handler handles the communication tasks of the diagnosis as
the hardware level:
-
-
-
Responding to the recognized by the communication stimulator mode
Connection
Data transfer according to predetermined timings
The command interpreter does not, regarding the SW level following tasks:
-
-
-
Interpretation of received request blocks
Exchange of information with system components
Creating a response blocks
7.2.1 Establish communication
logic "1"
TG
logic "0" T0 T1
Communication structure
SG
Ta
SG
Tb
SG
T4
TG
P2
SG
T4
SG-identification
TG
T3
SG
T4
TG SG
Initialization
with 5 baud (address)
Synchronization byte 55H
Keybytes 1 and 2
2 Inverted Keybyte
1 SG byte ID
Inverted 1 Byte
2 SG byte ID
Inverted 2 Byte
ETX
Figure XCOM01: communication after ISO 9141 for KW 71
T0 ... xcwt_ini, T1 ... xcwt_sync, Ta ... xcwt_kw1, Tb ... xcwt_kw2,
P2 ... xcwt_reabl, T3 ... xcwt_reaby, T4 <xcwt_outby
The following on the successful irritation communication structure consists of
-
-
-
the sync byte (55 hex, 8 data bits / no parity) from the SG to the TG
the two Keybytes xcwKeybyt1 and xcwKeybyt2 (7 data bits / parity odd) and
the logical inversion of the second Keybytes from the TG to the SG
All rights reserved by Robert Bosch GmbH, including in cases of proprietary rights applications. All rights of disposal such as copying and passing on to us.
DS / ESA Diagnosis - standard protocol 19 April 2002
0 bosch
EDC15 +
Y S01 281/120 - VG2
Page 7-3
This communication structure can be repeated in case of failure without further irritation to the
it programmed in the SG number xcwFehzmax is reached. This error event occurs when the
Xcwt_outby time for the logical inversion of the second Keybytes is exceeded or a SG
false inversion receives. The SG then begins again with the output of
Synchronization bytes.
7.2.2 Communication Sequence
The communication process begins with the first block of the control unit identification, which the
Controller independently after receiving the logical inversion of the second Keybytes sends. The
ECU identification may include multiple blocks depending on the scope. Each of these blocks
is answered with proper communication with an "Acknowledge" block by the tester.
Request block of the
Tester
SG
P1
TG
T3
SG
T4
TG
T3
SG TG
P2
SG
T4
Response block of
Controller
TG
T3
SG
T4
TG SG
P1
TG
ETX
1 Byte beg. block
Inverted 1 Byte
2 Byte request block
Inverted 2 Byte
ETX
1 Byte response block
Inverted 1 Byte
2 Response byte block
Inverted 2 Byte
ETX
Figure XCOM02: Communication sequence
P1 <xcwt_outbl, P2 ... xcwt_reabl
Following the transmission of the ID must be the SG-SG of the TG in the form of a
Request block indicate what information is required. The SG responds with
corresponding response blocks.
A block is composed of:
-
-
Block length - length of the block excl block length byte
Block counter - consecutive number of the block. It starts at 1 In block counter is> 255
the block counter is reset to 0
- Block title (designation of the request or response block
- Data portion - maximum of 169 bytes
- ETX - end of block indicator
The from the master (transmitter of the block) output bytes from the slave (receiver of the
Block) byte by byte returned inverted. With this form of output, the master receives immediately
after each byte the information whether the output byte has also been received correctly.
All rights reserved by Robert Bosch GmbH, including in cases of proprietary rights applications. All rights of disposal such as copying and passing on to us.
19 April 2002 Diagnosis - standard protocol DS / ESA
Page 7-4 EDC15 +
Y S01 281/120 - VG2
0 bosch
If during the block transfer time xcwt_outby (byte timeout) is exceeded, go
both the TG and the SG back to the beginning of the block transfer. The master waits
another timeout time unit, then went with the reissue of the first byte of the block
begins to ensure that the slave is decreased in any case in the time-out.
The last byte of a block (ETX) is not returned by the slave. If the last byte
correctly received by the slave, so he assumes the master function and can with the transfer
start of the next block. If an incorrect reception of the last byte (content wrong or
absent), the slave, the possibility to repeat the block just received. For this purpose,
it sends the block "No Acknowledge" with the block counter of the repeated block.
The communication sequence ends with the "Diagnostics-end" if he does not turn off
the ignition is canceled. Between the first and the last block of the
Communication sequence is a constant change of master - slave and function instead, ie the
Transmission direction of two consecutive blocks is never the same.
When the distance between two blocks exceeds the time xcwt_outbl (block timeout) breaks
the connection from the SG. As long, therefore, sent from TG no request block to the SG
is called "Acknowledge" blocks are exchanged to a once developed
To obtain connection alive. Furthermore, these blocks form a supervisory role over the
Functionality of the K-line. To send a request block, the TG has to wait until
it holds the master function, and inserts it instead of a "Acknowledge" block. The SG
answers after the time xcwt_reabl with an appropriate response block.
All rights reserved by Robert Bosch GmbH, including in cases of proprietary rights applications. All rights of disposal such as copying and passing on to us.
DS / ESA Diagnosis - standard protocol 19 April 2002
0 bosch
EDC15 +
Y S01 281/120 - VG2
Page 7-5
7.3 Standard telegram contents
Function
Generally
Read control unit identification
Read RAM cells
Read ROM / EPROM cells
Clear fault memory
Diagnostic end
Read fault memory
Read ADC channel
Acknowledge
No Acknowledge
Read ECU-specific addresses
Parameter coding
Read E2PROM
Write E2PROM
Login Request
Control device outputs
Actuator test Initiate / continue turn
Measured values
Reading
Read normalized
Adaptation
Reading
Testing
Save
Basic setting
Initiate
Initiate normalized
21
22
2A
11
28
B14
B15
B16
B09
B11
10
10
10
04 00
04 xx
00
01
03
05
06
07
08
09
0A
0B
10
19
1A
2B
04
12
29
B05
B20
B21
B07
B03
B06
B19
B01
B02
-
B13
B23
B24
B17
B08
B10
B12
01
20
21
05
06
02
09
-
-
-
07
26
27
11
03
08 00
01 to 08
08 25
Block-block-VAG
titelid
Function)
Block title)
BlockID)
VAG)
Name of the executed function in the SG and in the tester
internal SG and tester ID
Specification identification
VAG tester function number
All rights reserved by Robert Bosch GmbH, including in cases of proprietary rights applications. All rights of disposal such as copying and passing on to us.
19 April 2002 Diagnosis - Standard telegram contents DS / ESA
Page 7-6 EDC15 +
Y S01 281/120 - VG2
0 bosch
Read 7.3.1 SG identification
This function is used to establish the identity of the controller with respect to hardware version,
Software version and date of manufacture. After a successful attempt to establish communication
are the controller independently of its entire identification. Thereafter, the ID
be accessed via a separate request block at any time.
The control unit identification comprises 4 blocks. Each of these blocks is individually to the tester
transmitted and, with proper transmission with an acknowledge block from the tester
answered.
The display of the tester provides the data as follows (2 examples):
Displaynummer1 1 1
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 0 1 2
4 D 0 7 9 0 4 0 1 ___
4 D 0 7 9 0 4 0 1 ___
1 1 1 1 1 1 1 2 2 2 2 2
3 4 5 6 7 8 9 0 1 2 3 4
2, 5 l _ 5 _ R T D I _
2, 5 l _ 5 _ R T D I _
2 2 2 2 2 3 3 3 3 3 3
5 6 7 8 9 0 1 2 3 4 5
0 1 0 0 A G __ D 0 0
G 1 0 7 A G __ D 0 0
Data transfer:
Transmitter
Tester
Requirement
Byte
1
2
3
4
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
B01
Hex
$ 03
z
$ 00
$ 03
$ 1B
z +1
$ F6
$ 34
$ 44
$ 30
$ 39
$ 30
$ 37
$ 34
$ 30
$ 31
$ 20
$ 20
$ 20
$ 32
$ 2C
$ 35
$ 6C
$ 20
$ 52
$ 35
$ 20
$ 54
$ 44
$ 49
$ 20
$ 03
ASCII Display Title
Block length
Block counter on bus
Block title
End of Block
Block length
Block counter on bus
Block title
Device number
Application via xcwSGBlk1
ETX
Control unit
1 Block
4
D
0
9
0
7
4
0
1
2
.
5
l
R
5
T
D
I
ETX
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
Index
Index
Spaces
Designation
Tester
End of Block
z +2 Acknowledge
All rights reserved by Robert Bosch GmbH, including in cases of proprietary rights applications. All rights of disposal such as copying and passing on to us.
DS / ESA Diagnosis - Standard telegram contents 19 April 2002
0 bosch
EDC15 +
Y S01 281/120 - VG2
Page 7-7
Transmitter
Control unit
2 Block
Byte
1
2
3
4
Hex
$ 07
z +3
$ F6
$ 30
$ 47
$ 41
$ 56
$ 30
$ 31
$ 32
$ 33
$ 34
$ 35
$ 36
$ 37
$ 30
$ 31
$ 32
$ 33
$ 34
$ 35
$ 36
$ 37
$ 30
$ 31
$ 32
$ 33
$ 34
$ 35
$ 36
$ 37
$ 03
ASCII Display Title
Block length
Block counter on bus
Block title
Zero or
GRA is enabled or
ADR is enabled
ADR: Acceleration time, var speed threshold
or fixed speed equal to the default value
no adjustment
Adjustment A
Adjustment B
Adaptation A & B
Adjustment C
Adjustment A & C
Adaptation B & C
Adaptation A & B & C
no adjustment
Adjustment D
Adaptation e
Adapting D & D
Adjustment F
Adapting D & F
Adaptation E & F
Adapting D & E & F
no adjustment
Adaptation G
Adjustment H
Adaptation G & H
Adaptation I
Adaptation G & I
Adjustment H & I
Adaptation G & H & I
End of Block
z +4 Acknowledge
0
G
A
V
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
ETX
25
5 26
6 27
7 28
Tester
8
B01
All rights reserved by Robert Bosch GmbH, including in cases of proprietary rights applications. All rights of disposal such as copying and passing on to us.
19 April 2002 Diagnosis - Standard telegram contents DS / ESA
Page 7-8 EDC15 +
Y S01 281/120 - VG2
0 bosch
Overview of the supported customization features:
VAG
100
200
400
010
020
040
001
002
004
No.
01
02
03
05
04
12
18
Login
Login
OR
30
Adaptation
Limiting amount
Idle speed
Exhaust gas recirculation
Starting quantity
Start of injection / delivery start
Preheating
Maximum speed limit
Fuel cooling
FGG speedometer constant switching
OR
VE-quantity adjustment
Olda
mrmBEGaAGL or mrmBEGmAGL
mrmLLR_AGL
armARF_AGL
mrmSTA_AGL
sbmAGL_SBR / fnmAGL_FN
gsmAGL_VGK
mrmV_HGBSW
See Login Request
See Login Request
OR
zmmVE_AGL
A
B
C
D
E
F
G
B
I
VAG)
No.)
Adaptation)
Olda)
Display on VAG tester if adjustment was made
see overview adaptation (adjustment = channel number)
Name of adjustment
Olda channel of the corresponding matching value
All rights reserved by Robert Bosch GmbH, including in cases of proprietary rights applications. All rights of disposal such as copying and passing on to us.
DS / ESA Diagnosis - Standard telegram contents 19 April 2002
0 bosch
EDC15 +
Y S01 281/120 - VG2
Page 7-9
Transmitter
Control unit
3 Block
Byte
1
2
3
4
Hex
$ 0A
z +5
$ F6
$ 41
$ 53
$ 44
$ 47
$ 20
$ 20
$ 44
$ 30
$ 30
$ 03
$ 08
z +7
$ F6
$ 00
PP0
PP1
PP2
PP3
$ 03
ASCII Display Title
Block length
Block counter on bus
Block title
Automatic transmission
Manual transmission
Direct switch (ASG)
for gear
Spaces
Spaces
for version number
Version 00
Tester
Control unit
4 Block
Tester
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
B01
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
B01
A
S
D
G
29
about
xcwSGBlk2
be applied
D
0
0
ETX
30
31
32
33
34
35
ETX
End of Block
z +6 Acknowledge
Block length
Block counter on bus
Block title
Delimiter (NULL)
% PMC14., PMC07
% PMC06, PMC05, .., PMC00, WSC16
% WSC15, WSC14, .., WSC08
% WSC07, WSC06, .., WSC00
End of Block (ETX)
z +6 Acknowledge
PMC parameters ... code ... WSC workshops code
The byte 5 of the 4 ECU block (workshops code of the last adjustment) is omitted when in
xcwDIASCH applied (see description of parameter blocks).
7.3.2 Read RAM cells
With this function it is possible from the internal and external RAM, as well as messages
read at least one and a maximum of 169 bytes. By default, you read with this function
Messages (2 bytes), the address is not to be regarded as a physical address, rather than
Message number.
Is to be read from internal or external RAM, then the function serial E2PROM
Write the corresponding memory area to select. When reading from the RAM, understands
the address as an offset to the beginning of the RAM in the memory.
Byte
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
Request block
Block length
Block counter
Block title
Number of bytes
Address / Message number HB
Address / Message number LB
Block end ETX
TG-> SG
06
xx
01
xx
xx
xx
03
All rights reserved by Robert Bosch GmbH, including in cases of proprietary rights applications. All rights of disposal such as copying and passing on to us.
19 April 2002 Diagnosis - Standard telegram contents DS / ESA
Page 7-10 EDC15 +
Y S01 281/120 - VG2
0 bosch
Byte
1
2
3
4
n-1
n
Response block
Block length
Block counter
Block title
RAM / Message 1
...
RAM / message x
Block end ETX
SG-> TG
n
xx
FE
xx
xx
03
Read 7.3.3 ROM / EPROM cells
With this feature you can read a maximum of 169 and a minimum of 1 byte from the data set
(Physical address F0000H ... FBFFFH). The address as an offset to the beginning of
Data set to see.
Byte
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
Request block
Block length
Block counter
Block title
Number of bytes
Address HB
Address LB
Block end ETX
TG-> SG
06
xx
03
xx
xx
xx
03
Byte
1
2
3
4
n
n +1
Response block
Block length
Block counter
Block title
EPROM cell 1
...
EPROM cell x
Block end ETX
SG-> TG
n
xx
FD
xx
xx
03
7.3.4 Clear the fault memory
With this function, the fault memory can be deleted. Currently are defective error
but not deleted. After deleting the error memory the content is the
Output error buffer, or if no errors are entered ACKNOWLEDGE.
However, the time is before the transmission of the response block xcw_twti still awaited (to errors
to be to give the possibility stored in the error memory). Moreover
also deleted the CARB test results.
Byte
1
2
3
4
Request block
Block length
Block counter
Block title
Block end ETX
TG-> SG
03
xx
05
03
All rights reserved by Robert Bosch GmbH, including in cases of proprietary rights applications. All rights of disposal such as copying and passing on to us.
DS / ESA Diagnosis - Standard telegram contents 19 April 2002
0
7.3.5
bosch
Diagnostic end
EDC15 +
Y S01 281/120 - VG2
Page 7-11
This function causes the control device to end the connection to the test device. A possibly
performed actuator test will be aborted. A shared through a login request access
the E2PROM is disabled again (again to login, required for new irritation).
Byte
1
2
3
4
Request block
Block length
Block counter
Block title
Block end ETX
TG-> SG
03
xx
06
03
7.3.6 Read fault memory
With this function, the contents of the error memory is transferred to the tester. Abhnigig from
stored fault entry will be 3 bytes per error (error codes and error type applied -
see Troubleshooting) transferred and converted into the error text on the tester.
Byte
1
2
3
4
Request block
Block length
Block counter
Block title
Block end ETX
TG-> SG
03
xx
07
03
Byte
1
2
3
4
5
6
n
n +1
Response block
Block length
Block counter
Block title
Signal path code HB
Signal path code LB
Error type
...
Content error memory x
Block end ETX
SG-> TG
n
xx
FC
xx
xx
xx
xx
03
All rights reserved by Robert Bosch GmbH, including in cases of proprietary rights applications. All rights of disposal such as copying and passing on to us.
19 April 2002 Diagnosis - Standard telegram contents DS / ESA
Page 7-12 EDC15 +
Y S01 281/120 - VG2
0 bosch
7.3.7 Read ADC channel
With this function, an ADC channel can be read. The result is not normalized and
unlinearized sent to the tester.
Byte
1
2
3
4
5
Request block
Block length
Block counter
Block title
Channel number
Block end ETX
TG-> SG
04
xx
06
xx
03
Byte
1
2
3
4
5
6
Response block
Block length
Block counter
Block title
ADC value HB
ADC value LB
Block end ETX
SG-> TG
05
xx
06
xx
xx
03
Channel numbers:
Channel no.
00.65
01.64
2
3
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
66
67
68
69
70
Designation
Pedal position sensor supply
Pedal position sensor
Air flow meter
Atmospheric pressure sensor
Battery voltage detector
Boost pressure sensor supply
Air flow meter supply
Needle-movement sensor
Reference voltage
NOX temperature sensor 1
NOX temperature sensor 2
Fuel temperature sensor
Air temperature sensor
Saugrohrtemperaturfhler
Water temperature sensor
Boost pressure sensor
All rights reserved by Robert Bosch GmbH, including in cases of proprietary rights applications. All rights of disposal such as copying and passing on to us.
DS / ESA Diagnosis - Standard telegram contents 19 April 2002
0 bosch
EDC15 +
Y S01 281/120 - VG2
Page 7-13
7.3.8 Acknowledge
If requested no special function by the tester, it sends acknowledge blocks from
Control unit are answered with acknowledge. This serves to maintain the
Communication.
Byte
1
2
3
4
Request block / response block
Block length
Block counter
Block title
Block end ETX
TG <-> SG
03
xx
09
03
7.3.9 No Acknowledge
This block is produced by the tester or by the control device if a transmission error has occurred,
or an unknown title block has been received, sent.
Byte
1
2
3
4
5
Request block
Block length
Block counter
Block title
Block counter - 1
Block end ETX
TG-> SG
04
xx
0A
xx
03
Read 7.3.10 SG addresses
This function 6 addresses (xcwAdr1 ... xcwAdr6) are sent to the tester. This
Addresses can be used, for example, during a subsequent read E2PROM.
Byte
1
2
3
4
Request block
Block length
Block counter
Block title
Block end ETX
TG-> SG
03
xx
0B
03
Byte
1
2
3
4
5
...
14
15
16
Response block
Block length
Block counter
Block title
Address 1 HB
Address 1 LB
...
Address 6 HB
Address 6 LB
Block end ETX
SG-> TG
15
xx
FA
xx
xx
...
xx
xx
03
All rights reserved by Robert Bosch GmbH, including in cases of proprietary rights applications. All rights of disposal such as copying and passing on to us.
19 April 2002 Diagnosis - Standard telegram contents DS / ESA
Page 7-14 EDC15 +
Y S01 281/120 - VG2
0 bosch
7.3.11 parameter coding
With this function, the record variant can be selected. By means of the parameter code
can be one of 32768 different variants can be selected. The workshops - and
Parameter code are in the same place as workshops / Parameters Code of adaptation
stored. The response block this function corresponds to the control unit identification (see
Block Title 00).
Byte
1
2
3
(4)
4/5
5/6
6/7
7/8
Request block
Block length
Block counter
Block title
PMC15 PMC07 ...
PMC6 ... PMC0,
WSC16
WSC15 ... WSC8
WSC7 ... WSC0
Block end ETX
TG-> SG
07/08
xx
10
xx
xx
xx
xx
03
PMC parameters ... code ... WSC workshops code
The length is pending from xcwDIASCH (see description of parameter blocks).
Read 7.3.12 E2PROM
This feature allows a maximum 169 and minimum of 1 byte can be read from the E2PROM.
To perform this function, however, has previously had a successful login request
have been carried out. Some areas are separately blocked (WFS) and therefore can not
be read out.
Byte
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
Response block
Block length
Block counter
Block title
Number of E2PROM cells
Address HB
Address LB
Block end ETX
SG-> TG
06
xx
19
xx
xx
xx
03
Byte
1
2
3
4
5
...
n
n +1
Response block
Block length
Block counter
Block title
E2PROM cell 1
E2PROM cell 2
...
E2PROM cell n-4
Block end ETX
SG-> TG
n
xx
EF
xx
xx
...
xx
03
All rights reserved by Robert Bosch GmbH, including in cases of proprietary rights applications. All rights of disposal such as copying and passing on to us.
DS / ESA Diagnosis - Standard telegram contents 19 April 2002
0 bosch
EDC15 +
Y S01 281/120 - VG2
Page 7-15
Write E2PROM 7.3.13
This function can read RAM and ROM / EPROM read memory for the functions
memory areas are selected. Therefore the corresponding space on the address must
FFFFH to be written.
One of these memory areas can be selected and in the cited arrival
requirement blocks are read:
No.
0
1
2
Address
-
F600H - FDFFH
C000H - DDFFH
Byte
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
Designation
Messages
internal RAM
external RAM
Request block
Block length
Block counter
Block title
Number of bytes
Start address HB
Start address of LB
Storage area
Block end ETX
Request block
RAM read (default)
Read RAM
Read RAM
TG-> SG
07
xx
1A
01
FF
FF
xx
03
Byte
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
Response block
Block length
Block counter
Block title
Number of E2PROM cells
Start address HB
Start address of LB
Verify Ok / Verify not Ok
Block end ETX
SG-> TG
07
xx
F9
xx
xx
xx
FF/00
03
All rights reserved by Robert Bosch GmbH, including in cases of proprietary rights applications. All rights of disposal such as copying and passing on to us.
19 April 2002 Diagnosis - Standard telegram contents DS / ESA
Page 7-16 EDC15 +
Y S01 281/120 - VG2
0 bosch
7.3.14 Login Request
The login request has the following functions:
-
Sharing for the functions E2PROM write:
Read E2PROM and read adaptation / test / write (if for the respective channel
by application of xcwLOG0 - 7 is required, except are special cases with
own password). The signal received by controller 16-bit password must be in the
Record stored password (xcwPEEPROM) match. If this is the case, then the
released above functions until the diagnosis is canceled. The control unit
responds with an acknowledge block. The parameter code and the workshops code
are not considered.
FGR / ADR Sharing Services:
With this function, the FGR / ADR system shall be released if you had previously locked.
The signal received by controller 16-bit password must match the data stored in the
Password (xcwPFGROn) match. This function is only available when the
E2PROM is in order. The workshops code and EAF function switches are in the
E2PROM registered, but the workshops code is not in the same place
registered, and save the workshops code at adaptation. Could the function
are successfully completed, the controller responds with acknowledge, otherwise with No
Acknowledge UB.
FGR / ADR blocking:
With this function, the FGR / ADR system is blocked unless you had previously released.
The signal received by controller 16-bit password must match the data stored in the
Password (xcwPFGROff) match. Otherwise, applies to this function is the same as
for FGR / ADR release.
FGG tachometer frequency 1:
With this function, the tachometer frequency 1 is set for the vehicle speed sensor.
The signal received by controller 16-bit password must match the data stored in the
Password (xcwPFGG1) match. This function is only available when the
E2PROM is in order. The function switch for the tacho frequency is in the E2PROM
deleted. The function could not be successfully completed, the controller responds with
Acknowledge, otherwise with NoAcknowledge. The parameter code and the workshops code
are not considered.
FGG tachometer frequency 2:
With this function, the tachometer frequency 2 is set for the vehicle speed sensor.
The signal received by controller 16-bit password must match the data stored in the
Password (xcwPFGG2) match. This function is only available when the
E2PROM is in order. The function switch for the tacho frequency is in the E2PROM
placed. The function could not be successfully completed, the controller responds with
Acknowledge, otherwise with NoAcknowledge. The parameter code and the workshops code
are not considered.
-
-
-
-
All rights reserved by Robert Bosch GmbH, including in cases of proprietary rights applications. All rights of disposal such as copying and passing on to us.
DS / ESA Diagnosis - Standard telegram contents 19 April 2002
0
-
bosch
EDC15 +
Y S01 281/120 - VG2
Page 7-17
HGB (maximum speed limit) disable:
With this function, the maximum speed limit is deactivated again when they
was activated by means of adaptation channel 18. The signal received from the control unit 16-bit
Password must match the password stored in the data set (xcwPHGBOff).
This function is only available when the E2PROM is fine. The deactivation
is entered in the E2PROM. The function could not be completed successfully, so replies
the control unit with acknowledge, otherwise with NoAcknowledge. The workshops code
stored in E2PROM (workshops code adaptation).
KSK (fuel cooling system) to enable:
With this function, the function of the fuel cooling for hot countries means is
Tank temperature sensor and fuel circulation pump is activated. The control unit from the
received 16-bit password must match the password stored in the data set (xcwPKSKon)
match. This function is only available when the E2PROM is fine. The
Activation is entered in the E2PROM. The function could not be completed successfully,
so the controller responds with acknowledge, otherwise with NoAcknowledge. The
Workshops code is stored in E2PROM (workshops code adaptation).
KSK (fuel cooling) disable:
With this function, the function of the fuel cooling for hot countries means is
Tank temperature sensor and fuel circulation pump turned off. The control unit from the
received 16-bit password must match the password stored in the data set (xcwPKSKoff)
match. Otherwise, applies to this function is the same as enable KSK.
Set Readiness acceleration:
With this function, the counters are set in readiness fbmRDYNES on fbwSRDYm1,
the error memory (including OBD freeze frame) and all OBD Mode $ 06 Test Results
deleted. The signal received by controller 16-bit password must match the record in the
stored password (xcwPRDYm1) match.
Selection UTF-signal source:
With this function, the source of the ambient temperature sensor can be selected
be. The choices are: UTF via analog input, UTF via CAN or UTF about in
cowVAR_FZG defined signal source:
3
4
cowVAR_FZG
comVAR_FZG
-
-
-
-
comCLG_SIG.1
comCLG_SIG.2
Figure CANLog04_128: ambient temperature from combi or analog input
All rights reserved by Robert Bosch GmbH, including in cases of proprietary rights applications. All rights of disposal such as copying and passing on to us.
19 April 2002 Diagnosis - Standard telegram contents DS / ESA
Page 7-18 EDC15 +
Y S01 281/120 - VG2
0 bosch
The message indicates the comVAR_FZG been selected signal source:
Decimal
0
1
2
3
4
Comment
No data transmission
Data telegram 5ms/Bit
Data telegram 50ms/Bit
via CAN
via analog input
comCLG_SIG 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 X X 0
Login with xcwPswS3on
&
cowMSK_SIG.2
Login with xcwPswS3of
S
Q
R
Login with xcwPswS2on
&
cowMSK_SIG.1
Login with xcwPswS2of
S
Q
R
Figure CANLog02_128: Login request for signals
About the passwords xcwPswS2on or xcwPswS2of the bit is set comCLG_SIG.1
or deleted. About the passwords xcwPswS3on or xcwPswS3of the bit
comCLG_SIG.2 set or deleted. The message is comCLG_SIG in E2PROM
stored and has influence only continues after Steuergerteinitialisierung on
comVAR_FZG.
For the first initialization of the E2PROM is the label edwINI_LGS available.
However, while this label is with the mask cowMSK_SIG logically ANDed and
only the result written to the E2PROM.
All rights reserved by Robert Bosch GmbH, including in cases of proprietary rights applications. All rights of disposal such as copying and passing on to us.
DS / ESA Diagnosis - Standard telegram contents 19 April 2002
0
-
bosch
EDC15 +
Y S01 281/120 - VG2
Page 7-19
variable ADR / maximum speed set:
This feature allows the adjustment channel 28 is used for the Applizierung the maximum speed
(MrmADR_Neo) unlocked for the variable ADR. The signal received from control device 16 -
Bit password must match the password stored in the data set (xcwPADV).
ADR - fixed speed set:
This feature allows the adjustment channel 29 is used for the fixed Applizierung ADR
Speed (mrmADR_Nfe) enabled. The signal received from the control unit 16-bit password
must match the password stored in the data set (xcwPADE).
Range 0-9999 is reserved for the immobilizer:
The function of this area is included in the respective specifications.
VE-quantity adjustment:
This feature allows the adjustment channel 30 is used for the Applizierung the preinjection
adjustment-volume unlocked (if so requested by the application of xcwLOG_1.14
is). The signal received by controller 16-bit password must match the record in the
stored password (xcwPIAglOn) match.
-
-
-
Receives the control device other than the passwords mentioned above, so it breaks the
Connection, and is only ready to communicate again after a re-boot.
Byte
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
Request block
Block length
Block counter
Block title
HB password
LB password
PMC6 ... PMC0, WSC16
WSC15 ... WSC8
WSC7 ... WSC0
Block end ETX
TG-> SG
08
xx
2B
xx
xx
xx
xx
xx
03
PMC parameters ... code ... WSC workshops code
All rights reserved by Robert Bosch GmbH, including in cases of proprietary rights applications. All rights of disposal such as copying and passing on to us.
19 April 2002 Diagnosis - Standard telegram contents DS / ESA
Page 7-20 EDC15 +
Y S01 281/120 - VG2
0 bosch
7.3.15 Read measured values
Receives the controller read the block measurements, a maximum of 10 values can be simultaneously
be read. These measurements can in the map xcwMWB_KF by the application of
defined message numbers can be defined. If an undefined message number
is entered, the output will be after the last valid message number to the tester
canceled.
It involves the converted into 8-bit sizes measured values, the conversion under the
were limited to 0 or 255.
Byte
1
2
3
4
Request block
Block length
Block counter
Block title
Block end ETX
TG-> SG
03
xx
12
03
Byte
1
2
3
4
5
...
n
n +1
Response block
Block length
Block counter
Block title
Measured value 1
Measured value 2
...
Measured n-4
Block end ETX
SG-> TG
n
xx
F4
xx
xx
...
xx
03
7.3.16 actuator test Initiate / continue turn
With this function, a semi-automatic test of the actuators can be performed. Each
Time the request block is received, it is automatically set to the next control element
next program. The answer to this requirement is normally completed in Acknowledge. The
Response block contains a code, which is evaluated by the test device, after which the
Description of the actuator is outputted.
The actuator test can only be activated when the speed is less than or equal xcwSGSchw. Is
this is not the case, the control unit responds with No acknowledge block UB.
If, during a actuator tests the speed threshold xcwDrSchw exceeded or there is
no usable speed signal before (zmmSYSERR.4 = 1; see Monitoring Concept
"Summarized System Error") as the actuator test will be aborted. In any case, the
Actuator test canceled after the time xcwMaIoTim.
If the actuator test has already been carried out completely once, so responds, the control unit
a repeated invitation to actuator test with No Acknowledge.
Should be tested with this function, the ELAB, so this is not clocked, but only
off. He remains switched off for the current drive cycle.
The actuator, the actuator for the test is carried out, for the time xcwSt .. Tim with the
Duty cycle xcwSt .. TV driven. After this time, the actuator which is used to
100% duty cycle - xcwSt .. TV driven. This process is repeated until one of the above
said termination conditions fulfilled.
All rights reserved by Robert Bosch GmbH, including in cases of proprietary rights applications. All rights of disposal such as copying and passing on to us.
DS / ESA Diagnosis - Standard telegram contents 19 April 2002
0 bosch
EDC15 +
Y S01 281/120 - VG2
Page 7-21
The amplifiers can be about their message number (see Appendix, ehmF ...) the
Assign actuator numbers (xcwStell..). In addition, even for each actuator, a code
are applied (xcwCode..) which is output in response block.
Byte
1
2
3
4
5
Request block
Block length
Block counter
Block title
Pin number (no function)
Block end ETX
TG-> SG
04
xx
04
xx
03
Byte
1
2
3
4
5
6
Response block
Block length
Block counter
Block title
Actuator code
Actuator code
Block end ETX
HB
LB
SG-> TG
05
xx
F5
xx
xx
03
Read normalized values 7.3.17
This function belonging to the transmitted number display measured values are with
Transfer standard display number and normalizing to the tester, where it is then in physical
Units can be displayed.
In the parameter block channel table values are assembled into ad groups
(XcwK01_1/2/3/4 ... xcwK40_1/2/3/4).
The entries in the channel table each refer to the entries in the parameter block
Group table.
-
-
-
xcwGrpxx_A ... Standard display number
xcwGrpxx_N normalizing ...
xcwGrpxx_M ... Message number of the measured value (xx: 00 to 80)
Valid display numbers are 1 ... 40 Invalid Display numbers answered by the control unit with
No Acknowledge.
Byte
1
2
3
4
5
Request block
Block length
Block counter
Block title
Ad number
Block end ETX
TG-> SG
04
xx
29
xx
03
All rights reserved by Robert Bosch GmbH, including in cases of proprietary rights applications. All rights of disposal such as copying and passing on to us.
19 April 2002 Diagnosis - Standard telegram contents DS / ESA
Page 7-22 EDC15 +
Y S01 281/120 - VG2
0 bosch
Byte
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
Response block
Block length
Block counter
Response block title
1 Standard display number
1 Normalizing
1 Measured value
2 Standard display number
2 Normalizing
2 Measured value
3 Standard display number
3 Normalizing
3 Measured value
4 Standard display number
4 Normalizing
4 Measured value
Block end ETX
SG-> TG
0F
xx
E7
xx
xx
xx
xx
xx
xx
xx
xx
xx
xx
xx
xx
03
Since we only support a limited number of channels was the label xcwK100auf
introduced that specified in the label channel number on display (channel number) 100 redirects.
The channel number that is in this label will be locked at the same time, this also applies to the
Function values normalized read.
7.3.17.1 Definition of group numbers
The definition of the group numbers Appendix B refer to.
7.3.17.2 Measured value blocks 190-199
This function is mainly used for tape end tests.
The display numbers 190-199, the values are not normalized output (block title F4h,
see values not normalized read), thus ten measured values can be displayed simultaneously.
With the map xcwMWB_KF the desired values can be set in the application.
For each display number (190-199) there is a vertex on the y-axis, for each measured value
there is a support point on the x-axis.
If an invalid message number applied in the map xcwMWB_KF, the output is
canceled by the message number last version. If the first message number is invalid,
no measured value display (only valid for this function).
All rights reserved by Robert Bosch GmbH, including in cases of proprietary rights applications. All rights of disposal such as copying and passing on to us.
DS / ESA Diagnosis - Standard telegram contents 19 April 2002
0 bosch
EDC15 +
Y S01 281/120 - VG2
Page 7-23
7.3.17.3 Measured value blocks for the CAN-Bus
For each position of the CAN Measured value blocks a text of the bus user can describe
be defined. Based on the link mask xcwCANxx_X, the reference to the to
received CAN messages are produced.
Are all of the bits specified in the mask in the message camRCSTAT0 (see Appendix CAN)
set as is shown for the position in the measured value that no message is received
(Measured value).
In the other case it is indicated that one of the specified messages is received
(Measured value = +1).
In the CAN channel table the bus devices are assembled into ad groups
(XcwK125c1/2/3/4 ... xcwK129c1/2/3/4). A value of 255 means no ad in this position.
All rights reserved by Robert Bosch GmbH, including in cases of proprietary rights applications. All rights of disposal such as copying and passing on to us.
19 April 2002 Diagnosis - Standard telegram contents DS / ESA
Page 7-24 EDC15 +
Y S01 281/120 - VG2
0 bosch
The entries in the channel table refer to the entries of the CAN Busteilnehmertabelle.
(XcwCANxx_.)
-
-
-
-
-
-
xcwCAN_A Standard display ... number for all CAN Measured value blocks (37)
xcwCANxx_X ... linking mask with camRCSTAT
xcwCANxx_N normalizing ...
xcwCANxx_M ... measured value (xx: 00 to 10)
xcwCANxx_F ... linking mask with comCLG_FUN
xcwCANxx_S ... linking mask with comCLG_SIG
About the normalizing value and measured value of the text must be described which is to be displayed
when the control unit does not receive messages by this bus station. The other text results
from measured value +1.
Example: Determine the mask (xcwCAN. _X.) For a control unit:
Current assignment see chapter CAN.
Station wagon Brake Transmission
1 2 1 2 1
Bit
camRCSTAT
camRCSTAT
camRCSTAT
15
0
0
0
14
0
0
0
13
0
0
0
12
0
1
0
11
0
0
0
10
0
0
1
9
0
0
0
8
0
0
0
7
0
0
0
6
0
0
0
5
0
0
1
4
0
0
0
3
0
0
0
2
0
0
0
1
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
Value
all messages
be received
Transmission 2 message
down.
Combination 2 and brake
1 message
down.
2 ^ 1 +2 ^ 12 =
4098
2 ^ 5 =
32
2 ^ 15 +2 ^ 10 =
33792
Masks:
xcwCAN00_X
(Transmission)
xcwCAN01_X
(Brake)
xcwCAN02_X
(Combi)
0
0
1
0
0
0
0
0
0
1
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
1
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
1
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
1
0
0
0
0
0
xcwCAN .. _X is always a controller, CAN-bus device assigned.
VAG_Tester only shows "failed" when all messages of a SG (eg failure of all
Combined embassies) have failed.
All rights reserved by Robert Bosch GmbH, including in cases of proprietary rights applications. All rights of disposal such as copying and passing on to us.
DS / ESA Diagnosis - Standard telegram contents 19 April 2002
0 bosch
EDC15 +
Y S01 281/120 - VG2
Page 7-25
Determine the display text on VAG tester:
As a standard display number xcwCAN_A must always display the standard number for text applied
are:
xcwCAN_A = 37 dec
About the normalizing value and measured value of the display text is selected:
Brake
xcwCAN01_N
xcwCAN01_M
Transmission
xcwCAN00_N
xcwCAN00_M
Station wagon
xcwCAN02_N
xcwCAN02_M
Normalizing
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
..
...
Measured value
114
115
115
116
117
118
119
120
121
122
..
...
Text
Motor
Motor
ABS
ABS
Getr
Getr
Station wagon
Station wagon
D-Pump
D-Pump
..
...
1
115
1
117
1
119
0
1
0
1
0
1
0
1
0
1
There must always be selected, the text that describes the failure of the embassy. As text
indicating the reception of the message, the applied value + 1 is assumed.
Assignment to the measured value blocks:
Transmission
xcwCAN00_.
Brake
xcwCAN01_.
Station wagon
xcwCAN02_.
empty
255
Measured value
125xcwK125c1 00
Text: Getr.0 / 1
xcwK125c2 01
ABS0 / 1
xcwK125c3 02
Kombi0 / 1
xcwK125c4 255
All rights reserved by Robert Bosch GmbH, including in cases of proprietary rights applications. All rights of disposal such as copying and passing on to us.
19 April 2002 Diagnosis - Standard telegram contents DS / ESA
Page 7-26 EDC15 +
Y S01 281/120 - VG2
0 bosch
7.3.17.4 Hide the
By application of the value 255 in a CAN channel table entry is the appropriate place
hidden (for example: xcwK126c3 = 255).
The mapping is also of the enabled by encoding function or signal
affected:
255
xcwK12? c?
xcwCANxx_S = 0
> 1
comCLG_SIG logically ANDed with
xcwCANxx_S
Figure CANLog12_128: Blanking the display
In xcwCANxx_S can bit-coded the function or signal can be selected, which influence
has on display the CAN-bus device on VAG tester. If the label is applied with zero, so
the selected display group is always displayed. If a Anzeigruppe only displayed
be, when the corresponding CAN function or associated CAN signal by encoding
has been activated, the corresponding bit must be set in xcwCANxx_S.
If, for example, xcwCAN00_S.0 set, and the ASR / MSR function was measured by coding
unlocked (comCLG_SIG.0 = 1) then this CAN bus node at the position where he
a xcw12? c? Label has been defined (xcw12? C? = 00) are displayed. Is xcwCAN00_S.0 set, but
the ASR / MSR function was not unlocked by code, it is at the position where
the CAN bus devices in a xcw12? c? Label was defined, no text appears as
ECU internally not in xcwK12? c? applied value, but is used 255.
7.3.17.5 Example:
Channel 125
Display group number 125
Getr
Channel 126
Display group number 126
Climate 0/1 D-Pump 0/1
0/1 ABS 0/1 Station wagon 0/1 Air bag 0/1
All rights reserved by Robert Bosch GmbH, including in cases of proprietary rights applications. All rights of disposal such as copying and passing on to us.
DS / ESA Diagnosis - Standard telegram contents 19 April 2002
0 bosch
EDC15 +
Y S01 281/120 - VG2
Page 7-27
7.3.18 Overview adaptation
With the adjustment, it is possible motor-specific correction values for volume adjustment,
Idle speed, exhaust gas recirculation and start lot to read, test, and in the E2PROM
store. The matching channel numbers for selection of the correction values are identical
with the numbers of Mewerteausgabe.
The adjustment function is available only:
- (required if applicable) after successful login
- with intact E2PROM
Whether a login for the respective selected channel adjustment is necessary, by means of the label
be applied to xcwLOG_0 xcwLOG_7. The label decides xcwLOG_0 with bit 0 if for
Channel 0 is necessary to login and bit 15 whether a login for channel 15 is required. In Label
xcwLOG_7 can the login requirement for channel 112 are set to 127.
Calibration values are read, written or tested with this function are, or are
limited. The adjustment values are:
Adaptation channel number
1
2
3
4
5
12
18
27
28
29
30
Balance value
Quantity adjustment
Idle speed
Exhaust gas recirculation
Start of injection
Starting quantity
Preheating
Maximum speed (HGB)
ADR-up time (xxx, xx s)
var ADR maximum speed
ADR fixed speed
VE-quantity adjustment
All calibration values are 16-bit integer values.
All rights reserved by Robert Bosch GmbH, including in cases of proprietary rights applications. All rights of disposal such as copying and passing on to us.
19 April 2002 Diagnosis - Standard telegram contents DS / ESA
Page 7-28 EDC15 +
Y S01 281/120 - VG2
0 bosch
In response block for the adaptation functions we obtain the following block (adaptation
output to standard values):
Byte
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
Response block
Block length
Block counter
Block title
Adaptation channel number
Balance HB
Balance value LB
Sub-block title
1 Standard display number
1 Normalizing
1 Measured value
2 Standard display number
2 Normalizing
2 Measured value
3 Standard display number
3 Normalizing
3 Measured value
4 Standard display number
4 Normalizing
4 Measured value
Block end ETX
SG-> TG
13
xx
E6
xx
xx
xx
E7
xx
xx
xx
xx
xx
xx
xx
xx
xx
xx
xx
xx
03
All rights reserved by Robert Bosch GmbH, including in cases of proprietary rights applications. All rights of disposal such as copying and passing on to us.
DS / ESA Diagnosis - Standard telegram contents 19 April 2002
0 bosch
EDC15 +
Y S01 281/120 - VG2
Page 7-29
Read 7.3.19 adjustment
With this function it is possible to adapt the channel number corresponding current
used to read calibration value.
Byte
1
2
3
4
5
Request block
Block length
Block counter
Block title
Adaptation channel number
Block end ETX
TG-> SG
04
xx
21
xx
03
7.3.20 test adaptation
The control module uses the passed value adjustment as currently used calibration value.
This feature allows the response of the controller to a new calibration value immediately
to test. The set adjustment value is only valid for the driving cycle, in which he was placed, unless he
will save with adaptation written to the E2PROM.
Byte
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
Request block
Block length
Block counter
Block title
Adaptation channel number
Balance HB
Balance value LB
Block end ETX
TG-> SG
06
xx
22
xx
xx
xx
03
Save 7.3.21 adjustment
Is the correct calibration value is found, the operator has the option with this feature,
store the adjustment value in the E2PROM. In addition, there is also a code in workshops
the E2PROM entered. The parameter code is ignored.
If it is ensured that the balance value is stored in the E2PROM, then answers the
Control unit with the block matching output to standard values. During the storage
exchanges the control unit with the test device acknowledge blocks to communication
to maintain.
Byte
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
Request block
Block length
Block counter
Block title
Adaptation channel number
Balance HB
Balance value LB
PMC6 ... PMC0, WSC16
WSC15 ... WSC8
WSC7 ... WSC0
Block end ETX
TG-> SG
09
xx
2A
xx
xx
xx
xx
xx
xx
03
PMC parameters ... code ... WSC workshops code
All rights reserved by Robert Bosch GmbH, including in cases of proprietary rights applications. All rights of disposal such as copying and passing on to us.
19 April 2002 Diagnosis - Standard telegram contents DS / ESA
Page 7-30 EDC15 +
Y S01 281/120 - VG2
0 bosch
7.3.22 Initiate basic setting
The basic setting function is used, the engine in a defined operating state to
operate and then to read the measured values. To achieve this condition, certain
Actuators driven with a fixed duty cycle. For security reasons, this
Function just below the speed threshold xcwDrSchw and if an analyzable
Speed signal is present (zmmSYSERR.4 = 0; see Monitoring Concept "summarized
System Error ") are activated. For your information, that the System in basic setting
is, the diagnostic light flashes with the frequency xcwFreq. The solenoid valve plate
(EhmDMVS) is driven with the duty ratio xcwSBTV.
The communication is as follows:
Control unit Tester
Initiate basic setting
Output values
Initiate basic setting
Output values
other request block
or Acknowledge
or NoAcknowledge
Response to a new request
or Acknowledge
The following special cases should be noted:
-
When the speed is above the speed threshold xcwDrSchw, answered the
Controller block Initiate basic setting with No Acknowledge UB.
- At the same time, the default settings will be terminated at the threshold xcwDrSchw exceeded.
- If the speed drops below the threshold again xcwDrSchw, the default setting can again
be initiated.
Byte
1
2
3
4
Request block
Block length
Block counter
Block title
Block end ETX
TG-> SG
03
xx
11
03
Read response block see measurements
All rights reserved by Robert Bosch GmbH, including in cases of proprietary rights applications. All rights of disposal such as copying and passing on to us.
DS / ESA Diagnosis - Standard telegram contents 19 April 2002
0 bosch
EDC15 +
Y S01 281/120 - VG2
Page 7-31
Initiate basic setting normalized 7.3.23
This function can also for safety reasons only below the speed threshold xcwDrSchw
undwenneinauswertbaresDrehzahlsignalvorliegt (zmmSYSERR.4 = 0; see
Monitoring concept "summarized System Error") are activated.
With this function, the following basic settings are possible:
Adaptation channel number
03
04
11
22
35
Basic setting
Exhaust gas recirculation (ARF)
Start of injection (SBR)
Loader control (LDR)
Rail pressure setpoint (RDS)
Electric fuel pump (EKP)
If a default setting is carried out, in mrmN_LLDIA is an idle target speed of
xcwGRARF_N, xcwGRSBR_N, xcwGRRDS_N, xcwGRLDR_N, or xcwGREKP_N
specified.
With default setting ARF ARF control is switched off and all 3 actuators
(EhmFAR1, ehmFAR2 and ehmFAR3) are for the time xcwGRARF_T with the
Duty cycles xcwAR1ein, xcwAR2ein and xcwAR3ein driven. After this time,
are the actuators for the same time with xcwAR1aus, xcwAR2aus and xcwAR3aus
activated. This process is repeated until canceled by default.
With default setting SBR the injection start control remains switched on. As setpoint sbmPHIsoll
is specified xcwSBRein the controller for the time xcwGRSBR_T the injection start angle. After
Expiration of this time is specified to the controller, the angle xcwSBRaus. This process
is repeated until canceled by default.
With default setting LDR boost pressure control and the ARF control is switched off. The
Actuator ehmFLD_DK is for the time xcwGRLDR_T with the duty ratio xcwLDRein
activated. After this time, the actuator for the same time is xcwLDRaus
activated. This process is repeated until canceled by default.
With default setting RDS is the message zumPQsoll the respective target pressure xcwRDS_p1,
or xcwRDS_p2 specified. The fuel pressure setting for pressure 1 is for the period
xcwGRRDS_T. After this time, the set value for printing 2 is used. This
Process is repeated until canceled by default.
Basic setting EKP switches the EKP for the time xcwGREKP_T on and off (application of
655350000 causes activation during basic setting). About xcwGREKP_M the
Messagenr. set of ehmFEKP (other dig. controlled PWM output stages).
Instead of the 2nd Measured value outputted read normalized for matching is another
administrable measured value output. Standard display this number is 37, the normalizing value 0 At
Specification of XCW .. a, the measured value xcwGR .. ME is issued XCW at default value of .., the
Value xcwGR .. MA.
All rights reserved by Robert Bosch GmbH, including in cases of proprietary rights applications. All rights of disposal such as copying and passing on to us.
19 April 2002 Diagnosis - Standard telegram contents DS / ESA
Page 7-32 EDC15 +
Y S01 281/120 - VG2
0 bosch
In the remaining display group numbers no default setting is possible. The response block
measured values is normalized to spend on the corresponding adjustment channel number.
Byte
1
2
3
4
5
Request block
Block length
Block counter
Block title
Adaptation channel number
Block end ETX
TG-> SG
04
xx
21
03/04/11
03
The VAG tester offers the possibility of the special function 15 to read the readiness code.
This is to initiate possible if the control unit on the basic setting function normalized
(Title Block 28H) in the channel number 100 the readiness code with the standard display number 16
outputs.
Since we only support a limited number of channels was the label xcwK100auf
introduced that specified in the label channel number on display (channel number) 100 redirects.
The channel number that is in this label will be locked at the same time, this also applies to the
Function values normalized read.
Note:
The label is in xcwK100auf to disable the function to the value 255 to apply.
All rights reserved by Robert Bosch GmbH, including in cases of proprietary rights applications. All rights of disposal such as copying and passing on to us.
DS / ESA Diagnosis - Standard telegram contents 19 April 2002
0 bosch
EDC15 +
Y S01 281/120 - VG2
Page 7-33
7.3.24 Entering Ableichwerten by VAG tester
Adjustment is by means of diagnostic block 2A title, the corresponding block number, high byte
and low byte of the int (16-bit) - value set.
Note: All calibration values are on the driving software before being used again
checked for validity.
7.3.24.1 multiplicative adjustment
The following sizes are matched by multiplication:
-
-
-
-
Starting quantity
Limiting amount
Boost pressure throttle setpoint
ARF setpoint if cowV_AGL_B = 2
Given: Phys. Factor [-]
Limits: for Phys: -. FAKT_MAX ... + FAKT_MAX
int (16bit) - value = Phys. Factor * 10000
7.3.24.2 Accumulative Balance
The following variables are adjusted additively:
-
Desired idle speed
Given: Balancing the speed (offset) [U / min]
Limits: for Phys: -. N_LLABGL ... + N_LLABGL
int (16bit) - value = balance speed / N_QNT
ARF setpoint if cowV_AGL_B = 1
The values M_EQNT, N_QNT, M_LQNT and PROZ_QNT are the current. PHY file to
remove.
All rights reserved by Robert Bosch GmbH, including in cases of proprietary rights applications. All rights of disposal such as copying and passing on to us.
19 April 2002 Diagnosis - Standard telegram contents DS / ESA
Page 7-34 EDC15 +
Y S01 281/120 - VG2
0 bosch
7.4
-
-
OBDII protocol
SAE J1979 edition December 1991, revised on 14 June 1993
The diagnostic protocol corresponds in this form in the communications and the construction of block
Keyword Protocol 2000
The external communication of the "OBDII scan tools" based on the following specifications:
External communication is composed of two tasks:
-
-
Communication handler and
Command interpreter
The communication handler handles the communication tasks of the diagnosis as
the hardware level:
-
-
-
Responding to the, by Communications - recognized stimulator, operating mode
Connection according to the operating mode
Data transfer according to predetermined timings
The command interpreter does not, regarding the SW level following tasks:
-
-
-
Interpretation of received request blocks
Exchange of information with system components
Creating a response blocks
7.4.1 Establish communication
logic "1"
TG
logic "0" T0 T1
SG
T2
Communication structure
SG
T3
SG
T4
TG
T4
SG
P3
TG
P2
SG
P6
or
P3
Initialization
with 5 baud
Synchronization pattern 55H
Keywords 1 and 2
2 Inverted keyword
Inverted initialization address
Request block from the tester
Response block from the control unit
Figure XCOM03: data flow according to ISO 9141
All rights reserved by Robert Bosch GmbH, including in cases of proprietary rights applications. All rights of disposal such as copying and passing on to us.
DS / ESA Diagnosis - OBDII protocol 19 April 2002
0 bosch
EDC15 +
Y S01 281/120 - VG2
Page 7-35
The following on the successful irritation communication structure consists of
-
-
-
-
the synchronization pattern (55 hex, 8 data bits / no parity) from the SG to the TG
two keywords (7 data bits / parity odd) from the SG to the TG
the logical inversion of the second Keywords from the TG to the SG and
the logical inversion of the initialization address from the SG to the TG
Address word
33hex
08hex
Keyword 1
08
44
Keyword 2
08
46
Unsupported
7.4.2 Communication Sequence
Subsequent to the communication structure, the TG has the SG in the form of requirements
ing blocks indicate what information is required. The SG responds with corresponding
speaking response blocks.
A block is composed of:
-
Headboard:
Type identifier or define the format and
Target address (recipient address or communication direction) and
Source address (sender address)
- Piece of information:
Mode byte and
Length of the message (optional) and data bytes and
(The maximum length of the information part is 256 bytes in length and consisting of 255
Data bytes)
- Test part:
Checksum in hex code which represents CS = LOW byte of the checksum.
Breakdown of the head section:
-
emission-relevant system (SAE J1979 - Init with 33 hex functional, 5 Bd)
TG -> SG
68 hex
6A hex
Fx hex
SG -> TG
48 hex
6B hex
SG address
Remark
Type of communication sequence
Type of message (request / response)
physical address of the sending station
Type
Target
Source
-
functional / physical addressing (Init <> 33 hex functional) (not supported)
TG -> SG
xx hex
SG address
TG address
SG -> TG
xx hex
TG address
SG address
Remark
Address of the receiving station
Address of the transmitting station
Type
Target
Source
A byte block transfer consists of:
-
-
-
1 start bit
8 data bits, starting with LSB
1 stop bit
All rights reserved by Robert Bosch GmbH, including in cases of proprietary rights applications. All rights of disposal such as copying and passing on to us.
19 April 2002 Diagnosis - OBDII protocol DS / ESA
Page 7-36 EDC15 +
Y S01 281/120 - VG2
0 bosch
Length
Headboard
Len
maximum of 255 bytes of data -
M P D1
Data m
Dm
Testing
part
CS
Data 1
PID (optional)
Fashion - byte
Length (only for L = 0)
Source address
Target address
MSBLSB
A1 A0 L L L LL L
Length field (1 .. 63)
0
0
1
1
0
1
0
1
: Not allowed (without header
: Emission-relevant system (SAE J1979)
: Header - physical
: Header - functional
Calculate the checksum (CS
Headboard
M
L: length field (1 .. 63)
Calculate the checksum (CS
Headboard maximum of 256 data bytes -
Len
L = 0
M P D1
A maximum of 63 data bytes -
P D1
Checksum
Dm CS
Testing
part
Dm CS
Length (1 .. 255)
Figure XCOM04: block structure
All rights reserved by Robert Bosch GmbH, including in cases of proprietary rights applications. All rights of disposal such as copying and passing on to us.
DS / ESA Diagnosis - OBDII protocol 19 April 2002
0 bosch
EDC15 +
Y S01 281/120 - VG2
Page 7-37
7.4.3 Initialization by WUP
Irritation with wake-up pattern:
To reduce the communication structure of the TG may be a "wake-up pattern" Send.
Establishing communication with wake-up pattern:
logic "1" Communication structure
TG
TiniL
logic "0" T0
TWuP
Requirement
P2
SG
P3
TG
P2
SG
P6 / 3
P5
Type Tgt Src M CS Type
P1
Tgt Src Len * M KW1 KW2 CS
Type - Format
Tgt - Target - address
Src - Source - Address
M - mode - bytes (81
CS - checksum
Type - Format
Tgt - Target - address
Src - Source - Address
Len - length byte
M - mode - byte (C1
KW1, KW2 - Keywords
CS1 checksum
* Depending on the type - byte
Figure XCOM05: establishing communication with Wake Up pattern
After sending the "wake-up pattern" sends the TG the request block "Diagnostic startup"
(Mode 81) to the SG. The control device transmits within the time frame of the response block P2, and
informs the tester via the keywords 1 and 2 on the block format (see
"Establish communication").
Communication process:
The communication sequence at the "fast start" corresponds to the at initialization with 5
Baud.
Diagnostic Test Modes:
The diagnostic test modes at the "fast start" correspond to modes in the initialization
with 5 baud.
All rights reserved by Robert Bosch GmbH, including in cases of proprietary rights applications. All rights of disposal such as copying and passing on to us.
19 April 2002 Diagnosis - OBDII protocol DS / ESA
Page 7-38 EDC15 +
Y S01 281/120 - VG2
0 bosch
7.4.4 Time Definition
300 ms <
24 ms
49 ms
60 ms
5 ms
0 ms
25 ms
<
<
<
<
<
.
<
T0
TiniL < 26 ms
51 ms
300 ms
20 ms
20 ms
50 ms
Time the logic "1" prior to initialization
Time to logic "0" at initialization (Quick Start)
Duration of the wake - up - Patterns (Quick Start)
Time between the end of the initialization and the start of
Synchronization pattern
Time between the end of the synchronization pattern and the start of
first keywords
Time between the end of the first and the beginning of 2 keywords
Time between the end of the 2nd Keywords and the beginning of the logical
Inversion of 2 Keywords as well as the time between the end of
logical inversion of the second Keywords and the beginning of the logical
Inversion of the initialization address
Time after the diagnostic test encounters an Init error and with
sending the init address starts new
Bytefolgezeit for transmitting blocks from the control unit to the tester
Time between the end of a block of the test apparatus and the start of
Block by the control unit
Time between the end of the last block of the SG and the beginning
a new block from the test device
Bytefolgezeit for transmitting blocks from the tester to the control unit;
5 baud initialization: P4min = 5 ms, Quick start: P4min = 0-5 ms
Bytefolgezeit for the request block "Diagnostic startup" (Mode 81)
the "fast start"
Time between the blocks from the SG to the TG
TWuP <
T1
T2
T3
T4
<
<
<
<
300 ms <
0 ms <
T5
P1
P2
P3
P4
P5
P6
<
<
<
<
<
<
20 ms
P2max
5s
20 ms
20 ms
P2max
P2min <
Period P3 min <
P4min <
5 ms
5 ms
<
<
7.4.5 Error Handling
Initialization:
In the case of an initialization error, caused by a timeout of T4 or
a faulty transmission, the controller switches within the time T5min back to receive
the stimulus to address.
Communication:
Receives the control unit a block failed checksum, it sends an SG
Acknowledge (Mode 7F) with the Acknowledgecode 13 hex (unintelligible requirement).
Detects the SG a faulty structure of the request block, so it behaves like a
Checksum error. A violation of the time interval P4 leads to the above errors, and
will be treated accordingly. In case of exceeding of P3max the SG terminates the
Communication.
All rights reserved by Robert Bosch GmbH, including in cases of proprietary rights applications. All rights of disposal such as copying and passing on to us.
DS / ESA Diagnosis - OBDII protocol 19 April 2002
0 bosch
EDC15 +
Y S01 281/120 - VG2
Page 7-39
7.5 OBDII telegram contents
The implementation of functional diagnostic test mode according to SAE J1979 meets the
California OBD II requirements for emissions-related systems (initialization with 33 hex):
Function
Reading emission-related information
Reading stored boundary conditions (freeze frame)
Read debounced registered emission-related fault codes
Clear / reset emission-related information
Lambda - probes - Monitoring (not implemented)
Reading of test results (not with VP44 (136))
Reading the present in the debouncing emission related DTCs
Reading out vehicle information
VIN (Vehicle Identification Number)
Calibration ID (program level)
Calibration Verification Number (quasi checksum)
7F ............. ECU Acknowledge
81 ............. diagnostic start
Appropriate response modes have an offset of +40 hex.
Read 7.5.1 Emissions-related information
Mode 01h
Block title
(Fashion)
01 .............
02 .............
03 .............
04 .............
05 .............
06 .............
07 .............
09 .............
With this mode, you get access to emission-related information, such as analog and digital
An input and output, and system status information. The request block contains a
Parameters - ID (PID) of the SG with the needed information is communicated.
Byte
1
2
3
4
5
6
Request block
Type identifier
Target
Source
Fashion - byte
PID
Checksum
TG-> SG
68
6A
Fx
01
xx
xx
The length of the request is 6 bytes, the length of the answer blocks is used by the
PID-dependent.
Byte
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
Response block
Type identifier
Target
Source
Fashion - byte
PID
Data A
Data B (opt.)
Data C (opt.)
Data D (opt.)
Checksum
SG-> TG
48
6B
10
41
xx
xx
xx
xx
xx
xx
All rights reserved by Robert Bosch GmbH, including in cases of proprietary rights applications. All rights of disposal such as copying and passing on to us.
19 April 2002 Diagnosis - OBDII telegram contents DS / ESA
Page 7-40 EDC15 +
Y S01 281/120 - VG2
0 bosch
7.5.1.1 PID 00h - Supported PIDs (01-20 hex)
The SG responds to mode 01 PID 00 with a message that the 4 bytes (bit-encoded)
Information contains. Each bit indicates whether a PID is supported or not.
-
-
0 = PID is not supported by SG
1 = PID is supported by the SG
Bit
7
6
...
7
...
0
PID
01
02
...
09
...
20
Byte
Data A
Data A
...
Data B
...
Data D
7.5.1.2 PID 01h - Error memory info / Readiness
The SG responds to mode 01 PID 01 with a message that the 4 bytes (bit-encoded)
Information contains.
Data A - Number of emission-related DTCs and MIL status
Bit
0-6
7
supported evaluation
Number of stored fault codes in the SG
(Debounced and emission-relevant)
0 = MIL is not activated by the SG
MIL = 1 is driven by the SG
Data B (Bits 0-3) and Data C - Each bit represents the support or no
Support of an onboard diagnostic evaluation
Data B includes continuous monitoring
Data C includes tests that are carried out at least once per trip,
wherein:
-
-
0 = test is not supported by SG
1 = Test is supported by the SG
Data B (Bits 4-7) and Data D - Each bit indicates the status of diagnostic evaluations
regarding Data B (Bits 0-3) and Data C:
- 0 = Test completed (= Readiness reached) or not supported.
- 1 = Test not yet finished
All rights reserved by Robert Bosch GmbH, including in cases of proprietary rights applications. All rights of disposal such as copying and passing on to us.
DS / ESA Diagnosis - OBDII telegram contents 19 April 2002
0 bosch
EDC15 +
Y S01 281/120 - VG2
Page 7-41
Data B:
Bit
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
Evaluation
supported:
Misfire monitoring
Fuel system monitoring
Comprehensive Component
monitoring
reserved (report as 0)
status:
Misfire monitoring
Fuel system monitoring
Comprehensive Component
monitoring
reserved (report as 0)
Evaluation
supported:
Zndaussetzerberwachung
Test fuel system
Review the overall system
not assigned
Status:
Zndaussetzerberwachung
Test fuel system
Review the overall system
not assigned
RBP
8
9
10
11
8
9
10
11
fbwRBP_MIS
fbwRBP_FUE
fbwRBP_COM
Record
fbwRBP_MIS
fbwRBP_FUE
fbwRBP_COM
Data C (supported) and data D (status):
Bit
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
Evaluation
Catalyst monitoring
Heated catalyst monitoring
Evaporative system monitoring
Secondary air system monitoring
A / C Refrigerant monitoring system
Oxygen sensor monitoring
Oxygen sensor heater monitoring
EGR system monitoring
Evaluation
Catalyst
Hot catalyst
Evaporation system
Secondary air - system
Coolant air conditioning
Lambda - probe
Lambda - Probes - heating
Exhaust gas recirculation
RBP
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
Record
fbwRBP_CAT
fbwRBP_EGR
About the Label fbwRBP_ ... can be apply the Readinessbitposition.
7.5.1.3 PID 02h - Trouble Code
is not supported in this mode.
7.5.1.4 PID 03h - 1 Fh - data
The SG responds with a message that contains 2 bytes of information.
The PIDs correspond to the message numbers listed in Appendix C of 0x03 to 0x1F. It is
the corresponding measured value returned.
The message numbers 0x000C and 0x0010 have a 2-byte information. The others are only
1 byte long.
7.5.1.5 PID 1Ch - OBD requirements that support the vehicle
The SG responds to mode 01 PID 01 with a message that contains 1 byte of information.
The content can be applied with xcwPID1C.
7.5.1.6 PID 21h - Distance with activated MIL
The SG responds to mode 01 PID 21 with a message that contains 2 bytes of information.
The distance traveled with activated MIL is issued. (1 bit corresponds to 1 km)
See also "Other Functions" "Distance Travelled with activated MIL"
All rights reserved by Robert Bosch GmbH, including in cases of proprietary rights applications. All rights of disposal such as copying and passing on to us.
19 April 2002 Diagnosis - OBDII telegram contents DS / ESA
Page 7-42 EDC15 +
Y S01 281/120 - VG2
0 bosch
7.5.2 Freeze frame read
Mode 02h
With this mode, you get access to a set of stored constraints which the
first occurrence of an emission-related fault is stored after OBD II (freeze frame). In the
Request block are PID - and freeze frame No. (OBD II freeze frame No.: 0). The
Length of the request is 7 bytes, the length of the answer blocks is used by the PID
dependent.
7.5.2.1 PID 00h - Supported PIDs (01-20 hex)
same with fashion 00h 00h PID.
7.5.2.2 PID 02h - Trouble Code
it returns the two bytes Trouble code of the error that caused the entry
7.5.2.3 PID 03h - 1 Fh - data
The SG responds with a message that contains 2 bytes of information.
The PIDs correspond to the message numbers listed in Appendix C of 0x03 to 0x1F. It is
the corresponding measured value returned.
These PIDs data byte A is always the Freeze Frame number. Data B corresponds to the value
the message. The message numbers 0x000C and 0x0010 are 2 bytes long. The second byte is
then in Data C.
Byte
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
Request block
Type identifier
Target
Source
Fashion - byte
PID
freeze frame No.
Checksum
TG-> SG
68
6A
Fx
02
xx
xx
xx
Byte
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
Response block
Type identifier
Target
Source
Fashion - byte
PID
Data A
Data B
Data C (opt.)
Data D (opt.)
Checksum
SG-> TG
48
6B
10
42
xx
xx
xx
xx
xx
xx
Note:
The Freeze Frame is (visible error under Mode 03) only when debounced registered error
issued, the deposit is, however, already at the first Occurrence of the error.
All rights reserved by Robert Bosch GmbH, including in cases of proprietary rights applications. All rights of disposal such as copying and passing on to us.
DS / ESA Diagnosis - OBDII telegram contents 19 April 2002
0 bosch
EDC15 +
Y S01 281/120 - VG2
Page 7-43
Read 7.5.3 Emission-related error
Mode 03h
Stored fault codes are read with fashion 03 by the TG. These two steps are
required:
-
About mode 01 PID 01, the number of stored fault codes must be determined.
If no errors stored, the SG responds with "saved 0 error".
- With fashion 03 all-bounced registered errors are output. The SG sends up to 3
Error codes per block, and if no error is stored, transmits the SG to this request,
no answer.
The length of the request block (Mode 03) is 5 bytes, and the length of the answer block is
set at 11 bytes. If less than 3 error codes transmitted, then the
corresponding data bytes 00 hex padded to a fixed block length of 11 bytes
sure. For the construction of error codes, see chapter "Error codes".
Byte
1
2
3
4
5
Request block
Type identifier
Target
Source
Fashion - byte
Checksum
TG-> SG
68
6A
Fx
03
xx
Byte
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
Response block
Type identifier
Target
Source
Fashion - byte
Error code 1 (high byte)
Error code 1 (low byte)
Error code 2 (high byte)
Error code 2 (low byte)
Error code 3 (high byte)
Error code 3 (low byte)
Checksum
SG-> TG
48
6B
10
43
xx
xx
xx
xx
xx
xx
xx
(If more than 3 error codes)
Byte
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
Response block
Type identifier
Target
Source
Fashion - byte
Error code 4 (high byte)
Error code 4 (low byte)
Error code 5 (high byte)
Error code 5 (low byte)
Error code 6 (high byte)
Error code 6 (low byte)
Checksum
SG-> TG
48
6B
10
43
xx
xx
xx
xx
xx
xx
xx
All rights reserved by Robert Bosch GmbH, including in cases of proprietary rights applications. All rights of disposal such as copying and passing on to us.
19 April 2002 Diagnosis - OBDII telegram contents DS / ESA
Page 7-44 EDC15 +
Y S01 281/120 - VG2
0 bosch
7.5.4 Emissions-related information delete
Mode 04h
Purpose of this mode is to delete or reset all emission-related information.
This refers to:
-
-
-
Clearing the Number of Error Codes (Mode 01 PID 01)
Deleting of fault codes (mode 03)
Delete the test results (Mode 06 - Test results are initialized to 0)
Byte
1
2
3
4
5
Request block
Type identifier
Target
Source
Fashion - byte
Checksum
TG-> SG
68
6A
Fx
04
xx
Byte
1
2
3
4
5
Response block
Type identifier
Target
Source
Fashion - byte
Checksum
SG-> TG
48
6B
10
44
xx
7.5.5 reading of test results
Mode 06h
This mode is not supported with VP44 (136). Otherwise:
In mode 6, the latest test results and the comparison values of are not
continuously monitored errors outputted. After deleting the error memory (Mode 04)
the test results for the WTF test, KTF test and start, stop position test are discarded and the
Values in the EEPROM overwritten with 0. The value 0 is "not performed test" as an identifier
used and must not be the result of a conversion with ... xcwCARF.
Byte
1
2
3
4
5
6
Request block
Type identifier
Target
Source
Fashion - byte
Test ID
Checksum
TG-> SG
68
6A
Fx
06
xx
xx
With the Test ID 0, the available test IDs can be queried.
All rights reserved by Robert Bosch GmbH, including in cases of proprietary rights applications. All rights of disposal such as copying and passing on to us.
DS / ESA Diagnosis - OBDII telegram contents 19 April 2002
0 bosch
EDC15 +
Y S01 281/120 - VG2
Page 7-45
Response block for available test ID's:
Byte
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
Response Block 1
Type identifier
Target
Source
Fashion - byte
Test ID
Antwortblocknr.
available ID's 1 to 8
available ID's 9-16
available ID's 17 to 24
available ID's 25 to 32
Checksum
SG-> TG
48
6B
10
46
00
FF
xx
xx
xx
xx
xx
The Test ID is be applied for:
- XcwWTF_ID
- XcwKTF_ID
- XcwSTT_ID
- XcwLDF_ID
Application Note:
A test result may be characterized by Hide XCW an invalid ID in the label ... _ID
(ID> 32, for example: 255) enters. The SG reports only permissible IDs as available and unavailable
IDs are not queried by the tester.
The normalization of the signals corresponding to the normalization in modes 1 and 2
The test results (except LDF and KTF-test) are at their entry into the EEPROM
translated at the exchange for the error memory to 1 byte. If the test results
read, as they are with the translation for the error memory converted to 2 bytes and
then prepared with a diagnosis of conversion for the output. Be administered values
also converted three times, so that the relations with respect to the stored in the EEPROM
Values are again.




...
...
...
...
dynamic plausibility of the water temperature sensor
dynamic plausibility of the fuel temperature sensor
Start-/Stoplagentest
Plausibility LDF with ADF
Times
Temperatures
Temp.Differenzen
Voltages
...
...
...
...
xcwCARFS_Z, xcwCARFO_Z, xcwCARDS_Z,
xcwCARDO_Z
xcwCARFS_T, xcwCARFO_T, xcwCARDS_T,
xcwCARDO_T
xcwCARFSdT, xcwCARFOdT, xcwCARDSdT,
xcwCARDOdT
xcwCARFSUD, xcwCARFOUD, xcwCARDSUD,
xcwCARDOUD
Bit coding of the response block number:
Bit 7 = 0: test limit (bytes 9/10) is maximum
Bit 7 = 1: test limit (bytes 9/10) is minimum
All rights reserved by Robert Bosch GmbH, including in cases of proprietary rights applications. All rights of disposal such as copying and passing on to us.
19 April 2002 Diagnosis - OBDII telegram contents DS / ESA
Page 7-46 EDC15 +
Y S01 281/120 - VG2
0 bosch
Response blocks in respect of Test ID "xcwWTF_ID":
For that answer three blocks are defined, in which time, temperature rise and final temperature
of tests performed each spend with their limits. Depending on how the test
has been completed, the following is transmitted:
Test not yet performed:
Identifier 00h in the EEPROM memory error after deletion.
It will be sent with FFh values 3 blocks.
Test negative:
It will be sent with the test results, all three blocks.
End of test achieved by minimum temperature rise:
It will block 1 (hours) and Unit 2 (temperature rise, minimum temperature rise)
sent.
End of test end temperature achieved by:
It will block 1 (times) and Block 3 (temperature at end of test, minimum temperature)
sent.
Byte
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
Byte
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
Response Block 1
Type identifier
Target
Source
Fashion - byte
xcwWTF_ID
Antwortblocknr.
Timer status at end of test (High)
Timer status at end of test (Low)
permissible temperature rise time (high)
permissible temperature rise time (Low)
Checksum
Response block 2
Type identifier
Target
Source
Fashion - byte
xcwWTF_ID
Antwortblocknr.
Temperature rise (High)
Temperature rise (Low)
Mindestemperaturanstieg (High)
Mindestemperaturanstieg (Low)
Checksum
SG-> TG
48
6B
10
46
xx
01
xx
xx
xx
xx
xx
SG-> TG
48
6B
10
46
xx
82
xx
xx
xx
xx
xx
All rights reserved by Robert Bosch GmbH, including in cases of proprietary rights applications. All rights of disposal such as copying and passing on to us.
DS / ESA Diagnosis - OBDII telegram contents 19 April 2002
0 bosch
EDC15 +
Y S01 281/120 - VG2
Page 7-47
Byte
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
Response block 3
Type identifier
Target
Source
Fashion - byte
xcwWTF_ID
Antwortblocknr.
Temperature at end of test (High)
Temperature at end of test (Low)
Minimum Temperature (High)
Minimum temperature (Low)
Checksum
SG-> TG
48
6B
10
46
xx
83
xx
xx
xx
xx
xx
Response blocks in respect of Test ID "xcwKTF_ID":
For that answer three blocks are defined, in which time, maximum temperature change and
attained temperature change integral of the tests carried out each with their limits
are output. Depending on the condition of the test, the following is transmitted:
Test not yet performed:
Identifier 00h in the EEPROM memory error after deletion.
It will be sent with FFh values 3 blocks.
Test negative:
It will be sent with the test results, all three blocks.
Test positive end achieved by maximum temperature change:
It will block 2 (maximum change in temperature, minimum temperature change) sent.
Test positive end achieved by changing the temperature integral:
EswirdBlock1 (times) undBlock3 (temperature change integral,
Minimum temperature integral) sent.
Byte
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
Response Block 1
Type identifier
Target
Source
Fashion - byte
xcwKTF_ID
Antwortblocknr.
Operating hours duration of the test (high)
Operating hours duration of the test (low)
allowable operating hours duration (High)
allowable operating hours duration (Low)
Checksum
SG-> TG
48
6B
10
46
xx
01
xx
xx
xx
xx
xx
All rights reserved by Robert Bosch GmbH, including in cases of proprietary rights applications. All rights of disposal such as copying and passing on to us.
19 April 2002 Diagnosis - OBDII telegram contents DS / ESA
Page 7-48 EDC15 +
Y S01 281/120 - VG2
0 bosch
Byte
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
Byte
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
Response block 2
Type identifier
Target
Source
Fashion - byte
xcwKTF_ID
Antwortblocknr.
reached max. Temperaturnd. (High)
reached max. Temperaturnd. (Low)
min. required Temperaturnd. (High)
min. required Temperaturnd. (Low)
Checksum
Response block 3
Type identifier
Target
Source
Fashion - byte
xcwKTF_ID
Antwortblocknr.
attained max. Temp-integral (High)
attained max. Temp-integral (Low)
min. Required Temp-integral (High)
min. Required Temp-integral (Low)
Checksum
SG-> TG
48
6B
10
46
xx
82
xx
xx
xx
xx
xx
SG-> TG
48
6B
10
46
xx
83
xx
xx
xx
xx
xx
Response blocks in respect of Test ID "xcwSTT_ID":
Byte
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
Response Block 1
Type identifier
Target
Source
Fashion - byte
xcwSTT_ID
Antwortblocknr.
dsoUist_Ag at end of test (High)
dsoUist_Ag at end of test (Low)
mrwNL_MOST (High)
mrwNL_MOST (Low)
Checksum
SG-> TG
48
6B
10
46
xx
1
xx
xx
xx
xx
xx
All rights reserved by Robert Bosch GmbH, including in cases of proprietary rights applications. All rights of disposal such as copying and passing on to us.
DS / ESA Diagnosis - OBDII telegram contents 19 April 2002
0 bosch
EDC15 +
Y S01 281/120 - VG2
Page 7-49
Byte
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
Byte
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
Byte
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
Response block 2
Type identifier
Target
Source
Fashion - byte
xcwSTT_ID
Antwortblocknr.
dsoUist_Ag at end of test (High)
dsoUist_Ag at end of test (Low)
mrwNL_MUST (High)
mrwNL_MUST (Low)
Checksum
Response Block 1
Type identifier
Target
Source
Fashion - byte
xcwSTT_ID
Antwortblocknr.
dsoUist_Ag at end of test (High)
dsoUist_Ag at end of test (Low)
mrwNL_MOSP (High)
mrwNL_MOSP (Low)
Checksum
Response block 2
Type identifier
Target
Source
Fashion - byte
xcwSTT_ID
Antwortblocknr.
dsoUist_Ag at end of test (High)
dsoUist_Ag at end of test (Low)
mrwNL_MUSP (High)
mrwNL_MUSP (Low)
Checksum
SG-> TG
48
6B
10
46
xx
82
xx
xx
xx
xx
xx
SG-> TG
48
6B
10
46
xx
3
xx
xx
xx
xx
xx
SG-> TG
48
6B
10
46
xx
84
xx
xx
xx
xx
xx
All rights reserved by Robert Bosch GmbH, including in cases of proprietary rights applications. All rights of disposal such as copying and passing on to us.
19 April 2002 Diagnosis - OBDII telegram contents DS / ESA
Page 7-50 EDC15 +
Y S01 281/120 - VG2
0 bosch
Response block in terms of test ID "xcwLDF_ID":
For this answer, a block is defined, in which the absolute difference occurred ADF LDF
(LdmLDFP_dp) will spend the tests performed with his limit ldwLA_MAX. Each
on how the test has been completed, is transmitted as follows:
Test not yet performed:
Identifier 00h in the EEPROM memory error after deletion.
There, the block is sent with FFh values.
Test was carried out:
There, the block is sent with the test result.
Byte
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
Response Block 1
Type identifier
Target
Source
Fashion - byte
xcwLDF_ID
Antwortblocknr.
abs. Diff.ADF / LDF at end of test (High)
abs. Diff.ADF / LDF at end of test (Low)
permissible abs. Diff.ADF / LDF (High)
permissible abs. Diff.ADF / LDF (Low)
Checksum
SG-> TG
48
6B
10
46
xx
01
xx
xx
xx
xx
xx
All rights reserved by Robert Bosch GmbH, including in cases of proprietary rights applications. All rights of disposal such as copying and passing on to us.
DS / ESA Diagnosis - OBDII telegram contents 19 April 2002
0 bosch
EDC15 +
Y S01 281/120 - VG2
Page 7-51
7.5.6 Current emission-related reading errors
Mode 07h
Located in the debouncing, error codes are read with fashion 07 by the TG. This
Fashion is in block structurally and functionally equivalent to Mode 03
Physical implementation of the SAE J1979 messages
The previously treated Diagnostics - test - a functional modes are addressing with 33 hex
based. When physical addressing only a single SG is addressed and thus
the answers only refer to the respective control unit.
7.5.7 Reading of vehicle information
Mode 09h
The Fashion 09 serves testers vehicle-specific information such as VIN (Vehicle Identification Number)
and Calibration ID's to provide. From the CARB are only the reading of the
Calibration ID (program level) and the Calibration of Verification Number (checksum)
prescribed.
The request block contains an Info Type (InT) with the SG needed information
is notified. The length of the request is 6 bytes, the length of the response block of
the used InfoType dependent.
Byte
1
2
3
4
5
6
Request block
Type identifier
Target
Source
Fashion - byte
InfoType (InT)
Checksum
TG-> SG
68
6A
Fx
09
InT
xx
7.5.7.1 Info Type = 00h
With the InfoType 00h all available are displayed in encoded form. The coding
corresponds to the mode 01 PID 00
Byte
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
Response block
Type identifier
Target
Source
Fashion - byte
InfoType (InT)
Message Count
available InT's 1-8
available InT's 9 to 16
available InT's 17 to 24
available InT's 25 to 32
Checksum
SG-> TG
48
6B
10
49
00
01
xx
xx
xx
xx
xx
(Dec)
(Dec)
(Dec)
(Dec)
All rights reserved by Robert Bosch GmbH, including in cases of proprietary rights applications. All rights of disposal such as copying and passing on to us.
19 April 2002 Diagnosis - OBDII telegram contents DS / ESA
Page 7-52 EDC15 +
Y S01 281/120 - VG2
0 bosch
7.5.7.2 VIN (chassis number) - InfoType 01h & 02h
This infotype is only learned immobilizer supports 3 data. If you disable or
Immobilizer 2, this information is not available.
This InfoType is bit 0 in xcwINF_M09 wegapplizierbar.
Bit 0 = 0 ... InfoType not available
Bit 0 = 1 ... InfoType is available when available
Info Type = 01h
Returns the number of messages (replies) to transfer the VIN at InfoType 02h. The
Number of transmitted answers is always 05h.
Byte
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
Response block
Type identifier
Target
Source
Fashion - byte
InfoType (InT)
Number of messages
Checksum
SG-> TG
48
6B
10
49
01
Notorious
xx
Info Type = 02h
Returns the chassis number consisting of 17 characters in ASCII in 5 blocks of 4 characters
the first three data bytes are filled with 00h.
Byte
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
Response block
Type identifier
Target
Source
Fashion - byte
InfoType (InT)
Message Count
Infobyte 1
Infobyte 2
Infobyte 3
Infobyte 4
Checksum
SG-> TG
48
6B
08
49
02
MsC01h
In10h
In20h
In30h
In4 # 1
xx
02h
# 2
# 3
# 4
# 5
03h
# 6
# 7
# 8
# 9
04h
# 10
# 11
# 12
# 13
05h
# 14
# 15
# 16
# 17
All rights reserved by Robert Bosch GmbH, including in cases of proprietary rights applications. All rights of disposal such as copying and passing on to us.
DS / ESA Diagnosis - OBDII telegram contents 19 April 2002
0 bosch
EDC15 +
Y S01 281/120 - VG2
Page 7-53
7.5.7.3 Cal ID (Calibration ID) - InfoType 03h & 04h
The Calibration Identification (CAL-ID) (eg, program version) or Calibration Verfication
Number (CVN) (eg, checksum) if an approval relevance must be changed only
is given. The CAL ID can about the label xcwCAL_ID be applied.
The Calibration ID must identify the installed software unique. This is from the OBD
Required provisions to emissions related software in a standardized form to
identify.
Voters who did not develop the car manufacturers have an unequal Calibration
ID, so that they are indistinguishable from those of the vehicle manufacturer.
This InfoType with bit 1 in xcwINF_M09 wegapplizierbar.
Bit 1 = 0 ... InfoType not available
Bit 1 = 1 ... InfoType is available
Info Type = 03h
Returns the number of messages (responses) for the transfer of the Cal-ID at InfoType 04h.
The number of responses to be transmitted is always 04h in this control unit. This
Controller only has a Cal ID.
Byte
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
Response block
Type identifier
Target
Source
Fashion - byte
InfoType (InT)
Number of messages (NMs)
Checksum
SG-> TG
48
6B
10
49
03
04
xx
Info Type = 04h
Returns the Calibration ID consists of 16 characters in ASCII in 4 blocks of 4 characters. This
16 characters on the label xcwCAL_ID be applied.
Byte
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
Response block
Type identifier
Target
Source
Fashion - byte
InfoType (InT)
Message Count
Infobyte 1
Infobyte 2
Infobyte 3
Infobyte 4
Checksum
SG-> TG
48
6B
08
49
04
MsC01h
In1 # 1
In2 # 2
In3 # 3
In4 # 4
xx
02h
# 5
# 6
# 7
# 8
03h
# 9
# 10
# 11
# 12
04h
# 13
# 14
# 15
# 16
All rights reserved by Robert Bosch GmbH, including in cases of proprietary rights applications. All rights of disposal such as copying and passing on to us.
19 April 2002 Diagnosis - OBDII telegram contents DS / ESA
Page 7-54 EDC15 +
Y S01 281/120 - VG2
0 bosch
7.5.7.4 CVN (Calibration Verification Number) - InfoType 05h & 06h
The InfoType with bit 2 in xcwINF_M09 wegapplizierbar.
Bit 2 = 0 ... InfoType not available Bit 2 = 1 ... InfoType is available
The OBD laws require these values to a change in the emission-related software
recognize. Each Calibration ID must be assigned distinctive and clearly a CVN.
Voters who did not develop the vehicle manufacturer, must have an unequal CVN,
so that they are indistinguishable from those of the vehicle manufacturer.
The CVNs are transmitted hex values in 4 bytes, the high byte data byte in A.
Calculations that do not require 4 bytes fill the empty data bytes $ 00
In this system, only a 2-byte Calibration ID is supported.
The control unit starts by request mode $ 09 PID $ 06 an internal checksum calculation with
a CRC32 algorithm on the code and data area. The calculation is only at KL15
a (dimK15 = 1) and 0 speed (dzmNmit = 0) performed one of the two conditions
the calculation is not satisfied exposed. As long as the checksum is not present, the answers
Control unit does not (Note: The calculation takes about 40 seconds). If the final
Calculated checksum, it will spend InfoType 06h as 4-byte value with tester request.
The variables edmCHKOBDH and edmCHKOBDL match the output value. As long as
communication with the tester is maintained, the check sum can be read. At
Query Mode $ 09 PID $ 06 for a new communication structure (irritation), the
Checksum calculation again.
In the status byte edmCHKstat the status of the calculation is displayed. The status word is of
K15 on / off or a communication structure (irritation) reset.
Bit 0
Bit 1
Bit 2
Bit 3
Requirement CVN calculation, calculation is
Completed checksum calculation
Check sum was spent on diagnosis
The calculation was performed at least once K15
interrupted, or dzmNmit> 0.
Info Type = 05h
Returns the number of messages (responses) for the transfer of CVN at InfoType 06h.
The number of responses to be transmitted is always 01h in this control unit. This
Control unit has only one CVN.
Byte
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
Response block
Type identifier
Target
Source
Fashion - byte
InfoType (InT)
Number of messages (NMs)
Checksum
SG-> TG
48
6B
10
49
05
01
xx
All rights reserved by Robert Bosch GmbH, including in cases of proprietary rights applications. All rights of disposal such as copying and passing on to us.
DS / ESA Diagnosis - OBDII telegram contents 19 April 2002
0 bosch
EDC15 +
Y S01 281/120 - VG2
Page 7-55
Info Type = 06h
Returns the CVN consisting of 4 bytes hex values in a block. The information bytes are the
calculated checksum (edmCHKOBDH as high byte and low byte as edmCHKOBDL).
Byte
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
Response block
Type identifier
Target
Source
Fashion - byte
InfoType (InT)
Message Count
Infobyte 1
Infobyte 2
Infobyte 3
Infobyte 4
Checksum
SG-> TG
48
6B
10
49
06
01
edmCHKOBDH - High Byte
edmCHKOBDH - Low Byte
edmCHKOBDL - High Byte
edmCHKOBDL - Low Byte
xx
7.5.8 Control unit-Acknowledge
This response of the control device represents an acknowledge of the receipt of the request,
or contains an Acknowledge - code indicating the reason for the rejection of a required
Response features.
Acknowledge - Codes:
Confirmation:
Request Status:
00 hex -
10 hex -
11 hex -
12 hex -
13 hex -
21 hex -
22 hex -
31 hex -
Request is accepted; confirmation
Gen. Refusal without giving reasons
Mode is not supported
Request is not supported or the invalid format
Incomprehensible request
Busy
Operating conditions not correct
Requirement outside the permitted range
SG-> TG
7F
xx
xx
Byte
1
2
3
Acknowledgeblock
Fashion - byte
Request - Fashion
Acknowledge - Code
The test mode build with respect to the data structure on the provision SAE J2190 (MODE = 81
Diagnostic start). Appropriate response modes have an offset of +40 hex.
All rights reserved by Robert Bosch GmbH, including in cases of proprietary rights applications. All rights of disposal such as copying and passing on to us.
19 April 2002 Diagnosis - OBDII telegram contents DS / ESA
Page 7-56 EDC15 +
Y S01 281/120 - VG2
0 bosch
7.5.9 Diagnosis - Home
With this diagnosis - Test - fashion the TG calls the "fast start" the information about
the definition of the block format. The TG sends after the wake-up pattern} (enterprises and individuals, see
Chapter "Initialising via Wake-up Pattern") this request block.
Byte
1
Request block
Fashion - byte
TG-> SG
81
The SG responds with the keywords 1 and 2:
Byte
1
2
3
Keyword 1
C2
43
C4
Response block
Fashion - byte
Keyword 1
Keyword 2
Keyword 2
46
46
46
SG-> TG
C1
C4
46
Block format
Length information in the type byte
Length information in the opt. Length byte
SG understands both block formats
All rights reserved by Robert Bosch GmbH, including in cases of proprietary rights applications. All rights of disposal such as copying and passing on to us.
DS / ESA Diagnosis - OBDII telegram contents 19 April 2002
0 bosch
EDC15 +
Y S01 281/120 - VG2
Page 7-57
7.6 Description of the parameter fields
Bitmask
0000 0001
0000 0010
0000 0100
0000 1000
0010 0000
1000 0000
Bit
0
1
2
3
5
7
Value
0
1
0
1
0
1
0
1
0
1
0
1
Software switch xcwDIASCH
Parity check stimulus word from
Parity check stimulus word
just Parity
odd parity
Login Request from
Log a request
Custom bytes from
Custom one byte
Review of the block counter of
A review of the block counter
Length WSC / parameter encoding = 3 bytes
Length WSC / parameter encoding = 4 bytes
Bitmask
0000 0001
0000 0010
0000 0100
0000 1000
0001 0000
Bit
0
1
2
3
4
Value software switch cowFUN_COM
0
1
0
1
0
1
0
1
0
KW71 protocol active
KW71 protocol is disabled
KW2000 protocol active
KW2000 protocol is disabled
Blink code active
Blink code disabled
McMess protocol active
McMess protocol is disabled
CARB active (only if KW2000 protocol is active)
CARB deakiviert (even if KW2000 protocol Martina Gladbach)
Name
xcwSGADR
xcwADRCARB
xcwKeybyt1
xcwKeybyt2
xcw_n_Reiz
xcwKSbyte1
xcwKSbyte2
xcwKSCheck
xcw_N_Ende
Communication header
During communication recording is from the tester a
ECU address (0 ... 127) to the control unit sent (without parity).
This must match xcwSGADR.
After the CARB-irritation over the word address 33h to report the
Control unit with this address.
1 Keybyte - is from the control unit to the tester sent (0 ... 255).
2 Keybyte - is from the control unit to the tester sent (0 ... 255)
The average speed during the dzoNmit must Kommunikationsauf-
exception <= xcw_n_Reiz be (0 ... N_max)
Custom Byte 1: The diagnostic switch xcwDIASCH
selectable (transfer after Keybyte 2).
Custom Byte 2
Checksum for the custom bytes
Demolition speed KW71 - Diagnosis
All rights reserved by Robert Bosch GmbH, including in cases of proprietary rights applications. All rights of disposal such as copying and passing on to us.
19 April 2002 Diagnosis - Description of the Parameter Blocks DS / ESA
Page 7-58 EDC15 +
Y S01 281/120 - VG2
0 bosch
Name
xcwt_sync
xcwt_reaby
xcwt_outby
xcwt_reabl
xcwt_outbl
xcwt_ini
xcw_twti
xcwFehzmax
Communication timing
Period of time, after which the control unit after reception of the SG address,
Sync sends (s).
Time from reception of a byte to the sending of a byte (s).
Byte Timeout - Within this period, the tester needs to send a byte
(s).
Time period in which the control device to a request block with a
Should respond response block (s).
Period in which the control unit receives a request block (s).
Time of termination of the stimulus recognition until the beginning of next
Stimulus detection (s).
Time of the fault memory to delete fault memory output, maximum time
Save for adaptation.
Number of trials in establishing communications
(0 ... 255)
Control unit identification
Bosch Hardwarenr. (10 characters + 1 end characters)
Bosch Softwarenr. (10 characters + 1 end characters)
Customers HW / SW No. (11 characters + 1 end characters)
Date of manufacture (MMYY, 4 characters + 1 end characters)
SG-1 ID (25 characters + 1 end code) -
is sent as the first block.
SG-ID 2 (9 characters + 1 end code) -
is transmitted as the third block.
SG-ID 2 (9 characters + 1 end code) -
is output as a change in status for channel 80.
Message ID number of an additional control unit -
(Such as pump controller with VP44)
Name
xcwBHardNr
xcwBSoftNr
xcwKHSNr
xcwDatum
xcwSGBlk1
xcwSGBlk2
xcwSGBlk3
xcwSGfrID1
Note: The end character FF (Hex) is automatically generated by DAMOS!
Name
xcwPEEPROM
xcwPFGROn
xcwPFGROff
xcwPFGG1
xcwPFGG2
xcwPHGBOff
xcwPKSKon
xcwPKSKoff
xcwPRDYm1
xcwPADV
xcwPADE
Passwords, the actual use of the specific project
When you log in with this password will have access to all E2PROM -
Functions enabled.
With this password, the FGR / ADR can be turned on.
With this password, the FGR / ADR can be turned off.
Password FGG constant 1
Password FGG constant 2
Turn off password HGB
Password KSK switch for hot climate
Turn off password KSK
Password Readiness for the next Driving Cycle
Password ADR / var maximum speed be applied
Password ADR / fixed speed be applied
All rights reserved by Robert Bosch GmbH, including in cases of proprietary rights applications. All rights of disposal such as copying and passing on to us.
DS / ESA Diagnosis - Description of the Parameter Blocks 19 April 2002
0 bosch
EDC15 +
Y S01 281/120 - VG2
Page 7-59
Name
xcwDrSchw
xcwMaIoTim
Thresholds for actuator test
Speed threshold for the actuator test, the control of a
Controller output and the basic setting
The maximum time for which an actuator, or the control of a test
Controller output is performed.
Name (.. _ .. 1-40_1-4) Mekanaltabelle
xcwK .. _ .. number of an entry in Group Table - 255 represents a
Dummy entry.
xcwK100auflenkt the specified channel to on channel 100.
Name (.. 1-21, actuator Table
last entry = 0)
xcwStell .. Message number of the actuator - This number must be the
Message number to be an end stage.
xcwSt .. TVDas maximum duty cycle with which the actuator can be driven
is (%).
xcwSt .. TimTaktzeit - The actuator is for the time xcwStxxTim with xcwStxxTV
driven, for the subsequent period xcwStxxTim with 100% - xcwStxxTV ..
This is done until the end of time xcwMaIoTim. (s)
xcwCode .. actuator code - This code is from the SG to the tester as
Identification for the controlled actuator sent.
Name (.. 0-80)
xcwGrp .. _A
Megruppentabelle
Standard display number - This number is from the SG to the tester
transfer and allows this formula to a representation of a
Select the measurement value in engineering units.
Normalizing - If sent by the control unit to the tester and
this used to calculate the physical measurement value.
Message number of the measured value
xcwGrp .. _N
xcwGrp _M ..
Name (.. _ .. 125 - CAN - Mekanaltabelle
129c1 - 4)
xcwK .. c .. number of an entry in CAN Busteilnehmertabelle -255 represents a
Dummy entry.
Name (.. 0-5)
xcwCAN .. _X
xcwCAN .. _N
xcwCAN _M ..
xcwCAN_A
Name
xcwMWB_KF
Megruppentabelle
Linking mask with camRCSTAT
Normalizing
Text number of the bus station
Standard display number for all CAN Measured value blocks equal
unnormalized measured value
Message numbers for the non-normalized output of measured values in the
Channels 190-199 and 0
All rights reserved by Robert Bosch GmbH, including in cases of proprietary rights applications. All rights of disposal such as copying and passing on to us.
19 April 2002 Diagnosis - Description of the Parameter Blocks DS / ESA
Page 7-60 EDC15 +
Y S01 281/120 - VG2
0 bosch
7.7 Error Codes
Error codes are in accordance with SAE J2012 of 2 bytes together, the first 4 bits (first
Nibble) characterize the area and the following three nibble BCD-coded error code.
0-9 0-9
Error code BCD - coded
0-9
00 - Group 0
01 - Group 1
10 - Group 2
11 - Group 3
00 - powertrain
01 - chassis
10 - body
11 - reserved
P (engine drive train)
C (chassis)
B (body / structure)
U
Figure XCOM08: Structure of the error codes in accordance with SAE J2012
7.7.1 Error Code List
The individual error paths of the motor drive train are in accordance with the SAEJ2012
to apply a hint of scheme.
All rights reserved by Robert Bosch GmbH, including in cases of proprietary rights applications. All rights of disposal such as copying and passing on to us.
DS / ESA Diagnostics - Error Codes 19 April 2002
0 bosch
EDC15 +
Y S01 281/120 - VG2
Page 7-61
7.8 McMess
McMess is a transmission protocol for a communication between a control device (SG)
and a test device (TG). McMess has been optimized for the use of the K-line as
Transmission medium. The K-line is a digital single-wire interface with Ubatt - level. The
InformationenwerdenhnlichdemV.24-Standardasynchronbertragen.Die
Transmission units consist of 9 data bits, start and stop bit. The SG and TG
never send the same time. With McMess the TG to quickly check RAM contents from the SG. The
SG is minimal load in comparison to other protocols.
Definition of the address space:
McMess address
0000 - 0FFF
SG address
F0000 - F0FFF or
D8000 - D8FFF or
E4000 - E4FFF
depending on Datensatzvar.
F1000 - FBFFF or
D9000 - E3FFF or
E5000 - EFFFF
depending on Datensatzvar.
C000 - DDFF
DE00 - DEFF
DF00 - DFFF
E000 - E7FF
E800 - EEFF
EF00 - EFFF
F000 - F5FF
F600 - fdff
FE00 - FFFF
Designation
System table
1000 - BFFF DAMOS -
Maps
Parameters, Characteristics
C000 - DDFF
DE00 - DEFF
DF00 - DFFF
E000 - E7FF
E800 - EEFF
EF00 - EFFF
F000 - F5FF
F600 - fdff
FE00 - FFFF
External RAM
Gate Array - control register
Olda
Extended RAM
reserved
CAN
Internal uC register
Internal RAM
Internal uC register
All rights reserved by Robert Bosch GmbH, including in cases of proprietary rights applications. All rights of disposal such as copying and passing on to us.
19 April 2002 Diagnosis - McMess DS / ESA
Page 7-62 EDC15 +
Y S01 281/120 - VG2
0 bosch
In the current version McMess following codes are implemented:
o)
o)
o)
o)
o)
o)
o)
o)
o)
o)
o)
o)
o)
o)
o)
o)
o)
o)
02
04
07
0B
0D
0E
10
13
19
1C
2A
25
26
31
3B
3D
3E
4F
Read pp
Read Var 1
Read Var 2
ROM (Var 2 Var 1Read)
EEPROM (Var 2 Var 1Read)
RAM (2 Var, Var 1Read)
Byte (Var 1Read) the request table
Error memory (Var 2 Var 1Read)
SG-identification (DAMOS ID) number (Var1Read)
Read checksum
System initial start trigger (pp =! = 11h)
Var1: = pp (used as address LSB)
Var2: = pp (used as address MSB)
Byte (Var1) The request table: = pp
Log off (only if pp = EEh)
Activate ignition Synchronous Fairs
Enable Time Synchronous Measuring with as ignition synchronous menu
Output menu length for function 3D and 3E
In most functions, the variables Var1 and Var2 serve as addresses (Var1 as low byte
and Var2 as high byte). The abbreviation stands for pp parameters and the character ""Represents a
Increasing the variable by 1 More detailed information on the individual functions of the
McMess specification 2/10 refer to.
All rights reserved by Robert Bosch GmbH, including in cases of proprietary rights applications. All rights of disposal such as copying and passing on to us.
DS / ESA Diagnosis - McMess 19 April 2002
0 bosch
EDC15 +
Y S01 281/120 - VG2
Page 8-1
8 Monitoring Concept
8.1 Overview
This chapter describes monitoring algorithms and the corresponding replacement functions that are performed when errors are detected. There are the
Monitoring of all components and functions, any possible error (indicated in italics in the text) and all the parameters required for this
described. All error bits and parameters are also to facilitate the search, listed in the index. The error bits associated with the
Error paths (see also Chap. Error handling) can be found in an overview in Appendix E. (For data on the form cowFARFAB .., .. or cowFLDRAB
cowFMEBEG .., points at the end of the numbers 1,2,3 or 4 dar.)
Structure of the table:
Surveillance monitoring strategy
of
What is on-
monitored
How it is monitored
Data Replacement function Data
Parameters for
Replacement function
Which parameters What happens if the monitoring ei-
ter will recognize frnen error: = Replacement function
monitoring
required
Attention! Each error is debounced separately (see Chap. Error handling,
Debouncing). For this purpose there are separately applicable parameters for each error.
These parameters are not listed!
All rights reserved by Robert Bosch GmbH, including in cases of proprietary rights applications. All rights of disposal such as copying and passing on to us.
DS / ESA Monitoring concept -Survey 19 April 2002
0 bosch
EDC15 +
Y S01 281/120 - VG2
Page 8-2
8.2 exhaust gas recirculation (ARF)
Surveillance monitoring strategy
of
Control shut-
deviation
It is positive (error fbbEARSpR) or negative (Error fbbEARSnR) deviation over-
monitored. Exceeds the deviation for the time fbwEARSpRA or fbwEARSnRA the value +
aroEmax or - (aroEmax), then an error is detected. The value aroEmax is from the maps
arwEmaxGKF and arwEmaxFKF determined as a function of air mass setpoint, speed and quantity.
The monitoring is done only if aroEmax is <= arwEueAUS.
Data
arwEmaxGKF
arwEmaxFKF
arwEueAUS
Replacement function
Shutdown of the ARF
Shutdown of the LDR (be applied)
Full-load (be applied)
Data
cowFLDRAB.
cowFMEBEG.
8.3 exhaust gas recirculation actuator (AR1, AR2, AR3)
Surveillance monitoring strategy
of
Amplifier
Neutral
Amplifier
Short circuit
Status line
In Idle state the final stage of fbbEAR1_O error is set.
If status Short circuit of the output stage of the error fbbEAR1_K is set.
The control valve is monitored in its function via a status line. After a K15, has a flan-
edge change from LOW to HIGH be recognized on the status line. If the line at the beginning to
HIGH to LOW or too long (t> arwRK_LT) or then not long enough in the HIGH state
(T <arwRK_HT), the status line is assumed to be defective and the error is fbbEAR1_S
placed. No monitoring of the status line is performed when the last follow-up was interrupted
(EdmSTAUSNL = 1) or it was not a hardware initialization.
Is the level of status line as LOW so that a defect of the control valve is indicated, and the error
lerbit fbbEAR1_D is set.
In Idle state the final stage of fbbEAR2_O error is set.
If status Short circuit of the output stage of the error fbbEAR2_K is set.
In Idle state the final stage of fbbEAR3_O error is set.
If status Short circuit of the output stage of the error fbbEAR3_K is set.
arwRK_HT
arwRK_LT
Data Replacement function
Shutdown of the ARF (be applied)
Shutdown of the LDR (be applied)
Full-load (be applied)
Shutdown of the ARF (be applied)
Shutdown of the LDR (be applied) Vol-
load limited (be applied)
Data
cowFARFAB.
cowFLDRAB.
cowFMEBEG.
cowFARFAB.
cowFLDRAB.
cowFMEBEG.
Control flap
Amplifier
Neutral
Amplifier
Short circuit
Amplifier
Neutral
Amplifier
Short circuit
Shutdown of the ARF (be applied)
Shutdown of the LDR (be applied) Vol-
load limited (be applied)
Shutdown of the ARF (be applied)
Shutdown of the LDR (be applied)
Full-load (be applied)
no
cowFARFAB.
cowFLDRAB.
cowFMEBEG.
cowFARFAB.
cowFLDRAB.
cowFMEBEG.
All rights reserved by Robert Bosch GmbH, including in cases of proprietary rights applications. All rights of disposal such as copying and passing on to us.
DS / ESA Surveillance - exhaust gas recirculation (ARF) 19 April 2002
0 bosch
EDC15 +
Y S01 281/120 - VG2
Page 8-3
8.4 Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC)
Surveillance monitoring strategy
of
Suppression
the error
monitoring
In general, the Fehelrerkennung the error fbbEACC_B, fbbEACC_C, fbbEACC_D, fbbEACC_F,
fbbEACC_Q, fbbEACC_V, fbbEACC_P and fbbEACC_A stopped when the suppression of the CAN
Fault monitoring is active.
The suppression of the CAN error monitoring to prevent unnecessary error messages in the case of environ-
environmental conditions in which a communication of all CAN bus nodes are not assumed
can (see section CAN - suppression of errors of the external control device intervention).
During the suppression of error monitoring the debounce times already of any currently
located in debouncing error fbbEACC_Q reset.
If the bit is "ADR defective" is set in the ADR1 message, the error is reported fbbEACC_D
If the error ID 0xFFh recognized in the required torque, the error is reported fbbEACC_F-
det.
If requested at a speed below the threshold mrwFAS_BVK moment, the
Reported error fbbEACC_V.
If during OFF signal from the keypad (NOT (AND dimFGA dimFGL)) or driver braking
(DimBRE OR dimBRK) requested moment, the error is reported fbbEACC_P
If caw for the time ... _RTO receive any new message or is the message content inconsistent
(In two immediately successive attempts to read the data of the message was the content
already again partially overwritten), the error fbbEACC_Q when the suppression is reported,
the CAN error monitoring is not active.
Until the error finally broken, continues to be used as a substitute value, the ultimate message.
With correct (or incorrect) checksum error counter is decremented to 0 (or mreACC_Cog)
(Or incremented). Exceeds the error counter value mreACC_Cmx the error ECEC
ACC_C reported.
Is there a difference of the value of the current message count by more than mrwACC_Bmx of the pre-
reciprocating value, the error is reported fbbEACC_B. Similarly, if the message count on
more than mrwACC_Bmn main program periods does not change.
To avoid clocked malfunction of the ACC without a fault, is in every main pro-
program cycle in which an event occurs that one of the errors fbbEACC_B, fbbEACC_C, ECEC
ACC_D, fbbEACC_F, fbbEACC_V, fbbEACC_P reports increases a counter by the value 10, otherwise
is decremented by 1. If the counter exceeds the threshold mrwACC_Amx is event-driven error
registered fbbEACC_A
Data Replacement function Data
"ADR defective"
via CAN
Misrecognition
in Momentanf.
Requirement
under v-
Threshold
Requirement
implausible
CAN error
mrwFAS_BVK
Deactivation of the ACC engagement over
Ramp to 0
Deactivation of the ACC engagement over
Ramp to 0
Deactivation of the ACC engagement over
Ramp to 0
Deactivation of the ACC engagement over
Ramp to 0
Deactivation of the ACC engagement over
Ramp to 0
Checksum
error-GRA-
Message
Embassy
unplausi counter-
bel
General
Plausibility
mrwACC_Cmx
mrwACC_Cog
mrwACC_Bmx
mrwACC_Bmn
mrwACC_Amx
Deactivation of the ACC engagement over
Ramp to 0
Deactivation of the ACC engagement over
Ramp to 0
Deactivation of the ACC engagement over
Ramp to 0
All rights reserved by Robert Bosch GmbH, including in cases of proprietary rights applications. All rights of disposal such as copying and passing on to us.
DS / ESA Surveillance - Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) 19 April 2002
0 bosch
EDC15 +
Y S01 281/120 - VG2
Page 8-4
8.5 Working speed controller (ADR)
Surveillance monitoring strategy
of
Rule-
deviation
It is positive (error fbbEADRpR) or negative (Error fbbEADRnR) deviation over-
monitored. Exceeds the deviation for the time fbwEADRpRA or fbwEADRnRA the value
mrwADR_pRA or mrwADR_nRA as a fault is detected.
Data
mrwADR_pRA
mrwADR_nRA
Replacement function
Shutdown of the ADR
Data
8.6 atmospheric pressure sensor (ADF)
Surveillance monitoring strategy
of
Signal range Signal Range Check up (error fbbEADF_H) when anoU_ATM> anwADF_MAX
Signal RangeCheck down (error fbbEADF_L) when anoU_ATM <anwADF_MIN
Data
anwADF_MAX
anwADF_MIN
Replacement function
It is one of the boost pressure Compute-
used ter replacement value
(See chap. Input signals).
With a defective LDF is the VGW
anwADF_VOR used.
Data
anwADF_VOR
8.7 Battery voltage (U_bat)
Surveillance monitoring strategy
of
Signal range Signal Range Check up (error fbbEUBT_H) when anoU_UBAT> anwBAT_MAX
Below the Fahrgschwindigkeitsschwelle anwBAT_FG the signal range check is upward (
Error fbbEUBT_H) hidden. The healing of the fault can be made without suppression.
Signal RangeCheck down (error fbbEUBT_L) when anoU_UBAT <anwBAT_MIN
Data
anwBAT_MAX
anwBAT_MIN
anwBAT_FG
Replacement function
Default value
Data
anwBAT_VOR
All rights reserved by Robert Bosch GmbH, including in cases of proprietary rights applications. All rights of disposal such as copying and passing on to us.
DS / ESA Surveillance - working speed controller (ADR) 19 April 2002
0 bosch
EDC15 +
Y S01 281/120 - VG2
Page 8-5
8.8 Brake Centre (BCC, BRK)
Surveillance monitoring strategy
of
Plausibility
Main with red-
undantem
Brake contact
Brake signals implausible:
On implausibility of brake signals is decided when only one signal is logically active.
Dynamic fault detection:
Every time for a time t_dyn> threshold diwtBREdyn continuously an implausible
Brake signal condition exists, is recognized on a provisional defective brake contact and a counter
dioBREPLAU incremented. This counter is saved in the wake as dimBREPLAU in the EEPROM.
If the counter exceeds a specified value diwPBREdyn, the brake contacts are defective on
detected (error fbbEBRE_P). The dynamic defect detection by means diwPBREdyn = 255 deacti-
fourth.
Static defect detection:
A defective brake contact is detected when t_stat for a time> diwtBREsta implausible
Brake signal conditions exist. The time t_stat is the accumulated time of implausible states without
interim recognition for plausible braking signals (see below, Intact recognition). If both signals
the same state in which debounce is stopped t_stat. The value diwtBREsta = 655350000 o de-
activates the static defect detection.
Brake signals plausible:
On plausible brake signals is decided when the time diwtBREiO both signals the condition
"Brakes" (in fulfillment of this condition, the time is t_stat reset) and then both Si-
for the time diwtBREiO Show signals the status "Not brakes". In this case, the counter is di-
oBREPLAU reset to 0.
Intact recognition:
The fbbEBRE_P error "brake contacts implausible" is healed in operation when the in fbwEBRE_PB
fixed number of "plausible braking signals" are recognized. The intact recognition is at
dioBREPLAU> 0.
Note:
The recognition of "static error" is used as a supplement for error cases, for example on the driving cycle to-
lasting image error (plug that fell on the brake pedal - only effective in against the same input
suppressor circuit of the two signals). Both defect detections act on the error fbbEBRE_P, where
Due to the already included in the detection debounce on timer / counter value fbwEBRE_PA
is to be applied to 0.
Data
fbwEBRE_PA
diwtBREdyn
diwPBREdyn
diwtBREsta
diwtBREiO
Replacement function
Shutdown of the FGR
Data
All rights reserved by Robert Bosch GmbH, including in cases of proprietary rights applications. All rights of disposal such as copying and passing on to us.
DS / ESA Surveillance - Brake Centre (BCC, BRK) 19 April 2002
0 bosch
EDC15 +
Y S01 281/120 - VG2
Page 8-6
8.9 onboard supply control unit (BSG)
Surveillance monitoring strategy
of
CAN message
BSG_Last, bot-
Community errors
Data Replacement function Data
fbwEBSG_QABotschaftstimeout BSG_Last: Is receiving the CAN message BSG_Last
applied
fbwEBSG_QB (cowVAR_BSG = 2) monitors the time between two messages. If for the
time caw ... _RTO
fbwEBSG_QTkeine receive new message or message content is inconsistent (in two
immediately successive-
read the other following experiments, the data of the message was the content already again partially
overwritten), so back up data from the spare data bytes caw100_DTx be processed. From this
Time, as long as the fault condition is present, the error fbbEBSG_Q (time-controlled) reported,
if the suppression of the CAN error monitoring is not active.
The suppression of the CAN error monitoring to prevent unnecessary error messages in the case of environ-
environmental conditions in which a communication of all CAN bus nodes are not assumed
can (see section CAN - suppression of errors of the external control device intervention).
During the suppression of error monitoring the debounce times already of any currently
located in debouncing error fbbEBSG_Q reset.
All rights reserved by Robert Bosch GmbH, including in cases of proprietary rights applications. All rights of disposal such as copying and passing on to us.
DS / ESA Surveillance - Network control unit (BSG) 19 April 2002
0 bosch
EDC15 +
Y S01 281/120 - VG2
Page 8-7
8:10 CAN bus (CA0)
Surveillance monitoring strategy
of
Bus error
Data Replacement function
CAN - Volume interventions are canceled
chen. The monitoring of Botschaftsti-
meout gear / brake is hidden
(S.H. amount External intervention / gearbox).
If Ecomatic is performed via CAN as
is for the rest of the driving cycle
Ecomatic disabled.
Data
If the CAN module is in bus-off state (camSTATUS0.1), so the error is reported fbbECA0_O-cawINF_INI
det, unless one of the hiding conditions for CAN monitoring is active. The CAN is by cawINF_DLY
anwK15_H_UAblauf of cawINF_TBO reinitialized.
anwK15_H_O
If the CAN module in the Warning state (camSTATUS0.3), the error is reported fbbECA0_W,
unless one of the hiding conditions for CAN monitoring is active.
The suppression of the bus monitoring to prevent unnecessary error messages in the case of ambient
conditions in which a communication of all CAN bus devices can not be assumed
and therefore is also not provided.
The suppression of the CAN monitor is active as long as
the start is (camSTATUS0.8 = 1; mrmSTART_B = 1 and dzmNmit <0 or t <cawINF_INI)
the tracking is active (camSTATUS0.9 = 1),
the tension of the drying K15 anmK15 <anwK15_H_U (camSTATUS0.10 = 1) (in anmK15>
anwK15_H_O this condition is re-enabled)
the delay time is not cawINF_DLY after the disappearance of the above conditions
has expired.
Is fbbECA0_O A possibly already up to date in-debounce errors are reset.
(Detailed description of monitoring camSTATUS0 see "External lot of intervention via CAN")
The suppression of the bus monitoring is terminated only after no more blanking reason to-
lies, and then the delay time cawINF_DLY has expired.
All rights reserved by Robert Bosch GmbH, including in cases of proprietary rights applications. All rights of disposal such as copying and passing on to us.
DS / ESA Surveillance - CAN Bus (CA0) 19 April 2002
0 bosch
EDC15 +
Y S01 281/120 - VG2
Page 8-8
8:11 Crash Detection (CRA)
Surveillance monitoring strategy
of
GRA and
Fuel
Shutdown
Data Replacement function
The error fbbECRA_A leads to ex-
circuit of the GRA.
Data
There are two ways to select the input signal. Is the CAN-activation for diefbwECRA_A.
Crash-active detection (comCLG_SIG.7 = 1) is the signal via CAN (equivalent cowFUN_CRA =
2, message comFUN_CRA = 2). If the CAN - Activation not active (comCLG_SIG.7 = 0) can be
the input of the function on the SW - Switch cowFUN_CRA switch (0 = no / 1 = PWM / 2 = CAN).
The current switch position displays the message comFUN_CRA to (configuration of message com-fbwECRA_B.
FUN_CRA see chapter "CAN activation by coding"). The PWM evaluation provides
crmCRSTpwm to the crash detection, while for crash detection via the CAN airbag1-
Message is used (byte 0, bits 5-7). Can croCR_STAT The crash level values from 0 to 3 at-
take. The following table shows the allocation of the crash steps of:
CAN bits 5-7 crash-crash level designation
no Crash0000
001Gurtstraffer1
US201x
RDW31xx
The error fbbECRA_B represents the motor
and interrupts the fuel supply
(EKP, TAV, TIP).
Figure UEBE_08: Crash-stage
CAN
crmCRSTpwm
2
1
0
comFUN_CRA
croCR_STAT
crwCR_ST_A
a
a> = b
b
fbbECRA_A
fbbECRA_Q
fbbECRA_P
fbbECRA_Z
fbbECRA_C
> 1
crwCR_ST_B
a
a> = b
b
fbbECRA_B
Figure UEBE_07: Overview crash detection
All rights reserved by Robert Bosch GmbH, including in cases of proprietary rights applications. All rights of disposal such as copying and passing on to us.
DS / ESA Surveillance - crash detection (CRA) 19 April 2002
0 bosch
EDC15 +
Y S01 281/120 - VG2
Page 8-9
Continued crash detection
Surveillance monitoring strategy
of
Suppression
the error
monitoring
In general, the error detection of fault fbbEABG_Q, fbbEABG_C, and fbbEABG_Z is stopped,
if the suppression of the CAN error monitoring is active. The suppression of the CAN
Error monitoring to prevent unnecessary error messages in the event of environmental conditions in which
communication of all CAN bus devices can not be assumed (see section CAN -
Suppression of errors of the external control device intervention).
During the suppression of error monitoring the debounce times already possibly the current
located in debouncing above error reset.
Message timeout airbag 1: For vehicles with crash detection via CAN (comFUN_CRA = 2)
the time between two messages monitored. If for the time caw ... _RTO no new message received
catch or is the message content inconsistent (in two immediately successive experiments,
read the data of the message was the content already again partially overwritten), then the
FbbECRA_Q error (time-controlled) reported when the suppression of the CAN error monitoring is not
is active. If the error is finally fbbECRA_Q defective, the crash level is set to zero.
The suppression of the CAN error monitoring to prevent unnecessary error messages in the case of environ-
environmental conditions in which a communication of all CAN bus nodes are not assumed
can (see section CAN - suppression of errors of the external control device intervention).
During the suppression of error monitoring the debounce times already of any currently
located in debouncing error fbbECRA_Q reset.
The error message has the highest priority, followed by checksum error message and error counters.
Is there a difference of the value of the current message count by more than mrwABG_Bmx (15-disabled
vierbar) from the preceding value, the error is reported fbbECRA_Z. Likewise, if the
Message count more than mrwABG_Bmn (deactivated with 127) main program periods do not change-
changed. At a constant message count less mrwABG_Bmn the last valid message is
evaluated. The function is switched off in any case, as soon as the message count is defective as final
was detected.
With correct (or incorrect) checksum is an error counter to 0 (or mrwABG_Cog) decre-
benefits (or incremented). Exceeds the error counter value mrwABG_Cmx, the error
fbbECRA_C reported. If a checksum has been detected as faulty, the last valid bot-
community uses, that is, the crash state retains its value until the next valid message or to
the checksum is reported as permanently faulty. The checksum test is performed with mrwABG_Cmx
= 127 disabled.
Data Replacement function Data
CAN message
Airbag 1, bot-
Community errors
fbwECRA_QA
fbwECRA_QB
fbwECRA_QT
The crash detection via CAN is out-
switched.
The crash-level is set to 0.
Embassy
unplausi counter-
bel
mrwABG_Bmx
mrwABG_Bmn
The crash detection via CAN is out-
switched.
The crash-level is set to 0.
Checksum
error airbag1-
Message
mrwABG_Cmx
mrwABG_Cog
The crash detection via CAN is out-
switched.
The crash-level is set to 0.
All rights reserved by Robert Bosch GmbH, including in cases of proprietary rights applications. All rights of disposal such as copying and passing on to us.
DS / ESA Surveillance - crash detection (CRA) 19 April 2002
0 bosch
EDC15 +
Y S01 281/120 - VG2
Page 8-10
fbwECRA_PA
fbwECRA_PB
fbwECRA_PT
The crash detection via PWM is
turned off.
PWM
Crash signal
In Crash Detection via PWM from airbag SG a PWM signal is sent to the motor-SG to
to signal a crash.
In normal operation (no crash), the PWM signal 40 ms and 200 ms low high. In the event of a crash is 20x
the inverted signal sent: 40ms and 200ms high low. The evaluation is performed with a signal-
time tolerance of + -20% (see chapter 9.1.9). There must be at least an applicable number of crash
signal sequences (crwPWM_ANZ) are detected before the signal is considered as a crash event.
If the PWM signal is counted as a crash event occurs, the GRA AND fuel cut. This
done by crmCRSTpwm is set to stage the crash crwCR_ST_B. If a no-crash signal-
Sequence recognized crmCRSTpwm is supplied with the crash level 0. In an implausible PWM
Signal (spikes or Flatline: by crwCR_TOUT timeout detected) is crmCRSTpwm with the
Crash Level 0 provides and the error fbbECRA_P reported defective.
8:12 Electric fan - power amplifier (GER)
Surveillance monitoring strategy
of
Amplifier
Neutral
Amplifier
Short circuit
In Idle state the final stage of fbbEGER_O error is set.
If status Short circuit of the output stage of the error fbbEGER_K is set.
Data Replacement function
Send by 0xFFh CAN Motor5
Byte 5
Send by 0xFFh CAN Motor5
Byte 5
Data
All rights reserved by Robert Bosch GmbH, including in cases of proprietary rights applications. All rights of disposal such as copying and passing on to us.
DS / ESA Surveillance - Electric fan - power amplifier (GER) 19 April 2002
0 bosch
EDC15 +
Y S01 281/120 - VG2
Page 8-11
kuwLU1min
kuwLU1max
kuwLU2min
kuwLU2max
Send by 0xFFh CAN Motor5
Byte 5
Fan 1 or
Fan 2
blocked
The cooler fan power amplifier (KLE) announces the MSG via bi-directional PWM line (SG-Pin 11, for
VM +) or if the fans do not work. KLE pulls the line for a certain time to LOW.
The distinction between Lfter1 Lfter2 and is realized by the time duration. Lfter1 blocked
is recognized when the PWM line for a while between kuwLU1min and kuwLU1max LOW pulled
tions was. For fans 2 labels kuwLU2min and kuwLU2max apply. The tolerance must in this La-
bels are involved. Between the low phases, the line is released.
If a fan reported defective, the output stage remains actuated so that a possible Fehlerhei-
tion can take place.
Application Note: Example: PWM signal is between the sec Massetastungen for 2. enabled =>
fbwEGER_xB must be applied more than 40 events.
1 2 3 4
2 sec
kuwLU1min <t1 <kuwLU1max
fbbEGER_2
kuwLU2min <t2 <kuwLU2max
kuwLU1min <t1 <kuwLU1max
fbbEGER_1
finally broken
internal status GER_1
cured
provisionally cured
finally broken
1 The error becomes fixed defective reported as the number of defect messages is applied at 0.
However, the error status will change again healed preliminary, as the signal for two seconds
is ok again.
2 During this two seconds, the error counter is decremented by a total of 20. (The task runs
in the 100 ms window. Therefore, in two seconds, he comes off 20 times. Per task cycle is the
Counter is decremented by one.)
3 The error is reported fbbEGER_2 entgltig defective, since the number of defect relating to 0
is applied. The error counter of fbbEGER_1 remains at the previous value.
4 The error counter has been decremented by fbbEGER_1 by a further 20. The error is fbbEGER_1
but again reported entgltig defective, since the number of defect messages is applied at 0. So
the error counter is re-initialized. The error remains fbbEGER_1 entgltig defective.
All rights reserved by Robert Bosch GmbH, including in cases of proprietary rights applications. All rights of disposal such as copying and passing on to us.
DS / ESA Surveillance - Electric fan - power amplifier (GER) 19 April 2002
0 bosch
EDC15 +
Y S01 281/120 - VG2
Page 8-12
8:13 External quantity engagement / Transmission (Exme)
Defect detection
Surveillance monitoring strategy
of
AG4 Schaltsi-
signal timeout
For vehicles with AG4 gearbox via a switching signal (AG4-E) is the amount reduced.
If this signal is longer than the reset of error bounce on, the error fbbEAG4_L is set.
Data Replacement function
Termination of the amount of intervention and deacti-
vation
Switch to normal function
Deactivation of ECOMATIC
Data
This signal for the Heilungsentprellzeit is back in the state AG4 inactive, the error
reset.
ecwINIT_TBei vehicles with ECOMATIC is a switching signal (AG4-E) of the motor
abgestellt.ECOMATIC
If the level of the signal dimeco for a SG-reset does not within the time ecwINIT_T on high switching signal
the error is fbbEECO_L gesetzt.Timeout
mrwCANAUSBCAN Embassy Embassy transmission error 1: the case of electronic transmission
controls via the CAN BUS with the
Gear 1, communicate bot controller will monitor the time between two messages. If for the time
caw .. _RTO receive a new message or is the message content inconsistent (In two imme-tion errors
indirectly consecutive attempts to read the data of the message was the content already wiederEGS intervention
partially overwritten) or is a CAN defect before (in camSTATUS0 is bit 0, bit 1 or bit 2 ge-
sets), the status is set mrmEGSSTAT (.4) and terminates the crowd engaged.
From this time until the error condition is present, the error fbbEEGS_1 (time-controlled)
reported if the suppression of intrusion monitoring is not active.
The suppression of intervention monitoring to prevent unnecessary error messages in the case of ambient
conditions in which a communication of all CAN bus devices can not be assumed
(See Chapter CAN - suppression of errors of the external control devices intervention).
During the suppression of error monitoring the debounce times already of any currently
located in debouncing error fbbEEGS_1 reset.
CAN message engaging torque invalid: The EGS intervention is void if the EGS request bit
Gear 1, EGS mrmEGSSTAT (.5) is not set, or the EGS intervention torque with error code
mrmEGS_roh = 0xFFh occupied ist.Eingriff
There are no registered error.
Timeout:
Is activated by mrwEGSbegr time monitoring of the EGS-intervention, and the current EGS
Intervention has exceeded the applied intervention time mrwEGS_TIM, the error fbbEEGS_A is ge-
sets.
Below V threshold limit
Desired quantity by the start-
torque characteristic mrwANFAHKL
(Continuous). Above the threshold V-ram-
penfrmige increase in the amount of intervention
on mrwM_EMAX.
Bit mrmEGSSTAT (.7) is set (in-
formation transmission intervention can not,
or correct be carried out
the)
mrwANFAHKL
mrwV_ANFAH
mrwEGSRAMP
mrwM_EMAX
Termination behavior as embassy
timeout EGS, is a special case in New
tralwert mrmEGS_roh = 0xFEH the A-
completed attacked without ramp
mrwEGSbegrDie EGS intervention amount mroM_EEGS
is set to zero, is performed in addition a mrwEGS_TIM
mrwASGRAMP
Demolition of drehzahlsynchr. ASG
Amount of intervention
All rights reserved by Robert Bosch GmbH, including in cases of proprietary rights applications. All rights of disposal such as copying and passing on to us.
DS / ESA Surveillance - External lot of intervention / Transmission (Exme) 19 April 2002
0 bosch
EDC15 +
Y S01 281/120 - VG2
Page 8-13
8:14 External quantity engagement / brake (ABS)
Surveillance monitoring strategy
of
CAN message
Brake 1, bot-
Community errors
monitored by
ASR and MSR
- Intervention
Data Replacement function Data
CAN message
Brake 3
CAN message
Brake 1,
Validity
Intervention MSR
CAN message
Brake 1,
Validity
Intervention ASR
Error message brake 1: For vehicles with ASR / MSR - control is the time between two bot-
companies monitored. If for the time caw .. _RTO no new message received or the bot-
Community content inconsistent (in two immediately successive experiments, the data of the message
read the content was already back partially overwritten) or is a CAN defect before (in
camSTATUS0 is bit 0, bit 1 or bit 2 is set) so the status mrmMSRSTAT (.4) be and
mrmASRSTAT (.4) is set and finished the current amount of intervention. From this time until
the error condition is present, the error fbbEASR_Q (time-controlled) reported when the suppression of the
Intrusion monitoring is not active.
The suppression of intervention monitoring to prevent unnecessary error messages in the case of ambient
conditions in which a communication of all CAN bus devices can not be assumed
(See Chapter CAN - suppression of errors of the external control devices intervention).
During the suppression of error monitoring the debounce times already of any currently
located in debouncing error fbbEASR_Q reset.
If for the time caw ... _RTO no new message is received or brake 3 is the message content in-caw ... _RTO
consistent (at two directly successive attempts to read the data of the message
the content was already back partially overwritten) and is no suppression of the CAN monitor
active (mrmAUSBL = 0), an error is reported fbbEAS3_Q.
A MSR intervention torque mroMD_MSR is invalid if:
- The engaging torque of the MSR (mrmMSR_roh) not the Binrkomplement the ASR (mrmASR_roh)
corresponds OR
- The received mrmMSR_roh moment is occupied with error code 0xFFh OR
- The MSR mrmMSRSTAT request bit (.5) = 0 OR
- The MSR mrmMSRSTAT request bit (.5) = 1 AND ASR mrmASRSTAT request bit (.5)
= 1
There are no registered error.
An ASR intervention torque mroMD_ASR is invalid if:
- The received mrmASR_roh moment is occupied with error code 0xFFh OR
- ASR request bit mrmASRSTAT (.5) = 0, OR
- The ASR mrmASRSTAT request bit (.5) = 1 AND MSR mrmMSRSTAT request bit (.5)
= 1
There are no registered error.
mrwMSRRAMPAbschaltung ramps down to 0 (MSR)
mrwASRRAMPoder mrwM_EMAX (ASR).
Acknowledgment
rungsbit brake Embassy in motor 1 is mrwM_EMAX
for the cycle after the de-
bounce fbwEASR_QA irreversibly-
sets. Bit mrmASRSTAT (.7) /
mrmMSRSTAT (.7) is set (Infor-
mation in message engine 1 - brake
intervention can not, or not fully
be carried out)
Shutdown of the intervention on ramp to mrwMSRRAMP
0, is the same moment the received
mrmMSR_roh to the neutral value of 0,
is switched off without a ramp.
Shutdown of the intervention on ramp to
mrwM_EMAX, is also the recom-
captured moment mrmASR_roh on the
Neutral value 0xFEH, it is without a ramp
off.
mrwASRRAMP
mrwM_EMAX
All rights reserved by Robert Bosch GmbH, including in cases of proprietary rights applications. All rights of disposal such as copying and passing on to us.
DS / ESA Surveillance - External lot of intervention / brake (ABS) 19 April 2002
0 bosch
A MSR torque is then plausible if the integral torque W
W= ( MMSR - MRe ib )dt
0
T
EDC15 +
Y S01 281/120 - VG2
Page 8-14
mrwMDIntMX Shutdown of the MSR procedure on
Ramp to 0
mrwMSRRAMP CAN message
Brake 1, phy-
sical Plau-
sibilitt MSR
CAN message
Brake 1, func-
tional plausibility
bility MSR
exceeds the threshold mrwMDIntMX and the error is reported fbbEMSR_H defective. The inputs
handle is valid then again as plausible if the integral moment is again 0, and thus the error
fbbEMSR_H is reported as well. In order to allow the engagement again must the MSR at the moment-
least reach the neutral value once.
If the reference speed of the ABS control unit is valid, then the MSR intervention is functionally
implausible when the reference speed V_AKT (of brake 1) <mrwMSRFG_L and the error
ler fbbEMSR_P is reported defective. This error may be in the same cycle no longer healed who-
the. If the error is finally broken, the MSR intervention is canceled and in this driving cycle
no longer allowed.
mrwMSRFG_L Shutdown of the MSR procedure on
Ramp to 0
Block all other ASR/MSR-
Interventions
mrwMSRRAMP
mrwASRRAMP
mrwM_EMAX
All rights reserved by Robert Bosch GmbH, including in cases of proprietary rights applications. All rights of disposal such as copying and passing on to us.
DS / ESA Surveillance - External lot of intervention / brake (ABS) 19 April 2002
0 bosch
EDC15 +
Y S01 281/120 - VG2
Page 8-15
8:15 External quantity engagement / Automatic Transmission (ASG/VL30)
Monitoring
of
Plausibility
Transmission over-
implementation
Message
Getriebe_1
Monitoring strategy
It is sent by the transmission transfer function mrmGTR_UEB with a SG-internally deter-
telten value fgmFVN_UEB (transfer function drive train, determined from vehicle speed
fgmFGAKT [km / h], engine speed dzmNmit [1/min] and distance factor fgwDA._SF [pulses / m]) ver-
equalized. Is the difference between the two transfer functions is longer than the debounce time is greater than the
Maximum of two times the factor mrwFVHGTdi, and none of the active hiding conditions (Ge-
transmission in neutral position (mrm_P_N = 1), actuated clutch (dimKUP = 1) or SRC-error transmission
Translation (fbbEASG_L)), the error fbbEASG_U is set (note: no storage in the
EEPROM desired).
The monitoring signal range occurs only when the transmission is not in P or N position
(Mrm_P_N = 0).
Signal Range Check (Error fbbEASG_L) when mrmGTR_UEB <mrwFVHUEun or if
mrmGTR_UEB> mrwFVHUEob.
The evaluation of the EGS coding in motor-SG is activated with cowECOMTC.5 == 1. The error
fbbEASG_M bit is set when the bit "EGS coding in MSG" S_KOD = 1 (= not in
Order).
Data
mrwFVHGTdi
Replacement function
Default value for translation
mroFVHUEst.
Data
mrwFVHVGWU
Signal range
Transmission over-
implementation
Message
Getriebe_1
CAN message
Getriebe_1,
Evaluation of the
EGS coding
Plausibility
EDC/CAN-
Gear
mrwFVHUEun
mrwFVHUEob
As with plausibility gear ratio
fbbEASG_U.
Default value for the transfer function
mrmGTR_UEB.
The error fbbEASG_M solves the force-
fuel shutdown (regardless of the start-
bit) from.
mrwFVHVGWU
Is the EDC Gear mrmGANG longer than the debounce time equal to the transition information of the CAN
Message transmission 1 mrmGTRGANG and is no hiding